Albin Putzker 
 
 
-Digitized by tine Internet Arcinive 
 
 in 2007 with funding from 
 
 IVIicrosoft Corporation 
 
 littp://www.arcliive.org/details/conversationingeOOIiussricli 
 
CONVERSATION i 
 
 ON 
 
 A GRAMMATICAL BASIS 
 
 HERMANN C. 0. HUSS, PH. D. 
 
 Professor of Modern Languages and Literature in the College of 
 Ntw Jersey, Princeton. 
 
 IFIFTEC EiDiTionsr. 
 
 NEW YORK 
 
 HENRY HOLT AND COMPANY 
 
 F. W. CHRISTERN 
 BOSTON : CARL SCHOENHOF. 
 

 Entered according to Act of Congress, in the year 18S3, by 
 
 Hermann C. O. Huss, 
 
 In the Office of the Librarian of Congress , at Washington, D. C. 
 
 Copyright, 18S9 
 
 BY 
 
 Henry Holt & Co. 
 
PREFACE. 
 
 This text-book is intended to assist the instructor in 
 teaching beginners to speak German with the constant guid- 
 ance of the grammar, and is an attempt to include that which 
 is vital in the two methods which hitherto have been making 
 war against each other, viz. the "grammatical" and the so 
 called "natural" method. It consists of a theoretical and a 
 practical part with cross references. The former is an ordinary 
 grammar; the latter contains, besides reading exercises, a 
 lai'ge mass of material for conversation — German sentences 
 illustrating the leading gTammatical principles. 
 
 The work should be used somewhat in tliis way: Let the 
 teacher first pronounce and explain a number of German 
 sentences, say those of section 14 on page 2 of the Practical 
 Part, and then refer to the corresponding section on page 9 
 of the Theoretical Part. The sentences having thus been 
 made clear to the understanding of the student, must then be 
 memorized by him (cf. page 1 of the Practical Part), to serve 
 in the next recitation as material for conversation. Each 
 illustration has been so devised as to suggest to the teacher 
 a natural and definite question. Prom most of them two or 
 more different questions may be framed. Suppose, for 
 example, that the student has committed to memory the 
 sentence: §err ^txd) befi^t ein fef)r fd)one8 Sanb^au^ am 9?^eitt 
 
IV PREFACE. 
 
 — he will be able to -understand and answer the following 
 questions : 
 
 1. 3Bo ift ba$ Sanb^au^ bc^ germ Dieid) ? 
 
 2. 2Ba§ fitr ctn ?anbt)au^3 befi^t §crr Dicii^ ? 
 
 Of these two questions, the second is the best because it 
 calls foiih the answer „ctu fcl)r fd)onc§," which illustrates, and 
 marks by the heavy print the grammatical principle of § 82, 
 and fulfils the pui-pose for which the sentence was con- 
 structed. The examples have been carefiilly sifted with 
 reference to the possibihty of such a searching question in 
 every case. 
 
 It is neither necessary nor desirable that the question 
 should be slavishly formed in the exact words of the sentence. 
 The freer the question, the greater will be the exeiiion on the 
 part of the student in f oiTaing his answer, and the quicker 
 will he become independent in the use of the language. Nor 
 is it necessary to avoid in the question all the w^ords the 
 student is not supj)0sed to know, since one or two new words 
 introduced into a gi'oup of familiar ones wiU easily be under- 
 stood by him, and added to his vocabulary. It would, of 
 course, be an additional assistance to find them Avritten before 
 him on the black-board. 
 
 It will prove a useful exercise occasionally to require the 
 student to form the question himself, addi'essing it to a class- 
 mate. It is necessary for this purpose that the instructor 
 should give out that word which reminds the class of the 
 whole sentence to which it belongs. If, e. g., the sentence 
 „Sir blicbcn auf bctn 33crbec!, bi^ \mt !ein Sanb me!)r fallen" is 
 among those committed, the w^ord „33crbcct'' "vsTitten out on 
 the board or pronounced by the teacher, will at once remind 
 the class of the whole sentence, and suggest to one the ques- 
 tion: „3Sie lange hWzhzxi (Sie Quf bem 33crbe(f ?" and to another 
 the answer: „^t§ Xoxx fcin Sanb mel}r fa^en." 
 
 "Whenever the quantity of the Material for Conversation 
 
PREFACE. V 
 
 exceeds the demands of the instructor, or the memorizing 
 capacity of the student, it is left to the discretion of the former 
 to make the proper selections. All sentences under the head- 
 ing "Additional Examples," as implying no additional 
 principle, may in giving out the lesson safely be omitted 
 and reserved for an extemporary conversation with open 
 text-book. 
 
 AH the most important sections in the theoretical as well as 
 in the practical part have been marked by numbers in heavy 
 print, and in o, first course of study the instruction is best con- 
 fined to them, in order to avoid bewildering the student's 
 mind by particulars, for which time will be found later. Here, 
 putting off means saving time. This is, e. g., true of the 
 instruction in the German written character, and true above 
 aU of the declension of nouns in the plural, a real stone of 
 Sisyphus, which has fatigued, discouraged, and repelled 
 thousands of well meaning beginners. 
 
 Exercises for translating English into German have been 
 omitted because they are not only unsatisfactory for several 
 reasons, but even injurious in so far as they counteract the 
 most beneficial effects which conversation is intended to 
 produce in the student, viz. the habit of thinking in the foreign 
 idiom itself, instead of using his mother tongue as a medium 
 of thought 
 
 Heading exercises have been given in connection with the 
 first few paragraphs only, in the behef that thereafter a read- 
 ing book may be used to advantage. They are not meant to 
 be given out as lessons. 
 
 As to practice in ivriting, it is believed that it can best be 
 secured by addressing questions in German to the whole 
 class, and by requiring the answer to be written down and 
 handed in for correction. — If it should seem desirable to give 
 out lessons in \vriting, let them consist in requiring the proper 
 questions to be framed from a certain number of sentences. 
 
YI PREFACE. 
 
 a task which cannot by any means be done mechanically, and 
 will i^rove a very efficient exercise. 
 
 A single word to those who may honor the author's effoi-ts 
 with their criticism. No one who bear^ in mind that this 
 book is not meant to replace, but to accompany the instnictor, 
 wiU find fault with the writer for not swelling it with the 
 history of grammatical forms, and compai-ative philology. The 
 author fuUy appreciates the value of these illustrations, the 
 Ught they throw on the subject, the interest they awaken in 
 the student; but why not leave all that to the discretion of 
 the teacher? Besides, a historical grammar has been an- 
 nounced as being in prepai*ation by two competent scholars, 
 which will meet the wants not satisfied here. 
 
 Far more than an author's ordinary thanks are due to 
 Professor W. M. Sloane, of Princeton College, who read the 
 MS. with painstaking care, and gave it the benefit of his rare 
 German scholarship and valuable criticism. 
 
 PREFACE TO THE rOURTH EDITION". 
 
 In this revised edition the old title " A System of Oral 
 Instruction " has been abandoned and the practical part, 
 owing to its prominence, has taken i)recedence over the 
 theoretical. 
 
 H. H. 
 
TABLE OF CONTENTS. 
 
 The references are to paragraphs. 
 
 ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 Alphabet, 1 — 7. 
 
 Table of letters, 1; modified vowels and diphthongs, 2; double 
 vowels, 3; combinations of consonants, and doubled consonants, 5; 
 sonant and surd consonants, 6 ; use of capitals, 7. 
 
 Pronunciation, 8 — 10. 
 
 Quantity, 8 ; alphabetical list of all vocal and consonantal sounds, 
 9; accent, 10. 
 
 Division of syllables, 12. 
 
 Apostrophe, 13. 
 
 Articles and their declension, 14 — 15. 
 
 Nouns, 16 — 45. 
 
 Their declension:— Singular, IG— 17; plural, 18—21; paradigms, 
 22; examples for practice, 23; compound nouns, 24; nouns with two 
 plural forms, 25; defective declension, 26—28; suppressed forms of 
 declension, 29 ; nouns of foreign origin, 30 — 32 ; alphabetical list of 
 exceptions to the rules given on declension, 33 ; proper names, 34 — 40. 
 
 Gender:— Masculine nouns, 41; feminine nouns, 42; neuter nouns, 
 43; nouns with double gender, 44; compound nouns, 45. 
 
 Preliminary chapter on prepositions, 46-^7. 
 
 Verbs, 48—56. 
 
 Conjugation of the auxiliaries of tense \\(xbt\\, jetn, and inerben, 
 48—50; general remarks on the verb; formation of moods and tenses, 
 51—53. 
 
 Kegular conjugation:— Its characteristics, 54; paradigm (toben), 55; 
 special remarks, 56. 
 
Vin TABLE OF CONTENTS. 
 
 Preliminary chapter on the order of words, 57 — 61. 
 
 Normal order, 58; inverted order, 59; transposed order, 60; place 
 of the negative, 61. 
 
 Prehminaiy rules on the use of the Subjunctive, 62. 
 
 Verbs (continued), 63 — 79. 
 
 Irregular conjugation: — Its characteristics, 63 — 64; a comparative 
 table of the regular and irregular conjugation, 66; mixed conjugation, 
 67; conjugation of the modal auxiliaries, 68; remarks on them, 69 — 70; 
 alphabetical list of all irregular verbs, 71 . 
 
 Separable and inseparable verbs, 72 — 79, 
 
 Adjectives, 80—96. 
 
 Not declined when used predicatively, 80; their declension when 
 used attributively, 81—84; when used substantively, 85; suppressed 
 forms of declension, 86; indeclinable adjectives, 87; special re- 
 marks, 88. 
 
 Their comparison: — Regular, 89—91; irregular, 92; defective, 93; 
 special remarks, 94—95; particles used in comparison, 96. 
 
 Pronouns, 97 — 150. 
 
 Personal, 97—104; possessive, 105—107; demonstrative, 108—116; 
 interrogative, 117-121; relative, 122— 127; indefinite, 128—150. 
 
 Numerals, 151 — 165. 
 
 Verbs (completed), 166—182. 
 
 Passive voice, 166 —171 ; reflexive verbs, 172 — 176; impersonal verbs, 
 177—179; use of f)abcn and fein as auxiliaries of tense, 180 — 182. 
 
 Adverbs, 183—188. 
 
 Prepositions (completed), 189 — 193. 
 
 Conjunctions, 194 — 201. 
 
 Interjections, 202. 
 
 Word-formation, 203—215. 
 
 Derivation, 203—209; composition, 210—215. 
 
 Brief historical sketch of the German language, 216. 
 
 Correspondences of Consonants in German and English, 217 
 —220. 
 
PRACTICAL PART 
 
 CONTAINING 
 
 Material for Conversation p. 1 — 79. 
 
 Reading Exercises p. 80 — 92. 
 
MATERIAL 
 
 FOR 
 
 CONVERSATION. 
 
 Note. — As stated in tlie preface, the sentences wliieh. follow are meant 
 to be memorized by the student, to serve afterwards as material for con- 
 versation. It would, however, be contrary to his interests, should he 
 endeavor to impress them upon his mind by dint of translating their 
 English equivalents into German, inasmuch as by such a proceeding 
 he would constantly use his mother tongue as a medium of thought. 
 The only right course for him to take is, 
 
 First, to secure a logical and grammatical understanding of the sent- 
 ences to be committed; 
 
 Secondly, to pronounce them repeatedly aloud; 
 
 Thirdly, to write out from each illustration that word which will 
 remind him of the idea contained in it, as, e. g., the word „3ugenb" will 
 remind him of the statement made in the first sentence that youth is 
 the spring-time of life; 
 
 Finally, to endeavor to recall by the aid of his catchword the German 
 form expressing that idea, failing in which he will consult the text and 
 try again until he becomes wholly independent of it. 
 
 If he has conscientiously followed the second of these directions, the 
 English idiom will not intrude because by a repeated loud reading of 
 the text he has not only practiced his eye, ear, and tongue, each of 
 which factors will become a valuable support to his memory, but he 
 has, at the same time, established so close and immediate a connexion 
 between the German catchword and the other words constituting the 
 sentence that they will spontaneously present themselves at the first 
 call of the catchword, and group themselves around it ; and if at the 
 first attempt all do not come, they will at a second or third. 
 
 That the student may understand the questions formed by the in- 
 structor from the sentences thus memorized, we subjoin a list of the 
 most common interrogative pronouns and adverbs : 
 
mCTRT^T^ K»B' bONYEESATION. 
 
 toer? who? 
 
 iDCff en? -whose? 
 Wtm? to whom? 
 Iticn? "whom? 
 tpae?-vrhat? 
 iDctd^er? which? 
 
 tpa0 fiir ein? what tt)o ? where? 
 
 3dnd of? triotjin ? whither ? 
 
 line? how? lt>oI)cr? whence? 
 
 Unet)tc( ? how much? uic^S^alb ? ) for what 
 inarum? whj'? Hjc^iuegen?) reason? 
 
 iDonn? when? 
 
 Observe also the j^hrases: 
 
 2^a§ tt^iffen (^ie Don. . ? 
 iBa§ gilt t)on. . ? 
 
 "What do you know of . . ? 
 '\Miat is tiTie of . . ? \Vhat 
 said of. . ? 
 
 can 
 
 be 
 
 To§U— § 17 (p. 9 to 12). 
 14. 
 
 X)ie Ougcnb ift bet grul)lmg 
 bc8 ?eben^. — !4}a^ ii^cbcn. 
 
 !4}a^ ®d)loB ge^brt * bem ^b^ 
 nig, ber ^^arf bcm ^aifcr. 
 
 '^tv -Qiigcr licbt ben SSalb. 
 
 'A^it Sa^rl)cit ift emig. 
 
 !ir^ie (gonne ift bie Cuelle bc^ 
 2id)k^ unb bcr Same. — !4)ae 
 gid)t. 
 
 ^tc 9?i((a Satbau ger)ort ber 
 ©rdfin \)on 5lmim. 
 
 !3^er !4}ic^ter licbt bie gin* 
 famfeit. 
 
 !4^er 5lrabcr ncnnt ba§ garnet 
 bttS (Sd)iff bcr 3BUfte. 
 
 3cbe8 mctaii ift nu^^Iic^. 
 
 5(IIe0 ®lUc! ift tjcrgdngad). 
 
 * See § 55. 
 
 Youth is the sj^ring-time of 
 Hfe. 
 
 The castle belongs to the 
 king; the park, to the em^Deror. 
 
 The hunter loves the forest 
 
 Ti-uth is etemaL 
 
 Tlie sun is the source of 
 Hght and heat 
 
 The Tilla TTaldau belongs 
 to the Countess von Amim. 
 The poet loves soHtude. 
 
 The Arab calls the camel 
 the ship of the desei-t. 
 EveiT metal is usefuL 
 All happiness is transitory. 
 
 15, 
 
 '^cv grfmbcr ber 2o!omotiDe 
 tear ein (ingtanber. 
 
 The inventor of the loco- 
 motive was an Englishman. 
 
MATERIAI. FOK CONVERSATION. 
 
 tft bte (Sttmmc etncS ^^ic^ter^. 
 — !4}a^ @ett)if]cn. 
 
 ^4e ^uri3 pattern gel}brt 
 eincm (Snt3tanbei\ 
 ' grau ©iibner jtf)reibt etncn 
 9?oman. 
 
 Unfer Sebctt ift emc (Scl)u(e. 
 
 ^er ^apft (Si^1u^ wax bcr 
 ®ol)u etncr ^duerin. 
 
 X)a^ §otcl -53rlftol gel)ort 
 etnct ^ame in •Bremen. 
 
 ©err OJZetibe \d)xdbt cin ^urf) 
 
 The voice of conscience is 
 the voice of a judge. 
 
 The castle Hallern belongs 
 to an Englishman. 
 
 IVIi'S. Hiibner is writing a 
 novel. 
 
 Our life is a school. 
 
 Pope Sixtus was the son of 
 a peasant woman. 
 
 The Hotel Bristol belongs 
 to a lady in Bremen. 
 
 Mr. Mende is writing a book 
 on China. 
 
 16, 
 
 S^cr (Bd)ia\ tft ha^ ^itb bc§ 
 ^obc§. 
 
 „!Dic 9J?ad)t bc^ ©efangeS" 
 tft ber 2:itet einc§ @ebtcl)tc8 Don 
 (Sdjillcr. — !Der ©cfang; ba^ 
 ®ebtd)t. 
 
 5}te (Srfinbunt] bc6 ©lafcg 
 unb be^ $apierc§ tft fel)r alt. 
 — ^a§ ®la§; ba^ papier. 
 
 Mer 35?atb bci Settcjefelb ge* 
 ^ort bem (Staatc. — ^er (Staat. 
 
 1. X)k 2Bufte {ft ba§ ^eid) 
 be6 Sowett. — ®er i^dipe, 
 
 ®ie ^illa Df^oberti gel)drt 
 ctnetn D^uffen. 
 
 ®er @per(itig fitrd^tet bctt 
 fatten. 
 
 2. ^er taifer it^ar ber ®aft 
 be§ giirftcn Don Sii^tetiftein. 
 
 ^er (Sec uttb ber ^ar! gc^ 
 prcn bem ©rafcn ^euft. 
 ©ottter befittgt bctt ©elbcn 
 
 Sleep is the image of death. 
 
 "The Power of Song" is 
 the title of a poem by Schiller. 
 
 The invention of glass and 
 paper is very old. 
 
 All the woodland near Len- 
 gefeld belongs to the state. 
 
 The desert is the realm of 
 the Hon. 
 
 The viUa Kodern belongs to 
 a Russian. 
 
 The sparrow fears the fal- 
 con. 
 
 The emperor was the guest 
 of the Prince von Lichten- 
 stein. 
 
 The lake and park belong 
 to Count Beust. 
 
 Homer sings of the hero 
 Achilles. 
 
4 MATERIAL FOE CONVERSATION. 
 
 17. 
 
 T)cr Dbelt^f tft ba6 ^cn!ma( The obelisk is the monu- 
 
 ber gfrou non vgarncn; tie Ua^ ment to Ladj Samen; the 
 
 pelle Don DJZarmor ge^ort ber marble chapel belongs to the 
 
 gcrjogin. duchess. 
 
 To §18— §23. 
 
 Note. —The rules given in § 18 to § 23 on the formation of the plural 
 are not meant to be studied by the beginner, for whom the following 
 general statements may suffice : 
 
 1, In the nominative plural, masculine and neuter nouns 
 ending in d, Ctt, cr, or the diminutive syllables c^ett and leiu, 
 are not inflected: as, ber §imme(, sky: plui'. bic §tmmeL 
 
 All other nouns, feminine ones included, take one of the 
 endings e, cr, en (n): as, 
 
 ber Xi}d}, table: plur. Xi}6:}t, 
 
 ba^ .^leib, dress: plur. ^(etbcr. 
 
 ba^ ^ett, bed: plur. ^ettc«. 
 
 hk ^(ume, flower: plur. ^(umen. 
 
 In addition many nouns modify theu' radical vowel, viz.: 
 a to d, to 0, U to ii, au to du. Examples: 
 
 ber 35ater, -^ather: plur. 33tttcr. 
 
 ber ^otjUf ^on: plur. ^ol^tte. 
 
 ber ^ruber, brother: jdIut. ^ruber. 
 
 ber ^aum, tree: plur. ^dume, 
 
 2. The genitive and accusative of the plural are like the 
 nominative plural; the dative adds an n to it (except when the 
 nominative plui*al itself ends in n); thus, nom. bte ^riiber; gen. 
 ber ^iiber; dat i>cn ^ritbertt; accus. bte ^ruber. 
 
 !Die blotter ftnb ber (Sdjmuc! Leaves are the ornaments 
 
 ber ^durnc. — T)ad ^iatt of trees. 
 
 ^ebennann hat ^cdjtt unb Everybody has rights and 
 
 l^flid)tctt. — ^a*3 9?ecf)t; bie duties," 
 WW. 
 
 ^ie ))latnv ift eine Sel^rerin Nature is a teacher of man- 
 
 ber Mcnidjtn. kind. 
 
MATERIAL FOR CONVERSATION. 
 
 ^tnbct unb 9^arren reben bie 
 Sat)r^eit — '^a^ ^inb; ber 
 
 ®er ^bler tft ber ^onig ber 
 ^ogeL — !Der SSocjeL 
 
 „3Banbc l)abett Dt)ren/' fagt 
 ba§ ©pri^tuort. — X)k Sanb; 
 ba^ Dt)r. 
 
 ^ie @djtt)al6en finb bie ^o^ 
 tm be^ grul)ling^. — !^ie 
 ®(^tt)dbe; ber ^ote. 
 
 'Die gurf)[c finb riftu3. — 5)er 
 gud)d. 
 
 ^ie ^ienen finb fleigig. — 
 X)k ^iene. 
 
 3ebe^ filter ^at feine @pie(c. 
 — X)a^ (Spiel. 
 
 !Die mot ift bie Gutter ber (5r^ 
 finbungett. 
 
 !Die ©efe^c finb bie ^ciulen 
 beg (Staate^J — 3:)ag @efe^; bie 
 @dule; ber (Staat. 
 
 5(l(e ^Jj^enfd)cn finb mel)r ober 
 iueniger bie (Sflat)en_il)rer 2tU 
 benfc^aftctt. — T)er(^f(at)e; bie 
 ^eibenfd)aft. 
 
 T)ie Saftcr finb bie a'ran!^ 
 ^eitett ber ®cele. — "^a^ Rafter; 
 bie ^ran!^ eit. 
 
 ©riec^enlanb ift bie SSiege ber 
 ^ilnftc. — 'Die ^unft. 
 
 Children and fools speak 
 the tinith. 
 
 The eagle is the king of 
 bii'ds. 
 
 Walls have ears, says the 
 proverb. 
 
 Swallows are the heralds of 
 spring. 
 
 Foxes aire cunning. 
 
 Bees are industrious. 
 
 Every period of life has its 
 sports. 
 
 Necessity is the mother of 
 invention. 
 
 Laws are the pillars of the 
 state. 
 
 AU men are more or less 
 the slaves of their passions. 
 
 Vices are the diseases of the 
 soul. 
 
 Greece is the cradle of fine 
 arts. 
 
 24. 
 
 ^er ^'ngenienr Strobel 
 fd)reibt eine ®efd)ic^te be§ 
 ^rii(fenliauc§. — i)er ^ritden^ 
 ban. 
 
 Unfer ©cirtner ppan^t "^pkU 
 bourne unb ^einftotf c. — X)er 
 (Stocf. 
 
 Strobel, the engineer, is 
 writing a history of bridge- 
 
 building. 
 
 Our gardener is planting 
 apple-trees and vines. 
 
MATEMAL FOE COXVEESATION. 
 
 T)k Sod)e I)at fec^^3 S>cr^ 
 toge: a)?ontag,Dicn$tag, dMtU 
 tood), :4}onner«Jtag, greitaq uttb 
 'Sonttabenb; unb einen 9^u^c= 
 tag, bm Sountag. — ©er 2^ag. 
 
 Dcr 2)2alcr §au|ci)i(b malt 
 bie ^Bafferfttflc letncr §cimat. 
 — Dcr 33a|fcrfaU. 
 
 The week has six work days: 
 Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, 
 Thui'sday, Friday, and Satui'- 
 da}-; and one day of rest, Sun- 
 day. 
 
 Hauschild, the artist, is 
 painting the waterfalls of his 
 country. 
 
 29. 
 
 Uttfcrc Scftung^mauer ift 
 jtpan^ig ^nf^ \)od); ber @rabcn 
 ift breigig Sub brcit. 
 
 ^eber 3olbat ber ^Irmec 1:)at 
 gmei ^aot (Sc^ut)e unb \\vc\ 
 ^aav sgtriimpf e. — ^tv ®(i)u^ ; 
 ber (Strumpf. 
 
 (Sin ^ilogramm ift gwei 
 
 '^ie 3Ser!e be^ "profefford 
 geber foften jwan^ig Port 
 flinfsig 5pf ennig. — 4)a^ Serf. 
 
 The wall of our fortress is 
 twenty feet high; the ditch is 
 tldrty feet wide. 
 
 Every soldier of the ai'my 
 has two paii's of shoes, and 
 two pau's of stockings. 
 
 A kilogi'am is two pounds. 
 
 The works of Professor He- 
 ber cost twenty marks and 
 fifty pfennigs. 
 
 46. 
 
 1. !Dic 5lmetfcn fammein 
 iDd^renb bc0 eommer^ 33or^ 
 rate |itr ben SBinter. — ^ie 
 Slmeife; ber (Sommer; ber 3$or^ 
 rat. 
 
 ■ 'Dk ^ipflan^en tnarfifen nii^t 
 ii) e g e n ber 2^rocEen^eit. — X)ie 
 ^flange. 
 
 ' 2. £ie ^atteln fommen a u S 
 bcm Siiben. — ^ie X)attet; ber 
 igiiben. 
 
 Der Tlaxtt ift bei ber 
 :Srlicfe. 
 
 Ants, during summer, gather 
 provisions for winter. 
 
 The plants do not grow on 
 account of the drought. 
 
 Dates come from the south. 
 
 The market is near the 
 bridge. 
 
MATERIAL FOR CONVERSATION. 
 
 Sir mcffcn blc Xemperatur 
 bcr 5ltmoipl)cire mtt bcm Xijcx^ 
 mometer. — ^a^ ^^ermo= 
 meter. 
 
 ^ie (Solbatctt fommcn ebett 
 t)on bcr ^arabe unb marfc^ie^ 
 rett nad) iijun ^afernen. ^Die 
 Dberftcit Qel)en 3 u tf)rcm ©cnc^ 
 raL — ^er (^olbat; bie ^afcrne; 
 ber Dberft. 
 
 !Der ^aftor \DoI)nt bcr ^irc^c 
 gecjeniiber. 
 
 4)cr ^rafibent tft feit eincm 
 9al)rc i:x (5uropa. — ^Da^ 3al)r. 
 
 a. X)cr ^on[ut i^iibcr cjel)t 
 itoi^ iD^ittidjett unb bort bort ju 
 beni ^{)ai[er i;i ©afteirt. 
 
 3. Unfcrc ® l)iffc gct)en b ur c^ 
 bctt (Sue^fanal nad) 3^^^icu. — 
 '^a^ (Sd)iff. 
 
 ©a'5 ^^;Kf et mit ben fiinf ^le- 
 ge(n ift fiir ben ^Mffierer. — 
 3^a$ <Sict]c(. 
 
 ^iele &utc fterben o^nc bic 
 S^rbftungen bcr 9?eUgton. 
 
 T)ie 'ptanetcn tretfen um bic 
 (Sonne. — !^er planet. 
 
 (S()inin ift ein yj^ittet g c g c n 
 bttS gieber. 
 
 4. Sien tiegt an bcr T)onau. 
 Sir fa{)ren gemb^nlid) bt^ an 
 
 bctt glUB. 
 
 !Die ©emfen leben in ben ^\U 
 pen. — !Die @emfe. 
 
 ©er 9^^ein ftie^t in ben -53o= 
 benfce. 
 
 T)er ©otteSacfer ift I) inter 
 bcr ^ird)e. 
 
 ^ie (Sd)u(e ift neb en bcr 
 ^iid)e. 
 
 We measure the tempera- 
 ture of the atmosphere by 
 means of the thermometer. 
 
 Tho soldiers are just com- 
 ing from the parade, and are 
 marching to their barracks. 
 The colonels are going to their 
 general. 
 
 The pastor lives opposite 
 the church. 
 
 The President has been in 
 Europe for a year. 
 
 Consul Lober goes to 
 Munich, and from thence to 
 the emperor at Oastein. 
 
 Our ships go to India 
 through the Suez canal. 
 
 The parcel with the five 
 seals is for the cashier. 
 
 Many people die without 
 the comforts of reUgion. 
 
 The planets revolve about 
 the sun. 
 
 Quinine is an antidote to 
 fever. 
 
 Vienna lies on the Danube. 
 
 We usually drive as far as 
 the river. 
 
 The chamois live in the 
 Alps. 
 
 The Khine flows into the 
 Lake of Constance. 
 
 The cemetery is behind the 
 church. 
 
 The school is near the 
 chui'ch. 
 
MATERIAL FOR CONVERSATION. 
 
 T)cv .<loIo§ Don 9?f)obu^ ftanb 
 fiber bcm (SingauQ b^3 §afen^ 
 bcr S'ni'cL — $)cr (Siugang. 
 
 ^cr "^fab mit bent (Seldnber 
 fUt)rt bnrd) bie (Sc^(nd)t unb 
 iiber ben ^erg nad) ber (gtabt. 
 
 — ®a^ ©ctanber. 
 
 (5in 2:ei( ber SSitftc <Sat)ara 
 liegt nnter bcm 3)tee§fpiegel. 
 
 — ©er (Spiegel. 
 
 !iDie Sa|ferl)ii^ner landmen 
 unter baS Saffer. — 1)a^ 
 ©ul)n. 
 
 !^ie (gtatne be^ ^apfte^ ®re== 
 gor fte^t Dor bet ^at^ebrole. 
 
 T)a^ Drifter fi^t ;; m i f c!^ e n 
 bcr ^n^ne unb bcm $ubli!um» 
 
 — X)a^ ^nblifum. 
 
 The Colossus of Rhodes 
 stood over the entrance to the 
 harbor of the island. 
 
 The path vdih the balus- 
 trade leads through the ravine 
 and over the mountain to the 
 city. 
 
 A part of the desert of Sa- 
 hara hes below the level of 
 the sea. 
 
 Water-fowls dive under the 
 water. 
 
 The statue of Pope Gregory 
 stands in fiott of the cathe- 
 dral 
 
 The orchestra sits between 
 the stage and the audience. 
 
 47- 
 
 build 
 
 near 
 
 the 
 
 ^Die :53iber bauen onS Staffer. 
 
 — T)er ^iber. 
 ^ie 3J?inifter fmb nod) Bcim 
 
 ^onig. 
 
 ^ie (Emigranten gef)en gum 
 ^onful. — T)a' CEmigrant. 
 
 X)\c ©olbaten fommen tium 
 g^er^icrpla^. — ^er ^(a^. 
 
 ^ie tonigin gct)t im @om:= 
 mer geiub()nlid) in! (^birgc. 
 
 Die ©locfen rufen jur ^ird)e. 
 
 — Die ©lode. 
 (Storc^c unb (^njalben flie* 
 
 gen im |)erbft ubcrS lUleer. — 
 fecr ^tord); bcr ^Jcrbft. 
 
 48. 
 Note. — On the use of pronouns in direct address, see § 98 
 and § 105, 2, and on their agreement with the noun in regard 
 to gender, see § 100. 
 
 Beavers 
 water. 
 
 The ministers are still with 
 the king. 
 
 The emigrants are going to 
 the consul 
 
 The soldiers are coming 
 from the drill-ground. 
 
 The queen usually goes into 
 the mountains in smniner. 
 
 The bells caU to chui'ch« 
 
 Storks and swallows fly 
 across the sea in autumn. 
 
MATERIAL FOR CONVERSATION.. 
 
 9 
 
 3t^ ^ttBc cincn ^anaricn^ 
 tjoget im It'cifig. — ^er ^'afig. 
 
 T)a^ V^amm fagte gum SSolf: 
 „2)tt ^aft fein ©erj." — ©er 
 SBolf. 
 
 ^a§ ®e)d)aft be§ ^anquier^ 
 SD^aufe getjt fel)r gut; ct \)ai 
 itber ge^it ^ommt^. 
 
 SJ^eine ^ntkx ift utiipol)!, 
 fie Ijttt ba§ gteber. 
 
 ^a^ ^orf ^uct)t)eim ift Hein; 
 e§ ^ot tiur brcil}unbert ^in* 
 H)ot)ner. 
 
 S3Bir ^aBcn neun 5Q?onatc 
 (Bdjnk unb brei 3Jionate 3ferien. 
 — ^er SDbnat. 
 
 Sic l^abcn nod) brei (Stun* 
 ben Qdt bi^ gum ^Ibgang be^ 
 3uge^, — ®ie (Stunbe; ber 
 5lbgang; ber ^^ug. 
 
 i,§ahtn ^it nod) cine Sod^e 
 ©ebulb," fagte ber ilonful gu 
 ben ^lu^wanberern. 
 
 ^JJieinc ^(tern jinb no^ in 
 SKleu; fie Ijabcn uielc greunbe 
 bafelbft. 
 
 iJct) ttjar nic^t im ^'ongert; 
 i^ ^tttte !etn billet, — ©a^ 
 ^^ongert. 
 
 9)Jein S5atcr n?ar geftem auf 
 feincm ^iircau, benn cr IJotte 
 uicl 3U tt)un; meine 3J^utter aber 
 wax gu |)aufc, fie ^otte ®dfte 
 au^ ber '5)Jacl)barfc^aft, — Da^ 
 bureau; ber (^aft. 
 
 ^ir ioaren nid)t in ber SSor=* 
 Icfung; mit fatten feine Qdt 
 
 !Dcr 9^ic^ter fagte gum '^e- 
 linqucntcn: „<Sie pttcn tcin 
 ^ci)i, im @ee gu fifdjcn/ — 
 ' 2)cr Delinquent. 
 
 I have a canary bird in the 
 cage. 
 
 The lamb said to the v^^olf : 
 Thou hast no heari 
 
 The business of Mauke, the 
 banker, is very prosperous; he 
 has more than ten clerks. 
 
 My mother is unwell, she 
 has a fever. 
 
 The village of Bucliheim is 
 small ; it has but tlu-ee hundred 
 inhabitants. 
 
 We have nine months school 
 and three months vacation. 
 
 You have still three hours' 
 time before the train starts. 
 
 Have patience for' another 
 week, said the consul to the 
 emigrants. 
 
 My parents are still at 
 Vienna; they have many 
 friends there. 
 
 I was not at the concert; I 
 had no ticket. 
 
 My father was in his office 
 yesterday, for he had a gi-eat 
 deal to do; but my mother 
 was at home, as she had guests 
 from the vicinity. 
 
 "We were not at the lecture; 
 we had no time. 
 
 The judge said to the cul- 
 prit: You had no right to fish 
 in the lake. 
 
10 
 
 MATERIAL FOR CONVERSATION. 
 
 T)k 5Irbcitcr \mvcn mit 9f?cd)t 
 uujufricben, benn fie fatten 
 i)ie( Slrbcit unb luenig 8of)tt. 
 
 The •workinen were justly 
 discontented, for they had 
 much labor and little j)ay. 
 
 49. 
 
 T)cv ^Spcrber fagt jum (Sper* 
 ling in ber gabel: „T)u bift 
 mctn, benn ii^ Un grog, unb 
 bu bip Rein." — I)cr (Sperling. 
 
 9)Zcin ^atcr ift nid)t gugaufe, 
 ct ift auf ber 3agb. 
 
 T>a5 better ift unfrcunblii^ 
 l^ier m ben Bergen; c8 ifl !alt 
 unb feud)t. — !iDcr ^crg. 
 
 ,Miv finb ^aicm," fagten 
 bie ^^lu^manberer, „unb finb auf 
 bem Sege nad) (Ealifornien." — 
 5Der ^aier. 
 
 Wlcim (v(tern finb nid)t I)ter, 
 fie finb in (Suropa. 
 -^ 2)Jeine ^^riiber maren geftern 
 abenb in ber 33orIefung; ii) 
 felbft ttior im 33erein. — ©er 
 S3erein. 
 
 SBir to or en tDd^renb be^ 
 SBintcr^ in ';)^eapc(. — !iDer 
 Winter. 
 
 !l)ie ?agc ber granjofcn in 
 9J?o§!au njar {)offnung^lov^; fie 
 maren ol)ne Dbbacf), '3k()rung 
 unb ^leibung. — '^tv granjofe. 
 
 „<Btitn Sie ganj o^ne Sor* 
 gc," fagte ber "^rebiger gu un§, 
 Jd) bin ^):}v greunb unb meine 
 c^ gut,'^ 
 
 The hawk, in the fable, says 
 to the sparrow: Thou ai't mine, 
 for I am lai'ge, and thou art 
 small 
 
 My father is not at home, 
 he is out hunting. 
 
 The weather is disagree- 
 able here in the mountains; it 
 is cold and damp. 
 
 "We ai'e Bavarians," said 
 the emigrants, "and are on 
 our way to California." 
 
 My parents are not here, 
 they ai'e in Eui'ope. 
 
 My brothel's were at the 
 lectui'e last night; I myself 
 was at the club. 
 
 We were at Naples during 
 the -svinter. 
 
 The condition of the French 
 at Moscow was hopeless; they 
 were mthout shelter, food, or 
 clothing. 
 
 "Be entirely free from care," 
 said the i^reacher to us, "I am 
 3 our friend and well disposed 
 towai'ds you. 
 
 50. 
 
 Qd) !ann nid)t mel^r arbciten, I cannot work any more, I 
 i^ met be mube. am getting tired. 
 
MATERIAL FOR CONVERSATION. 
 
 11 
 
 Unfcr T)icner ift nic^t !ran!, 
 aber tx ttiirb alt unb fd)tt)ad). 
 
 3Sir mitffen cilen, bcnn C'3 
 regnet, unb loir lucrbcn na^. 
 
 -3(^ t)cr!aufe tnetnc ^rief* 
 marfen, benn flc iuerbcn mir 
 gletc^gitltig. — X)k dJlavk. 
 
 ^d) muBte mctne O^Jetfe tiac^ 
 ©panteu auffc^ieben, benu i^ 
 tuurbc plo^Iic^ fran!. 
 
 ©ad '$er[eiTetd) tour be bie 
 ^eute 2lle^anberd» 
 
 Our servant is not sick, but 
 lie is getting old and weak. 
 
 AVe must liurry, for it is 
 raining, and we are getting 
 wet. 
 
 I am selling my stamps, for 
 I am growing indifferent to 
 them. 
 
 I had to put off my journey 
 to Spain because I suddenly 
 fell sick. 
 
 The Persian empire became 
 the j)rey of Alexander. 
 
 55. 
 
 Qrfl fd)retbc einett ^rtef an 
 meinen Secret in Bremen. 
 
 grau (Sc^allcr copiert cine 
 9}?abonna uon Wlnxiiio. 
 
 Sir cjlaubcn (eid)t \va^ \mv 
 !)offcn. 
 
 ,,^tebct eure getnbe!" ift cine 
 S5or|"d)rift bed (i^rtftentumd. — 
 !4^ad (SI]rtftentum. 
 
 nungen tdufdjcn. — !l)er ^wet^ 
 fc(; bie §oftnung. 
 
 3d) mac^tc bie ^efanntfd^aft 
 metned ajiufitte^rcrd in Sied* 
 baben, 
 
 ^ert!(ed fc^mitdtc 5lt!)en nttt 
 ^entpeln unb .Statuen. — 'X)er 
 ^empel. 
 
 2Btr tDaren jmei (Stunbcn ivx 
 S5crein unb fpiettcn bann ®d)ac^ 
 bid 5Jiitternad|t. — X)k md)t 
 
 I am ■writing a letter to my 
 teacher in Bremen. 
 
 Mrs. SchaUer is copying a 
 Madonna by MuriUo. 
 
 We easily believe what we 
 hope. 
 
 Love your enemies, is a 
 precept of Christianity. 
 
 Doubts torment, and hopes 
 deceive. 
 
 I made the acquaintance of 
 my music-master at Wies- 
 baden. 
 
 Pericles adorned Athens 
 with temples and statues. 
 
 We were at the club for 
 two hours, and afterwards 
 played chess until midnight 
 
 56. 
 
 ^(eyanbcr griinbcte ©tdbte Alexander founded cities 
 unb ^^dnigreidje. and kingdoms. 
 
12 
 
 MATERIAL FOR CONVERSATION. 
 
 ^tc 9iuffen opferten tl)re 
 .?)auptftabt unb rcttcten il}re 
 grei^cit. 
 
 The Russians sacrificed 
 tlieii' capital, and saved their 
 freedom. 
 
 Additional Examples to § 55 — § 56. 
 
 ^ ^c^ njo^ttC in bcr griebrid)^ 
 ftraBc. 
 
 T)ie ^inbcr fpiclctt tior bem 
 §au)'c, — S^a^ ttnb. 
 
 Qd) bleibc gu §aufe tnegen 
 be§ 9?cgcii^. — !Dcr 9?egen. 
 
 !I)er ©artncr ift im ©arten 
 unb pflanjt ^ lumen. 
 
 ^ie gurdjt uerleitjt glitgef. 
 — ^er gaigef. 
 
 !Die (S^inefen betrad)tcn bie 
 2^anne al§ ein @tnnbilb ber Un* 
 fterbltd)!ett. — ^cr (5l)inefe. 
 
 Tk 3Sufte erfittlt ba^ ©emiit 
 mit bem ®cfU()te bcr Uncnblic^* 
 teit. — T)a^ ©efit^l. 
 
 T)er (Sinfiebler tno^ntc in 
 ciner §utte im SBalbe. — !Der 
 Salb. 
 
 §crhi(c§ befreite ben ^rome^ 
 t^eu^ t)om ©eier. — ®cr ®eier. 
 
 ^cpkv entbccftc bie ^cwc* 
 gung^gefe^e ber ^(aneten. — 
 ^a^ (Sefct^. 
 
 2lnftoteIc§ leitcte ^cn Unter* 
 ridjt Stlcjanber^. 
 
 I live in Frederick Street. 
 
 The children are playing 
 before the house. 
 
 I stay at home on account 
 of the rain. 
 
 The gardener is in the gar- 
 den, planting flowers. 
 
 Fear gives wings. 
 
 The Chinese regard the fir 
 as an emblem of immortality. 
 
 The desert fills the mind 
 ■with the sense of infinity. 
 
 The hermit Hved in a hut in 
 the forest 
 
 Hercules rescued Prome- 
 theus from the vulture. 
 
 Kepler discovered the laws 
 of the rotation of the planets. 
 
 Aristotle supervised the in- 
 struction of Alexander. 
 
 To § 58- 
 58, 
 
 S^ lin nie in (^uropa jcs 
 ttjcjcn, ic^ l^obc nod) nte 3^^it 
 gcnug gur 9^ei]e gc^ttBt. 
 
 c^crr iKid)ter ijt Senator gc? 
 
 §61. 
 
 I have never been in Europe, 
 I have never yet had time 
 enough for the journey. 
 
 ]VIr. Eichter has become a 
 senator. 
 
MATERIAL FOR CONVERSATION. 
 
 13 
 
 tnu^ cntbcrft. 
 
 !Der Sagen mirb g(etc^ be- 
 rett |cin. 
 
 !4)ie Slnfunft unferer (Sttertt 
 mor un^ alien cine Ucbcrs 
 taft^ung. 
 
 ^Mc(e 3nfe!tctt finb hm 
 grudjten fi^ablt^. — ^a^ 
 Snfeft; bie grudjt. 
 
 ^(^ geticnf c ben (Sommer in 
 ^ari^ 311 dcrBrinactt. 
 
 ^f^apoleon^ Stbft^t n)ar feine 
 gctnbe etnjeln ju fi|(o0Ctt. 
 
 „(S^ ift rii^mlit^," fagt §0^ 
 ra.;;, „fur ba^ ^atcrknb ju 
 ftctkn.^' 
 
 Galvani discovered galvan- 
 ism. 
 
 The carriage will be ready 
 immediately. 
 
 The arrival of our parents 
 was a surprise to all of us. 
 
 Many insects are hurtful to 
 the fruits. 
 
 I intend spending the sum- 
 mer at Paris. 
 
 Napoleon's intention was to 
 beat his enemies sej)arately. 
 
 " It is glorious," says Horace, 
 "to -die for one's country," 
 
 59. 
 
 ©eftem tnotcti to it in ber 
 
 5lu^ftcl(nng. 
 
 Sir arbciteten bi§ brei U^r, 
 bann moditctt ttiir ?incn (Spa* 
 giergang urn. bie ©tabt. 
 
 3m Sinter too^ncn ttiir in 
 ber @tabt, im (Sommer auf bem 
 i^anbe. — X)a^ \ia\\h, 
 
 !Die ^onigtn ^aBc it§ gefe^en, 
 aber nici)t ben ^onig. 
 
 ^'raftitj ift bie <Stimme bc^ 
 2:enortften ntd)t, aber fel)r bieg* 
 fam. — jDer ATenorift. 
 
 Senn e^ (jegen abcnb f^dn 
 ift, (jo) gcbenten mir anf bem 
 g(uf|c p rnbern. — ^er glug. 
 
 T)a ic^ ®afte ^abe, faun ii^ 
 ntd)t t)erfpred)en in bie iStabt ^n 
 fommen. 
 
 Yesterday we were at the 
 exhibition. 
 
 We worked until three 
 o'clock, then we took a walk 
 around the town. 
 
 In winter we live in town; 
 in summer, in the country. 
 
 I have seen the queen, but 
 not the king. 
 
 The tenor's voice is not 
 strong, but very flexible. 
 
 If it is fine towards evening, 
 we intend rowing on the river. 
 
 Since I have guests, I can- 
 not promise to come to town. 
 
u 
 
 MATERL\L FOR CONVERSATION. 
 
 60. 
 
 *^o(t)!ratc6 \)attc cmcti 9^ing, 
 tt)c(d)cn ct feljr f)od) fdjt^tc. 
 
 ©eftcrn \)abcn mv bie ^urg 
 bciud)t, IDO Sutler bie ^ibel 
 
 Potycrates had a ring which 
 he valued xerj higlilj. 
 
 Yesterday we \isited the 
 castle where Luther ti'anslated 
 the Bible. 
 
 61. 
 
 ©te ?eute glaubcn bie @e* 
 fd)id)te be^ ^cttler^ nii^t. 
 
 Qd) emartc metne greunbe 
 ni^i me^r; e^ ift fd)OTi fel)r 
 fpat. 
 
 The people do not beUeve 
 the beggars stoiy. 
 
 I do not expect my friends 
 any longer; it is very late al- 
 ready. 
 
 Additional examples to § 58 — § Gl. 
 
 §err ^Seige f^ai neulidi fcine 
 3ucferfabri! ticrfauft. 
 
 §eutc abenb tottn tc^ tiid)t 
 au^ge^en, tueil ii^ greunbe au^ 
 ber (Stabt crtuarte. 
 
 Sir finb geftertt 5Ibcnb in 
 ber Dper gcttjefcn unb iijerben 
 ^eute abenb gu §au|e blciben. 
 
 priebrid) miirbc me{)r ^^Ippetit 
 §obcn, fagt ber ^trgt, mcnn er 
 mel)r arbeitete. 
 
 SSir bewnnbem in ben ^ra* 
 men (^octI)ei5 bie ($l)araftere, 
 mcil lie immcr ber ^Mtnr ge- 
 trcu {inb. — Da^ !Drama; ber 
 (^t)arafter. 
 
 iDa^ Setter ift nn[i<^er; id) 
 glaube, c5 ttiirb morgcn rcgs 
 nen. 
 
 Sd) ^aBc etncn (Btod unb 
 einen O^egcnfdjirin in ber Stabt 
 gcfauft. 
 
 ©corg ijl 8oIbat gctoorbcn. 
 
 ]\Ii\ Weisse sold his sugar- 
 factory the other day. 
 
 To-night I cannot go out 
 because I am expecting friends 
 fi'oni the city. 
 
 We were at the opera last 
 night, and shall stay at home 
 to-night. 
 
 Frederick would have more 
 api^etite, the ph^'sician says, 
 if he worked more. 
 
 We admii'e the chai-actei-s 
 in the dramas of Goethe be- 
 cause they are always faithful 
 to nature. 
 
 The weather is uncertain; I 
 beheve it will rain to-morrow. 
 
 I have bought a cane and 
 an umbrella in town. 
 
 George has become a soldier. 
 
MATERIAL FOR CONVERSATION. 
 
 15 
 
 Str ttJCtbcn in brei (Stunben 
 in (Sm^ fcin. 
 
 '5^ie ©tra^cn ftnb burcl) hm 
 9^ecjcn fet)r fiiimut^ig gcliaorbcn. 
 — X)ie @tra§i\ :. 
 
 T)er llaufmann Wldcx Ijat 
 ISanfrott gcma^t. 
 
 ^ir ^ttbcn l)eute friil) cinen 
 ^pa^tergang bur(^ ben SSalb 
 
 X)€r ^r^t eritcirt, cine 9?ei]e 
 iiber t)tn Dcean iuiirtic ber @e^ 
 funb^ett ber gnr[tin fj^abcn. 
 
 — ^te (Srf)riftftel(er alter ^eiten 
 ^aBctt bie 33er(jangen^eit anf 
 ^^often ber (^egeniMrt gcloH. 
 
 — 2)ie 3eit. 
 
 We shall be at Ems in three 
 
 hours. 
 
 The streets have become 
 
 very dirty owing to the rain- 
 Meier, the merchant, has 
 
 become a bankrupt. 
 
 We took a walk through 
 
 the woods this morning. 
 
 The physician declares that 
 a journey across the ocean 
 would injure the health of the 
 princess. 
 
 The writers of aU times 
 have praised the past at the 
 expense of the present. 
 
 62, 
 
 1. -3ebermann tennt ben 
 ^n^fprnd) ^(epnber^: „^Benn 
 idjf^ ntd)t 5liepnber to are, 
 ttiiinfd^tc iiij, !iDiogene^ ^n fein. 
 
 5Benn xdj bie^ ^^fti^^^^^S 
 mciner (SItern ^iittc, tciftc ic^ 
 fogleid) nacI)(Snropa (or wiirbc 
 id) fogleid) nad) (Snropa tcifcn). 
 
 Sir ^'diitn nnfer $aud ntd)t 
 tjertanft^iDennmnf ere Itmcjebnng 
 nid}t fo geranfc^uoU gewefen 
 mdrc (or roir ttjiitbcn nnfer 
 gan^ ntc^t Dertanft IjttlJcn, 
 toenn etc.). 
 
 2. (Sato ppegte ^n fagen, er 
 fci nie fo ttjenig allein, al-^ tpenn 
 er alkin fci. 
 
 §omer (e^rt, \>a^ 5ltlae bie 
 (5rbe trogc. 
 
 Every one knows the saying 
 of Alexander : "If I was not 
 Alexander, I should like to be 
 Diogenes." 
 
 If I had the consent of my 
 parents, I should go to Europe 
 unmediately. 
 
 We should not have sold 
 our house if our surroundings 
 had been less noisy. 
 
 Cato used to say that he was 
 never less alone than when he 
 was alone. 
 
 Homer teaches that Atlas 
 carries the earth. 
 
16 
 
 VJLTERTAL FOR CONVERSATION. 
 
 T)tr T^icb bctcucrtc, cr l^obe 
 bie Ul)r gctauft, loiff c aber nid)t, 
 in ipeld)cm l^iben, benn cr fci 
 ganj frcmb in bcr @tabt. 
 
 Unfer ^onful f(f)reibt, bag 
 cin ^rieg ^mifdjcn granfrcic^ 
 unb (Sljina unocnneiblicl) fci. 
 
 Tlie thief protestod lie had 
 bought the watch, but did not 
 know in which store, for lie 
 was an entii'e sti'anger in the 
 city. ^ 
 
 Our consul wi'ites that a 
 war between France and China 
 is unavoidable. 
 
 67. 
 
 1. 3d) borf abenbS nit^t 
 au^^e^en unb !ann fomit nid)t 
 in bie (Stabt fommen. 
 
 T)k ^inbcr Woikn raiffen, ob 
 fie ^eute baben turfen. 
 
 Sil^elm Wat t)erbrieB(id), 
 tDeit er nid^t auf bie ^agb gc^en 
 burfte. 
 
 !^ie 5lrbeiter n)iinfd}ten cine 
 S?crfammlung gu I) alien, Ijaben 
 aber nic^t gcburft. 
 
 2. Qdj fanit f)eutc abenb 
 tiid)t in bie 33or(einng ge^en, id) 
 l^abe ^riefe gu )d)reiben. — X)er 
 ^rief. 
 
 -Semattb fragte ben ^iogene^, 
 urn rokmi Ul)r cr gn SJiittag 
 efjen fo((te. !Diefcr antnjortcte: 
 ^Senn bu reid) bift, ig inann 
 bu tPiUft; n>enn bu arm bift, 
 n?ann bu fonnfl." 
 
 Unfcre greunbe fonncn nic^t 
 t)or DJ^ittag anfommcn. 
 
 Qd) ionnte nic^t c^er font* 
 men, nj?il id) lange auf bie 
 ^ferbe luarten mugte. — '^a^ 
 $ferb. 
 
 3. Qd) mog ben (Stro^^ut 
 nid)t; cr ift gu ^od). 
 
 I am not allowed to go out 
 in the evening, and cannot, 
 therefore, come to town. 
 
 The children want to know 
 whether they are allowed to 
 bathe to-day. 
 
 AVilliam was vexed because 
 he was not allowed tj go 
 hunting. 
 
 The workmen wished to 
 hold a meeting, but they were 
 not allowed. 
 
 I cannot go to the lecture 
 to-night; I have lettei*s to 
 wiite. 
 
 Somebody asked Diogenes 
 at what o'clock he should dine. 
 He answered : "If you ai'e 
 rich, dine when you like ; if 
 you are poor, when you can." 
 
 Our friends cannot arrive 
 before noon. 
 
 I could not come sooner 
 because I had to wait a long 
 time for the horses. 
 
 I do not like the straw-hat; 
 
 it is too higL 
 
MATERIAL FOR CONVERSATION. 
 
 17 
 
 ^mt Wcvn tnogctt ^eute 
 mM in^ Xl)catcr ge()en. 
 
 'i^a^ ^d)Io^ am (See fteljt 
 nod) tmmer leer; niemanb Ijat 
 
 feurfjt unb ungefunb tjt. 
 
 3^cl) ino^tc nod) etnc ScUe 
 l^tcr im @artcn bleibcn; nnferen 
 ^efu(^ fonnen tuir eine (Stnnbe 
 fpatcr mad)en. — !Dcr ©arten. 
 
 4. grt^ tDetnt, tneil er gu 
 §aufe bleiben inu§, tr»d()renb 
 feine @efd)iwifter au^gel)en biir* 
 fen. 
 
 (S3 ift em 9?atnrgcfe^, ha^ 
 aUc Wlm\d)tn fterben miiffcn. 
 
 SD^eine grennbe !onnten nic^t 
 e'^er fommen, \w\i fie lange auf^ 
 2Dampffd)tff loarten umfetcn. 
 
 5. >Du follfl beinen S5ater 
 unb bcine SJ^utter e()ren — ift 
 eine 3Sorfd)rift ber :^ibeL 
 
 'A^cv SiJ^iniftcr ift befc^afti^t 
 unb I)at unS (^cantinortct, mv 
 fottctt inieberfommen. 
 
 5)ie ^tonung fotttc I)ente 
 ftattfinben, bod) ift cin 3(uff d)nb 
 notig geiDorben, 
 
 - 6. !^er 5Infang bon (Sd)tt(er§ 
 „llpenjagerMantet: MiU^i hn 
 nid)t bad l^ammtetn l)itten'?" 
 
 ^er !Dire!tor mar fet)r frcunb- 
 lid) gegcn und. „^'ommen (Sie, 
 tDann (Sie luottcn," fagte er, 
 „@ie finb immcr luidtontmen." 
 
 3d) tooUtt fjcftern gran ^lu 
 berd bcfnd)en, aber id) l)atte 
 felbft «efud)» 
 
 My parents do not wish to 
 go to the theatre to-day. 
 
 The castle on the lake still 
 remains empty; nobody has 
 wanted it thus far because it 
 is damp and unhealthy. 
 
 I should hke to stay here in 
 the garden a while longer; we 
 can make our call an hour 
 later. 
 
 Fred cries because he must 
 stay at home, while his broth- 
 ers and sisters are allowed to 
 go out. 
 
 It is a law of nature that all 
 men must die. 
 
 My friends could not come 
 any sooner because they had 
 io wait a long time for the 
 steamer. 
 
 Thou shalt honor thy father 
 and thy mother, is a precept 
 of the Bible. 
 
 The minister is busy, and 
 has answered us that we are 
 to come again. 
 
 The coronation was to take 
 place to-day, but a delay has 
 become necessary. 
 
 The beginning of Schiller's 
 "Alp Hunter" runs; "Wilt 
 thou not guard the lambkin?" 
 
 The director was very kind 
 towards us. "Come when you 
 hke," said he, " you are always 
 welcome." 
 
 I intended calling on Mrs. 
 Liiders yesterday, but I had a 
 visitor myself. 
 
18 
 
 MATERIAL FOR COX^'ERSATION 
 
 69, 
 
 ?ubmi(^ f)at ntd)t auf ben 
 ^afirmarft Qclien biitfcn; fchi 
 Srubcr (Sbuarb {)at gcburft. 
 
 Sd) t)abe metnen greunbcn 
 md)t fcf)reibcn f onncn, iuei( id) 
 i^re Ibrefje nic^t f)attc, 
 
 §eute nad)mittacj \mv fcin 
 ^l)catcr; bie ^d)aufpiclcr I)abcn 
 in bicfer §i^e nid)t fpiclen mos 
 gen. 
 
 9}?cin 3?cttcr I)at pIot4ic^ ab* 
 reifeu miiffcn. 
 
 Lewis has not been allowed 
 to fio to the fail*; his brother 
 Edward has. 
 
 I have not been able to 
 write to my friends because 
 I did not have theii' addi'ess. 
 
 There was no theatre this 
 afternoon ; the actors have had 
 no inclination to play in this 
 heat 
 
 My cousin has been obliged 
 to leave suddenly. 
 
 71, 
 
 !^tc gctnbe iDaren tm S?or* 
 tei(, meiT unfcr @enera( j;u fpdt 
 Befall ba^ geuer gu erdffnen. 
 — Tcr 33ortciL 
 
 ^ad ^on^ert Bcginnt f)ciite 
 urn Dicr U()r; gefteni bcgann 
 c^ urn brei. 
 
 ^cr ^au be§ ®ome§ l)at be* 
 reit^ bcgonncn. — ^er !4^ont. 
 
 !^ie igdjmugglcr leiftctcn kU 
 ncn Siberftanb, fonbern ftrccf^ 
 ten bie SSaffen unb botcit urn 
 (Sd)onung. — ®ie Saffe, 
 
 &ir l^abcn grau 9?nge oft 
 umfonft gcbctcn ^lauier ^u 
 fpielen; fie fpielt nie in ©efell* 
 fcf)aft. 
 
 9Jlein vSc^n^ager I)at bie 5lb* 
 fid)t, in Berlin gn Blcibcn. 
 
 Unfere (5cereiie wax fe^r an* 
 genelpn; bie 5tdd}te inaren ftet^ 
 fo l)eiter unb mi(b, \>a^ \mv biiJ 
 9J?itternad)t anf bem S3erbecf 
 ilicftctt. — 1)a^3 ©erbecf. 
 
 The enemy had the .advan- 
 tage because our general gave 
 the order to open fire too late. 
 
 The concert begins at four 
 o'clock to-day; yesterday it 
 began at thi-ee. 
 
 The building of the cathe- 
 dral has begun akeady. 
 
 Tlie smugglers offered no 
 resistance, but laid down their 
 arms and asked for mercy. 
 
 "We have often asked Mrs. 
 Huge in vain to play on the 
 piano; she never plays in so- 
 ciety. 
 
 My brother-in-law intends 
 to stay at Berlin. 
 
 Our voyage was very pleas- 
 ant ; the nights were always 
 so serene and mild that we 
 remained on deck until mid- 
 night 
 
MATERIAL FOR CO:^TVERSATION. 
 
 19 
 
 Utiferc 9?eii'cc^cfdt)rtcn finb* 
 in !4)rc^ben gcMicbcn. — !3)er 
 
 !Da^ 9ftof)r ^t bie (Sigenfc^aft, 
 bag c§ nid)t (cidjt iDrit^t. 
 -- Unfer 33irt brat^ ben ^on- 
 traft, unb fo mngten n>ir tn^ 
 §otcI ge(}en. 
 
 Unfer ©tener I) at hen 5.(rm 
 gcBto^cttitnb ltcc5tim4)ofpitaL 
 — !^a^ ©ofpitaL 
 
 @op^of(e^ bra^tc ha^ 
 2^ranerfpie{ ^u feiner ^olkn^ 
 bung. 
 
 l^uculto ^at bie ttrfc^e t)on 
 5l)*ien nad) Suropa gcbroi^t. 
 -= £)anntba( bat^tc unablciffig 
 auf bie 3^ernid;tung 9^om^« 
 
 S:)ie ®efaf)rten be§ Dbt)ffeu§ 
 it)oUten nidit auf i!)re (2d)iffe 
 ^nriidgeljen, lueil fie Sotu^ gcs 
 gtffctt batten* 
 
 Sir fel)en ben ^bnig faft tag* 
 lid), menu er nad) bent *$ar! 
 fttljtt. 
 
 i^J^ine (SItern finb anf§ ^anb 
 gcfa^rcn. 
 
 (^uftau ^IbolpI) pet in ber 
 ©d){adjt bci l^lt^en. 
 
 ®cr 9Zebe( fallt, bie (Sonne 
 iDirb balb fc^einen, 
 
 :4^ie 9^ad)tigallett finb jel^t 
 fel)r fparlid) in unferm SKalbc; 
 fonft fingcrt mir jebe 2Bod)e ein 
 paar, — 3^ie 9kd)tigall. 
 . - Sir l^aben heute ntorgen So- 
 relten int ^ac^e gcfongcn. — 
 ©ie gorelle; ber S3ac^. 
 
 Our fellow-travelers have 
 remained at Dresden. 
 
 The reed has the quality of 
 not breaking easily. 
 
 Our landlord broke his con- 
 tract, and so we had to go to 
 the hotel. 
 
 Our servant lias broken his 
 ami, and lies in the hospital 
 
 Sophocles brought tragedy 
 to its perfection. 
 
 Lucullus brought the cherry 
 from Asia to Europe. 
 
 Hannibal was incessantly 
 planning the destruction of 
 Rome. 
 
 The comrades of Ulysses 
 would not go back to their 
 ships because they had eaten 
 of the lotus. 
 
 We see the king almost 
 daily when he is driving to 
 the park. 
 
 My parents have driven in- 
 to the country. 
 
 Gustavus Adolphus fell in 
 the battle of Liitzen. 
 
 The fog is falhng; the sun 
 wiU shine soon. 
 
 Nightingales are very scarce 
 now in our forest; we formerly 
 caught a couple every week. 
 
 We caught trout in the 
 brook this morning. 
 
 * Note.— Many intransUive verbs are connected with fciii. (See § 181). 
 
20 
 
 MATERIAL FOR CONVERSATION. 
 
 71 (continued). 
 
 Qn ^eutfdilanb fcj^tcn bie 
 (^tubcntcn |el)r Did. — 5)cr 
 ^tubcnt. 
 
 " 5}ie 3c^^^9 metbct, ba^ he- 
 fonber^unfcrc ^^nfauterie tapfer 
 gcfo(^tcn l)at. 
 
 -3cl) finbc mcine 2Bo{)nung 
 flcin, abcr frcunblic^. 
 
 5)cr 5^ic!)ter !^l)cobor .Corner 
 fonb ben 2^ob auf bcm .^djlad)!* 
 fclbe. — '^a^ gelb. 
 
 ^te ^inber bicfeS ^nftitutd 
 flcj^tcn ^orbe; fie ^abett and) 
 \d)o\\ §ute au$ (Strof) gcflot^s 
 ten. — Da^3 ^nftitut ; ber iiorb ; 
 ber $ut. 
 
 5Mc @^nepfen finb fcf)irer ^u 
 yd)icBcn, incil fie fel)r fd)neil 
 flicacn. — ^ic (2cl)ncpfe. 
 
 t^ov ciner Sod)e flog unfer 
 ^uiucrmagajtn in bie l^uft. — 
 l^a^ OJ^aga^in. 
 
 ^Diad) ber(S(^(ad)t bci ^ama 
 fio^ §aTiniba( ^u 5(ntiod)u^. 
 
 5luf bent O^igi l)aben inir tro^ 
 unfcren ^el^^en gcfrotcn. — 
 3)er 9iigt; ber ^el^. 
 
 ^ie ^ienen finb nit^Itc^, n>ei( 
 ficnn^§onig nnb Sacfi^? acbcn. 
 
 Sir l}aben unfcrer ^^illa nod) 
 !cinen y^ntcn gcgeben. 
 " !£)ie Scilber ^]3o(en^^ finb nn* 
 fid)cr, n^eil e^ nod) Sdlfe unb 
 :^ducu barm aicbt.* — 33er 
 «dr. 
 
 Students in Germany fence 
 a great deaL 
 
 The newspaper reports that 
 our infantry especially have 
 fought bravely. 
 
 I find my lodgings small, 
 but cheerful 
 
 Theodore Komer, the poet^ 
 met with death on the battle- 
 field. 
 
 The children of this institu- 
 tion make baskets; they have 
 hitherto braided hats also 
 from sti'aw. 
 
 Snipe are hard to shoot be- 
 cause they fly \ery fast 
 
 A week ago, our powder- 
 magazine blew up. 
 
 After the battle of Zama, 
 Hannibal fled to Antiochus. 
 
 We were cold on the Rigi 
 in spite of our furs. 
 
 The bees are useful because 
 they give us honej^ and w^ax. 
 
 We have not yet given a 
 name to our villa. 
 
 The forests of Poland are 
 unsafe because there ai'e still 
 wolves and bears in them. 
 
 On the ^mp3r3onal use of geben, see § 179. 
 
MATERIAL FOR CONVERSATION. 
 
 21 
 
 T)k ®efd)ic^te (cl)rt, \ia^ c^ 
 gu alien ^citeu .'perren unb 
 ^ncc^te gegckn I)at, — :^te 
 
 ©tcr am ©eftabc gc^cn wiv 
 iac^xd) anf bte Qao,h, 
 —' '^^ad) ber ^lnnal)me tion ^art§ 
 giitg 9tapoleoti frehinllig in bie 
 S^erbannung. 
 
 iD^etne (^Itern finb in hk 
 ^ird)e gcgongcn. 
 ' !Der 5lr3t Tnad)t nn^ §ot> 
 nung, hai unfer ^atcr balb gcs 
 ncfeti mirb. 
 
 ' yJiein On!e( Wuxhc in ^Ile^ 
 ^anbria fiebertran! nnb gcno§ 
 erft nad) fec^^ SO^onatcn luicber. 
 — ^er momt 
 
 T^k ©rafin ift DoUfommen 
 gencfcn. 
 
 - Scnn tt)ir auf t>cn Sit^rer 
 tDarten^gcUjinncn unferegrenn* 
 be einen ^^orfprung. 
 
 - (Safar gctnann bie @unft bc^ 
 5>olfe§ burd) feine greigebigfeit. 
 
 - ©a^ «olL 
 
 Unfer Wiener l)at in ber 2oU 
 tcrie gettiattnen unb ift nun 
 felbftanbig. 
 
 !r)ie gitd)fe groBcn Sbd)er in 
 ben ^rbboben. — ^a^ Sod). 
 
 9}2cin 9^ad)bar grofit in fei^ 
 Item ©artcn. 
 
 llnfere Offi.^ierc l^nlUn 
 ^rieg^rat, benn ber geinb ^dlt 
 atle $affe befey. — 3)er "ipag. 
 
 Cicero J^itli \)kv ^chtn ge* 
 gen Ciatilina. — S^ie 9f^ebe. 
 
 ^cr ^er^og ift fcl)r fran!; 
 fein l^eben ftongt an eineni ga* 
 ben. — !Der gabcn. 
 
 History teaches that there 
 have been masters and ser- 
 vants at all times. 
 
 Here at the sea-shore we 
 go hunting every da}^ 
 
 Napoleon, after the capture 
 of Paris, went voluntarily into 
 exile. 
 
 My parents have gone to 
 church. 
 
 The physician gives us hope 
 that our father Avill soon re- 
 cover. 
 
 My uncle took a fever in 
 Alexandria, and did not re- 
 cover until after six months. 
 
 The countess has recovered 
 completely. 
 
 If we wait for the guide, 
 our friends will get the start 
 of us. 
 
 Caesar won the favor of the 
 people by his liberaHty. 
 
 Our servant won in the lot- 
 tery and is now independent. 
 
 Foxes dig holes in the 
 ground. 
 
 My neighbor is digging in 
 his garden. 
 
 Our officers hold a council 
 of war, for the enemy has oc- 
 cupied all the passes. 
 
 Cicero delivered four 
 speeches against Catiline. 
 
 The duke is very sick; his 
 Hfe hangs by a thread. 
 
22 
 
 MATERIAI. FOR CONVEESA.TIOX. 
 
 71 (continued). 
 
 ■^ 3:)cr tatfcr -3ofep^_ \oav cvup 
 ltd) bemuf)t tie SBof)(faf)rt feincS 
 
 - ^arl ber ©roge ^oB ben §an^ 
 bcl unb forberte bic Stiffen* 
 fd)aft 
 
 Sran^ i|t auf bcr 3Siefe unb 
 l^ilft bcti 5Irbcitcnt. — T^cr 
 5lrbcitcr. 
 
 ^te ^(ataer ^olfcn hen 3ltf)c* 
 ncrn gegen bie ^erfcr. 
 
 3c^ eriaugte bie (Srlaubnt^ 
 bie geftung ju be]'ud)en, wcii id) 
 hen tommanbanten f anntc. — 
 5)cr ^ommanbant. 
 ^ (Sigenlob f lingt nic^t gut. 
 
 ^6) iDotrte ben Zf)akv nxd)t 
 neI)Titcn, tDcit er nid)t cd)t f long. 
 
 3d) muB su §aufe blciben, 
 bi^ meine dltcrn fommcn. 
 
 (Ed[ar fdjricb an fcincn 
 grcunb: „S6:} lorn, fa^ unb 
 ftegte." 
 
 ^ie i?einbe muBtcn it)re ^a= 
 noncn in unfcrn §anben loffcn. 
 
 - 'A^k ^anone. 
 
 Unfre ^^oli^^ei ift fel^r xoad)^ 
 fam; fie lop feinen ^Serbrec^er 
 entnnfdjcn. 
 
 - "^ladj bcr (5innal)me t)on 3D2an= 
 tua lic^ ^Bonaparte eine ^c= 
 fal3ung m bcr ^taht unb mar:^ 
 fdjierte nac^ £)\kn, 
 
 Sir I)abcn unfcr ®cpad am 
 ^a{)n()of gclafjcn. — !Dcr 
 :^al)nl)of. 
 
 The Emperor Joseph earn- 
 estly endeavored to promote 
 the "weKai'e of his people. 
 
 Chai'les the Great improved 
 commerce and fuiihered sci- 
 ence. 
 
 Frank is in the meadov^r, 
 helping the laborers. 
 
 The Plataeans helped the 
 Athenians against the Persi- 
 ans. 
 
 I obtained permission to 
 visit the foiiress because I 
 knew the commander. 
 
 Self-praise does not sound 
 ■weU. 
 
 I refused to take the doUar 
 because it did not ring time. 
 
 I have to stay at home rm- 
 til my parents come. 
 
 Caesar "WTote to his friend : 
 "I came, saw, and conquered.'' 
 
 The enemy were obhged to 
 leave their camion in our 
 hands. 
 
 Our poHce are veiy vigilant; 
 they let no criminal escape. 
 
 Bonapai'te, after the capture 
 of Mantua, left a garrison in 
 the city, and marched towards 
 the east. 
 
 We have left our baggage 
 at the station. 
 
MATERIAL FOR CONVERSATION. 
 
 23 
 
 ^ ^k ^ricgMa(^nd)tcn finb 
 f(^(ed)t; un[re ^olbatcn Iciicn 
 unter bcr^ij^c; fiebaben and) 
 \d)on Saffcrmangel gcUttcn. 
 
 — T:k "iRadjvidjt 
 
 - ©a^ ^ferb tDurbe fc^eu, lt?ei( 
 cm Scidjnam tm Sege lag. — 
 3)cr l^cidjnam. 
 
 (Sonftantino^jcl ift feljr fc^on 
 gclegcn. 
 
 -DJcciuSSatec gcl|t nid)t tnc()r 
 in hen S5erein, uicit er ben 3^a* 
 bo!§rau(^ tncibcn mug, 
 
 •*5aluu^ tnicb taitgc ^cit ein 
 S^reffcn mit ©annibaL 
 
 " T)k (Bd}\da bc^ ©errti <ScnTt 
 melfcn jel^t hen g(ac^ettin()alt 
 be^ partes ; ()eute morgen I)aben 
 fie bie §o^e be^ Dbeli^fen gcs 
 mejfcn. 
 
 &>ir !aufctt mdjt^ met)r bci 
 Scvrn <Bpk^r iucii; er jdjlec^t 
 liiiP; friiljcr mag er beffer. 
 
 !Der patient iDirb nt(f)t ge^ 
 funb, mii er !eine 3Jiebictn etn* 
 nimmt. 
 
 3^ T^abe ettt 3^tnmer in ber 
 ^arfftrage gcnotnmcn. 
 
 ©eftertt rict ber ^'onful mcU 
 nem SSater in bleiben; r)eute 
 tttt er utt^ alten ju gel^en. 
 
 3^cr Wc'^t l)at memer Wnikv 
 gctotcnna^ ^arl^bab 3Ui3ef)en. 
 
 X)er ^Infang t)oti ®oet{)e^ 
 ^rlfontg lautet: ,,Scr tcitct fo 
 fpat burd; ^Jiad;t uub Siu^?" 
 
 Tlie news from the war is 
 bad: our soldiers are suffering 
 from the heat; they have, 
 moreover, aheady suffered 
 from scarcity of water. 
 
 The horse took fright be- 
 cause a corpse was lying in 
 the road. 
 
 Constantinople is very beau" 
 tifully situated. 
 
 My father does not go the 
 club any more because he 
 has to avoid the smoke of 
 tobacco. 
 
 Fabius for a long time 
 avoided a battle with Hanni- 
 bal 
 
 The pupils of Mr. Senn are 
 now measuring the area of 
 the park; this morning, they 
 measured the height of the 
 obelisk. 
 
 We don't deal at Mr. Spiess' 
 any more because he gives 
 poor measure ; he formerly 
 gave better measure. 
 
 The patient does not get 
 well because he takes no me- 
 dicina 
 
 I have taken a room in 
 Park Street 
 
 Yesterday, the consul ad- 
 vised my father to stay; to- 
 day, he advises all of us to 
 leave. 
 
 The physician has advised 
 my mother to go to Carlsbad. 
 
 The beginning of Goethe's 
 Erlking reads: "Who rides 
 so late thi'ough night and 
 wind?" 
 
24 
 
 MATEMAL FOR CONVERSATION. 
 
 71 (continued). 
 
 3d^ Italic ben ^ronprin^cn ge* 
 fel)en, al^ er auf Me ^arabe xiii, 
 
 §annibal f^icb Don ^talien 
 mtt S^^ranen in ben 5lugen. — 
 X)k Zi)vant; bad 5Iuge, 
 
 ^a§ Setter f^eint gut gu 
 merben; ba§ barometer fteigt. 
 
 (5§ ift triibe unb !alt ^ier in 
 8cl)bcn; bie (Bonne \)at fctt 
 einem 2J?onat nid)t gcfd^icnen. 
 
 - Tlcin ^ater mug unf em 5)te* 
 ncr Idglic^ luegen S'iadilaffigteit 
 fr^cltcn. 
 
 - 5)er Qnfpeftor xoav aUgemein 
 t)erl)afit, meil cr bie 2Irbeiter be* 
 ftdnbig idjolt. 
 
 !Dte &ie!ruten f^tc^cn nad) 
 ber (gc^eibe. — ©er D^efrut. 
 
 SS?ilt)etm >lcll f^o§ einen 
 5lpfct t)om topfe feinee @o^* 
 ne^. — ©cr ^opf. 
 
 ©ie ^lerjte berid)ten, ha^ ber 
 ^5rdfibent gut gcft^lofcn \)at 
 
 - ©cr 5lr3t. 
 
 9^apo(con f^licf fe^r wenig. 
 
 3c^ trage bie Ul)r gum lU)r* 
 
 tnadjcr, iiicit fie nid)t mc^r 
 
 ©ie ^onigin ^t>irb abreifcn, 
 fobalb ba^ ^^avtamcnt gcfi^lofs 
 fen ift. 
 
 ©a^ ^ki f ^miljt ]c\^v Iciest. 
 
 ©a§ 5lBad)iJ an ben S^iiQ^tti 
 bc$ Staru^ ft^molj an ber 
 (Sonne. — ©cr gUigct. 
 
 SBir nicrbcn morgcn unfer 
 ^orn f^nciUcn; ben SSeigcn 
 ^abcn njir fd)on geft^nittcn. 
 
 I saw the crown-prince as 
 he was riding to the parade. 
 
 Hannibal departed from 
 Italy Avith tears in his eyes. 
 
 The weather seems to be 
 getting fine; the barometer 
 is rising. 
 
 It is gloomy and cold here 
 in Ley den; the sun has not 
 been sliining for a month. 
 
 My father has to scold our 
 servant for negligence every 
 day. 
 
 The inspector was univers- 
 ally hated because he con- 
 stantly scolded the laborei^ 
 
 The recruits are shooting 
 at the mai'k. 
 
 WiUiam Tell shot an apple 
 off the head of his son. 
 
 The physicians report that 
 the president has slept welL 
 
 Napoleon slept very little. 
 
 I caTiy the clock to the 
 clockmaker's because it has 
 stopped striking. 
 
 The queen will depai't as 
 soon as j^ai'Hament is proro- 
 gued. 
 
 Lead melts very easil}^ 
 
 The wax on the \vings of 
 Icai'us melted in the sun. 
 
 "We shall cut oiu* lye to- 
 mon'ow; we have cut the 
 wheat alreadv. 
 
MATERIAL TOR CONVERSATION. 
 
 25 
 
 Qn her Qcitmq ftetjt, ha^ ber 
 ^dfer einen ^rief an ben 'papft 
 gcfdjncBctt l^ot 
 
 - 3:)a^ tinb f(!Jrctf, fo oft c§ 
 Slqnei ne()men tnu^* 
 
 !Dte «tbe( fagt: „^ae ^tut 
 5lbel^ f^ne .^^um $immel." 
 
 ,,'^a^ UnGlitcf jt^tcitct 
 f(f)ne((/' fac|t ber T)tc^ter. 
 
 S'ti ber geftung luar e§ nan;^ 
 fttll ; nitr erne <Sd)t(b tt)ad)e f ^ritt 
 langfam auf unb ab. 
 
 Uttfere (Sd)tffc feitertcn, bi^ 
 bie ^anonen ber gort^ ff^mics 
 gen. — SDae gort 
 
 - !Dcr ^elegrapt) melbet, bag 
 alio ^ad)e m ©ebtrge betrdc^t^ 
 lid) geji^ttJoflen finb unb un^ 
 etnc Uberj'c^wemmung bet)or* 
 ftel)t. 
 
 i^orb ^t)ron fcOttJomm uber 
 ben ^elie^pont. 
 -!Dte ©olbaten fd^rtjongctt btc 
 gal)nen, ai^ ber ^a\\cx nal)te. 
 
 — S)te ga^ne. 
 ©djonal^^'^lnabe ff^ to or ©an* 
 
 nibal ben ^Jomern geinbf^aft. 
 
 — ADer 9^omer. 
 
 IDie ^nbianer fc^cn unb l)o* 
 ren [cl)r fi^arf. 
 
 Sir blieben auf bem S3erbe(f, 
 bi5 iDir fein Sari's) me^r fo^cn. 
 ~ ©a§ SScrbed. 
 
 -3c^ l^abe grau 9f^euter t)orI)in 
 auf ber ^traj^e gefc^cit. 
 
 ^3^a)3oteon mad}te einen ge!)* 
 ler, aU er STruppen nad) IMqito 
 fanbte. 
 
 ^ie ^tnber tan,^en unb fins 
 gen im §ain. — 3^cr .?)ain. 
 
 !^ie ^olijct Ijat bicfe ^ilrbetter 
 
 It is stated in the newspaper 
 that the emperor has written 
 a letter to the pope. 
 
 The child cries whenever it 
 has to take medicine. 
 
 The Bible says: "The blood 
 of Abel cried to heaven." 
 
 "Misfortune strides fast," 
 sajs the poet. 
 
 It was quite still in the 
 fortress; only a sentinel paced 
 slowly up and down. 
 
 Our ships fired until the 
 camion of the forts were silent. 
 
 The telegraph announces 
 that aU the brooks in the 
 mountains have swoUen con- 
 ciderably, and that an inunda- 
 tion is near at hand. 
 
 Lord Byron swam across 
 the Hellespont. 
 
 The soldiers waved their 
 flags when the emperor was 
 approaching. 
 
 Hannibal, while jet a boy, 
 swore hostility to the Romans. 
 
 The Indians see and hear 
 very acutely. 
 
 We remained on deck until 
 we saw land no longer. 
 
 I saw Mrs. Eeuter in the 
 street a little while ago. 
 
 Napoleon made a mistake 
 when he sent troops to Mexico. 
 
 The children are dancing 
 and singing in the grove. 
 The police have arrested 
 
2G 
 
 MATERIAL FOR CON^^ERSATION. 
 
 71 (continued). 
 
 orrcttert, mil fie (Sipottlicbcr 
 Quf bie 9?egierung gcfungcn 
 ()aben. — ^a6 Sieb. 
 
 !5)ie ©cologte le^rt, bag bie 
 .^onttnente balb fintctt, balb 
 ftciiicn. — !4)er Continent. 
 
 m^ bie ^kdiric^t Dom Xobe 
 bc§ £an3(er^ tarn, fontcn alle 
 ^urfe an ber ^orfe. — 5^cr 
 
 3Me 3^fi^<^K^ PpJ^QC^ nuf 
 bem gugboben gu fi^cn. — ^cr 
 ^apanefe; ber ^oben. 
 
 5(uguftu§ l)atte (^liicf unb 
 ©rfo(g, folange cr auf bem 
 S;i)rone fa|. — ^cr 2:()ron. 
 
 !Der 9)?aior l)at bem $aupt* 
 mann im !©uefl ben 3cl}abet 
 gcf^oltcn. — ^a§ ©nelL 
 
 c^crr ^idjtcv t)at t)ente f(f)on 
 
 ^me'imal im 9^eict)^tag gcf^ros 
 
 ' ctt unb iDtrb nidjt iDieber f^Jtcs 
 
 tn. 
 
 Unfer ^^rcbigcr gefallt un§ 
 nid)t, weil er m langjam f^ri^t ; 
 friit)er f^radj er f(^neller, 
 
 5I(§ ha^ (^d)tff gener fing, 
 flJtangcn t^tete *i|3a|fagiere in^ 
 
 ?nt!)er flonb in Sonn§ un* 
 erfdjrocfen uor ^aifer unb O^cid). 
 
 *ipromet^eu§ {)at \>a^ gcuer 
 au5 bem §immct ^cjlo^Un. 
 
 !i[)er Gallon fiicg anfang^ 
 fcnfredit in bie §o^e, banu flog 
 er n»cftUd) baooii. 
 
 these laborers because iliey 
 have been singing satirical 
 songs against the government. 
 
 Geology teaches that con- 
 tinents sink at one time, liie 
 at another. 
 
 AVhen the news of the 
 chancellor's death arrived, all 
 the stocks at the exchange fell 
 
 The Japanese are wont to 
 sit on the floor. 
 
 Augustus was fortunate and 
 successful as long as he sat on 
 the thi'one. 
 
 The major has spHt the 
 captain's skull in the duel 
 
 Mr. Eichter has spoken 
 twice already in the Diet to- 
 day, and will not speak again. 
 
 Oiu' preacher does not 
 please us because he speaks 
 too slowly; he formerly sjDoke 
 faster. 
 
 When the ship caught fii'e, 
 many passengers sprang into 
 the water. 
 
 Luther, at Worms, stood 
 fearless before the emperor 
 and emph-e. 
 
 Prometheus stole fire from 
 heaven- 
 
 The balloon at first rose 
 pei-pendicularlv ; it then sailed 
 away westwai-d. 
 
MATERIAL FOR CONVERSATION. 
 
 27 
 
 T)a^ ^f)crmotneter ift um 
 eineti ®rab gcfticgcn. 
 " @^ ift fo l)ei6 l)ier in ^aler== 
 tno, \)a^ Diele Seute am (Sott= 
 nenftic^ ftctkn. — 'Dcr (Btid) 
 
 ^apokon ftorb in ber @e* 
 fan(ienfd)aft ber (Sngtdnber. 
 
 ^ente morgen ift ber :^ifd)of 
 gcftotBctt. 
 
 ^JJ^ein ^ater ^at unfercm 
 (partner ben 5lbfd)ieb gegeben, 
 iDcil er gar nid)t^ t^ot. 
 -3}er ^^a^ft ©regor l)at ben 
 ^aifer Don ^eutfd)(anb in ben 
 ^ann gct^on. 
 
 - Unfere ^^felbdnme trogcn 
 i^euer nic^t; bi§l)er t)aben fie fe^r 
 reidjlid) gctrogcn; and) ber 
 Qnittenbaum triigt nid)t fo Diet 
 trie gen)b{)nlid). 
 
 ^d) I)abe ben 'Direftor nen= 
 lidx.in ber -^anf gctroffcn. 
 
 Snea§ ttug feinen ^ater auf 
 ben (Bdjnikvn au^ S^roja. — 
 3)ie @d)nlter. 
 
 • ^ie 3^ben tnihtn meift 
 §anbe(. — ^er Quhe, 
 
 Unfrc (gSeereife loar nid)t ge^ 
 fa()r(o^; ber (Sturm tticli un'fer 
 (Sd)iff an bie ^iifte. 
 
 X)emoftt)ene^ wax fe!)r jung, 
 al^ er 3uerft offentlit^ auftrttt. 
 
 -(Sotratee ttanf ben ®ift* 
 bed)er. 
 
 i)a^(Sprid^rt)ortfagt: „35ie(c 
 tod)e tjcrlicrbctt ben :^rei." — 
 :SDer llod). 
 -Untraut bcrbitBt nic^t. 
 
 ^er 9?egen t)at bie ^ege tiers 
 botBctt. ~ X)er ^eg. 
 
 The tliermometer has risen 
 one degree. 
 
 It is so hot here in Palermo 
 that many people die of sun- 
 stroke. 
 
 Napoleon died in captivity 
 to the Enghsh. 
 
 The bishop died this morn- 
 ing. 
 
 My father has discharged 
 our gardener because' he did 
 not work at all. 
 
 Pope Gregory excommuni- 
 cated the emperor of Germany. 
 
 Our apple-trees do not bear 
 this year; they have, up to 
 this time, borne very abund- 
 antly; the qmnce-tree, also, 
 does not bear as usual. 
 
 I met the director in the 
 banlc the other day. 
 
 Aeneas canied his father 
 on his shoulders out of Troy. 
 
 The Jews are mostly in 
 business. 
 
 Our voyage was not -without 
 danger; the storm drove our 
 ship near the coast. 
 
 Demosthenes was very 
 young when he first appeared 
 in public. 
 
 Socrates drank the poisoned 
 cup. 
 
 The proverb says : Too 
 many cooks spoil the broth. 
 
 HI weeds grow apace. 
 The rain has spoiled the 
 roads. 
 
28 
 
 MATERLAX FOS CONVEBSATION. 
 
 71 (continued). 
 
 ^cr (Bpankv iJcrgigt nidjt 
 ldd)t eine ^eleibigung. 
 
 ^cr D^cfrut ticrgag, feme 
 glinte 3U rctnigen. 
 
 S)cr (partner \)at bcrgcffcn 
 tncinc ^f(an3en gu bcgicjcn. — 
 X)ie ^flanje. 
 
 - ^reufeen tictlor burrf) 'bcn 
 ^ncbcn^Dcrtrag t»on Siilfit bci* 
 nal)e bie §dlfte feincr (Staatcn. 
 
 ' §err @tabe t)at feine ^ud)* 
 ^alterftelle ticrlorcn. 
 
 ^er Slrjt ift urn ^cmf)arb 
 be[orgt,tt)eit er gUfrf^neH mdd^ji. 
 
 !^ie (Scf)Iarf)t ift getDonncn, 
 bie gcinbe toci^cn oiif qUcu 
 (2etten; ba0 Centrum toi^ ju^ 
 erft. — !4^'ie (geite. 
 
 5)ie 5lrbeiter finb auf ber 
 Sicfe uttb tticnbcn $eu. 
 
 - 5)a^ ^ublifum toanbtc bcm 
 9?cbner ben dlMm unb uerlieg 
 ben Saal. 
 
 \\m bie ©otter 311 t)crfo!)ncn, 
 lunrf ^^otljrmte^ fcincn 9iiug 
 iii^ ^JO^ccr. 
 
 Sir l^abcn ha^ ©cu gcttios 
 Qcti; c§ ttiicgt ac^t^ig ^^funb. 
 
 5^ie ^inber ^inb ouf ber 33e* 
 ranba unb tomb en ^ran5e; 
 l^eute friil) ^abcn fie ©uirlanben 
 gcttiunbcn, urn bie ^apelle gu 
 fd)miicfen. — ^cr ^rans; ^^^ 
 ©uirlanbc. 
 
 - 3^^^i (Sd)tangen — fo gel^t 
 bie (Sage — toonbcn fic^ urn 
 l^aofoott u^b feine ^oljne. — 
 2)ie 8c^laugc; ber l^eib. 
 
 The Spaniard does not easi- 
 ly forget an offense. 
 
 The reci-uit forgot to clean 
 his gun, 
 
 liie gardener has forgotten 
 to water my plants. 
 
 Prussia lost, through the 
 treaty of peace of Tilsit, al- 
 most one-haK of her provinces. 
 
 Mr. Stade has lost his pos- 
 ition as book-keeper. 
 
 The physician is anxious 
 about Bernhard because he is 
 groA^ing too fast. 
 
 The battle is won, the enemy 
 is yielding on all sides; the 
 centre gave way first 
 
 The laborers are in the 
 meadow, turning hay. 
 
 The audience tui-ned their 
 back on the orator, and left 
 thehaH 
 
 In order to reconcile the 
 Gods, Polycrates threw his 
 ring into the sea. 
 
 We have weighed the hay; 
 it weighs eighty pounds. 
 
 The children are on the 
 veranda, making wreaths; they 
 made garlands this morning 
 to decorate the chapeL 
 
 Two serpents, according to 
 the mj-th, wound themselves 
 around Laocoon and Lis sous. 
 
MATERIAL FOR CONVERSATION. 
 
 29 
 
 (5^riftu§ " fagtc am ^reu^: 
 „S3ater, bergieb il}ncn, benn jic 
 tniffcn md)t H)a^3 fie t^un." — 
 
 „^d) mcifi^ bag t(^ ntd)tg 
 h?eiB," ift em Slu^fpru^ be§ 
 ©ofrate^. 
 
 Sir finb ntc^t burd) ben SKatb 
 gegatigett, meit l»ir bett 2Beg 
 nid)t tmi^icn. 
 
 ifoie geinbe iDcrbcn burd) utt= 
 fer ^^a( jie'^cn. 
 
 ^ao) ^efiegung bcr ©ricdjcn 
 3og 3l(ejanber gegen bte ^erfer. 
 — ^er ®riedj)e. 
 
 ^ie 55o(ter ift unmoralifi^, 
 iDeil fie ii)re Dpfcr oft gttiinot 
 gegen i()r ©etDiffcn gu rcbcn. — 
 ^a^ Dpfcr. 
 
 §err a)2cn!e ^at fciuen (So^tt 
 
 Sen. 
 
 Ckrist said on tlio cross: 
 "Father, forjjive them, for 
 they know not what they do.'* 
 
 "I know that I know noth- 
 ing," is a saying of Socrates. 
 
 "We did not go through the 
 woods because we did not 
 know the way. 
 
 The enemy will march 
 through our valley. 
 
 After conquering the Greeks, 
 Alexander inarched against 
 the Persians. 
 
 The rack is immoral be- 
 cause it often makes its victims 
 speak contrary to their con- 
 science. 
 
 Mr. Menke has compelled 
 his son to become a merchant. 
 
 73. 
 
 !^ie ^ontgin tt)irb morgen 
 aBrcifctt. 
 
 !Der ^ron|)rin;5 teif!c Dor^ 
 geftcrn ton Berlin ah unb lorn 
 §eute morgen in ?Dlailanb an. 
 
 SD^orgcn gcbcn!en tnir nad^ 
 ^uropa abjure if en; mein ^rn* 
 ber ift fc^on abgcrcift. 
 - Sir l^aben gran 9?ott) anf=* 
 Qcforbert l^eute abenb mit un§ 
 ^n fingen; fie l^at e^ jeboc^ ab* 
 gcf(l)(agen. 
 
 2])er ^taifer Bttnot hen (Som^ 
 mer in t)erfd)iebenen 4Dabern 
 ga. — 'La^ ^ab. 
 
 The queen will leave to- 
 morrow. 
 
 The crown-prince left Ber- 
 lin the day before yesterday, 
 and arrived at Milan this 
 morning. 
 
 We intend leaving for Eur- 
 ope to-morrow; my brother 
 has left already. 
 
 We asked IVIrs. Both to sing 
 with us to-night, but she has 
 declined. 
 
 The emperor spends the 
 summer at different watering 
 places. 
 
30 
 
 MATERIAL FOR CONVEBSATIOU: 
 
 5D^etnc (Sltem gebcnfen ben 
 3iiiter in ^encbig 3U3Ubringen. 
 
 SKir ^abeti ^erm unb gran 
 \^citcrer fiir l^ciite abenb einge* 
 tobcn, itnb fie ^abeu gugcj'agt. 
 
 <Sir So^n granfltn f am aitf 
 fcincr 9?eife nac^ htm 9^orbpol 
 urn. — 3>er $oI. 
 
 ^a-S ^onsert I)at Ijcute ftatt^ 
 gefunben. 
 
 3c^ t)offe, in brei !i:agcn gn^ 
 riicf ^ttfommen. — '^cv Sag. 
 - ©er (^ri(^t^I)of fjat unfcren 
 Hgcnten freigefprodjen. — X)er 
 Slgent. 
 
 X)er ^riefbote ift Dor gc{)n 
 3JJimttcn Dor unfercnt ^aufe 
 Dorbeigcfommcn; er lommi in 
 einer (gtunbe toieber tiorbet. — 
 2)ie SDIinute. 
 
 -3c^ fa^ ba6 ^ncggf(f)iff, aU 
 cS eben in ben §afen einlicf. 
 
 §eute frii^ l^aben h)ir bie 
 55refd)e in ber Tlamx gc[c^cn, 
 too bie jtmppen be^ ^o'nig^ in 
 9^oni cinbrangcn. 
 
 SDcr patient fc^Ucf um Dier 
 H^r eitt unb toai^te crft um 
 ge^n U^r loieber ouf. ^r jic^t 
 ten ^affec bem Zt^ct Uor ; ber 
 2:t)ec tegt feine D^erDen ;;n fe^r 
 •iif. — "^v 3:f)ee; ber 9ierD. 
 
 5)cr general 3teinad) ift eben 
 ^ier tjorbeigcritten. 
 
 gefunben, ober bie 5Iu^fagen 
 ilimmen nici)t uicrctn. — i)ie 
 Slu^^fagc. 
 
 SDie S3u(!ane toctfcn Scuja 
 attS. — ^tx ^viilan. 
 
 My parents intend to spend 
 the winter at Venice. 
 
 We inyited Mr. and Mrs. 
 Leiterer for to-night, and they 
 have accepted. 
 
 Sir John FranMin perished 
 on his voyage to tlie North 
 Pole. 
 
 The concert took jDlace to- 
 day. 
 
 I hope to come back in three 
 days. 
 
 The court has acquitted our 
 agent 
 
 The postman passed by our 
 house ten minutes ago; he 
 will pass again in an hour. 
 
 I saw the man of war when 
 it was just enteiing the harbor. 
 
 "We saw this morning the 
 breach in the waU where the 
 troops of the king entered 
 Eome. 
 
 The patient fell asleep at 
 four o'clock, and did not awake 
 tmtil ten. He prefers coffee 
 to tea; tea excites his nerves 
 too much. 
 
 General Steinach has just 
 passed here on horseback. 
 
 The examination of wit- 
 nesses has token place, but 
 their testimonies do not agree. 
 
 Volcanoes throw out lava. 
 
MATERIAL FOU CONVERSATION. 
 
 31 
 
 - St)!urc| f^afftc bie Oorb= unb Lycurgus abolished gold 
 
 (Stlbermiin^en aB. — ®ie and silver coinage. 
 
 Unfer ^ireftor tft gcnefen Our director has recovered 
 
 unb I)at fcine Slrbeit iDiebcr auf^ and resumed his work. 
 , gcnommen. 
 
 Sir finb geftern au^gcsogen. We moved yesterday. 
 
 76, 
 
 SOZettt SSater l^at bcfd)(o[fen 
 fetn §au§ ju dcrfaufcn. 
 
 (Sofrate^ ^at 9}?aBiguttt3 in 
 alien 3)tngeti em^fo^'lcn. — 
 ^a^ S:)ing. 
 
 M tft fo Mt r)ier in mi^a/' 
 f(i)reibt mein greunb, ,,ba6 alle 
 (SttroncnbUttcn crfroren jinb.^' 
 
 §crr 33eit f)at ^eute morgen 
 fetne ^ilia Ucrtauft. 
 
 "^k 3^cpe)dje Dom trieg^^ 
 fcf)aup(a^ lautete: „X)cv @ieg 
 tft unfeiv bie geinbe finb jets 
 
 ^er 9^ic^ter fagte ^um ^Ibtjo* 
 faten: „3rf) tan nic^t um^in 
 3t)re 9^ebe ju mipifligcn.'^ — 
 '^tv mt)oht. 
 
 l^ut^er ^at feine ^el)re nie 
 tnibcrrufctt. 
 
 1. 3^cr ^apft ^at bem taifer 
 bereit§ geantwortet. 
 
 My father has decided to 
 sell his house. 
 
 Socrates recommended mo- 
 deration in all things. 
 
 " It is so cold here in Nice," 
 writes my friend, "that all 
 lemon-blossoms are frozen." 
 
 Mr. Veit sold his villa this 
 morning. 
 
 The dispatch from the 
 theatre of war ran : Victory is 
 ours; the enemy are scattered. 
 
 The judge said to the 
 lawyer: "I cannot help dis- 
 approving of your speech." 
 
 Luther never revoked his 
 doctrine. 
 
 The pope has already an- 
 swered the emperor. 
 
 78. 
 
 ©err ^rciunUc^ ift bon ^om 
 na(| S!JJund)en ubergefiebelt. 
 
 t^cv T)ampfer „^(i)\ikv" ift 
 untergegangen. 
 
 Mr. Braunlich has moved 
 from Rome to Munich. 
 
 The steamer " Schiller " has 
 gone down. 
 
MATERIAL FOR CONVERSATION. 
 
 !4)er 9?tng luar gu Hein; e5 
 tnar unmocjlid) ta^ i2ei( (^in) 
 burd[i5u^,tet)cn. 
 
 ©ie geinbe burt^^ogcn unfer 
 !^anb nad) alien S^idjtungcn; em 
 ^pion l)atte il)nen unfere '^(dne 
 Winter brac^t. — '^k iRid)tung; 
 bcr ^lan. 
 
 $err ^ed)ftein !^at (Strafe 
 ;ial)[cn miiffen, mil cr cm £mb 
 ubcrftt^rcn l)aL 
 
 3Bir jinb auf cinem glo§ 
 iibergefabrcn. — ^a$ ^[o% 
 
 '4Der ^apitan Goo! umfdjifftc 
 bie (vrbe Dreimat. 
 
 !Der Drf an ri§ ^dume unb 
 gdufcr urn. 
 
 The ring was too small; it 
 was inijDossible to puU the 
 rope through it. 
 
 The enemy marched tkrougli 
 our country in all directions; 
 a spy had informed them of 
 our plans. 
 
 Mr. Bechstein has had to 
 pay a fine because he ran over 
 a child- 
 
 We crossed on a raft 
 
 Captain Cook sailed three 
 times around the world. 
 
 The hurricane tore down 
 trees and houses. 
 
 Additional Examples to § 78. 
 
 T)k ^oUjci l)at \>a^ §au§ un^ 
 fere^ 9cad)bard t)ou obea bi^ 
 unten burr^fut^t. 
 
 SO^eine greunbe l)aben (Ba'dj^ 
 fen unb Satern 3U gu^e hnx^i 
 rcijl. 
 
 §onanb ift t»on tiielcn ^ana^ 
 Icn bur(^fi))nttten. — 5^er 
 ^anal. 
 
 (5olumbu^ but^f^ifftc iiu 
 crft hen Ocean. 
 
 SBiv finb oon ber Unfc^ulb 
 beg ^afi'ierer^ iiberjcugt. 
 
 33o6 l)atben§onierubcrjc^t. 
 
 $eute frit() ):)at ung unfer 
 gii^rer bie (gtelle am 9il)ein ge= 
 getflt, IDO 9?apo(eon nad) ber 
 @d)(ad)tbeiVeip3ic^ iibcrgcfcfet ift. 
 
 "^k Corner iibcrtrttfctt alle 
 9f^ationen an Sapfcrfeit. — 'A^k 
 5iation. 
 
 The poHce have searched 
 the house of our neighbor 
 from top to bottom. 
 
 My friends traveled on foot 
 through Saxony and Bavaria. 
 
 Holland is intersected by 
 many canals. 
 
 Columbus first crossed the 
 ocean. 
 
 We are convinced of the 
 cashier's innocence. 
 
 Yoss translated Homer. 
 
 Our guide this morning 
 showed us the place on the 
 Rhine where Napoleon crossed 
 after the battle of Leipsic. 
 
 The Komans surpassed all 
 nations in braverv. 
 
MATEELiL FOR CONVERSAllOX. 
 
 33 
 
 ^ie 9^eitcrct be6 geinbe^ t)er== 
 fud)te, un^ gu umge^cn. 
 
 t)cv ^clxnt ttcv^a^r feinen 
 @abc( umju]rf)nallen. 
 
 ®cr giirft l)atte i^eber Xvup^ 
 ^en nod) ®elb genuQ, ben Hr ieg 
 jtt itntctnc^mcn. 
 
 511^ lr>ir ba^ SBracf erreid)ten, 
 tt)ar e^ eben im ^tQvi\\ untev* 
 3tti'inten. 
 
 The cavalry of the enemy 
 tried to outflank us. 
 
 The recruit forgot to buckle 
 on his sword. 
 
 The prince had neither 
 troops nor money enough to 
 untei^take the war. 
 
 When we came np to the 
 wreck, it was just on the jDoint 
 of going down. 
 
 79, 
 
 (I^irtftn^ fagte am ^reu^c: 
 „(^^ ift UoIIBrnrl)t." 
 
 :^er :^ilbl)auer mmcv \)at 
 feinen *il3rometl)en^ tjollcnbct. 
 
 !Dcr Dberft ftcl)t Dor bem 
 ^nei3§gerid)t, iDeil cr bie ^e^ 
 fel)(e be^ ©cneral^ nidjt tiofls 
 jogcn Ijat. — S}a^ ©eri^t. 
 
 Christ said on the cross: 
 "It is finished." 
 
 Madler, the sculptor, has 
 finished his Prometheus. 
 
 The colonel is to he tried 
 by courtmartial because he has 
 not executed the orders of the 
 general. 
 
 80. 
 
 SDie ^offnnng ift ttugcttfcj. 
 @panien ift etnftmal^ fcljr 
 retc^ nnb mot^tig geiDefen* 
 
 Hope is deceitful 
 Spain was very rich 
 powerful at one time. 
 
 und 
 
 81, 
 
 T)a§ Srbtebcn, fagt bcr ^cU 
 tun(;Sberid)t, tlang \mc ferner 
 
 Qd) l)abe blancg papier nnb 
 rote 3:tnte getanft. 
 
 $err ^JJand) ^at eine ?abnng 
 tt)et|ctt 23larmor^ bei nnfcrer 
 girma beftellt. — T)er OJiarmor. 
 
 2J?aria®tnart fc^rieb i^rXef= 
 tament mit eignct §anb nieber. 
 
 The earthquake, says the 
 newspaper account, sounded 
 like distant thunder. 
 
 I have bought blue paper 
 and red ink. 
 
 Mr. Bauch has ordered a 
 cargo of white marble from 
 our firm. 
 
 Mary Stuart wrote her will 
 with her own hand. 
 
34 
 
 MATERL\L FOR CONVERSATION. 
 
 „Der ^aifer/ fc^rcibt mein 
 Sreunb, „[it ein ID'^ann Don 
 i)ol}cm 2Sud)^, brcitcn ^djuU 
 teru uitb c^cfunbcr ^e)id)t^farbe. 
 
 3Sir brauc^cn f(i)mar5Ctt 
 (Sammt unb grunc ®eibe fiir 
 unfern Alitor. 
 
 X){e Sc^otten f)aben gett)of)n* 
 lic^ blauc ^ugeu unb blonbc 
 .^aare. — ®er ©c^otte; ba^ 
 
 "iProfeffor (Sta^t l)at fcitte 
 (Satnmlung beutfc^cr ^^Itertii* 
 Tuer unferem SJiufeum dermac^t. 
 
 !Da^ 5llpftabet bcftef)t au^ 
 groBcn unb flcincn ^ud)ftaben. 
 — 1>r :Sud)ftabe. 
 
 §err 3titbcr t)at cjute 2^inte, 
 blauc, rote wxh fc^war^c. 
 
 ^r ©drtncr Qdkim t)at fe()r 
 fettene ^flanjen, frembc unb 
 einl)eimii'ct)e. 
 
 "The emperor," my friend 
 wiites, " is a man tall in stat- 
 ure, with broad shoulders, and 
 a healthy complexion." 
 
 "We need black velvet and 
 gi'een silk for our altar. 
 
 The Scotch usually have 
 blue eves and fair hair. 
 
 Professor Stahl bequeath- 
 ed his collection of German 
 antiquities to our museum. 
 
 The alphabet consists of cap- 
 itals and small lettei-s. 
 
 IMr. Stiiber has good ink, 
 blue, red, and black. 
 
 Gleim, tlie gardener, has 
 very rare plants, foreign and 
 indigenous. 
 
 82—83, 
 
 dm fran55fifd)cr .^upfcrfte^ 
 ti)er ()at ben ^rei^ gcmonnen. 
 
 !Der ^tvx im grauen ^od 
 \mv ber fran,^dfifc^c3)ialer ^arr. 
 
 — Der ^orf. 
 
 !Dcr "^^rei^ beS @tcc;er§ im 
 SKettlauf tft eine gotbenc Ul)r. 
 
 — Der I'auf. 
 !Da^ ganje Sanb fetert bie 
 
 
 goibenc ©odijett be^ ^aifere. 
 
 ©err 9?et(^ beft^t ein fe^r 
 fd)onc8 l'anbl)au^ am 9i()ctn. 
 
 5Bir njcrbcn morgen ba^ neuc 
 SJiujeum befuc^en. 
 
 A French engraver has won 
 the piize. 
 
 The gentleman with the gi'ay 
 coat was the French painter 
 Karr. 
 
 The prize of the winner in 
 the race is a gold watch. 
 
 The whole country is cele- 
 brating the golden wedding 
 of the emperor. 
 
 ]\Ir. Reich possesses a very 
 beautiful villa on the Rhine. 
 
 We shaU \isit the new 
 museum to-morrow. 
 
MATERIAL FOR CONVERSATION. 
 
 85 
 
 5lUe ^reibc^eiiiinungen in ber 
 5lu^ftellung (inb bte 5lrbcit eine^ 
 italient|d)cn ^linftler^. — :Die 
 3eid)nung. 
 
 granffurt "wax frit{)er bte 
 §auptftabt be^ beutfct)cn Wid)^. 
 
 :Dte ^iifte be^ ^bmtral^ ift 
 t)on einem preugifc^cn ^ilb^ 
 Ifjauen 
 
 !Dte Orangen fommen au§ 
 bcm fonntgctt Hubert, — X)k 
 Drange. 
 
 ^te 5lrbetter ^aben ^eute 
 einen fd)dncn 5lpoUo au^gegra^ 
 ben, 
 
 ^ir ^aben nculic^ \)cn attcn 
 ^empel ber SJ^incroa bcfud^t. 
 
 T)tv 5Ird[)aoIog Dr. (^(^affer 
 Ifat in ^(cinaficn bic ^^uinen 
 eincr aiten ^tabt entbecft — 
 X)k 9?uine. 
 
 @oetI}eei gauft tft bie trone 
 ber beutfc^en i^itteratur. 
 
 !Dte nenctt Slu^grabnngcn in 
 ^ompeji finb ber ©egenftanb 
 einer 5lb^anblnng t)on i)r. gelb* 
 mann. 
 
 §crr 'tRolji giebt eine 5Iu§* 
 ma^t ber giicii)ifd)cn ^taffiter 
 I)eran§. 
 
 T)ie "iPalmen n)acf)fen in htn 
 l)eij5cn !^anbern. — !I)ie ^a(me» 
 
 AH pencil-drawings at the 
 exhibition are the work of an 
 Italian artist. 
 
 Frankfort was formerly the 
 capital of the German empire. 
 
 The bust of the admiral is 
 by a Prussian sculptor. 
 
 Oranges come from the 
 sunny south. 
 
 The laborers excavated a 
 fine Apollo to-day. 
 
 visited the ancient 
 of Minerva the other 
 
 We 
 
 temple 
 day. 
 
 Dr. Schaffer, the archaeo- 
 logist, discovered the ruins of 
 an ancient city in Asia Minor. 
 
 Goethe's Faust is the crown 
 of German Hterature. 
 
 The new excavations at 
 Pompeii are the subject of a 
 treatise by Dr. Feldmann. 
 
 Mr. Rohl is publishing a 
 selection of the Greek classics. 
 
 Palm-trees grow in hot 
 countries. 
 
 82, 1. 
 
 Wlcxn attct gau§(e^rer, Dr. 
 grennb, ift unfer ©aft. 
 
 Unfcr nencr Drganift inirb 
 morgcn bie gro^e £)rge( fpic(ctu 
 
 My old tutor. Dr. Freund, 
 is our guest. 
 
 Our new organist will play 
 the large organ to-morrow. 
 
36 
 
 MATERIAL FOR CONVERSATION. 
 
 §err <Staubc ^t fein grogcS 
 gernro^r unferer (Stemroarte 
 Dermact)t. 
 
 ^^err (Sctbcl l)at fcinc ncuc 
 3>tUa am See be^^ogen. 
 
 X)cx ©drtner dl'mnc ^at t)cutc 
 frill) alle fcine lueijen O^ofcu 
 Dcrfauft. — 'I)k 9?o)e. 
 
 IVIr. Staude has bequeathed 
 his large telescope to our ob- 
 ser^-atory. 
 
 ]\Ir. Seidel has moTed into 
 his new ^*iUa on the lake. 
 
 Rinne, the gardener, sold 
 all his white roses this mom- 
 
 83, 1, 
 
 liefer rote ^(eiftift ift gu 
 l)art, jener blaue ift gu weid); 
 id) nel)me biefen |d)tDar5Ctt. 
 
 ^iefe^ ineiBC vgau^ gel)t)rt 
 bem "ipfarrer, iene^3 griinc bcm 
 <Sd)ulIc{)rer» 
 
 S^ieje jutigctt 8olbaten ge^en 
 in-^ gclb, jene altcn blciben in 
 (^arnifon. 
 
 ^eber gutc 53iirger ift itber 
 ha^ 3(ttentat auf t>a^ !^ebcn bc^ 
 •prdfibenten entruftet. 
 
 This red pencil is too hard, 
 that blue one is too soft; I will 
 take this blaek one. 
 
 This white house belongs to 
 the pai-son; that green one, 
 to the school-teacher. 
 
 These young soldiers go to 
 the field, those old ones re- 
 main in gan-ison. 
 
 Ever^" good citizen is in- 
 dignant at the attemj)t on the 
 life of the president 
 
 84. 
 
 Ittifere (Seereife h)ar nid)t ge* 
 fabric^; ein )d)n)immcnbcr (Si^* 
 berg bcbrobte unfer 3c^iff. 
 
 (Bd^iikx^ „!^ieb uon ber ©locf c" 
 ift cin t)ie(bett)UTibertc§ @ebid)t. 
 — SDae ieieb. 
 
 Our voyage was not with- 
 out danger; a floating iceberg 
 threatened our ship. 
 
 Schiller's " Song of the BeU " 
 is a much admired poem. 
 
 85. 
 
 T'k 4riftlid)e Dtcligion (cl)rt, 
 ha^ ^ol)C unb 9liebrigc, 9leid}C 
 unb 3lrmc gleid) finb Dor @ott. 
 
 -53ei htn (Sgljjptem l^crrfc^te 
 ber (^^ebraiid), bie 2^otctt cinju* 
 balfamieren. — "^cx (Jg^pter. 
 
 The Christian Religion 
 teaches that high and low, rich 
 and poor, are alike before God. 
 
 The custom of embalming 
 the dead prevailed among the 
 Eg^^tians. 
 
MATERIAL FOR CONVERSATION. 
 
 37 
 
 1. Qxn iBebtcntct bed ©ra^ 
 fen ^at tie (vmlabung fjcbrac^t. 
 
 3ot)ann {)at :^e|d)(iftti)utig 
 (^efunben; er ii't ber ^ebientc 
 bed §auptmannd. 
 
 !Der @e(e^rte, ber 'Dtcl)ter 
 unb ber ^btlofopli ikWu bie 
 9^u!)e. 
 
 fiumbolbt toav eitt ®e(e^rtcr 
 faft alten ©ebtetett ber 9k== 
 tumnffenfd)aft. — T)a^ ©ebtet. 
 Unfcr ^onful ^t und l)or 
 (^icilien gemarnt, ineil 9?cifcnbc, 
 iDie er fagt, nid)t fid]icr t)or 9^du* 
 bern finb, — T)er D^itubcr. 
 
 2. ©in !l)cutf(^er l)at bie 
 ^afcf)enul)r crfunben, 
 
 SJ^eine 9?cifec^efal)rtett iDaren 
 !Deutfd)c unb Jfocinen. — ©er 
 ©dne. 
 
 ^rofeffor (Sta^t betttett fein 
 letted ^ud) : „X)k ©eutf d|cn in 
 5luftra(ten." 
 
 3. ©ad S^onc, bad 23Sa^re 
 unb ha^ (SJutc finb bie brei 
 ^beale ber 9)Zenfd)f)eit. — ©ad 
 3beaL 
 
 ©ie .^ritiler fagen Dom ^uc^c 
 h^^ '^rof cfford jogqe, bag ed t^ict 
 9leucg unb ScrtublleS ent()d(t 
 
 A servant of the count has 
 brought the invitation. 
 
 John has found employ- 
 ment; he i3 the servant of the 
 captain. 
 
 The scholar, the poet, and 
 the philosopher like quiet. 
 
 Humboldt was learned in al- 
 most every branch of natural 
 science. 
 
 Our con'^ul has warned us 
 against Sicily because travel- 
 ers, as he says, are not safe 
 from robbers. 
 
 A German invented the 
 watch. 
 
 My fellow - travelers were 
 Germans and Danes. 
 
 Professor Stahl entitles his 
 last book: "The Germans in 
 Australia." 
 
 The beautiful, the true, and 
 the good are the three ideals 
 of mankind. 
 
 The critics say of Professor 
 Fogge's book that it contains 
 much that is new and valuable. 
 
 8G, 
 
 SO^etnc (SItern ^bcn ganj 
 ©eutfd)(anb bereift. 
 
 ©ie ^oti;^ei l)at gonj bonbon 
 nac^ \>m ^crbrectiern burc^fud^t. 
 
 i^rau ^aucr fpridjt bie ^cr^ 
 liner aj^unbart. 
 
 1. 
 
 My parents have traveled 
 through the whole of Germany. 
 
 The police have searched 
 all London for the criminals. 
 
 87, 1. 
 
 Mrs. Bauer speaks the dialect 
 of Berlin. 
 
38 
 
 MATERIAL FOR CONVERSATION. 
 
 !Die9?umbcri3crSpic(maarett The Numberg toys are 
 finb bcrii^mt. — iDie SBaare. famous. 
 
 88, 1. 
 
 'Ajk ^dutnc t?on dalifornictt 
 fmb fe^r I)0(^ unb il}re ©tammc 
 t)on macl)ttgcm llmfancje. — 
 '^cv <Stamm; ber Umfanc;, 
 
 5^ie ^d)iDet5 ^at I)o§e Serge 
 unb tiefe vgeen. 
 
 The trees of California are 
 very high, and theu' stems of 
 an immense circumference. 
 
 Switzerland has high moun- 
 tains and deep lakes. 
 
 89. 
 
 '^k ^^cter§!ird^e in 9?0Ttt ift 
 ein fd)oncrcr iBau aU bic dJlav^ 
 cu^firc^e in 33enebig. 
 
 Sir t)aben unfer §au« in bcr 
 (Btaht t)cr!auft unb ein bcquc== 
 mcrcS in ber 33orftabt bejogen. 
 
 &c'6\vL^ tuar bcr reid)flc SOlann 
 bc5 Hltcrtum^?. — ^a5 ^lltcr:^ 
 turn. 
 
 S^ae ^lima bon (Siibfpanicn 
 ift ba^ {)ei^cflc in (Suropa. 
 
 !Demoftf)enc6 toav bcr be* 
 riibmtcflc gricd)ifd)e 9?ebner. 
 
 ^rofcj'for Diicbcl tpirb iiber 
 bie neucflcn (Jntbecfungen in 
 ber (Il)emie Icfcn. 
 
 ©ute (Sd)iDimmer fuc^en ini* 
 ntcr bie tiefflcn (Steden. — S^ie 
 <Ste((e. 
 
 SD^ein i^Tcunb in 5lt^en 
 fd^reibt, bie \?uft fci bort flarcr 
 unb burd)i'id)tigcr, unb bcr §im* 
 met t)on einein reincrcn unb 
 ticfcrcn <^(att aU bcl un^ gu 
 ©aufe. 
 
 Si Peter's at Borne is a finer 
 structure than St. Mark's at 
 Yenice. 
 
 We have sold our house in 
 the city and moved into a 
 more convenient one in the 
 suburbs. 
 
 Croesus was the richest man 
 of antiquity. 
 
 The climate of southern 
 Spain is the hottest in Eur- 
 ope. 
 
 Demosthenes was the most 
 celebrated Greek orator. 
 
 Professor Eiedel vnR lecturfe 
 on the latest discoveries ir 
 chemistry. 
 
 Good swimmers always seek 
 the deepest places. 
 
 My friend in Athens writes 
 that the air is clearer and more 
 transparent there, and the sky 
 of a purer and deeper blue 
 than mth us at home. 
 
MATERIAL FOR COITVERSATION. 
 
 Additional examj)les to § 89. 
 
 Unfre ncue ^o^nung ift 0C^ 
 raumtQcr unb in jcber ginfic^t 
 ancjenet)mer al^ bie altc; fonj't 
 n)ol)nten n)ir in ber gcraufd)^ 
 Dollftctt ©trage, jc^t iu bcr 
 rul)tfjftctt. 
 
 4)ie rctd)ftett Seutc ftnb utc()t 
 tmmer bie freigebigjictt. 
 
 ^ie ^cttiire guter iBii^er ift 
 gkic^ einer Unter^altung mit 
 ben au§ge3eid^netftcit SJ^anncrn 
 ber iBergangen^eit — ®cr 
 3)^ann, 
 
 Unfcr ^aftor I) at bie Blutig^ 
 fictt (^cfjlact)ten bc^ ^ricge^ mit^ 
 gemadjt* — ®te (Sdjla^t ; bcr 
 
 !^ante§ ©ottlit^e tomobie ift 
 bie er^abenfle 4)id)tung bcr 
 ltalienifd)en l^itteratnr* — S)ie 
 ^'omobie* 
 
 ^eter bcr ®ro^e wav bcr ge^ 
 bilbetftc 9iuffe fcincr ^dt 
 
 Our new lodging is more 
 roomy, and in every respect 
 more pleasant than the old 
 one ; "we formerly lived in the 
 noisiest street, "we now live in 
 the quietest. 
 
 The richest people are not 
 always the most HberaL 
 
 The reading of good books 
 is like a conversation with the 
 most distinguished men gf the 
 past 
 
 Our pastor took part in the 
 bloodiest battles of the war. 
 
 Dante's Divine Comedy is 
 the most subhme poem of 
 ItaHan literature. 
 
 Peter the Great was the 
 most accompHshed Kussian of 
 his time. 
 
 90, 
 
 !Da§ gcner brac^ gerabe au^3, 
 qU ber SBinb am Ijcfttgftcn tt»ar. 
 
 Sir ftnb nm. rcid)ftcn, inenn 
 mir cm 3ufriebenftett finb» 
 
 The fire broke out just as 
 the wind was most violent. 
 
 We are richest when we aro 
 most contented. 
 
 91. 
 
 ®oetT)e fc^ien grogct aU er 
 \oav; (Sd)itlcr n)ar grower a($ cr 
 fd)icn. 
 
 'a:)cx 2'6x\)c ift ftar!er aU ber 
 
 Goethe seemed taller than 
 he was; Schiller was taUer 
 than he seemed. 
 
 The lion is stronger than 
 the ti«Ter. 
 
40 
 
 MATERIAL FOR CONVERSATION. 
 
 !Der ^blcr tft ber ftiirffte 5Bo^ 
 
 9}?em 3iiittitcr ift baS f oltefte 
 int §aufc, abcr c^ ^at bie lDei= 
 tcfte ^u^fid)t. 
 
 !^crD3Zontb(anc ift ber l)bc^fte 
 4Berg ber 5llpcn. 
 
 (Sine gerabe IL^inte ift ber fur* 
 gefte SScc^ groifdjen ^xod ^un!* 
 ten, — S^er $untt. 
 
 92. 
 
 S)a^ (Spricf)tt)ort fagt: „(iin 
 (gpertinn in ber .^anb ift Bcffcr 
 c.l^ cine Stanlic auf bem !l)ac^e." 
 
 !Der l&cflc ^affee fomtnt au^ 
 5lrabien» 
 
 Unfere ^dngebritde ift l^ojcr 
 al^3 ber S^om. 
 
 The eagle is the strongest 
 of birds. 
 
 My room is the coldest in 
 the house, but it has the most 
 extensive ^-iew. 
 
 Mont Blanc is the highest 
 moimtain of the AIjds. 
 
 A straight line is the shortest 
 distance between two points. 
 
 The proverb says — A bird 
 in the hand is worth two in 
 the bush. 
 
 "^It greit)eit ift ba§ ^B^fle 
 ©ut einer Elation. 
 
 ^^apoleon toax ber grSpc 
 5Ve(bI)crr beS 3fit)5^^itnbert5, — 
 5)a§ 3:af)rr)unbert. 
 
 cgerr ©ierfen ift in bie ^taht 
 Oe^ogen, um feincn ^inbem 
 nd^cr gu fcin. 
 
 ^ie SBafferleitung toirb erft 
 no^ficS 3^al)r fertig ipcr^cn. 
 
 ll^ie ^agcr fcljoffen mc^rcrc 
 .^afen itnb ^anind)cn. — 5)er 
 Sciger; ber §afe. 
 
 1. i)it mcificn ©tatuen ber 
 5ln$fteIIung finb tiortrefflic^. 
 
 The best coffee comes from 
 Arabia. 
 
 Our suspension bridge is 
 higher than tlie dome. 
 
 Liberty is the highest good 
 of a nation. 
 
 Napoleon was the greatest 
 general of the century. 
 
 Mr. Giei'sen has moved into 
 the city, in order to be nearer 
 to his children. 
 
 The aqueduct will not be 
 ready before next year. 
 
 The hunters shot several 
 hares and rabbits. 
 
 Most of the statues of the 
 exhibition are excellent. 
 
 93. 
 
 ^;e ougctc SJJaucr beS ©c* 
 fanpniffe^ ift brci^ig guJ5 Ijod}, 
 hk innttt s^angig. — >DaS ©c* 
 
 The exterior wall of tlie 
 prison is thirty feet high; the 
 interior, twenty. 
 
MATERIAL FOR CONVERSATION. 
 
 41 
 
 T)ie geinbc hdjauMkn utt= 
 fcren ©efanbten mit ber duvets 
 [ten il}|{pd)tunr5» 
 
 'A^ii^ uktc (StocftDcr! un[erc§ 
 .?)aufc^ ent^dit ad}t ^inumXr 
 ba^^ unitxt ^cl)n. 
 
 9^icl)arb ift bcr o'bctftc m \cU 
 ner ^tlaffc, ^mit bcr iintcrftc. 
 
 $Homu(u^3 \mv bcr crfic ro^ 
 imfd)e ^onig, unb S^arquiniu^ 
 @upcrbu^ bcr le^tc. 
 
 5iriftibc3 unh ^paminonba^ 
 waxen ;^tt)ci fcltcne Gt)aratterc; 
 bcr erpctc (or crftcrcr) wax 
 ciujii] burc^ feincn (^cred)tig^ 
 fcitsfinn, bcr Ic^tctc (or Ic^s 
 tcrcr) buret) fcine (Sntf)alt|am^ 
 kit — Scr (I!)ara!tcr. 
 
 The enemy treated oiir am- 
 bassador with the utmost con- 
 tempt. 
 
 The upper story of our 
 house contains eight rooms; 
 the lower, ten. 
 
 Bichard is the first in his 
 class; Emil, the last. 
 
 Romulus was the first Roman 
 king; and Tarquinius Super- 
 bus, the last. 
 
 Aristides and Epaminondas 
 were two rare characters; the 
 former was unequaled for his 
 sense of justice; the latter, for 
 his abstinence. 
 
 9G. 
 
 ■2Sir lyoI)ucn c^cnavi cBcufa 
 tncit t)on granffurt M \)on 
 min. 
 
 ^cr ^onig "^PijiKp^ wax cBcns 
 fa t(ug aU ta\)\cx. 
 
 r,3cna/' [djrctbt meiu greimb, 
 „ift nicljt fa oroB ttJtc Scipjig, 
 aOcr e3 ij"! rjcit fcI)oncr gckgcn 
 iinb bid billigcr aU biefcS* 3c 
 I-ingcr inir ^'icr tnoljnen, bcfio 
 bcffer gcfdlU e'3 un§." 
 
 Un[cr (gommcr ti"t ertrdglid); 
 je l)ci^cr bie Za(\t finb, bcfto 
 littler jinb bie Tiddjtc, 
 
 ^/tor Wax bcr tapferfte um 
 ax" alien Xxoiancxn. — 3)cr 
 Sroiancr, 
 
 @o!ratc§ wax ber njeifefte tion 
 alien ®ried)ett. — S^cr ©rtcdjc* 
 
 „X)cr md(!^tt(3[te l!3n alien 
 
 "We live just as f;ir from 
 Frankfort as from Cologne. 
 
 KingPhilipp was as prudent 
 as he was brave. 
 
 "Jena," writes my friend, 
 "is not so large as Leipsic, 
 but it is far more beautiful in 
 nituation, and much cheaper. 
 The longer wo live here, the 
 better we like it." 
 
 Our summer is endurable; 
 the hotter the days ai'e, the 
 cooler are the nights. 
 
 Hector was the bravest of 
 all the Trojans. 
 
 Socrates was the wisest of 
 all the Greeks. 
 
 " The most powerful of all 
 
42 
 
 3£ATERIAIi FOR CONVERSATION. 
 
 ber ^lutjenbltcf.^ 
 
 rulers," sajs Schiller, " is tli« 
 moment." 
 
 97. 
 
 Q6) \nar gcftcm iticnt in ber 
 SPcrfammluitg, iucit bcr ^(rjt 
 mir ucrboten ^at abenb^ au^* 
 gugcl)cn. 
 
 ^cr ^ieb ]ac^tc 5U fciner 
 (5ntfd)utbigung: „I>cr ^lunger 
 IjatmidJ gc^iimngen g:i ftc()tcn.'' 
 
 511^ id) 5(b|d)tcb Dom ^^ireftor 
 ttal)m, fagte cr: „3d) U">crbe 
 bii^ mcincn greunbcit in ^^cm 
 cmpfct)Icn unb Ijoffe, balb i?on 
 bir gu l)orcn." 
 
 daltjjula bcfat)( ben ^ftdmern, 
 i^m gottlid)c (5I)re gu ermcifen; 
 bof^ fetne Untertl)anen Uemc^^ 
 tetcn if)n. — !5)cr 9^dmer. 
 
 SBir el)ren ba^3 5lnbenfen be§ 
 (Sofrated, liietl er unS ein ^ct- 
 fpict Uia[}rer ^eelengro^e gege^^ 
 ben I; at. 
 
 ,,grcunbe/' bcgann ber $Reb* 
 ncr, „{c^ l)abc cui^ cine SO^ittei== 
 lung gu mad)en, hk eud^ alle 
 iiberrajdien tinrb." 
 
 ^te ^(rbcitcr ftanben an^, 
 treil i^ncn bcr gabrif{)err fcine 
 9?ebuftion bcr Slrbeit^jeit gc* 
 tod^ren luoKtc. 
 
 Qd) l)abe §eine§ ©cbioite gc* 
 Tauft unb l)Offe fie tra^renb ber 
 gerien gu lefen. 
 
 I was not at the meeting 
 Yesterday because the I3hysi- 
 cian has forbidden me to go 
 out in the evening. 
 
 In justification of himself 
 the thief said: "Hunger has 
 compelled me to steal" 
 
 "WTaen I took leave of the 
 dii-ector, lio said: "I shall re- 
 commend Tou to my friends 
 at Bern, and hope soon to 
 hear from you." 
 
 Cahgiila ordered the Romans 
 to render him divine honoi*s, 
 but his subjects despised him. 
 
 We honor the memory of 
 Socrates because he has given 
 us an example of time gi*andeur 
 of mind- 
 
 " Friends," began the orator, 
 "I have a communication to 
 make to you which ^vill sur- 
 piise you alL" 
 
 The workmen struck be- 
 cause the proprietor of the 
 factory refused to gxant them 
 a diminution of their working 
 time. 
 
 I have bought Heine's poems, 
 and hope to read them during 
 vacation. 
 
 98. 
 
 34 ft^rieb meiuent ^ud)^ 
 l^onbler: „^ bitte Sic, mic^ 
 
 I ^Tote to my bookseller: 
 Please let me know how 
 
MATERIAL FOR CONVERSATION. 
 
 43 
 
 ir»{ffcn JU laffcn, iDiCDicl id) mucli I owe 3^ou." He ans- 
 
 g^ncn fdjutbtcj bin/' (Sr ant^ wered tliat I owed him noth- 
 
 tcortcte, id) fci if}m nid)t<3 \d)nU mg. 
 bicj. 
 
 100. 
 
 Sir ^ben unferen SGagcn 
 uerfauft, tvcxi tx au§ ber SD^obe 
 ttjar. 
 
 (gie fragen nad) ber neueti 
 :33io(}rapr)ie CeffingS; fie JDirb 
 balb crfdjeinen. 
 
 "We sold our carriage because 
 it was out of fashion. 
 
 You inquire about the new 
 biogi-aphy of Lessing; it will 
 appear soon. 
 
 101, 
 
 !^ie 51rttlteric ftanb auf eincm 
 
 itgcl, bie 3^nfantcrie na()c bas 
 ci. — ^cr ©iigeL 
 
 ^icle S5cber gebeti if)r §anb^ 
 tner! auf, tDcit fie nidjt genug 
 batttit t)crbiencn. 
 
 ^rofcf[or S:)ictri(^ fdireibt 
 meincm ^atcr, hc^ er etne dnU 
 bedung mit bem SO^ifroffo)? ge^* 
 nadjt Ijat unb ba(b etneu S3or^ 
 trag barilBct fjalten tctrb. — 
 ®a§ 2}'^i!rof!o^. 
 
 ©er S3ogelftelIcr fing nur 
 gclju SSiJgcI, bod) irar er ganj 
 iufrieben, n)eil ^inet 9^a^tigaUen 
 Mtuttter iDareu. — !Die 9^a^^ 
 tigaU. 
 
 ^iu ttalienifd}e^ (S^rid)ttiort 
 fagt: „!Der Mar^ madjt bie 
 iDIumen, unb ber 5l]3rit ^at ben 
 SMm batJiJtt,'' 
 
 S^iemanb tnoHte bie (Statue 
 bcfS :53ilbl)auer§ 2;()i"e(c, \ml tin 
 glecfen haxm roar* 
 
 The artillery stood upon a 
 hill; the infantry, near by. 
 
 Many weavers give up their 
 trade because they do not earn 
 enough by it. 
 
 Professor Dietrich writes to 
 my father that he has made a 
 discovery with the microscope, 
 and will soon deliver a lecture 
 on it. 
 
 The bird-catcher caught ten 
 bii'ds only, but he was quite 
 satisfied because there were 
 two nightingales amongst 
 them. 
 
 An Italian proverb says — 
 March makes the flowers, and 
 April has the glory of it 
 
 Nobody wanted the statue 
 of Thiele, the sciilptor, because 
 there was a stain on ii 
 
44 
 
 MATERIAL FOR CONVERSATION. 
 
 102, see 172, 
 
 103. 
 
 ^k (Bummc allcr (Bchotc i[t: 
 Siclie bcincn TOdiftcn \vk bi^ 
 jclbfl. — 5:)a^ (^cbot. 
 
 ^ie gcinbe griffcn un[cre 
 Xvvippcnnid)t an, lueit fic fclbfl 
 einctt ^Ingrtff Don un^3 ennar- 
 teten. 
 
 1. <SclBflaitt®aIcjcngeftanb 
 bcr 3}Zorbcr feme (Bdjvdh md)t 
 ein. — ^cr ©algen. 
 
 2. 5^icmanb ^at bie junge 
 ^aucrin gc^mungcn in5 .^loftcr 
 3U gcf)cn: fie l)at ben ^djlcier 
 Uott fclljfl gcnommen. 
 
 The sum of all tlie com- 
 inandinents is — Love tliy 
 neighbor as tlivself. 
 
 The enemy did not attack 
 our troops because tliey them- 
 selves exj^ected an attack from 
 our side. 
 
 Even at tlie gallows the 
 mui'derer did not confess his 
 guili 
 
 Nobody com2:)elled the young 
 peasant woman to enter the 
 convent; she took the veil of 
 her own accord. 
 
 104, 
 
 Tldn SSater fet^te geftcrn 
 aBenb fcine 9letfe radjt fort, 
 tt)eil er t)ic( @e(b bet \i^ I)atte. 
 — S}at^ ©elb. 
 
 grau (Stetni^ I) at alle il)re 
 ^inber mit flcj nacf) 2^entfd)^ 
 lanb genommcn. 
 
 My father did not continue 
 his journey last night because 
 hs had a great deal of money 
 with hinL 
 
 Mrs. Steinitz has taken all 
 her children with her to 
 Germany. 
 
 105. 
 
 !^ie SBcl^cnfcIbcr am (^ee 
 finb iittfcr; tk 235iefcn gefjoren 
 unfercm 9kdjbar. — S)a5 gelb. 
 
 !4)te 5lrbeit ij't etne ^ebtnnung 
 unfercg ©ludeS. — S)a^ @(u(f. 
 
 il^cine (SItern n)oI)nen bci 
 i^rcn S5ennanbten in (Suropa. 
 
 3ofe)3^ fagte gu feinen -^rit^ 
 beru: „3cl; bin 3^ofep!), tntx 
 4Sruber." 
 
 The wheat-fields on the lake 
 are ours; the meadows belong 
 to our neighbor. 
 
 Work is a condition of our 
 happiness. 
 
 Mj parents are staying with 
 their relatives in Europe. 
 
 Josej^h said to his brothers: 
 "I am Joseph, your brother." 
 
MATERIAL FOR CONVERSATION. 
 
 45 
 
 1. „SBo ^a}t bu bcittctt 
 SJ^unb gelaffen?" fa^te bcr Se^= 
 rer gum Keinett ^au(, a(§ cr 
 ntd)t rebcn luolltc, 
 
 „So I)abt i|r eurcn Siti?'' 
 fagte gri^ gu feinen ^amcra^^ 
 ben* — ®cr ^antcrab. 
 
 ,,@c^icben <Sic 3S,i^^ ^cife 
 na(^ granfrcidi auf, bi3 bie po^ 
 litifc^cn 9h(^rid)tcn beffcr ft»er^ 
 ben; ba§ ift mein '^at/' fatjte 
 ber ^onfnl gu nxeinm (gltern. 
 
 "Where did you leave your 
 mouth?" said the teacher to 
 Httle Paul, when he refused 
 to speak. 
 
 "Where are your wits?'* 
 said Fred to his comrades. 
 
 "Put off your journey to 
 France until the poHtical news 
 gets better; such is my ad- 
 vice," said the consul to my 
 parents. 
 
 106. 
 
 !^a6 (Stubiergimmcr meine^ 
 S3ater§ ift redjt^ t)om (Empfano,^ 
 gimmer, btt§ mcinigc Itn!^ ba* 
 Don* 
 
 3cf) bin mit ber gran 3Bai^ 
 t)emanbt; ntein Dnfct nnb bcr 
 ijtige toaxcn ^riiber. 
 
 Sir tDiffcn nidjt t)icl t)on ber 
 SD^ufi! ber alten @rted)en; bod) 
 ift fo \)\d geiDifv bag fie bon 
 ber itnfrigctt feljr oerfd)tebcn 
 
 SJleine ©tern merben ba§ 
 §au§ be§ 3Jiaior§ bejieljen, tDeit 
 btt§ t^rtge gu !(ein ift 
 
 1. 36cnopfion fit^rte bie (Sets 
 ttigeit rjoMbe^alten in bie QzU 
 mat guritd 
 
 My father's study is to the 
 right of the parlour; mine, to 
 the left of it 
 
 I am related to Mrs. Waitz; 
 my uncle and hers were 
 brothers. 
 
 We do not know much about 
 the music of the ancient 
 Greeks, but this much is cer- 
 tain that it was very different 
 from ours. 
 
 My parents will move into 
 the major's house because 
 theirs is too small 
 
 Xenophon led his comrades 
 back home in safety. 
 
 110, 
 
 !^ie atten §errcn im Dmnt^ 
 buiS toaren grembe. ^er mit 
 ber Grille irar ber ruffifd^e @e^ 
 fanbte, unb bcr mit bem (^txoly 
 l)Ut fein ©etretdr. — '^tx Dm* 
 nibue. 
 
 The old gentlemen in tha 
 omnibus were foreigners. The 
 one with the glasses was the 
 Russian ambassador, and the 
 one with the straw-hat, his 
 secretary. 
 
46 
 
 MATERIAL FOR CONA'ERSATIOX. 
 
 fr^kv ift meitt rul)igfte^ 
 ^ferb," fagte ber gii^rer ; „mit 
 icm iaufctt (Sie fcinc @cfal)r/' 
 
 T}cv (iltcftc giil)rcr umr ab* 
 hiefcnb, ba^crmuBten luir ben 
 Don Qcftern Ipicbcr engaflicren. 
 
 ^ie befte, abcr tcuerfte »8d)ule 
 ift bic bcr ferfa^runcj. 
 
 (2cf){ncr^ fc^bnfte^ 2ieb ift 
 bog Don bcr ©locfe. 
 
 Sir gefallen alien bcncn, 
 bcrcn ©gentiebe tDir fc^meidjeln, 
 bcfonber^ wcnn w'lv felbft un^ 
 bcfjcn nid^t bcwuBt ftnb. 
 
 " Here is my quietest horse," 
 said the guide; "with him 
 you run no danger." 
 
 The oldest guide was absent, 
 therefore we had to re-engage 
 the one we had yesterday. 
 
 The best, but most expens- 
 ive school is that of experience. 
 
 Schiller's most beautiful 
 song is that of the BelL 
 
 We please all those whose 
 self-love we flatter, especially 
 when we ourselves are not con- 
 scious of it 
 
 112. 
 
 „'^k]t^ (or bte§, or ha^) ift 
 mein (Sdjmucf," fagte (Eomelia 
 gu i^rer greunbin, a(5 i^re 
 (So^ne eintraten. — 'i)tv 
 (Sdjmucf. 
 
 „^o0 fmb nic^t meine £in^ 
 bcr/ fagte bie ^ranfe, ai^ man 
 i^re 3:od)ter an i()r ^ttt brac^te. 
 — X)k 2:od)tcr. 
 
 "These are my jewels," said 
 Cornelia to her friend, whea 
 her sons entered. 
 
 " These are not my children," 
 said the sick woman, when 
 they brought her daughters to 
 her bedside. 
 
 113, 
 
 !Dcr .^oufmann ^Raufd) I) at 
 ein !i'anbl)au^3 gefauft; b at ou§ 
 tan man erfe^en, bag cr nod) 
 nid)t bantrott ift. 
 
 -3d) bin nid)t in bic 3>crfamm^ 
 Inng gcfommen, lucit mid) nic* 
 manb ba&on bcnad)rid)tigt I)at. 
 
 Rauscli, the merchant, has 
 bought a countrs'-house ; from 
 this it may bs inferred that 
 he is not yet a bankrupt 
 
 I did not come to the meet- 
 ing because nobody informed 
 me of it 
 
 114. 
 
 Unfcr bcftcr grennb ift bcrs 
 jcttigc (or bcr), ber un^ bie 
 
 Our best friend is he who 
 tells us the truth, and vet we 
 
MATERIAL FOR CONVERSATION. 
 
 47 
 
 S03at)rl)cit fagt, unb bod) r)affen 
 iDtr leti^t bcnjcniGcn, bcr unfere 
 
 Sir fdjrcibcn Uldjt bcmjcnt^ 
 gctt (or bem), bcr un§ lobt, 
 (^cfd)ma(f unb (Sinfidjt ^u. 
 
 „i)k bcfte grau/' fagte (So^ 
 !ratc§, ,»{ft bicjenicjc (or bie), 
 Don bcr bie Seute am iDenioften 
 rebcn." 
 
 ©ic ^ercbfamfcit be§ ^cri!^ 
 Ie§ lx>ar Don bcrienigcn (or bcr) 
 5lrt, iDcIc^e ntcl)t ilberrebct, fon= 
 bern iiberjeugt 
 
 ©a§ fc^onfte ^on3ert Voav 
 ba§jentgc (or ba^]), \vd6)t§> 
 §err 5^enmann biric^iertc. 
 
 S^ie foftbarften 4)tamanten 
 finb btcjentcjcn (or bte), trcldje 
 avL^ Dftinbien !ommen. — 3^cr 
 !Diamant» 
 
 Sir Der^ei^en gem bcnjeni^ 
 gen, tvcldjt un^ langmeilen, 
 aber ntd)t benen bie iuir hng^ 
 hjeilen* ^ 
 
 are quick to liate liim avIio 
 offends our seK-love. 
 
 We are quick to attribute 
 taste and intelligence to liini 
 wlio praises us. 
 
 " The best woman," Socrates 
 said, "is she of whom peox)le 
 talk least" 
 
 The eloquence of Pericles 
 was of the sort which does not 
 persuade, but convince. 
 
 The finest concert was that 
 which Mr. Neumann con- 
 ducted. 
 
 The most precious diamonds 
 are those which come from the 
 East Indies. 
 
 We gladly pardon those 
 who bore us, but not those 
 whom we bore. 
 
 115, 
 
 !IDer ^erg mit bem fc^arfcn 
 ''Profile, fagt ber p()rer, ift bct= 
 felbc, t>cn \mv geftern Don Dften 
 fatjen. — T)a^ profit. 
 
 X)k (Sangerin, iDcIdje I)cute 
 abenb fingen inirb, ift bic* 
 fctbc, bie iDir in -Lofton geljdrt 
 ^aben. 
 
 !Da0 ^entige ^on5ertpro== 
 gramm ift baSfetbe \vk ba^ 
 geftrige. 
 
 The mountain with the sharp 
 outlines, says the guide, is the 
 same we saw yesterday from 
 the east. 
 
 The singer who is going to 
 sing to-night is the same we 
 heard at Boston. 
 
 The program of to-day's 
 concert is the same as that of 
 yesterday. 
 
48 
 
 MATERL\L FOS CO^r^^ERSATION. 
 
 116, 
 
 (53 ift cine fol^c ^i^t Ijkv 
 m glorenj, bag ba$ %^p\]a{U 
 p]ia]tcv fci)mit<;t 
 
 ©cfterii ging ctit fali^cr 
 ©tunn, bag tjiele (gffcn einfic* 
 len. — ^ie (^ffe. 
 
 1. 'A}a^ (Stimmred}t ^bcn 
 nur fal^c, bic Icfcn !onnen. 
 
 There is so great lieat here 
 at Florence that the asphaltmii 
 paYement is melting. 
 
 There was such a tempest 
 yesterday that many chimneys 
 fell do^vn. 
 
 Only such as know how to 
 read have the right to vote. 
 
 118. 
 
 (Sdnttcr^ Gaudier bcginnt mit 
 hen S5}ortcn : „SBcr luagt e^, 
 Otitter^mann obcr £napp, ^u 
 taudjen in biefen (gc^tunb?" — 
 5)ae 33ort 
 
 ^ie (2d)aufpiclcr bcratcn, 
 tocficn 2tM fie gucrft aufful)* 
 ten folkn. — S)a^ Stiicf. 
 
 Unfcr 3:1) etna ;;um englifdjen 
 5Iu[fat3 lautct: f&tm untcx hen 
 ©riedfcn (jcbii^rt unfcre grogte 
 ^eiDnnberung, itnb n»em un* 
 fere grogte ^^tnncj? — ^aS 
 
 T:k 5IrBeiter berieten geftem, 
 tocn au^ il)rer Mittc fie jum 
 3}^nifter fd)icfen fodten. 
 
 ^99Bo§ l^aben 8ie gu iljrer 
 2>erteibii3nng gu fagen?'' fragte 
 ber 9iid)ter ben 3lngeHagten. 
 
 3. S)a6S:t)emaber^jei§auf= 
 gabe lautet: JBSorin beftel)t ha^ 
 ifeefen be§ (5r!)abenen? 
 
 !SDer 5(rreftant berlangt gu 
 tDiffen, to omit er fcine grcil)eit 
 erlangen fann. 
 
 Schiller's "Diver" begins 
 with the words: "Who vent- 
 ures, Knight or Knave, to dive 
 into this abyss?" 
 
 The actors are dehberatrng 
 whose play to give fii^st. 
 
 The subject of our EngHsh 
 composition is — To whom, 
 amongst the Greeks is our 
 greatest admiration due, and 
 to whom our highest esteem ? 
 
 The workmen dehberated 
 yesterday whom they should 
 send from among them to the 
 minister. 
 
 "What have you to say in 
 your defense ?" asked the judge 
 of the defendani 
 
 The subject of the prize- 
 essa^ds — ^^^lierein consists the 
 essence of the subhme? 
 
 The prisoner wants to know 
 how he can obtain his hberty. 
 
MATERIAL FOR C0N^^3RSATI0N. 
 
 49 
 
 119. 
 
 t,^^td)tn 3Scg t)aben (Sic ge^^ 
 uommen, unb wcldjcS ^Dar 3^1)^ 
 ^efthnmunt3§ort?" frac^te bcr 
 5lbt)o!at ben 3^^9^^* -^ ^^^ 
 Drt ; ber ^^^O^* 
 
 „a[Sc^ ein (gletib!" ricfbcr 
 ^onig au§, a(§ er bie Ubcr= 
 f djtDc'mmung f a^. — SDa^ (Stcnb. 
 
 "Which way did you take, 
 and "what was your destina- 
 tion ?" asked the lawyer of the 
 witness. 
 
 "What a scene of miserj^'" 
 exclaimed the king, when he 
 saw the inundation. 
 
 120, 
 
 ®ie crfte gragc mctnc§ g^a^ 
 minatory tDar: JSESaS flit tin 
 Unterfc^icb ift gtrifdjcit ber jDUt- 
 id)cn unb bortfdien @an(e ? ®ie 
 (e^te Srage tear: 3n lDa§ fur 
 etnem S^ia(e!te \>\d}tctt §omer? 
 
 — T)cv Unterfrf)ieb; bcr !4Diale!t 
 
 1. ^ii) I)abe hen ©drtner ge^ 
 fragt, maS flit ^lumcn nnb 
 \m^ fiir Dbft cr ^eute fct( Ijat 
 
 — T)a6 Dbft. 
 
 2. .^crr ^itti^'^i' ^f^ leibcnb, 
 unb !cin 5lrjt tann angebcn, 
 teidS er fnt einc ^ran!()ctt I)at. 
 
 The first question of my 
 examiner was — What differ- 
 ence is there between the Ion- 
 ic and the Doric column? 
 The last question was — In 
 what dialect did Homer write 
 his poems ? 
 
 I have asked the gardener 
 what flowers and wliat fruit 
 he has for sale to-da}^ 
 
 Mr. Zinner is sick, and no 
 physician can tsll what disease 
 lie has. 
 
 123—124. 
 
 ^ccf^oDcn ift ein ^omponift, 
 xt)dd}tx (or ber) feincS ®(ctcf)cn 
 auf bcr Selt nidjt I) at. 
 
 ^l)ibia§ Wax etn ^itnftler, 
 bcffctt @d)opfungen nod) Ijcute 
 unerreid)te IDZuftcr finb. — ^te 
 @c^opfung; ha^ 9)?ufter. 
 
 4)a^ gotbene 3^^^^^^^^ ^'^^ 
 bagjentge.in lDe(d)em (or bem) 
 H^ @o(b nid)t ^crrfd)te. 
 
 Beethoven is a composer 
 who has not his equal in the 
 world. 
 
 Phidias was an artist whose 
 creations are to this day un- 
 equaled models. 
 
 The golden age was that in 
 which gold was not supreme. 
 
50 
 
 MATEEIAL FOR CON^^ERSATIOX. 
 
 ^a-0 ^antljeon in 9?0Tn mac^t, 
 tt)ie alle 9Jei|'cnben ncrftc^em, 
 etnctt ©nbrucf, lucldjcn (or 
 ben) mannie bcrgij^t. 
 
 ?nt(}er ftammte au^3 eincr Jva* 
 milic, Wcldjt (or bic) t)on bcr 
 Slrbctt il)rcr ^^dnbe Icbte. 
 ^ T)a^$ ntenfd)Iid)e Scbcn ift nur 
 eine lauc^e (Ir^ie^nnc^, bcr en 
 3ie( bie iBcrDoUfomninnng ift. 
 — ^a^3 3ieL 
 
 !^cr 5(r5t I)at mir eine Hrjnci 
 tierfc^ricbcn, uon ^Dcld)cr (or 
 bcr) id) jtiinblic^ einen St()ce* 
 Idffcl Doll einne^men foC. — 
 
 ;i:ie (Spartaner tbteten alle 
 ^inber, ipeldje (or bie) Der* 
 friippett ^ur Selt famen. 
 
 The pantheon in Rome, as 
 all travelers assert, makes an 
 impression which is never f or- 
 gotten- 
 
 Luther descended from a 
 famil}' which hved by the labor 
 of their hands. 
 
 Human life is but a long 
 education, the object of whicli 
 is improvement 
 
 The physician prescribed 
 for me a medicine of which I 
 have to take a tea-spoonful 
 every hour. 
 
 The Spartans killed all in- 
 fants winch were bom crip- 
 pled. 
 
 Additional Examples to § 123 — § 124 
 
 9JHttn)od) I)ciSt bcr Xac^, bet 
 (or lueldjet) bie 3}|itte ber'^odje 
 bilbet. 
 
 giir biele 3J?enfd)ett ift bie 
 3Migion nic^t^S ai^ ein ^annt, 
 untci* bem (or ir>eld)cm) fie waiy 
 rcnb hc^ 9?egen^ (Sdjufe fuc^en, 
 unb ben jie ucrlaffcn, fobdb bcr 
 9?e(^cn auf^ort. — i)er ^d)U^. 
 
 X)it §offnung ift eine grenn:^ 
 bin, wddjt un^ im Ungliicf 
 ndl)cr ift CiU$ im (3tM, unb bie 
 un>5 unfere -^itrbe tragen ^ilft, 
 luenn fie ant fd)mcrftcn ift. 
 
 SMe egi)pti[c^cn S)cnhndler 
 fmb bie diteftcn.mit benen n»ir 
 bctannt finb. — ^a5 ^cnfmaL 
 
 '^cv Oft)mp ift ein -^erg, 
 beffcn (S)ipfet faft nie fidjtbar 
 ift. — X)er @ipfe(. 
 
 The day in the middle of 
 the week is called Wednesday. 
 
 For many i>eople reUgion is 
 nothing but a tree under which 
 they seek shelter dming the 
 rain, and which they leave as 
 soon as the rain ceases. 
 
 Hope is a friend which is 
 nearer to us in misfortune than 
 in happiness, and which helps 
 us to cany oui* burden when 
 it is heaviest 
 
 The Eg^-ptian moJfuments 
 are the oldest with which we 
 ai'e acquainted. 
 
 Olvmpus is a mountain the 
 summit of which is hardly 
 ever visible. 
 
MATERIAL FOR CONVERSATION. 
 
 51 
 
 125. 
 
 29Scr nicijt'3 tt)agt, (jeiDinnt 
 
 3Bir Dergcffen Iei(J)t, tnaS ir»ir 
 anbcrn t»crban!en. 
 
 NotHng venture, notliiiig 
 win. 
 
 We easily forget wliat we 
 owe to others. 
 
 126. 
 
 ^rofeffor (SMmtI)cr Heft f)eute 
 itber bie ri)mifcl)en 9^uincn, bte 
 er geftem mtt jcmcu (s^tubcntcn 
 befuc^t I)at* 
 
 Professor Giintlier lectures 
 to-day on the lioman ruins 
 he visited yesterday with his 
 students. 
 
 127. 
 
 ^IborpI) etatjr ^t ctn md) 
 qefdjvieben, to or in er hen .^aifer 
 feiberiu^ geijeu feme ^iogra^ 
 p\)m Derteibigt — ^Der -53to^ 
 grapl). 
 
 !Die @d)u(b ber SJ^aria Stuart 
 ift ein "$unft, motiibcr bie @e^ 
 fc^trf)t5fd)reiber nic^t einii] finb. 
 
 (Sin (Snglanbcr ^at ein -3tt^ 
 ftruntent erfnnben, loomit man 
 bie SiJieereStiefe of)ne @en!blei 
 meffeu tann* — ®a^ iBIet. 
 
 Adolph Stahr has written a 
 book in which he defends the 
 emperor Tiberius against his 
 biographers. 
 
 The guilt of Mary Stuart is 
 a 2^oiiit on which historians 
 do not agree. 
 
 An Enghshman has invented 
 an instrument with which one 
 can measure the depth cf the 
 sea without the sounding lead. 
 
 128. 
 
 Unfer ©cfanbter fd}reibt au^ 
 Berlin, baji moti einen allgc* 
 meinen enropaifd)en ^rieg be== 
 fiird)te. 
 
 3d) lefe in ber ^citnng, ba^ 
 man eine Dortrefflii^e @tatne in 
 ^ompeji gefunben \}at 
 
 1. dJldn I) at fetten grennbc, 
 menn fie ciiicm am niitigften 
 finb. 
 
 Our ambassador writes from 
 Berhn that people apprehend 
 a general European war. 
 
 I read in the paper that an 
 excellent statue has been found 
 at Pompeii. 
 
 We rarely have friends 
 when we need them most. 
 
52 
 
 materi.Uj for conversation. 
 
 2. ^ie 3^ugcnb ift ein gliid* 
 ltd)e^5 5Uter; irenn vaan juni] ift, 
 I)at man cbcn jo t>icle ^offttun* 
 fjcn aU ^uufdje. — ^er 
 S^unfd). 
 
 3. aj^itt fdngt an fic^ gn be^ 
 teid)ern, wenn man fcinc (Edjul* 
 bcu be3al)(t 
 
 Youth is aliajjpy age; wlien 
 one is joung, he has as many 
 hopes as wishes. 
 
 "W'e begin to enrich our 
 selves when we pay our debts. 
 
 129—133, 
 
 3tt -9I)rcr 5lbn)c?cnl)cit i-'t 
 Scmanb au6 ber (Stabt l)ier ge* 
 njefen. 
 
 „Si|"fen Sie iemanb(cn), ber 
 guten itlat)ieruntemd)t giebt?" 
 fragte mid) bie ©rafin. 
 
 Qi) l)abe niemanb(cn) auf 
 bem <Sce gefel)cn. 
 
 <Die ^icbe ergriffen bie j^lndjt, 
 abcr tcincr enttam. — 'J^er Dieb. 
 
 ©ncr t»on ben 3iDit(ingen 
 ^ot)me I}at bie ^djcune in 
 ^rant) Qcftccft, abcr feinci (Don 
 bciben) cieftcl)t c5 ein. — ^er 
 ^icillinG; ^^^ ^ranb. 
 
 Somebody from the city 
 was here in youi* absence. 
 
 "Do you know any one who 
 gives good piano instnietion?" 
 the countess asked of me. 
 
 I have not seen anybody on 
 the lake. 
 
 The thieves took to flight, 
 but not one escaped. 
 
 One or the other of the 
 Boehme twins has set fire to 
 the bam, but neither one ad- 
 mits it 
 
 134—135. 
 
 '^lad) '^^rofeffor gedinere dJlcU 
 nung ift jcbc§ (oreinjebe^) ©c- 
 mdlbe ber ncuen vSammtnng 
 ein 93?eiftcrftiicf. — S)a^5 ^titcf . 
 
 ^ebcr (or ein jeber), ber bie 
 Selt fennt, ift me^r ober tneni* 
 gcr miBtranifdi. 
 
 ^ie .^onigin ift fo betiebt, 
 n»ci( fie fiir jcbcrmann ein 
 frennblid^e^ ^ort ^at. 
 
 "^k ^tebe be^ tan^Ierd f)at 
 nid)t JebermannS -^eifall. — 
 '^cv ^eifall. 
 
 In the oi:)inlon of Professor 
 Fechner, every jiicture of the 
 new collection is a mast€r- 
 piece. 
 
 Every one who knows the 
 world is more or less suspi- 
 cious. 
 
 The queen is so popular be- 
 cause she has a kind word for 
 everybody. 
 
 The speech of the chancellor 
 does not meet with approbar 
 tion from everyone. 
 
MATERIAL FOR CONVERSATION. 
 
 53 
 
 136, 
 
 !Der Settler blttet nt(f)t urn 
 ®elb, fonbern urn cttuag ^rob. 
 — !Dag@elb;ba^-^rob. 
 
 5Bir (efen taglid) irgcnb tU 
 tt)a0 au^ ber Sfiaturgefoitdite* 
 
 The beggar does not ask for 
 money, but for some bread. 
 
 "We read something or other 
 on the subject of natural 
 history every day. 
 
 137—138, 
 
 ^OTtc^ t)erbrannte feine eige* 
 nen @d)iffe, urn ben (Seinen 
 feme anbere §offnung al^ bie 
 be^ (Sieged 3U Ia[fen. — ^er 
 @ieg. 
 
 ©nor bon hm ?Ingc!Iagten 
 ift eiti "Deutfc^er, ein anbercr ift 
 tin ©djiuebe, bie iibrigeu finb 
 ^uffen. 
 
 ^cr ^uc^pnblcr I)at mir 
 n\d)t ba^ red)te iBuc^ ge|d)icft; 
 id) l]atte ein anbercS bejtellt. 
 
 ®ie ^et)t)Iferung bcr 33er^ 
 cinigten (gtaaten iDdc^ft rafc^cr 
 al^ bie irgenb eine^ anbercn 
 ganbe^. 
 
 !Die 9J^enfd)cn gerfaden in 
 ^n)ci ^(affen; bie eine {)errf(^t, 
 bie anbere bient. — !l)ic Piaffe. 
 
 Sir !)aben unfre ©dfte iibcr^ 
 rebetnat^ cincn Stag ^n bieiben. 
 
 X)tv rnffifd}e unb preuBifc^e 
 ^onfnl ^ben cinaniicr offent* 
 lid) befd)tmpft. 
 
 Cortez burned his own ships, 
 in order to leave to his com- 
 panions no other hope than 
 that of victory. 
 
 One of the defendants is a 
 German, another is a Swede, 
 the rest are Russians. 
 
 The bookseller has not sent 
 me the right book; I had 
 ordered a different one. 
 
 The population of the United 
 States is growing more rapid- 
 ly than that of any other 
 countr}\ 
 
 Men are divided into two 
 classes; the one rules, the 
 other serves. 
 
 We have persuaded our 
 guests to stay another day. 
 
 The Russian and Prussian 
 consuls have publicly insulted 
 each other. 
 
 139—142. 
 
 Unfere (Sotbaten ^ben atleS 
 3Sertranen auf il)re ©enercile 
 oerloren. 
 
 Our soldiers have lost all 
 confidence in their generals. 
 
54 
 
 MATERIAL FOR CONVERSATION. 
 
 (5§ {ft mciftcn6 etn "A^'mq ber 
 UnmogItrt)fett fiir einen (Staat^^ 
 mann, e^ aiitn rec^t gu macl)ett. 
 
 Wan {)at cine gan^c ©ruppc 
 Heiner "iplanetett gunfdjen Tlax^ 
 unb Jupiter entbccft 
 
 '^k ©emalt bc^ Stunned trar 
 fo grog, bap gan^c §au[er au^ 
 ben (gtragen Derfdjmanbeit 
 
 (2^ ift etn ^pom, baB ba^3 
 ©an^^c gropcr o(^ bcr ^eU ift. 
 — S}a§ 3lpom. 
 
 ^rofcffor (gc^Idger l^aft ba* 
 fitr, ha^ berSpiriti^mu^ lauUx 
 ^etrug ift — X:ct ^etrug, 
 
 5^cr 3Sa]^nfinn be5 ^rutu5 
 tDar I outer 33crfte(Iung. — Xic 
 ^crftcUung» 
 
 It is in most cases an im- 
 possibility for a statesman to 
 please everybody. 
 
 They have discovered a 
 •whole group of small planets 
 between ^lars and Jupiter. 
 
 The force of the tempest 
 "was so gi'eat that entii-e houses 
 disappeared from the streets. 
 
 It is an axiom that the 
 whole is gi-eater than its part 
 
 Professor Schlager believes 
 that spiritualism is all a fraud- 
 
 The insanity of Brutus was 
 all a pretense. 
 
 143—146. 
 
 'a^cv \cigtc cgt)ptifrf)C £rieg 
 bauerte nur etnigc 3!?od)cn. 
 
 T)k £riti!cr finb nid)t etnig 
 in it)rem Urteil iiber t>a^ neuc 
 Srauerfpiel; einigc lobcn e^, 
 anbere tabeln e^. — ^a^ Ur^ 
 teiL ' 
 
 ^cr aJhtfifbireftor hot un^ 
 ^illetc an; xviv banftcn il)m 
 aber, tt>ci( luir jd)on rotid)t ge* 
 !auft l^attcn. 
 
 (t^ ift fein Staffer tnelir in 
 unfcrcm ^rnnnen, tt>ir ^aben 
 aber tioc^ ipelcf)e§ in ber difterne. 
 — ^a^ 2i?af|cr; ber iBrunnen. 
 
 dllit tin paax ©olbftitden 
 !ann man biele Slrme gliidlid) 
 marf)en. — X)o§ ^tM, 
 
 Sir hjerben in tin paax Xa^ 
 gen abrei]cn. 
 
 The last Egyptian war lasted 
 but a few weeks. 
 
 The critics do not agree iA 
 their judgment of the new 
 tragedy; some praise it, others 
 find fault with it 
 
 The musical director offered 
 us tickets, but we declined 
 with thanks because we had 
 already bought some. 
 
 There is no more water in 
 our well, but we have some 
 left in our cistern. 
 
 "With a few pieces of gold 
 mu; one can make many poor 
 
 people happy. 
 Xa- We shall leave in a few days. 
 
MATERIAL FOR CON^^ERSATION. 
 
 55 
 
 3m le^ten gelbjuge fjaben 
 unfere (Solbaten matt^c ^adjt 
 im (Sc^nee Qefdjlafen. — :Dcr 
 ^VLc\; ha (Bd)ncc, 
 
 (Sia ita(teni|cl)e$ (Spric^tnort 
 
 au-3 unb !ommt gefc^oren nac^ 
 ©au[e." — X)te SBolIe. 
 
 U7- 
 
 !Die 58egetattoti ift ^ier mcgcn 
 ber tJielen Mten 9^arf)te no^ 
 fel)r ^uritcf, 
 
 T)ct (Sturm ^at mlt §au[er 
 befc^fibtgt. 
 
 X)cv Sf)rgct3 ift erne ^(ippc, 
 an bcr fc^on Dieic gefd}cttert 
 finb. — S:)cr @cta. 
 
 §:rr ©ofer ift mit feiner 
 (Stelle un^ufrieben, mcil er diet 
 Slfbcit unb njcnig @ei)a(t ^at. 
 — 3:)a5 ®cl)a(t. 
 
 ^ie ^eftt^utic^ $errn 9^ofen6 
 iftfe^rfd)on,abermitcitt tncntg 
 Siefenlaub tucire fie fct)duei\ 
 
 @oetl)e^ Ic^te SKorte maren: 
 „2id)t, mcijt ^l6)tV' 
 
 grau ..?L)ioUcr ift fo fc^mad), 
 ha^ hit ^ix^k km goffnung 
 mc jt fiir fie ^ben. 
 
 §enr '^otjn ijat fein @efd)aft 
 fo bebeutenb emeitert, baf^ er 
 no^ ^\vd ^orrefponbenten 
 brauc^t. — ^a§ (^efdjcift. 
 
 liDie S^scr t)aben brei §ofett 
 unb tne^rcrc Sadjteln gefc^of* 
 fen. — !Die Sac^teL 
 
 Unfere @rnteau^fid)ten finb 
 \d)kd)t, tt)ei( inir nidjt (^tnn^ 
 9?cgen (or Olegen nemtg) gcf}abt 
 l^aben. — S)ie Slu^fidjt. 
 
 In the last campaign, our 
 soldiers slept in the snow many 
 a night 
 
 An Itahan proverb says — 
 Many a one goes out for wool, 
 and comes home shorn. 
 
 -150. 
 
 Vegetation here is still far 
 behind on account of the many 
 cold nights. 
 
 The storm has injured many 
 houses. 
 
 Ambition is a rock on which 
 many have foundered already. 
 
 Mr. Hofer is dissatisfied 
 with his jDOsition because he 
 has much work and a small 
 salary. 
 
 Mr. Rosen's place is fine, 
 but with a little meadow-land 
 it would be finer. 
 
 Goethe's last words were: 
 *' Light, more light!" 
 
 IVfi-s. Moller is so weak that 
 the physicians have no longer 
 any hope for her. 
 
 Mr. Rohn has extended 
 his business so considerably 
 that he needs two more cor- 
 respondents. 
 
 The hunters have shot three 
 hares and several quails. 
 
 Our prospects for the har^ 
 vest are bad because we have 
 not had enough rain. 
 
56 
 
 MATERIAL FOR CONVERSATION. 
 
 ^in gcmiffcr §err @cini^ ift 
 ^oftmeifter gcujorben. 
 
 One ]VIi\ Geinitz lias become 
 postmaster. 
 
 151 
 
 !Der ^c^rer ga^rte: ,,ctn8, 
 jttici, brci !" unb alle ^naben 
 tlogen lr»ie ^feile gum Settlauf 
 baDon. — i)er "^fei(. 
 
 3ti bcr gemdBigteti 3otte 
 c^icbt c^ bier ^^iire^jCitcn : 
 griU)lmi3, (Sommciv @erbft uub 
 feintcr. — S^ie 3cit. 
 
 33?ir l^abeu funf ginger an 
 jeber §anb. — ©er ginger. 
 
 ^ie iBod)e I)at fcj^§ SSer!* 
 tage. 
 
 ^a§ alte ^om lag auf fieicn 
 §iigeln. 
 
 Unferc (5ifcnbal)nwagen l^a- 
 ben ttr^t 9?aber. — T)a^ '>Ra'b. 
 
 T)k Qal)[ hcviSbxicn ift ntnn, 
 — ©ie mu]c, 
 
 !Die c^riftlic^e 9?eUgion for* 
 bert bie iXbung ber jc^n @c^ 
 bote. 
 
 !l)er ©otte^bienft bcginnt nm 
 elf. — ^er ^ienft. 
 
 T)a^Sat)rl)at5tti5lf9Jionate: 
 S^anuar, gebruar, ^J^dr^, ?lpri(, 
 9J^ai, ^nm, Ouli^ 5luguft, 3cp^ 
 tember, Oftober, DZooember, 
 ^December. 
 
 T)cr rote Omnibus fagt brcU 
 gciftrt "ipcrionen. — ©ie ^erfon. 
 
 ^iJiobe i)atte btcr^r^n ^^inber. 
 
 'I^ie ^ogtinge bcr 'JJ^a(crfd)u(e 
 finb funfje^n bi^ fei^jc^n 
 3at)rc alt; nur mcnige finb 
 pcbjc^n bis oi^t^c^n, fciner 
 t)on itjnen ift ttcunjc^n. — 
 5)er 3ogling. 
 
 The teacher counted: "one, 
 two, three!" and all the boys 
 darted off for a race li^e 
 aiTows. 
 
 In the temperate zone, there 
 are foui' seasons: spiing, sum- 
 mer, autumn, and Tvinter. 
 
 We have five fingers on each 
 hand. 
 
 The week has six working 
 daya 
 
 Ancient Rome was situated 
 on seven hills. 
 
 Our raihoad cars have eight 
 wheels. 
 
 The number of the Muses is 
 nine. 
 
 The Christian Eehgion re- 
 quires the practice of the ten 
 commandments. 
 
 Divine sei'vice begins at 
 eleven. 
 
 The year has twelve months : 
 Januaiy, February, March, 
 Api-il, May, June, July, August, 
 September, October, Novem- 
 ber, December. 
 
 The red omnibus holds 
 thu'teen }>ei'sons. 
 
 Nioba hadf oui-teen children. 
 
 The pupils of the school of 
 painting ai'e from fifteen to 
 sixteen years old; only a few 
 are from seventeen to eighteen, 
 none of them is nineteen. 
 
MATERIAL FOR CONVERSATION. 
 
 57 
 
 Wt Jtoatt^ig 3al)ren ift je* 
 bermartn in :l)eutf^(anb mtlttftr* 
 
 !Der gebruar I)at at^tunbs 
 jluanjig Xac^c, in (Scf)aUjal)rcn 
 ncununb;^tDan^,ig. 
 
 ^er^lpril \)at t>tci§ig Xa^c, 
 bcr iDM cinunbbrctfjig. 
 
 'Ajk frangofifdje 5Ifabcmie lie* 
 ftel)t au'3 tJtctjig lWitgltebern» 
 — ©a§ mth. 
 
 ^cr ^onig ^riantog I)atte 
 fttnf5i3 (Sof)ne. 
 
 X)te Gtunbe ()at fc^jig aJii:^ 
 nutcn. — ^ie SO^inute. 
 
 Unfcr iBitrgermeii'tcr ift fleBs 
 
 (v§ c^iebt in 'Deutfcbjanb eine 
 groile ^njatjt tion ^erfonen, bie 
 oc^t^ig bi§ neunjig -3al)re alt 
 ftnb. 
 
 ^rei^uttbctt (Spartaner fie* 
 len bet X()ermopi)(ae. 
 ^©a§3(^^)^ ^}^^ btciTjunbcrts 
 funfimbfcd^;^ig 3;:age» 
 
 (5ine aJinriabe ift jc^ntous 
 fcnb. 
 
 ^Berlin I)at iiber eine 9Wittiott 
 (iintt)ot)ner; bonbon l}at bcinat)e 
 Dtcr TOlUoncn. 
 
 1. ^ertl)oIb (Srf)marj Ijat im 
 3a^re cintaufcnbbtei^uns 
 bcrtttt^tjtg ba§ (Sdjiegputt^er 
 erfnnben. 
 
 (5oIumbn§ entbedte ^Imertfa 
 im Qa\)xc bict^c^n^unbctts 
 jtnciutibncun^ig. 
 
 2. (Sine a)ki1 l)at ^nnbctt 
 ^fennic^. 
 
 2!ttuf cnb 'Sc^ritte madden cine 
 romifc^e IDJeile. — X)er ^djxitt 
 
 Every one in Germany is 
 subject at twenty years of age 
 to military duty. 
 
 February has twenty-eight 
 days; in leap-year, twenty- 
 nine. 
 
 April has thirty days; May, 
 thii-ty-one. 
 
 The French Academy con- 
 sists of forty members. 
 
 King Priam had fifty sons. 
 
 An hour lias sixty minutes. 
 
 Our mayor is seventy years 
 old. 
 
 There are in Germany a 
 large number of persons from 
 eighty to ninety years old. 
 
 Three hundred Spartans 
 fell at Thermopylae. 
 
 A year has three hundred 
 and sixty-five days. 
 
 A myriad is ten thousand. 
 
 Berhn has over one million 
 inhabitants; London has al- 
 most four millions. 
 
 Berthold Schwarz invented 
 gunpowder in the year 1380. 
 
 Columbus discovered Amer- 
 ica in 1492. 
 
 A mark has one hundred 
 pfennigs. 
 
 A thousand paces make a 
 Roman mile. 
 
58 
 
 MATERIAL rOR CONVERSATION. 
 
 152—153. 
 
 ^cr ^onlc^ "^at ttur cmcn 
 Don ben ^^crbrcd)ern bcgnabigt. 
 
 ^cr ^ud)()anbler l)at mir brct 
 ^ud}cr ^ngefdjidt, obc^teid) id) 
 nur bicfc^ cine bcftcllt i)abe. 
 
 9J^it tin unb 5iuan3ig Qal]^ 
 ren ift nun niitnbic;. 
 
 302em Hcincr ^mber lemt 
 jetjt ba$ ^inmalcing. 
 
 5Bir Waxtn ade gefnnb an 
 ^orb mit 5[n^5na^me gracicr 
 obcr brcicr ^:noncn. 
 
 13>av3 «i:b bc5 iWaIer§ @d)ctb^ 
 Icr ftcdt bie (^cbnrt bcr brci 
 ©ration Dor. — ^ie ©rajte. 
 
 ^eibc ^arteien bcanfprni^ten 
 in ber Icl^tcn (Bd)iad)t ben <Sieg. 
 — '5Me i^artct. 
 
 S^er vSto(5 ber (Eomelia toa^ 
 ren i^re bciben @of)ne. 
 
 5}er Coffer nnb bie9?eifetafd)e 
 nnfere^ (^V.aftc^ finb angetom^ 
 men; ber S^iener l)at betbc§ auf 
 feine (^tube gctragen. 
 
 Tlie king lias pardoned but 
 one of the criminala 
 
 Tlie bookseller lias sent me 
 three books, although I order- 
 ed only this one. 
 
 At twenty one, one is of age. 
 
 My little brother is now 
 leaiTiing the multii^Hcation 
 table. 
 
 We -were all well on boai'd 
 with the exception of two or 
 three persons. 
 
 The picture of Scheidler, 
 the artist, represents the birth 
 of the three Graces. 
 
 Both sides claimed the vic- 
 tory in the last battle. 
 
 The pride of Cornelia was 
 her two sons. 
 
 The trunk and satchel of 
 our guest have arrived; the 
 sers^ant has caiTied both to his 
 room. 
 
 158 — 159, 
 
 SJ^eiftcr S)ck Don ^itrnbercj 
 mad)te bie ctjic 2:a)(^ennf)r. 
 
 !Da^ ^iDeitc, Diertc nnb fcd)jtc 
 Snd) ber 5(eneibe finb bie fc^iin* 
 ften be^ ganjen @ebid)t-5. 
 
 Qd) tcfe ben brittcn 2:ei( Don 
 ;^d)iaer^3 Sallenftein. 
 ^cr 'pap ft ©regor ber ^k^ 
 
 Master Hele of Niimberg 
 made the fii'st watch. 
 
 The second, fourth, and 
 sixth books of the Eneid are 
 the most beautiful of the whole 
 poem. 
 
 I am reading the third part 
 of Schiller's WaUenstein. 
 
 Pope Gregory YIl excom- 
 
MATERIAL FOR CONVERSATION. 
 
 59 
 
 bente ()at ben tatfei\getnrid) hen 
 ^iertctt in ben -53ann getl)an. 
 
 ^'m arfjtcn 3^^)^'i)^tibert be* 
 bro()ten bie 5(raber granfreid), 
 
 T)k ^ren^^^itge begannen tm 
 etftctt -3^^^'^}^^^c^^- — ®^i* 
 
 3Sir leben im neun3e^ntcti 
 3at)rt)unbert 
 
 S^er gorfter @tb()r i}at feinen 
 ^nnbertftcit ©cburt^tag ge^ 
 feiert, feiii 'ool)n hm Dierunb^ 
 ficbsigftcn. 
 
 municated the emperor Hen- 
 
 ly IV. 
 
 In the eightli century, the 
 Arabs threatened France. 
 
 The crusades began in the 
 eleventh century. 
 
 We hve in the nineteenth 
 century. 
 
 Stohr, the forester, has celeb- 
 rated his hundredth birthday; 
 his son, his seventy-fourth. 
 
 160, 
 
 1. ®oet()c befud)te ^talien 
 3tt)eimoI. 
 
 ®er getnb mad)te einen brei^ 
 maligctt togriff auf unfere 
 iSd)an3en. — ^le (Bd)an]c, 
 
 2. fcer Slrreftant !)at einen 
 t)icrfa(5crt ©iebftal)! begangen. 
 
 ^rft nad) t)ic(fad)Ctt S(ben- 
 tenern errei(^te £)bt)|feu§ feine 
 §eimat — 4)a§ Slbentener. 
 
 ®er S^^unnel !ann in ^ttiei 
 S'a^ren nnmoglii^^ ferttg fetn; 
 bie boppelte ^t-'it ift h^M erfor- 
 ber(id). 
 
 3. Unfcr ©iirtner t}at hvcU 
 crlcl 33eil(^en, blane, tDei^e unb 
 gelbe. 
 
 3Der M\cv 9^ero beflecJte fci* 
 nen 9^anten bnrd) alter lei 
 @d)anbt{)aten, — !Dte '^^^at 
 
 Goethe visited Italy twice. 
 
 The enemy made a thrice 
 repeated attack upon our re- 
 doubts. 
 
 The prisoner has committed 
 a fourfold theft. 
 
 Not until after many ad- 
 ventures did Ulysses reach his 
 home. 
 
 The tunnel cannot possibly 
 be finished in two years; twice 
 that time is necessary for it. 
 
 Our gardener has three 
 kinds of violets; blue, white, 
 and yellow. 
 
 The emperor Nero dis- 
 graced his name by all sorta 
 of infamies. 
 
 ^ie Wdh&jcn gtngen je ^iDei 
 unb 3tt)ei in ber $ro;^effion, bie 
 ^naben jc \3ier unb t)ier. 
 
 16L 
 
 The guls walked two by 
 two in the procession ^ the 
 boys, four by four. 
 
60 
 
 MATERLUL. FOR CONVERSATION. 
 
 3e bcr f iinfte SD^ann bc^ sct)n^ 
 ten 9?enimente^5 fie( beim ^^n^ 
 griff auf bie erfte (Sd)an3C. — 
 X)a^ D^egiment. 
 
 Every fifth man of the 
 tenth regiment fell in the at- 
 tack on the first redoubt. 
 
 162. 
 
 ■ 1. T)ariu§ bot bem 5llepn* 
 ber bie §d(fte feine^ 9f?eic^e§ 
 
 QTt. 
 
 ©n 5lc^te( t)on jtDattjig i[t 
 jtpci imb ctn l^olb. 
 
 I)ie -Siiger frf)offen ein \)aU 
 bc§ ^u^enb ijafen. 
 
 iibcr giuci ^rittcl bcr (Srb* 
 oberflddje fiub mit Saffer be^ 
 berft. 
 
 (Sin 5Biertcl ober ein giinftcl 
 unferer ^eudlferung finb 3r* 
 lanber, 
 
 2. ^ein 35atcr l)at ba^s §au^ 
 bc^3 Oberften nic^t gcfauft, benn 
 erftenS ift e^ nid)t gro^ genug, 
 unb gtneitcnS gefallt i()m bie 
 i^agc nid}U 
 
 Darius offered Alexander 
 one-half of his kingdom. 
 
 One-eighth of twenty is two 
 and a half. 
 
 The hunters shot half a 
 dozen hai'es. 
 
 Over two-thii'ds of the 
 earth's suii ace is covered with 
 water. 
 
 One-fourth or one-fifth of 
 our population is Irish. 
 
 My father has not bought 
 the colonels house, for in the 
 first place, it is not lai-ge 
 enough, and in the second 
 place, the situation does not 
 please him. 
 
 163. 
 
 ^d) \mv brct nnb ctn ^atbe§ 
 3al)r iu 'Dcutfcfilanb, mein 
 Srnber nnr britt^aCb 3-"i^^^- 
 
 SBir gingen Uicrt^atb dJlcU 
 Icn ;^u guB. bie iibrigcn anberts 
 f^M 3)M(en fuhren'wir, — !©ie 
 iU^eile. 
 
 I was in Germany for three 
 years and a half; my brother, 
 only two years and a half. 
 
 We went three miles and a 
 half on foot; the remaining 
 one mile anJl a half w^e drove. 
 
 ^'ie 3ogtingc bc3 ?t)ceunt6 
 frix^ftiicfen um jlcbcit lUr unb 
 effen um ein Ugt su 3Jlittag. 
 
 164. 
 
 The pupils of the lyceum 
 breakfast at seven o'clock, and 
 dine at one. 
 
MATERIAL FOR CONVERSATION. 
 
 Gl 
 
 (5^ toav gcrabe urn elf, aU 
 wiv ben erften geuerldrm l^or^ 
 ttn; ttm cin0 [tanb ba^ Zljcakv 
 in ^(ammen, — !Dte glamme, 
 
 3rf) ^atte bcm ^edncr einge^ 
 f(i)drft, mid) (urn) ciit 85icrtcl 
 ouf fed)§ gu iDcden; \tatt beffen 
 tDedfte er tnic^ (nm) irci Skiers 
 tcl auf fec^§, unb fiinf 9Kintt? 
 ten itttt^ fieben mugte ict) am 
 ^a{)nl)of fcin. 
 
 ^^ luar jc^n SWinittcn titit 
 SJ^Itternadit, at§ uni* ben erften 
 (5rbfto6H)af)mat)mcn. ttm ^alh 
 tin U|r be^ 9JJor(jen§ ftitrgte 
 bte ^tr^e ein. — S3te aJlinute; 
 ber ^Jiorgen. 
 
 ^er Ic^te S^^G^ ^^^ ^^^ ^^t^* 
 tigfte t)on alien, tt)et( er genan 
 angebcn fonnte, am (or ben) 
 itii'elJtelten er hen ^Ingeflagten 
 gefel)en Ijatte, 
 
 It was just eleven when we 
 heard the first alarm of fire; 
 at one, the theatre was in 
 flames. 
 
 I had enjoined the waiter to 
 ' call me at a quarter past five ; 
 instead of that he caUed me 
 at a quarter to six, and I had 
 to be at the station at five 
 minutes past seven. 
 
 It was ten minutes before 
 midnight, when we noticed 
 the first shock. At half-past 
 twelve in the morning the 
 church fell in. 
 
 The last witness was the 
 most important of aU because 
 he could teU exactly on what 
 day of the month he had seen 
 tli3 defendant. 
 
 ^fla^oHeon ber ^rfte ftarb ben 
 (or am) fiinften ^al 1821. 
 
 S)ie (gct)tad)t bet ^ena fanb 
 ben bicrje^ntcnOtober 1806 
 
 ftatt 
 
 165. 
 
 Napoleon the First died on 
 the fifth of May, 1821. 
 
 The battle of Jena took 
 place on the fourteenth of 
 October, 1806. 
 
 166. 
 
 •-3:^ !ann um 3el)n Ut)r nldjt 
 in ber ^tbliot^ef fetn, ba id) gu 
 biefer (Stnnbe auf ber ^oft tn 
 mttrtet metbe. 
 
 :Dae ©c^log im Salbe luttb 
 t)on einer italienifc^en ©rdfin 
 htto^nU 
 
 Sir tnitfjen ^a^c \tti)cn, 
 bis n)ir abgclojl toetben. 
 
 I cannot bo at the library 
 at ten, as I am expected at the 
 post-office at that hour. 
 
 The castle in the forest is 
 inhabited by an Italian coun- 
 
 We must stand watch until 
 we are relieved. 
 
62 
 
 >L\TERL\L FOR CONYERS.\TIO>:. 
 
 T)cv S3orftanb fcf)ricb mtr: 
 „<Bk tocrbcn crfu^t ^itn!t(id) 
 urn ficbeti Ut)r gu er)cf)einen." 
 
 -3rt $Rug(anb toctticn bie })o* 
 liti)rf)en ^erbred)er nac^ ©ibi* 
 rieit gcfii^itft. 
 
 ^di tour be ;juerft Don mct^ 
 Tiem S?ater iintcrtii^tct. 
 
 ^orintt) tourbe Don ben ^6^ 
 mem jcrjiort. 
 
 ©ie ©cbritbcr ®untr)er tours 
 ben ntc^t ertod^It, meil fie fiir 
 ^c^ublifancr gcl)a(ten lourben. 
 
 ^c^ bin l)eute morgen eingec 
 f^ricbcn toorbcn. 
 
 S)ie SHaoevei ijl in alien cioi^ 
 fifierten !i3anbern obgefr^afft 
 toorben. 
 
 „Q6) i^abe Q^mn ;;u ntelben, 
 ha^ (^ie Dom ^aifcr begnobigt 
 toorbcn flub," fagte ber Herfer* 
 meifter gum ©efangcnen. 
 
 SDie ^tragen firib burc^ bie 
 glut bcrborbcrt toorbcn. 
 
 ©ne 2Jhu^ — fo ergdf)tt bie 
 gobct — befreite eincn ^oraen, 
 bcr in einem S^e^e gefongcn 
 toorbcn to^r. 
 
 IWeinc ^(tem fonnten gran 
 9?id)tcr nid)t einlaben, tr»ci( fie 
 i()r nid)t borgcftcttt toorben 
 toarcn. 
 
 3i) tocrbc morgen cjomis 
 nicrt toerben. 
 
 3:a^ :4:)enhna( bc5 .Qanglere 
 toirb iibermorgenent^iittt toers 
 ben. 
 
 3=1^ !ann meinem ®aft nid)t 
 ratcn ab^,ureifen, id) tourbe migs 
 Ucrftanben toerben. 
 
 ^rofcffor ^ietric^ ift ent* 
 
 The chairman Tvrote to me: 
 "You are requested to appear 
 punctually at seven o'clock." 
 
 In Russia, political offenders 
 are sent to Siberia. 
 
 I was first taught by my 
 father. 
 
 Corinth was destroyed by 
 the Komans. 
 
 The brothers Giinther were 
 not elected because they were 
 looked on as repubhcans. 
 
 I was matiiculated this 
 morning. 
 
 Slavery has been abolished 
 in all civilized countries. 
 
 *'I have to announce to 3-0U 
 that you have been pardoned 
 by the emperor," said the 
 gaoler to the prisoner. 
 
 The roads have been spoiled 
 by the flood. 
 
 A mouse, according to the 
 fable, rescued a hon which 
 had been caught in a nei 
 
 My parents could not invite 
 !Mrs. Richter because they h^d 
 not been introduced to her. 
 
 I shall be examined to- 
 mon-ow. 
 
 The monument of the 
 chancellor ^-ill be unveiled the 
 day after to-morrow. 
 
 I cSkunot advise my guest to 
 leave; I should be misunder- 
 stood. 
 
 Professor Dietrich is deter- 
 
MATERIAL FOR CONVERSATION. 
 
 63f, 
 
 fc^foffett feme Seljre nidjt ^u 
 tribcrrufcn ; er itjctg, t^a^ er 
 fonft t)on alien feincn (Stuben== 
 ten bcrkffcrt tocrbcn toilrbc. 
 
 S^cr ^erbredjcr tniirbe bcs 
 gnobigt triarbctt fcin, \x>tnn or 
 ?Reue Qcjeigt l)atte, 
 
 rrllnfer ^ngriff ouf bie ftettcn 
 $o(}ett tni^icitij]," Jagte bcr 
 Dberft, „aber Wk toarcn gctas 
 belt itjorbcn, wcnn voir xlyi 
 nidjt gewagt I)attenJ' — Xk 
 §o()e. 
 
 S!)ic gort§ mtttcn friiljcr gcs 
 nommcit marbcn, locnn \mv 
 nnfere ^anonen inv ©telle gc^ 
 I)abt l^dttcn. 
 
 S)a§ ^acfct mn^ foglctd) auf 
 bie "poft gctragcn Uicrbcn. 
 
 mined not to retract his teach- 
 ings; he knows that he -would 
 otherwise be abandoned by 
 all his students. 
 
 The criminal would have 
 been pardoned if he had 
 shown repentance. 
 
 "Our attack on the stee23 
 heights failed," said the col- 
 onel, "but we would have been 
 blamed if we had not risked 
 it." 
 
 The forts would have been 
 taken sooner if we had had 
 our cannon on the spot. 
 
 The i^arcel must at once be 
 taken to the post-ofiice. 
 
 167. 
 
 „^fe Seitiire outer S^oucKcn/' 
 fagt 'iprofeffor (Sc^mibt, „\~t 
 alien ju cm^fc^lcn." 
 
 Unfcre ^Regterung macl)t neue 
 9?uj'tungcn, tt)ci( ein balbigcr 
 ^riebenig]'(i)tn§ nic^t ju crttittrs 
 itn x\t — 3^ie $Rii[tnng. 
 
 1. !Die 35it^^(5 entt)dtt iBc* 
 rid)te iibcr bie in (Suro^^a ^u crs 
 l:iartcnbc SSci^^enernte* 
 
 ©ie @c[unbt)cit ift ein i:ber= 
 am 1)0^ 5tt jc^a^enbcS ®nt. 
 
 "The reading of good nov- 
 els," says Professor Schmidt, 
 "is to be recommended to 
 every one." 
 
 Our government is making 
 new preparations because a 
 speedy conclusion of peace is 
 not to be expected. 
 
 The newspaper contains re- 
 ports on the wheat-crop to be 
 expected in Europe. 
 
 Health is a blessing to be 
 rated exceedingly liigh. 
 
 ^ie le^te 9^ad)ric^t 'com 
 ^rieg§fd)au|3la^ ift, bag bie Qn^ 
 bianer aefd)(agen finb nn\> \)on 
 nnferemeitereit)erfotgt mcrbcn. 
 
 168. 
 
 The last news from the 
 theatre of war is that the 
 Indians are beaten, and are 
 pursued by our cavalry. 
 
64 
 
 MATERIAL FOR CONVERSATION. 
 
 ^(^ tt)ir on ha^ T)ampffd)iff 
 famen, inurbc gcrabe ber ^liifcr 
 gend)tct, fo ba|l mir feiiten Sib- 
 fd)icb Don unfern greunbcu ndy 
 men fonntcn. 
 
 ^ie erbeuteten .^anonen idq- 
 reu unfern (Solbaten ju nid)tv^ 
 niifee, lueit fie fdmtlic^ Demagelt 
 waxtn. 
 
 5Die ^uefteKuncj tuirb Imlb 
 gefd)Ioffen mcrbcri, unit f.1)on 
 biemeiften^iiber ucrfauft finti. 
 — Da^ ^ilb. 
 
 Wlien we reached the steam- 
 er, the anchor was just being 
 raised, so that we could not 
 take leave of our friends. 
 
 The captured guns were of 
 no use to oui* soldiers because 
 they were all spiked. 
 
 The exhibition will soon be 
 closed because most of the 
 pictui'es are akeady sold. 
 
 160 — lYL 
 
 (S8 ifl fcincm romlfdjcn ^rief^ 
 ter crlttubt ^,u l)eiraten. 
 
 ©S ifl bcr ^d)ilbn)a(i)c bcrs 
 Botcn mit hen 5>oritberge^enben 
 3U rcbcn. 
 
 T^ie Qcftrigc 5lbcnbc5efellfd)aft 
 \oav )cljrtebl)aft; c§ tiiurbc gcs 
 fungcn nnb gcton^t. 
 
 9Jccinem Onfe( nefdllt e§ nic^t 
 tm ^^erein; eS ttiirb ibm moiel 
 ^oUtiftrt. 
 
 „Ste ^ci^cn Sic, nnb trie 
 dt finb (^ie?" fracjte mic^ ber 
 il^ireftor. 
 
 §erobot Ijeigt bcr 35ater ber 
 ®e)djtcf)tc. 
 
 Xo Roman priest is allowed 
 to maiTv. 
 
 The sentinel is forbidden to 
 talk with the passei-s-by. 
 
 Last night's party was very 
 hvely; there was singing and 
 dancing. 
 
 My uncle does not like it 
 in the club ; there is too much 
 pohtical talk for him. 
 
 "AMiat is your name, and 
 how old are you?" asked the 
 director of me. 
 
 Herodotus is called the 
 father of liistors'. 
 
 172 — 173. 
 
 3d) cttnitctc wt^ ben Xenor 
 fdjon einmal getjort gu t)abcn. 
 „3BennI)u2)ii^ entfi^ncgctt 
 
 fannft nac^ (Suropa gu fom= 
 men," fd)reibt meine S^antc, ,Jo 
 \m\i id) ^ir gem t>a^ ^^cifcgcib 
 fdiicfen." 
 
 I remember to have heai'd 
 the tenor once before. 
 
 "If you can make up your 
 mind to come to Europe," 
 wiites my aunt, " I wiU take 
 pleasure in sending money for 
 your traveling cx]3ensG3. 
 
[ATERI.\li FOn CON\TERSATION. 
 
 65 
 
 !\(h nld)t it)ot)( bei un^; er fc^nt 
 i($ na^ fetnett Bergen. 
 
 3Kir tounbcrn Utt§,ba§ unfre 
 @afte fd)on l)eute eittnctroffen 
 finb, aber iDir frcucii itn§ um 
 fo mc(}i\ 
 
 ^ie ^aucrtt in (Suropa jinb 
 unpfriebcn; fie Bcflagcn M 
 iiber ben (Steuerbrucf. — 'i)cv 
 -Waiter. 
 
 ^Sc^ctt Sic flt^, mettic 
 grcunbe/' fagtc ber ^mfibent, 
 al^ wir i()m bie Slbreffe iiber* 
 reid)t fatten. 
 
 Qd) ()abe mi^ nii^t um beu 
 ^ret^ fiemorbctt. 
 
 ^Si^amc bii^/' fagte bie 
 SD^uttcr ^u Sia)clm, M l)aft 
 iDtt^ aig Dcrftcflt." 
 
 iU^cia S3ater beftnbet fidj ntd)t 
 ti3ol)l, cr l)at flr^ ftarf crtaltct. 
 
 ^Mr l)aben un§ dcrf^iitct, 
 iDeihuiriinS tmSalbc dctlaus 
 fctt l)abcn. 
 
 „Gie f)abeTt fit^ 3U fe()r auf 
 3I)r gute^ @Ut(J ucrlafjcn/' 
 fagte ber S^aminator sum ^au* 
 bibaten. — ®er ^aubibat. 
 
 SBir ii^crben unS ac()t ^age 
 1)tcr nuf^altcn. 
 
 „(Sie luerbeu flt^ batb an un^ 
 fer 21ima gcmo^ucn," \ac^tt tin 
 QUtmittiger @^fimo 3U uuferu 
 yJorbpotfa^rern. 
 
 ^d) gcttouc mir ntd)t, btefe 
 ©onate t)om -^(att ^u fpielen; 
 ic^ (telle fie mir fcf)r fd)Uier t)or. 
 
 §crr 9}^ebeu ift lDal)ttfiunig 
 getnorbeu; er bilbet fi^ tin ber 
 reic^ftc 3Jlauu ber ^e(t 3U feiu. 
 
 The young Swiss does not 
 feel comfortable among us; 
 lie longs for liis mountains. 
 
 We are surprised that our 
 guests have arrived to-day, 
 but we are aH the more re- 
 joiced. 
 
 The peasants in Europe are 
 discontented; they complain 
 of heavy taxation. 
 
 "Sit down, my friends," 
 said the President, when we 
 had presented liim the address. 
 
 I have not competed for the 
 prize. 
 
 "Shame on you," said his 
 mother to WiUiam, "you have 
 been very deceitful." 
 
 My father is not well, he 
 has caught a heavy cold. 
 
 We are late because we lost 
 ourselves in the woods. 
 
 "You have been relyinfif too 
 much on your good luck," 
 said the examiner to the can- 
 didate. 
 
 We shall stay here for eight 
 days. 
 
 "You will soon get ac- 
 customed to our climate," said 
 a goodnatured Eskimo to our 
 North Pole expedition. 
 
 I do not trust myself to play 
 this sonata at sight ; I imagine 
 it to be very difficult. 
 
 Mr. Meden has become in- 
 sane; he imagines to be the 
 richest man in the world. 
 
66 
 
 JtlATERIAL FOR CON^TIRSATION. 
 
 3c^I)abc mir dotgettommcn 
 
 ncidjfte^ ^al)V uacl) 3^^^^^^^ l^ 
 
 Qdj tt)ei6 bie 5lbreffc be§ cttG- 
 Ii|d)ett ©eiftlic^en nirf)t, aber id) 
 tDerbe mir 9Rii^e gcben fie gu 
 erfal)ren, — X)cv @ciftUd)e. 
 
 I liave determined to go to 
 Italy next year. 
 
 I do not know the address 
 of the Eno^hsh clergyman, but 
 I shall take i^ains to iind it 
 oui 
 
 Additional examples to § 172. 
 
 gc^t guritcf, lucif er fic§ urn 
 nici)t^ befiimmert. 
 
 ^ie 'iRcd)nuTti3 bc§ Sremben 
 Belief fir§ auf taufenb Wlavt. 
 
 d)lcm ©roBeltem erfteuen 
 fliij noc^ immer einer guten (^e= 
 funbl)eit. 
 
 dMnt mvLtkv cr^olt fi^ 
 nur langfam Don ifjrem gicber. 
 
 ^d) ^ahc mtdj iiberaU nac^ 
 ?^rau .^o()ler ertunbigt, bod) 
 tami jtr^ niemanb entjinnen 
 i)on il)r gcl)ort gu liaben. 
 
 DJ^an fagt t»OTt griebric^ bem 
 ©ro^cn, bag er fl^ nie im dla^ 
 men eiue^ ^i^olbateti irtte. — 
 '^cv 9^ame. 
 
 Der alte §ufe(b lebt in tief^ 
 fter 5lrmut; er !ann nid)t meljr 
 arbeitenunb fri^ttmt fli^ 3U bet^ 
 te(n. 
 
 (Sie fbnnen fH t)oIIfommen 
 auf 3^ren gii{)rcr tjerlaflen. 
 
 ^er ^bnig l)at fid^ geioeigert 
 baS Urteil gu unterfd)reibcn. 
 
 The business of Mr. Rober 
 is declining because he attends 
 to nothing liimself. 
 
 The stranger's bill amount- 
 ed to one thousand marks. 
 
 My gi-and-pai'ents ai'e still 
 enjoying good health. 
 
 My mother is recovering but 
 slowly from her fever. 
 
 I have inquired everj^where 
 for ^Mrs. Kohler, but no one 
 can recollect having heard of 
 her. 
 
 It is said of Frederick the 
 Great that he was never mis- 
 taken in the name of a 
 soldier. 
 
 Old Hufeld hves in the 
 deepest poverty; he cannot 
 work any longer, and is asham- 
 ed to beg. 
 
 You can rely to the utmost 
 on your guide. 
 
 The king has refused to 
 sisrn the warrant 
 
 lU. 
 
 !:Da3 9^oI)r Biegt fic^. 
 £opemihi^ Iet)rte guerft, bag 
 bie ($rbe fir^ Bcmegt, 
 
 The reed bends. 
 Copernicus first taught that 
 the earth moves. 
 
MATERIAIi FOR CONVEESATION. 
 
 67 
 
 1, Sir finb entfc^Ioffeu un^ 
 f:r $au^ ^u Derfaufen, fobalb 
 f4 cin ^ciufer ftnbct. 
 
 We are determined to sell 
 our house as soon as a pur- 
 cliaser is found. 
 
 177. 
 
 1. (B^ fi^ncit fo ftar! i;t hen 
 5l(pcn, bag bte ^oftoerbinbung 
 unterbrodjctt x]t, 
 
 Senn c§ nicl}t tcgnct, ^irb 
 bae Settrenneti morgett \tatu 
 finb en. 
 
 2. ^§ munbcrt ttit§, bag 
 bcr S3crbrec^er begnabigt wov^ 
 ben ift. 
 
 ,r@3 ft cut tntcj, bag (gie fo 
 t)crtrancn§t)olI 3U mtr t'ommcn," 
 fagte ber ^farrcr. 
 
 m tfjut mir Icib, \)m S5or^ 
 trag iiber ben ^l)onograp^en 
 ntri)t geljcirt gu ^aben. 
 
 3. !4:)er'23atlent!(aat, bag eS 
 i5mfcl)r5ci6ifi. 
 
 3^c^ fonnte gcftern mlji in 
 bte ^erfammlung {ommen; c0 
 mar mir nid}t ttio^t. 
 
 4. ^0 fcpt unferm !^lcncr 
 ntd)t an gntem SBiKen, aber an 
 (Srfa()rnng. 
 
 Notes. — a. 25ir tDoIjntcn tm 
 §ote(, bl^ c8 ung gclttng einc 
 gnte $nDattDoI)nung 3U finben. 
 
 'iPo(t)frate^ filrditcte ben 9^eib 
 ber ©fitter, tneit i^m al(e fetne 
 Unterne^mungen glilrftett. 
 
 lb is snowin;^ so liard in the 
 Alps that postal communica- 
 tion is interrupted. 
 
 If it does not rain, the race 
 ■wiU take place to-morrow. 
 
 We wonder that the criminal 
 has been pardoned. 
 
 "I am glad that you come 
 to me so confidentially," said 
 the parson. 
 
 I am sorry not to have heard 
 the lecture on the phonograph. 
 
 The patient complains of 
 feeling very f everisli. 
 
 I could not come to the 
 meeting yesterday; I was not 
 well. 
 
 Our servant is not wanting 
 in good will, but in experience. 
 
 "We lived in the hotel until 
 we succeeded in finding a 
 good private lodging. 
 
 Polycrates feared the envy 
 of the Gods because he was 
 successful in all his enter- 
 prises. 
 
 179. 
 
 ^n ben SSereinigten (Staaten 
 gtcit eg feinen ^beL 
 
 Tliere i^ no anstocracy in 
 the "United States. 
 
63 
 
 MATERIAL FOR COXVEKSA'HO::. 
 
 S5or bctt 3^ttcn bc^ gucitKu^^ 
 gaB e0 nod) fcine ^irfc^en in 
 (£uropa. — SMe ^irfd)e. 
 
 (S^,(^icl)t bic[c§ Sal)i* fet)r ft»C:^ 
 nig 2ipfc( bet un5, Uial)rcnb c0 
 »origc^ ^aljr fcljr Diele gcgcBcn 
 Jet. 
 
 Si^ic Sm5cr t)erfict)em, bap 
 c? !):ucr t){c(e 3:raul)cn gcBctt 
 tu:r!). — S^ie Straubc. 
 
 1. dl ift leinc Zxntc md)V 
 \:i hzv glafdje. 
 
 ^3 finb 3tT)ct ©errcn uub 
 3:yci '^amen im (gmpfanojim* 
 ncr. 
 
 Before the times of Lucul- 
 lus, there were no cherries in 
 Europe. 
 
 Ai^ples are scarce with us 
 this year, while last year there 
 were j)leuty of them. 
 
 The vine- dressers assei-t that 
 there "wiil be plenty of gi-apes 
 this year. 
 
 There is no more inV in the 
 bottle. 
 
 There are two gentlemen 
 and two ladies in the paiior. 
 
 181. 
 
 1. T)ic Scild^eu in bcm ^ou* 
 qi:t flnJi in nnferem ©artcn 
 fjciDarfii'cn. — !Da^3 SSe{(cf)en; 
 ba^ bouquet. 
 
 Tlcinc iUhitter i Jl tJoKtommcn 
 gencfcn. 
 
 S^cmtfto!Ie6 i|l in ber S3cr* 
 tanuung ^eftorbcn. 
 
 >Dcr .^auptmann 'Biolk ijl 
 feinci SBnnben cricgen. — !^ie 
 
 2. ©eftern Un Id) 7,vl mcU 
 nrn Dntel in ber SBorftabt ge* 
 fi^rcn. 
 
 9)2etne (gitem finb gan3 pio^ 
 M) nai) ^aUt abgereift. 
 
 S^cr ^onig ifl nad) 3Jiitnd)en 
 juriicfgctc^rt. 
 
 •iprofeffor tnnje ifl t)on^re§^ 
 ben nac^ ^cip^ig gc^,ogen. 
 
 Sir bleiben I)eute gu ^au\c, 
 VDtii nnfcr 3>atcr angcfonuucu 
 ifl. 
 
 The violets in the bouquet 
 grew in our gai'den. 
 
 My mother has completely 
 recovered. 
 
 Themistocles died in exile. 
 
 Captain Stolle has suc- 
 ciunbed to lus wounds. 
 
 I yesterday drove to my 
 uncle's in the suburbs. 
 
 My parents left for Halle 
 quite suddenly. 
 
 The king has returned to 
 Munich. 
 
 Professor Kunze has moved 
 fi'om Dresden to Leipsic. 
 
 AYe are staying at home to- 
 day because oui' father has 
 anived. 
 
MATERIAL FOR COITV^ESATIO:?. 
 
 G9 
 
 S^ !attn feln SSaffer i5ici)cn, 
 tncit bcr (Winter in ben ^runneu 
 gefallcn ift. 
 
 a. ^tcj:anber boti §umbotbt 
 ^ai fe^r t)tc( c^cretft. 
 
 SDie ®c[ellfc^aft ifl narf) bcm 
 5Il)cnbc[fctt fpajieren gegatigen. 
 — ©a^ ^beubeffen. 
 
 8. Sj) ^irt focbcn \>tm ^tqte 
 auf bcr (Strafe bcgcgnct. 
 
 !Dcr ^onig ift nur bi§ j^um 
 j^tDciten 5l!t gebliebcn. — Der 
 2l!t. 
 
 ^a3 S5or! ift un^,ufriebcn, 
 vocii h:z geuent)er!e nic^t ge(un* 
 geii fln^. 
 
 a. !iDie *iPoIi^,ei ift bem ®au* 
 ner bi3 nac^ 'prag gefolgt; bort 
 abcr l)at fie fcine (Spur t)cr^ 
 lorett. 
 
 9tubo(|3^ mug gu §aufe btel* 
 ben, tt)ei( cr fciner SDwtter nidjt 
 gefolgt ^at. 
 
 I cannot draw any watei' 
 because the bucket has fallen 
 into the well. 
 
 Alexander Ton Humboldt 
 traveled extensively. 
 
 The company took a walk 
 after supper. 
 
 I have just met the physi- 
 cian in the street. 
 
 The king remained only 
 until the second act. 
 
 The people are discontent- 
 el because the fireworks did 
 not succeed. 
 
 The police followed the 
 sharper as far as Prague, but 
 lost there his track. 
 
 Balph must stay at home 
 because he did not obey his 
 mother. 
 
 182. 
 
 "?Profcffor iScI)ring Ijat Ijcutc 
 in feinen 33orlefungen itbcr Xa^ 
 citu^ fortgefat)rc:t. 
 
 !^cr ©oftor ift nid)t mel}r ha, 
 er ift fortgcfaI)reu. 
 
 (g^ ift fo !alt bet un6, ha^ mu 
 fere ^runnen gefroren finti. — 
 iDet ^runnen. 
 
 ^6 tt)ar fel)r latt im (Sd)(itten; 
 xoit l^oBcn an §anben unb ^^'iu 
 ^eu gefroren. — 3Dcr (Sct)(itten. 
 
 Professor Beliring proceed- 
 ed to-day in his lectures on 
 Tacitus. 
 
 The doctor is no longer here ; 
 he has driven away. 
 
 It is so cold here that our 
 Avells are frozen. 
 
 It was verj' cold in the sleigh ; 
 our hands and feet suffered. 
 
 18.3. 
 
 IBet un^ ttergc^t ein 3^ag tute 
 ber anbere: t)ormittag8 arbeiten 
 
 "With us one day passes like 
 another; we work during the 
 
70 
 
 MATERIAL FOR COX^'ERSATION. 
 
 totr, nad)mittag§ geljcn tvxv fpiv 
 giercn, unb abcnbS mad;cn wix 
 
 „Die (Sd)tad)t tear fc^r blu* 
 tig," fd)rcibt bcr 9)Mjor, „b{e 
 ^^ugcln flocjen red)tS uub liufg; 
 id) fa^ greunbe unb gcinbc 
 rci^cnmctfc fallen." — ^k 
 
 forenoon, take a -walk in the 
 afternoon and make visits in 
 the evening. 
 
 " The battle was very bloody," 
 writes the major, "the bullets 
 flew right and left; I saw 
 friends and enemies fall by 
 companies." 
 
 184. 
 
 T)cr ncuc (Eontmi^ arbeitet 
 \d)v forofoltig. 
 
 Qm ©cbirge gtcl)t ber ^cU 
 fcnbe bte 2}^au(ttere ben ^^ferben 
 »or, iDeit fie tiorp^tigcr auf* 
 treten. 
 
 !Dte g^adjtigatt finest nntcr 
 alien 23ogeln am fc^dnflcn. 
 
 1. Um bte 9?ucf!el)r ber 
 STruppen gu fciern, fd)mU(ftcn 
 tic iDiirncr hk @tra|en oufS 
 bcr[d)uienberi)d)flc mit glag* 
 t\cn unb ©uirlanben. — ^ie 
 glance. 
 
 aCnr iDurben t)om ^on[u( 
 aufi ^oflidjpc enipfangen. 
 
 The new clerk works very 
 carefully. 
 
 Travelers in the mountains 
 prefer mules to horses because 
 they step more carefully. 
 
 Of all birds, the nightingale 
 sings most beautifully. 
 
 To celebrate the return of 
 the troops, the citizens decor- 
 ated the streets most profusely 
 with flags and festoons of 
 flowers. 
 
 "We were most poHtely re- 
 ceived by the consul 
 
 185. 
 
 Unfere iBiirger l^oren gem 
 beutfd)c DJ^ufif, abcr nod) lithtt 
 italteni)"d)e; om Itebflcn tjovtn 
 fie bie italienifc^e £)pcr. 
 
 SO^clne SO^uttcr beftnbet fid) 
 md)t ganj toajl; ouf bent ^anbe 
 bcfanb fie fic^ icjfcr; am BcPcit 
 ift e^ ii)X rva^renb tl)rcr euro* 
 ))aifi^en vReife gegangcn* 
 
 Our people lilie GeiTrian 
 music, but better still ItaUan, 
 and prefer Itahan opera to all 
 other kinds. 
 
 My mother is not quite 
 well; in the country she was 
 better; but at no time was she 
 so well as dming her Eiu'opeaa 
 tour. 
 
MATERIAL FOR CONVERSATION. 
 
 71 
 
 187. 
 
 tlnf crc3icT)'6ruttncn finb meif^ 
 ten^ mit gineiCvimcnt t)erfel)cn; 
 iDci^renb ber ehie ^inunter^eljt, 
 fommt bcr anbcre |crauf. 
 
 '^k beibcti ^erbrcdjcr tnur* 
 ben ftct^ t)on emanber Qctrcnnt 
 cje^altcn ; fo eft bcr eine in t>m 
 @crt(^t§faa( l^crcinfam, ipurbe 
 bcr anbcre l^inan^n^f^^^)^*^* 
 
 %IU ic\) an ble 4:{)itre Kopfcn 
 I)ortc, vicf id) „I|ctctn!'' iDoranf 
 cine wtr nnbcfannte (Stimme 
 antn)ortcte: „S<^ !ann ntd)t 
 l^iucin!ommcn, bie 3:i}ure ift 
 t)crfd)(of[cn." 
 
 (i^ ift uu^ fitr tntntcr Dcrfagt 
 jn tpiffcn, tuo^et n)ir fommen 
 nnb iDo^tn w'w Qc()cn. 
 
 „2Bo tommen (gie \^tt, unb 
 Ujo gcl)en <Sie l^in?" fragte 
 mid) ber Q'nfpcftor. 
 
 i)cv ^anqnier SJletgner ift 
 nad) granffnrt g^sogen, unb 
 fein ^ruber toirb anc^ bajin 
 gel) en. 
 
 „Senn (Sic Iner^cr fommen," 
 fagte bcr ^rebiger gn mir, „\o 
 \mh e§ 3^^c^' "ttidjt an gntcn 
 ^^rennben fcljlcn*'' 
 
 Our draw-well^ are {general- 
 ly fitted witli two buckets; 
 wliile the one is going down, 
 the other is coming up. 
 
 The two criminals were 
 constantly kept separated from 
 each other; whenever the one 
 entered the court-room, the 
 other was led out of it 
 
 When I heard a knocking 
 at the door, I cried — Come in; 
 whereupon an unfamiliar voice 
 answered: *'I cannot come iu: 
 the door is locked." 
 
 It is forever denied to us to 
 know whence we come and 
 whither we go. 
 
 "Whence do you come, and 
 whither do you go ?" the In- 
 spector asked of me. 
 
 Meissner, the banker, has 
 moved to Frankfort, and his 
 brother wiU f oUow him thither. 
 
 "If you come here," said 
 the preacher to me, "you will 
 not lack for good friends." 
 
 188. 
 
 ^Dle deputation ber ^Irbcitcr 
 immfd)t bem gabriri)errn bos 
 flit gn banfen, ha^ er il)nen ein 
 fefejimmer eingerid^tet l^at. 
 
 5lpolfo iuar barilBct erjiirnt, 
 
 The deputation of the work- 
 men wish to thank the pro- 
 prietor of the estabhshment 
 for having fitted up a reading 
 room for them. 
 
 Apollo was angry because 
 
72 
 
 MATERIAL FOR CONVERSATION. 
 
 ha^ \\)m bie ©cfd^rten bc5 
 Dbt)[feu^5 fcine ^linbcr geraubt 
 Ijattcn. — 5^a^ 9imb. 
 
 Unfcr ©eneral fel)lte. t\ntin, 
 ba^ cr ben gcinb 3U fpdt angriff. 
 
 Sir fd^Iiegen bie ©elbtjer* 
 Iegenl)eit bee SJiajor^ barouS, 
 ha^ er fein Siebling^pferb Dcr* 
 tauft l)at. 
 
 !Cie !iDid)tcr getDtnnen bie 
 ©unft ber ^egenteti oft bos 
 tut(^, ba^ fie i()nett fc^meidjeltu 
 — S^cr Regent. 
 
 ^l)i(ipp Don ^^aniett ivar 
 ber ein3ige, bcr emftlic^ borait 
 bac^te hen STob bcr aiZaria 
 ©tuart gu rddjcn. 
 
 tlie comrades of Ul^'sses had 
 stolen liis cattle. 
 
 Oiir (reneral made a mistaJie 
 in attacking the enemy too 
 late. 
 
 We infer the pecuniary em- 
 barrassment of the major from 
 the fact that he has sold hia 
 f ayorite horse. 
 
 Poets often -win the favor 
 of rulers by flattering them. 
 
 Philip of Spain "was the 
 only one who seriously thought 
 of avenging the death of ]\Iai'ia 
 Stuai't. 
 
 189— 192< 
 
 SS>ir bcgteitctcn unfere grcun* 
 be Big on0 (gtabttI)or. 
 Sir rubertcu Vi^ jur ^riicfc. 
 
 Unfcr 9^a(^bar Ijat htn $ro* 
 gc6 t)cr(orcn; auger ben ©e* 
 riiit^fofteu mup er 2000 ^laxt 
 3al)IeTt. 
 
 ^cr patient Ijai ha^ Mte 
 S3ab bcr dr^tliciien SSerorbnung 
 gemd§ gcnommeiu 
 
 ^er ^\\^o[ tooljut \)tm 
 !Dome 3uudd)tt. 
 
 Unfer SBirt ertpartct l^cutc 
 obetib bie ^bnigiu neb ft eincm 
 grogcn @ef olge. — SDa^^ ©ef o(gc. 
 
 '^CT A^ampfer (gd)it(er fing 
 anf l)oI)er ^ee geuer nnb ging 
 ni i t f a ;u t bcr Siannf djaf t nn* 
 ter. 
 
 We accompanied our friends 
 as fjir as the city gate. 
 
 AVe rowed as far as the 
 bridge. 
 
 Our neighbor has lost the 
 law-suit; besides the costs, he 
 has to pay 2000 marks. 
 
 The patient has taken tlie 
 cold bath according to the 
 prescription of the physician. 
 
 The bishop lives next door 
 to the cathedral 
 
 Our landlord, to-night, ex- 
 pects the queen with a large 
 suite. 
 
 The steamer " Schiller ** 
 caught fire on the high seas, 
 and went down with all her 
 crew. 
 
MATERIAL FOR CONVERSATIOIT. 
 
 73 
 
 T)cm (^k\ti^e ;;ufoIge mu^ 
 ber lUiorber bie S^obe^ftrafe er* 
 leiben. 
 
 $ciT 3J?enbct ift au§ hem 
 S3ereme QU^geftoJen tnorben, 
 n^eit er ben (BtatnUn guintber 
 gel)anbc(t \)at — ^a^ (Btatvit 
 
 ® a n f bcr Umfidjt unb Stier^ 
 gte (Sicero^ iDurbe tie ^erfdjtro^ 
 rung ^atittna^ rec^tjeittg ent= 
 bedl 
 
 SOJeincr 5lnfi(J)t n a cf) (or na^ 
 metner 5lnfid)t) \d)idt e^ fi^ fiir 
 nn^f unfcre @dfte am ^aljn^of 
 3a bcgriigciu 
 
 ^l lift at t bc§ grul)lmg6 ^a* 
 ben tinr im (giiben nur eincn 
 Derfrit()ten (^ontmer. 
 
 Unfer ©arten liegt auger* 
 I) alb bet @tabt, aber inner* 
 I) alb bctSJ^auer. 
 
 £)berr)alb bc§ Safferfall^ 
 tft bic (gcenene fet)r fd)on, un* 
 tcrtjalb ticgfclBcn aber iDirb 
 ]ie emformig. 
 
 ^ergtuB ift binnen etnct 
 8tunbe um gn>ci gug geftiegen. 
 
 granfreld) Ucgt ton t){cr au0 
 bteSfett^bc0 9?f)em^,!J:)eutfd}* 
 lanb jenf ett^ bcSfclkn. 
 
 S)cr ^aifer ift feincr @efunb* 
 !)ett ^alber nai^ (Sm^ gegan* 
 gen. 
 
 S)er 9^ebner ttjurbc inm it* 
 ten feincr 9^ebe feftgenontmen* 
 
 Unfer fdjonftcr (gpajiergang 
 ift Icings bcSgtuffe^. 
 
 gaut bc8 Urteilgfpru(^§ I)a* 
 Un bcibe ©eUnquenten leben^* 
 Iangltd)c^ ^iid)tf)au^. 
 
 4)er gcuerwet)miann $ein* 
 
 According to the law, the 
 murderer must suffer the 
 ■penaliy of death. 
 
 Mr. Mendel has been ex- 
 pelled from the club because 
 he acted contrary to the re- 
 gulations. 
 
 Thanks to the circumspec- 
 tion and energy of Cicero, 
 CatiHne's conspiracy was de- 
 tected in time. 
 
 In my opinion, it is proper 
 for us to welcome our guests 
 at the station. 
 
 We have, in the south, only 
 a premature summer instead 
 of sjDring. 
 
 Our garden lies without the 
 town, but within the walL 
 
 Above the waterfall, the 
 scenery is very fine; below it, 
 however, it gTOws monoton- 
 ous. 
 
 The river has risen two feet 
 within one hour. 
 
 From where we stand,France 
 lies this side of the Bhine; 
 Germany, on the other. 
 
 The emperor has gone to 
 Ems on account of his health. 
 
 The orator was arrested in 
 the midst of his speech. 
 
 Our most beautiful walk ia 
 along the river. 
 
 According to the sentence, 
 both criminals are to be im- 
 prisoned for life. 
 
 Hem-y Stapel, a fireman. 
 
u 
 
 JIATERIAL rOa CONVEIffiATIOX. 
 
 x\6) (^iapcl !)at eine golbene 
 lll?et>ai((e bcfommen, tocii er 
 tro^ bcr ciuBerftcn @cfal)r sirct 
 £inber gcrettet Ijcit 
 
 5lltefti§ gtng urn i^rc§ &at^ 
 ten ID {((en in ben ^abc^^. 
 
 Wlcim il^cmmnbtcu luol^nen 
 unnoctt bcS i^afcn^?. 
 
 S'cr l^icb offiicte bie !l:i)ure 
 m'lttcU einc§ 3Jad)f(^(Uffc(^. 
 
 received a gold medal because 
 in the face of the greatest 
 danger he saved the lives of 
 two childi'en. 
 
 Alcestis def3cended for her 
 husband's sake into Hades. 
 
 My relatives Hve'^not far 
 from the port. 
 
 The thief opened the door 
 by means of a false key. 
 
 193. 
 
 S6) Ijobc §crm itnb i^ran 
 T)imt?cr uhtt ben (See ^in ru- 
 bem fcl)cn. 
 
 S^cr f^allott ift uBcr ba^ @c* 
 btrgc meg gcflocjcn. 
 
 ailo^^art UHir tion £mbl)cit 
 auf bcr llihifif ergcbcn. 
 
 !^te 5^icbc fprangcn gum 
 genftcr l^inauS nnb entfamcn. 
 
 aiMr t)crltef>ett ha^ .^^au^^ erft 
 atS ba^ SiHiffer jur 2:|iirc ^ers 
 einftromte. 
 
 !iDie ^uppel fief mliUn im 
 ©ottc^bicnfte ein. 
 
 I saw Mr. and !Mrs. Diintzer 
 rowing across the laka 
 
 The balloon flew away over 
 the mountains. 
 
 Mozai-t was devoted to 
 music from childhood. 
 
 The thieves jmnped out of 
 the window and escaped. 
 
 We did not leave the house 
 until the water was looming 
 in through the door. 
 
 In the midst of the service 
 the cupola fell in. 
 
 194—195, 
 
 Tk ©cfcHfcbaft blicb tm 
 ^arf, Bi§ bci^ gcucnt)er! feincn 
 Slnfang nal)m. 
 
 !4^ie (2d)iucbcn t)crridhtetcTt 
 ftet^S il^r ©cbct, BctJor jie in bie 
 fed}Iacl)t ^ogcn. 
 
 i)crSO^drbcr tt>itrbc ^^um Xobe 
 Dentrtci(t; ha cr abcr ^cuc 
 geigte, iintrbe ifjni bie S^obc^ 
 ftrafe erlaffctu 
 
 The company remained in 
 the park until the fireworks 
 began. 
 
 The Swedes always offered 
 a prayer before going into 
 battle. 
 
 The murderer was con- 
 demned to death; but since he 
 evinced repentance, the death 
 penalty was remitted. 
 
MATERIAL FOR CONVERSATION. 
 
 7j 
 
 ^aM e^moriicnregnenfolttc, 
 h)trb ba^ gcft ii'bermorgen ftatt* 
 finben. 
 
 l^ubtnig ber ^Jrotntne tear fo 
 red)tltcf), baft iljm feine getnbc 
 nid)t tneniijcr trauteu a(^ fcine 
 grcunbc. 
 
 9lttcjbcm ^(tfar bie ©alHcr 
 befiegt ^atte, iiberfdjritt cr ben 
 
 ^er *iportter lt)i(( ipiffen, nB 
 er ba^ §au^ 3itfd)lte^ett !ann. 
 
 53eet^ot)cn com^onterte bi§ 
 an fctn (Snbe, obgtcic^ er taub 
 gctt)orben iKar. 
 
 @cit (or fcttbcm) meine 
 Tlnttcv im ©cbirge ift, bcfinbet 
 
 ISfeii^tcnb bie Zvojancv for(5== 
 Io§ fdjtiefcn, brangen bie ®ric* 
 ci;en in i()re (Stabt ein. 
 
 S^ie n)ilben ©anfe finb fdjmer 
 ^u fdjiejen, ttJcil fie fe^r l)oc^ 
 unb fdjncU fliegen. — !Die 
 ®an§. 
 
 ^ine SD^ionbtinfterniS pnbet 
 ftalt, tnenn bie febe ^inifc^en 
 ©onne un'i) SJ^onb tritt 
 
 a^ voav !etn Staffer tm Drte, 
 at^ ce brannte, fo baft bie 
 (gpri^cn nu^lo^ inaren. — !Der 
 Ort; bie^pi%, 
 
 SJZan l^at bcm iungcn ^aron 
 dneniBonnunb gecjeben, botnit 
 er fein il^ermogcn 'nid)t t)ergeu* 
 t>tn tann. 
 
 ©cr ^Ir^t ^at bem ^attcnten 
 geraten^ tdglic^ jtnet ober bret 
 
 In case it should rain to- 
 morrow, tlie festival will take 
 place on the day after to- 
 morrow. 
 
 Lewis the Pious was so 
 honest that his enemies trusted 
 him not less than his friends. 
 
 After Caesar had conquered 
 the Gauls, he crossed the 
 Bhine. 
 
 The doorkeeper wants to 
 know whether he can close 
 the house. 
 
 Beethoven continued to 
 compose until his death, al- 
 though he had become deaf. 
 
 Since my mother has been 
 in the mountains, she has been 
 feehng much better. 
 
 While the Trojans were 
 sleeping in securitj^, the Greeks 
 entered their city. 
 
 Wild geese are hard to shoot 
 because they fly very high and 
 very fast. 
 
 An eclipse of the moon 
 takes place when the earth 
 comes between the sun and 
 the moon. 
 
 There was no water in the 
 place at the time of the con- 
 flagration, so that the fire- 
 engines were useless. 
 
 They have given the young 
 baron a guardian, so that he 
 cannot squander his fortune. 
 
 The physician has advised 
 the patient to v/alk for tw^ or 
 
76 
 
 MATEMAL FOR C0N\"ERSATIOX. 
 
 (Stimbcn fpa^iercn .p getjen, jc 
 naditicm cr bci ^rdften ift. — 
 :^ie ,<tlraft. 
 
 ^ie feinblicfic 9?eitcrei t)er* 
 fud)te, unfere recite glatife gu 
 umgci)cn, inbcftcn tie .^nfan* 
 terie auf alien ^^unften geqen 
 tie unfrtge iJoiTucfte, — t)cv 
 ^unft. 
 
 Sotote bie erften (Sc^iiffc ^c^ 
 len, fan! ber ^Jla[ov goljer tot* 
 lid) ucmunbet uom $ferbe. — 
 !iDcr (g^ug. 
 
 Obl)fjeu^ lotinte feine ^tU 
 mat lange ntd}t crreid)cn, tnic 
 (or fo) fe^r er jid; au(^ bamac^ 
 fe^ntc. 
 
 Sobalb Co 3{)ncn gcfcidig ift, 
 lircd)cu unr nad) ben'^ccn auf. 
 
 SBir uicrben am (^eftabe blei* 
 ben, fo longc (ol§) bie ^ittt^ 
 runi] e^ erlaubt. 
 
 ^emoftt)ene§ nat)m ©ift, um 
 nidjt lebenbig in bie §dnbe fci^ 
 ncr geinbe ju fallen. 
 
 Sir tonnen feine 9)linute 
 Icinger iparten, bcnn wiv miiffen 
 nod^ t)or fed)^ Ut)r bie Stabt er^ 
 reid)en, toenn e^ au(!^ noc^ fo 
 fel)r regnet. 
 
 „3d) nnd alle§ geftel)cn/' 
 fagte ber epion, „tticntt eie 
 mid) nur am Seben laffen.'^ 
 
 ^eine^ t)on biefen (Sdjiffen 
 n)trb unter @ege( neften, mnn 
 fid) ber @turm nid)t legt. 
 
 three hours evers' day, accord- 
 ing to his strength. 
 
 The enemy's cavahy tried 
 to turn our right flank, while 
 the infantry advanced against 
 us alonof the whole hne. 
 
 As soon as the first shots 
 were heai'd, Major Folzer fell 
 moi-tally wounded from his 
 horse. 
 
 Ulysses could, for a long 
 time, not reach his home, how- 
 ever much he longed for it 
 
 As soon as it pleases you, 
 we shall set out for the lakes. 
 
 "V\^e shall stay at the sea- 
 shore as long as the weather 
 permits. 
 
 Demosthenes took poison in 
 order not to faU ahve into the 
 hands of his enemies. 
 
 We cannot wait one minute 
 longer, for we must reach the 
 town before six o'clock, though 
 it may rain ever so hard. 
 
 "I wiU confess even-thing," 
 said the spy, "i^rovided you 
 only let me hve." 
 
 None of these ships will set 
 sail unless the stonn subsides. 
 
 196. 
 
 1. Unfere grcunbe tnerben 
 (Sicitien nid)t befudjen, bcnn e^ 
 
 Our friends are not going 
 to visit Sicily, for it is already 
 
MATERIAL FOR CONVERSATION. 
 
 77 
 
 Ift f(^on fet)r f)eij^ in Stalieti; 
 nui) (or auBerbem or iiberbie^) 
 tjahcn fie nid^t genucj 3^^t baju 
 iibric^. 
 
 *!|3rofefior Seller ift ntr^t 
 niir ein au§ge;^eirf)neter (5I)emi^ 
 !er, fonbern er i)at ait^ me^^ 
 rere tDertuoUe ©ntbecfungen in 
 ber ^I)l)fi! gemac^t, — !43ie (^nU 
 bedung. 
 
 (Somo^l bie i^lotte ol8 bae 
 ^anbt)eer ber ^erfer trurbe Don 
 ben @ried)en gefc^Iagen. 
 
 9^a(^ ber ^nfic^t be§ 3n* 
 genieur^ ^'et)( finb bie ^ogen 
 ber neuen -Q3rii(fe Itiebcr fjod) 
 noc^ meitgenug. — !©er:^ogen. 
 
 i)ie 9tduber tuurben iciii im 
 ^ampfe getotet, itiU fielen fie 
 nnfern ©enbarnten lebenbig in 
 bie §anbe. — ®er (S^enbarm^ 
 
 ^ie Seftung mugte Japitulie* 
 
 ren, benn cincrfcitS gingen bie 
 
 SSorrate auf bie 92eige, nnbcts 
 
 cit0 ^errfci)te 3^r»ietrad)t ^v^'u 
 
 c^en ben :Q3iirgern nnb ber ^e* 
 
 a^ung. — 3)er ^iirger. 
 
 ©a§ Setter ift fei)r unbe* 
 ftanbig l)ier in bonbon; Ibolb 
 regnet e§, bolb fdineit e^. 
 
 2. §err ^ird)ner ift nid)t 
 banfrott; biclme^t ^at er fein 
 (^efd)dft bebeutenb enueitert. 
 
 Unfere greunbe finb je^t tnU 
 tncbcr in ber (S(i)iDei5 obcr im 
 (Sdiwar^malb. 
 
 n^mkn (Sie fid)/' rief un§ 
 ber @d)affner p, „fonft !om^ 
 men (gie lu fpdt." 
 
 very hot in Italy; besides, 
 they have not time enough to 
 spare for it. 
 
 Professor Weller is not only 
 a distinguished chemist, but 
 he has also made several valu- 
 able discoveries in physics. 
 
 The fleet as well as the army 
 of the Persians were defeated 
 by the Greeks. 
 
 According to the opinion of 
 the engineer Kehl, the arches 
 of the new bridge are neither 
 high nor wide enough. 
 
 The robbers were in part 
 killed in the fight, and in part 
 taken alive by our policemen. 
 
 The fortress had to sur- 
 render, for in the first place, 
 the provisions were running 
 low, and in the second place, 
 there was discord between the 
 citizens and the garrison. 
 
 The weather here in Lon- 
 don is very uncertain; it rains 
 one minute and snows the 
 next. 
 
 Mr. Kirchner is not a bank- 
 rupt; he has, on the contrary, 
 enlarged his business con- 
 siderably. 
 
 Our friends are now either 
 in Switzerland or in the Black 
 Forest. 
 
 "Make haste," shouted the 
 conductor to us, "otherwise 
 you will be too late." 
 
78 
 
 MATERIAL FOR CONVERSATIOX. 
 
 Unferc f^olbaten bcabfict)ti(;* 
 ten bie •53rii(fe p befci^en, ofls 
 citt hk geinbe ifamen i^nen gu* 
 Dor. 
 
 l^id)ett finb l^ier jtemftd) fpar- 
 Itd^; bogcgcn (or f)mocgen) 
 t)nbcn mx Ubcrflup an 2l()orn* 
 baumcn. — 5^ie (Sidje. 
 
 '3^cr 5(r5t \}at a\k mogIid)en 
 9J?ittc( uerfnd)t, ben (Ertrunfe^ 
 nen in^3 ?eben priicf^nrufen; 
 bo^ (or jeboc^ or inbe^ or in* 
 beffen) c^ Wav gu ]pdt, — !5)a^ 
 mtttl 
 
 •^er ^anfntann (^treit l)at 
 im le^ten (Stnrnt giuei (Sd)tffe 
 Derloren; bcnna^ (or beffen- 
 ungeac^tet or gIeid)n)ol)() ift fcin 
 ^rebit nic^t gcfunfen. — ^er 
 tobit. 
 
 3. ^er "ipfab na^ bent ©ipfcf 
 be^ ^erge^ ift gluot fteil, aber 
 fd)attig. — ^er ©tpfet. 
 
 4. (E^3 l^atte me{)rere ^age 
 geregnet; iJo^er maren bie 
 ©traBen fo fotig, tci^ unfere 
 ^anonen nic^t tran^portiert 
 tperben fonnten. 
 
 Our soldiei-s intended to 
 occupy the bridge, but the 
 enemy forestalled them. 
 
 Oaks are rather scarce here; 
 maples, on the contrar}% are 
 abundant 
 
 The physician tried all pos- 
 sible means to restore the 
 drowned man to life, but it 
 was too late. 
 
 Streit, the merchant, lost 
 two ships in the last storm; 
 neyei-theless his credit is not 
 diminished. 
 
 The path up to the summit 
 of the mountain is steep, it is 
 true, but shad}^ 
 
 It had been raining several 
 days, and therefore tlie roads 
 were so muddy that our cannon 
 could not be transported. 
 
 197. 
 
 ©err ©ef)r ift nid)t 9J?a(er, 
 fonbcttt ^ilb^aner; nteine QU 
 tern finb nidjt intint mit i{)m, 
 ahtt fie fennen il)n jiemlid) 
 gut. 
 
 IVIr. Gehr is not a painter, 
 but a sculptor; my parents 
 are not intimate with him, 
 but they^know him pretty 
 weU. ^ 
 
 198. 
 
 SBir gebenfen in etner \}aibcn 
 ©tnnbe anf 5nbred)en, totnn ^ie 
 nic^t:^ bagcgen ^abeu. 
 
 We intend to staii in half 
 an hour, if you have no objec- 
 tion. 
 
MATERI.M. FOR CONVERSATION. 
 
 79 
 
 !Der ©drtner \mii iDiffen, oB 
 er iDci^e ober rote ^ofen ju 
 ben befteUten ^ouquet^ ne^men 
 foU. 
 
 The gardener wants to know 
 whether he is to take white 
 or red roses for the bouquets 
 ordered. 
 
 199, 
 
 1. !Da^ (Spric^tDort fagt: 
 „9)?acf) @eu, tuenn bie (Sonne 
 fc^eint." 
 
 ^tr waren in 5l(e^*anbria, 
 M e^ bombarbiert nrnrbe. 
 
 ©ie ^^riege tnnrben fritter 
 mit t)te( me()r (S3raufam!eit ge^ 
 \n\)vt al§ jel^t; totnn cine ^Stabt 
 m bte ^cinbe be^ Sieger^ fiet, 
 iDurbe fie Qcwb()nlic^ geplitnbert 
 unb jerftort. 
 
 2. T)k foiiid \dili trtffen, 
 toann njir liier angefommen 
 finb. 
 
 The proverb says — Make 
 hay while the sun shines. 
 
 We were in Alexandria when 
 it was bombarded. 
 
 Wars were formerly con- 
 ducted with much more cruelty 
 than now; when a town fell 
 into the hands of the con- 
 queror, it was usually pillaged 
 and destroyed. 
 
 The police want to know 
 when we ai-rived here. 
 
 200. 
 
 T)k (Sinbrei^er fatten 3Kad)en 
 an^geftellt, bomit fie hd i^rer 
 5lrb'eit ntt^t iiberraf d)t raiirben; 
 unb ba fie fiircl)teten, ba^ bie 
 ©prengung be^ 4^elbfd)ran!^ fie 
 tjerraten mddjte, fatten fie bie 
 genfter mit naffen 2:itd^rn oer^ 
 l)angen. — ©ie ^acl)e; bcr 
 ©d)ranf; ba^ Zud], 
 
 The burglars had established 
 outposts, that they might not 
 be surprised at their work; 
 and fearing lest tlie bursting 
 of the safe should betray them, 
 they had covered the windows 
 with wet cloths. 
 
 201, 
 
 5lnfang§ bereuten metne 25er= 
 inanbten, fid) in ^affel nieber^ 
 getaffen in Ijaben; allein |c Ian* 
 ger fie bort n)ot)nen, bcfto beffer 
 gefciKt e$ iljnen. 
 
 My relatives were at first 
 sorry that they had settled in 
 Cassel; yet the longer they 
 live there, the better they 
 like it. 
 
READING EXERCISES. 
 
 Note. — The student's attention is called to the correspondences ol 
 consonants in German and English (p. 124). 
 
 To§14-§17(p.9). 
 
 ^ic Grbc' ift runb. T)a§ 9J?eer' ift hvt'it' unb tief. SiMe Mau 
 ber §tmmc(* ift, \vk rein* unb !(ar' bie 8uft' ! X)a^i ^Ici ' ift 
 fc^rocr'. 3Da§eifen*' ift ^art. 3:)a$ Sad)^ ift lucid) ". X)k 
 MM), ber §onig unb ber Qudtv " finb fii^ ''. 5)cr §irfd) '' ift 
 fd)nell'^; bie <Sd)ne(fe^*' ift langfam''. X)k 3eit^' ift loftbar^". 
 S^a^ Setter'"' ift Derdnbernd)'^\ ^er9?aum" ift unenblid)". 
 @ott"iftuberdI". 
 
 X)a^ geuer ift fein Element. T)a^ gid)t be§ 2)2onbe§" ift 
 matt "'. !5Die SBufte '^^ ift bie ©eimat " be^ ^^tiiDen'". ^cr Xot> " 
 beS gitrften irar einUngliicf" fiir ba§ ^anb. !iDie ^eife" ber 
 ^onigin" tear 9mcfad)'\ !Die ^enntni^"' ber ©efd)id)te'' ift 
 notn3enbig'\ Unfer ^afein'' ift cm 9Mtfer". ^er Zoh ift 
 lein libel*'. T)cx @d)metterling " ift ein (St)mbot ber Unfterb* 
 Iid)!eit ". ^Da^ tleib ** ber Unfd)ulb *' ift n^eig ". '^k (Stimme *' 
 
 1 earth. 2 sea. 3 broad. 4 sky. 5 pure. 6 clear, 7 air. 8 lead. 
 9 heavy. 10 iron. 11 soft. 12 sugar. 13 sweet. 14 stag. 15 swift. 
 16 snail. 17 slow. 18 time. 19 precious. 20 weather. 21 change- 
 able. 22 space. 23 infinite. 24 Grod. 25 everywhere. 26 moon. 
 27 dim. 28 desert. 29 home. 30 lion. 31 death. 32 misfortune. 
 33 journey. 34 queen. 35 fortunate. 36 knowledge. 37 history. 
 38 necessary. 39 existence. 40 riddle. 41 evil. 42 butterfly. 43 im- 
 mortality. 44 dress. 45 innocence. 46 white. 47 voice. 
 
READING EXERCISES. 81 
 
 bc§ .?>er5en^ {ft nidjt immer'' bie (Stimme be^ 35crftanbe§ (m.)". 
 Unban! ^^ ift ber Selt ^^ ?o^n^\ ^er ©eij " ift bie SBur^eP* 
 alle^ ilbet^ (n.). sjijcfjt^" {ft jo o^mi^"' a($ bcr Sob, ni^t§ \o 
 ungeimg a(^ bie<2tunbe'' bee 3:obee. 0()ne'' ^ampf' fein 
 ©teg"". T)ie gurd)t''' be^ §errn ift ber Sei^ljeit^' 5lnfang'\ 
 
 48 always. 49 reason. 50 ingratitude. 51 world. 52 reward. 53 avar- 
 ice. 54 root. 55 nothing. 56 certain. 57 hour. 58 without. 59 struggle. 
 60 victory. 61 fear. 62 wisdom. 63 beginning. 
 
 To§ 18 — §21. 
 
 (See Note on page 4 of the Practical Part.) 
 
 (Seine Saffen' tDarcn gtatf* iric' ein (Spiegel* (m.). ^ie 
 Sterne' (m.) finb 3at)l(o§\ (S^ ift be!annt\ \ok' bie ®ett)itter" 
 (n.) entfte^cn'". (Sd)iUer nennt'* bie SBoU'en'" Segkr'' ber 
 ^itfte'*. 3i)ie ©emcilbe'' unb Statuen iinfere^ Wln\mm^ finb 
 beriU)mt''. !Die ^tjitren ''^ unfere^ !l)omee finb t)on (^rj'', bie 
 (Saulen^' t)on aj^armor '\ 2:)ie3:)ad)er'' ber§dufer'' in^tdien 
 finb meift^' ptatt. Unfere Stragen"* finb gerabe''' unb breit. 
 So finb bcine iBiidjer '^^ ? So finb bie ^^riic^te '" meiner 5lrbeit '' ? 
 !Deine §dnbe finb !alt, unb beine is^i^jpen"' finb blag'", ^ie 
 gifdje (m.) \)abcn !eine Stimme". gliegen" unb ajliiden'' finb 
 bie ^^a^rung"* ber (Sc^UJatben ", 
 
 1 S)ie SBaffe, weapon. 2 polished. 3 as, 4 mirror. 5 star. 6 num- 
 berless. 7 known. 8 how. 9 thunderstorm. 10 arise. 11 calls. 
 12 3)ie 2Bol!e, cloud. 13 sailor. 14 3)ie ^n\t, air. 15 S)a8 ©emcilbe, 
 painting. 16 famous. 17 S)le S^^iire, door. 18 bronze. 19 2)ie @du(e, col- 
 umn. 20 marble. 21 2)aS S)ad), roof. 22 2)a§ §au6, house. 23 mostly. 
 24 S)ie (Strafe, street. 25 straight. 26 S)a3 Sdixd}, book. 27 ®ie grud)t, 
 fruit. 28 labor. 29 S)ie !Bippe, lip, 30 pale. 31 voice. 32 2)ie gUegc, 
 ay. 33 3)ie TlMt, gnat. 34 food. 35 3)ie @d)n)a(be, swallow. 
 
 To § 24. 
 
 :iDie^pfeIbdume^ U\xl}cn\ %ik Dbftbdume^ f)aben bie @e^ 
 
 1 2)er 5lpfelbaum, apple-tree. 2 bloom. 3 fruit-tree. 
 
82 READING EXERCISES. 
 
 ftalt* if)rer grucf)te. ^ie !^orbcerb{atter * finb gciDitrj^aft". T^tx 
 grueling'' ift na\}c''; bie 3aatfclber" finb grim. T)ic Singoogcl" 
 gentegen" in ^^Deutfdjfanb hen (gdju^'' bc^ ©cfc^e^" (n.), 
 SS^affcrfcide " finb tnalcrtfd)''. ^er 9^c(far unb ber 9JMn finb 
 9kbenf(ufie" bc^$Hf}ein^. §afenp(%'' finb mcift )e()r belebt'". 
 ^er ^iirgenneifter'' ^at fein ^urean int 9?at^anfe^\ !^{e 33or* 
 l)angc^' mcine^ Soljn^immcr^ " (n.) finb mctj?''. Unfere @ro§* 
 ticiter'* luarcn (vngldnbcr. 2Bie t)ic( toftcn bicfe §al^tiid)cr''? 
 
 4 shape. 5 3)Q§ ?orbecrbIatt, laurel-leaf. 6 spicy. 7 spring. 8 near. 
 9 2)a3 @oatfeIb, grain-field. 10 2)cr ©ingOogel, singing-bird. 11 enjoy. 
 12 protection. 13 law. 14 2)er SBofferfall, "water-faU. 15 picturesque. 
 16 2:cr 9ZebcnfIu|3, tributary. 17 2)er §afenplQ^, sea-port. 18 lively. 
 19 mayor. 20 town-ball, 21 2)er 3Sorl)ang, curtain. 22 sitting-room. 
 23 white. 24 grand-father. 25 2)a§ ^al^tud^, neck-handkerchief. 
 
 To § 30. 
 
 ^ie SJionard^en (5uro^a§ l)atten' cine 3^f ^^^^^'hi^ft ' i^ 
 Berlin. X)k @eograp()en ' miffen * nnr trenig ' t»on a}^ittclafrifa. 
 5}iefe ^rofefforcn finb tcil^' ^^itofopf)en ', tcxU ©cotogen' nnb 
 tei(^ aJJineralogen. X^it 5lftronomen ' be^ 5lltcrtum5 '' (n.) r)atten 
 !eine gernro{)re". 33iele 2^i)rannen*^ ©riedjenlanb^ '' maren 
 §crrfd}er'* Don Xalent unb 35erbienft'*. ^en ©dedjcn'" marcn 
 aire 5Iu6lanber'' ^arbaren''. 3:)ie ^a^nen'' ber ^ometen '" 
 finb meift" nnbefannt". X)k ^laneten finb inaljrfdjcinlid) '-'' aKe 
 beiDoI)nt". aJieine S5ettern'^ finb ^^^oftoren ber DJ^ebicin. ^We 
 SlbDoiatcn"" nnb 'JJotare unfcrcr (Stabt" f}aben t)ie( gu tl)un'\ 
 !I)ie (5f)t)re " be^ (SopI)ofIe^ finb er^abcn '°. 
 
 ^ie OJZnfi! unferer d^oriile " ift einfad)", aber" ernft nnb 
 
 1 had. 2 convention. 3 geographer. 4 know. 5 but little. 6 partly. 
 7 philosopher. 8 geologist. 9 astronomer. 10 antiquity. 11 ®a3 
 gcrnro^r/ telescope. 12 tyrant. 13 Greece. 14 ruler. 15 merit. 
 IG Greek. 17 foreigner. 18 barbarian. 19 ®ie ^al)n, orbit. 20 S)er 
 hornet, comet. 21 mostly. 22 unknown. 23 probably. 24 inhabited. 
 25 S)er ^Better, cousin. 26 lawyer. 27 city. 28 do. 29 S)er (^t)or, 
 chorus. 30 sublime. 31 hymn. 32 plain. 33 but. 
 
REAMNG EXERCISES. 83 
 
 feterltc^'*, !Die ^trd)m ^* uttb ^alaftc, bie Dbelt^lcn unb ^ri^ 
 umpt)bogen "' ^om^ finb ein ©egenftanb" (m.) ber ^etDun^ 
 beruuG '' aller 9lationen. Sir refen '' bte @c[d)t(^te bcr ^apfte 
 t)on Scopotb t)on dlank, Me ©enerafe 9^apo(con^ tt^arenSJ^anner 
 Don 3^a(ent. "ipcilen*" unb !5)iamanten finb !oftbar» T^ie 
 eiep^anten finb !tuG** xmb Gele^^l3'^ S:)ie ^oligci t)crfoIi3t" 
 atle -Settler ** unb ^agabnnben, 3n Berlin finb iiber '' t)ier^ 
 taufenb *' ^tubcntcn. 
 
 34 solemn. 35 church. 36 2)er iBogcn, arch. 37 object. 38 ad- 
 miration. 39 read. 40 ®ie "iperle^ pearl. 41 intelligent. 42 docile. 
 43 prosecutes. 44 beggar. 45 over, 46 four thousand. 
 
 To §34 — §35. 
 
 'Dk Zcmpd 5lt^en§ toavm 3}^eiftertt)er!e ber 5lrd)tte!tun ©er 
 ganbel ' ^orintl)^ wax auBcrorbentlid) ' batljenb ', !iDer S3efut) tft 
 ^ente * ber (Stol^ ' unb morgen ber (Sdjred'en " 5)leape(§, ®ie ^e= 
 lagerung " Don (^t)ra!u§ burd) ^ bie Dtomer n»ar fel)r languiiericj ^ 
 ®te 5ltmofpI)dre 3talien§ ift meift !Iar unb fonntg. (SnglanbS 
 ^efi^ungen '" finb fcl)r gal)lretd) '\ 5lnftotc(e^ n>ar ber ii^eljrcr " 
 5l(e^'anber§. Qd) Ijabe (Sdjtller^ unb ®oetI)e§ SKerfe, X)cv Zob 
 be§ :DemoftI)ene^ tear tragtfd). Sutfen^ ®timme ift t)olI unb 
 rein» SJ^arien^ ^ran!f)eit '' ift ni(^t gefd^r(id) '\ 
 
 1 commerce. 2 exceedingly. 3 flourishing. 4 to-day. 5 pride. 
 6 terror. 7 siege. 8 by. 9 of long duration. 10 ®ie iBefi^ung, pos- 
 session. 11 numerous. 12 teacher. 13 disease. 14 dangerous. 
 
 To §46— §47. 
 
 X)k ^dd'er arbciten ' h)dl)renb ber 9^ad)t. Unfere 2J?afc^inen 
 ftcl}en' ftill iDcgen be^ M^ftanbe^ ' ber 5lrbeiter\ Q\t biefe^ 
 ^anb ' nad) 3^I)rem @efd)mad " ? „%vi^ hen 5lugen \ am bem 
 8inn%" fagt ' ba^ (^pridjUiort '\ T)ie ^oft ift hci ber ^rucfe ", 
 
 1 work. 2 stand. 3 strike. 4 workman. 5 ribbon. 6 taste. 7 2)a3 
 Stuge, eye. 8 mind. 9 says. 10 proverb. 11 bridge. 
 
84 RE.\DING EXERCISES. 
 
 bent 9^at!)au^ gcgcniibcn X^ie 5(rbeiter fommcn*' t)om JJc^be. 
 33L>ir t)abcit nid)t @etb genug'' gur ^cife. giir tncn fiub bicfe 
 ^^flaumcn '* unb 5(prifo|cn''? (E()mm v^t cin IDIittel'' gcgcn ba^ 
 gneber. 25>ir glauben an bic gortbaucr ^' bcr'3ee(c'^ nad) bcm 
 ■S^obe. 3}^cinc (vltern inoljticn '' i.n (Sommcr auf bcm \^anbe unb 
 Im Sinter in bcr i^tabt ^er (See ift I)intcr bem ^arf. ^ie 
 2(rmut=" it»oI)nt" oft" ncbcn bcm Uberftuffe '\ 
 
 X^ie (Strage fiUjrt''* iibcr i>m ^crg"* nad) ber (Stabt. !Die 
 ^iid)c " ift untcr bcm (Speifejimmer ". 'Der Dbeli^f ftef)t'' »or 
 bcr £ird;e. 5)a3 §ofpita( licgt'" gunfcfien bcm gluffc unb ber 
 ^taht Tlcin Onfel bcmoI)nt'" cin ?anbl)au^ am ^ee. Qd) 
 fd)reibc " einen -53ricf " an meinen grcunb in .geibelberg. 2}^ein 
 ^Setter arbcitct '' in cinem ^anf^aufc. X;ie (gdjnittcr'* frii^* 
 ftiicfen'' im Cdjatten bcr i^inbc. X)cii*e §anbfd)u()c '" ticcjen"' 
 auf bem ^lauicr'^ @e^e" bie ?ampe auf hen 2:ifc^. ^ie 
 3citung" lieijt untcr bem (Sofa, ^er ^ibcr'' taud)t" unter 
 \>a-^ SS^affer. !Dcr Spiegel Ijcingt " iibcr ber £ommobe **. 'a^cx 
 §afe ** fprang" iibcr ben 3^^^*^- 3^ fanb'' ben 9?ing l)intcr 
 bem Sd)rante ". :4^er §unb frod) "' ()intcr ben Cfen ". 93?eine 
 ^ommobe ftel)t gtrifdjcn bem ^ett unb hem genfter ''. 9^iicfe " 
 ben ^leiberfd)ranf^* t)or bie 3^()iir, unb ben ^^ offer ncbcn ben 
 Sd)ranf. A^a^ ^^cnfnrnt " be5 giirften ftcljt t)or bem Sdjioffe. 
 
 I)ie grauen hcictcn '" rod()renb ber Sd)Iad)t *'. Sir loartcn " 
 ^icr uiegen be^ (^en)itter^ ". (Sin guBPfab'" fiiljrt iibcr bie Siefe 
 nad) bem See. Sir eriangten" (gintritt'' in bie gcftung" burc^ 
 
 12 come. 13 enough. 14 2)ie ^flaume, plum. 15 apricot. 16 remedy. 
 17 duration. 18 soul. 19 live. 20 poverty. 21 lives. 22 often. 
 23 abundance. 24 leads. 25 mountain. 26 kitchen. 27 dining-room. 
 28 stands. 29 lies. 30 inhabits. 31 write. 32 letter. 33 works. 
 34 reaper. 35 breakfast. 36 Xcv §ani)l'cl)ul), glove. 37 lie. 38 piano. 
 39 put. 40 newspaper. 41 beaver, 42 dives. 43 hangs. 44 chest of 
 drawers. 45 hare. 46 leaped. 47 fence. 48 found. 49 cupboard. 
 50 crawled. 51 stove. 52 window. 53 move. 54 clothes-press. 55 mo- 
 nument. 56 prayed. 57 battle. 58 wait. 59 thunderstorm. 60 foot- 
 path. 61 obtained. 62 entrance. 63 fortress. 
 
BEADING EXERCISES. 85 
 
 ben©nflug'* unferer greunbc. 2Btet)tc( forbert"' bcr ^ote"" 
 fiir feiuen Sea""? ^adjc'' hk '^cdjmn'" tiidjt o[)ne h^n 
 Strt'", Sarum fd)n)tmmft'* bu gegen ben (Strom''? SSer 
 ful}r'' 3ucrft'* urn ba§ ^a\> §orn? S)ie SJ^ctalle fommen au§ 
 bc:n ©cIjOBc'' bcr (Srbe. !5)a§ S:)cn!mal bc§ ^ontg§ ftcl)t beim 
 ©c^Ioffe. Sir treibcn'' §anbe( mit alien ^latloncn Suropa^. 
 Sir be^a^kn" unfcre 5lrbeiter'' nad) ber Qualitat iljrer 5lrbeit 
 ®ie §offnung'' ift unfere (Stul^e'" im Ungtud. 
 
 64 influence. 65 asks, 66 messenger. 67 way. 6S make. 69 bill. 
 70 hoot. 71 swim. 72 current. 73 sailed. 74 fir.-t. 75 bowels. 
 76 carry on. 77 pay. 78 workman, 79 hope. 80 support. 
 
 To § 78. 
 
 3^ f)abe greunbe in tbtn unb grauffurt. ^u ^aft !eine ^^ad)^ 
 \\d)t' gn ertuarten'. 5)cr *ipatient madjt' un^^orge*; er l)at 
 njebcr" (Sdjlaf nocf)' 5(ppetit. Sir ^aben ®afte ttom !i?anbe. 
 ^tnbcr, l^abt i^r§unger? S^ tjerftdjere' (^I)nen, (Bk ^ahcn 
 cinen greunb am STtinifter. ©u l^atteft !ein Sf^edjt gu f d)iei3cn °. 
 Sir I)attcn !ctn®aicf'" im (Spiel ^\ ^ie ©inbre^er ''^ l)attcn 
 ^red)ei[en'' unb Sprcngpuloer '*. So fatten bie 9?auber '' i^re 
 S3orrate '' ? Sa§ l)attcft bu gcftem auf bcm 9tatl)aufe 3U tl)un? 
 §attet il)r bie (grlaubnis'" gu fifdjcn? Qah^ id) redjt'' obcr un* 
 red)t ". §-fi ^^ ®^^^ '° 9<^^^^9 3^^ ^^^fe ? §err ^aftncr ift gc^ 
 fat)rlid)'^ !ran!"; ber 5lrst'=' f)at feine ©offuung'* fitr feine 
 ©enefung''. @r l^at \)tn 3:t)pl)U^, nid)t iral}r'°? 9^cin, etne 
 ©erj!ran!^eit". — ©atten Sie eincn giiljrer"' ilber ba§ @e* 
 birge '' ? 9leiu, bcr Seg t^ar un^ belannt '\ 
 
 1 indulgence. '2 expect. 3 causes. 4 care. 5 neither. 6 sleep. 
 7 nor. 8 assure. 9 shoot. 10 luck. 11 play. 12 burglar. 13 crow- 
 bar. 14 blasting-powder. 15 robber. 16 ^cr S5orrat, provision. 
 17 permission. 18 right. 19 wrong. 20 money. 21 dangerously. 
 22 sick. 23 physician. 24 hope. 25 recovery. 26 not true?— has he 
 not? 27 heart-disease. 28 guide. 29 mountains. 30 familiar. 
 
READING EXERCISES. 
 
 To § 49. 
 
 iBift bu utttDo^I ? 9^em, id) bin nur * miibc ', — Sie wctt ' ift 
 e§ nod) * nad) bcr <Stabt ? — SSir finb 2J^cnfd)cn uv.h f d)ti3an{"cn ' 
 balder' ftct^^ gtDii'djcn 23a]^rl)cit nnb -Si'i-'^^'. — S)^ fcib fcijr 
 crl)i^t% ^inber; too jcib irjr gctncfcn? — ^ie Ufcr'" M 9il)ein« 
 finb fc^r malerifd^, bc)onbcr§ " gtoifdjen Tlaini unb ^oblenj. — 
 3ft ba§ 3}Ma3C]ien'' fertig^''? Sa, e§ ift langft^* fcrtig, aber 
 bie ©dfte finb nod) nid^f' ba". — (Sinb luir frci'^ obcr unfrei 
 in unfcrcn ©anblnngen '' ? — (Seib il)r nod) meine grcunbe? — 
 „Q6) tear loilb nnb nnbanbig^' o(§ ^nabc/' fd^rcibt'" ©err 
 2)ZoI)ring in fctncr ^iograpl)ie, „bie (gpicle meincr £amerabcn 
 iparcn mcift gn rnt)ig" fiir mid). ^cin-53anm iDar ntir gn" 
 I)od)'% !cin gelfcn'* gn ftciP% !ein ©rabcn"' gn brcit; id) wax 
 bie SScrjiociflung " meincr 2Jtnttcr," — 3Bo ioarcn (Sie fo lange? 
 5lnf bcr ^orfe^\ — SSar id^ nid)t immcr an bcincr (Scite ? Sar 
 bcine grcubc'" nid)t mcine grcnbe nnb bcin l^cib'" nid)t mein 
 geib? 
 
 1 only. 2 tired. 3 far. 4 stilL 5 -waver. 6 therefore. 7 always. 
 8 error. 9 overlieated. 10 bank. 11 especially. 12 dinner. 13 ready. 
 14 long. 15 not yet 16 here. 17 free. 18 2)ie §aublung, action. 
 19 unmanageable. 20 writes. 21 qniet. 22 too. 23 high. 24 rock. 
 25 steep. 26 ditch. 27 despair. 28 exchange. 29 joy. 30 sorrow. 
 
 To § 50. 
 
 3d) tDcrbe gteid)gitltig * gegen ba^ Sanbleben. Unfcr ®drtner 
 nnrbaltnnb fdjiDad)". S}a§ Setter toirb fdjon. ^er§erbft' 
 iftnafjc*; bae Saffer n)irb fdjon' rcd)t !alt. Sir tuerben nic 
 gang ' glcid)gii(tig gegen ^inl)m ' nnb gl)re '. Serbet nic^t nn^ 
 gebnibig', mcine grennbc! Q^v Uicrbct fd)(dfrig''' ^inber, e6 
 irirb and) fd)on fpdt". S§ ift l^eip" nnb trocfen" l^ier, bie 
 
 1 indifferent. 2 weak. 3 fall. 4 near. 5 already. 6 qnite. 7 glory. 
 8 honor. 9 impatient. 10 sleepy. 11 late. 12 hot. 13 dry. 
 
READING EXERCISES. 87 
 
 ^Stragcn tt)crbcu ftaubtg '* unb ble ^runnen'" Iccr ". !^er griif)^ 
 ling ift ha, bie ^dume tncrben grim. 34 tDurbe fteberfran! in 
 $Rom; ami}''' meine (gltern luurbcn Iran!. !Die 5In!nnft'' bc§ 
 giirftcn \nurbe fd;nell '" iiberall befannt* T)a§ ^iperferreicl;'" tnurbc 
 eine ^eute'' ^llc^anbcr^, >Die Stomer inurbcn admditg" bie 
 gerren bcr Sclt. ll)ie ^arbaren im 9^orbcn, anfangS" ein 
 ©egenftanb"* bcr S3erad)tnng " ber 9?omcr, luurbcn fpater" tl)re 
 §crrcn. 
 
 14 dusty. 15 well. 16 emr>ty. 17 also. 18 arrival. 19 quick. 
 20 Persian empire. 21 prey. 22 by degrees. 23 in. the beginning. 
 24 object. 25 contempt. 26 later. 
 
 To § 55. 
 
 Q<i) Icfe etnen 9loman* tjon 5^et)tag, S'^^bcr ®ricd)c lerntc 
 eincn Xcir ber ®ebicf)te §omer§ auStDcnbig". Scr Icrnt nidjt, 
 n)dl)rcnb* er leljrt^? ^er SJicnfc^ irrt% fo lang' er ftrebt\ 
 JiDie 2:ugcnb ' mad)t hm aJlenfdjcn gliiciad) '\ !Da§ (gnbe frfinf' 
 ba^Scr!. ©er(Scgen'' !ommt t)on oben''. !Die ^lume im 
 ©arten tc^rt, tr»ie lange bie ©djonfjeit '* n)dl)rt". ^ugenb mad)t 
 md)t\iol]'% fonbcrn^' bcmutig^\ 5:)cr Gljrift gtaubt^" an bie 
 Unfterbtidjlcit'" bcr ©cclc. ^ie §iinmc( er3d^(cn" bie &jxc 
 ©ottc§. !Dic9^atur mad)t Icincn (Sprung '\ ^a§ SBer! lobt 
 ben OJieifter. 3^ur ber ^cfi^ bcr 33crnunft'' untcrfc^eibet'* hen 
 3Jicnfdjen tJom S^icre. 9^td)t§ Dcrtitr^f bie 3cit fo fcl)r tDie bie 
 5lrbeit. ^3 rcgnct" unb taut'' l)icr feit einem SJ^onat. !5)ie 
 ®icpd(^e'' ftitrjen''' mit^etofe'" t)on ben Bergen, bie glitffe 
 fc^iuellen, bieX)dmme" berften; 5lngft unb (Sd)rec!en " ^errf^t" 
 uberall. ' 
 
 1 novel. 2 part. 3 by heart. 4 while. 5 to teach. 6 err. 7 ag 
 long as. 8 strive. 9 virtue. 10 happy. 11 to ci'own. 12 blessing. 
 13 above. 14 beauty. 15 to last. 16 proud. 17 but. 18 humble. 
 19 to believe. 20 immortality. 21 proclaim. 22 leap. 23 reason. 
 24 distinguish. 25 shorten. 26 to rain. 27 to thaw. 28 2)er ®ie§= 
 'ba6), torrent. 29 to rush down. 30 roaring. 31 dike. 32 terror. 
 33 prevail. 
 
88 KEADINa EXERCISES. 
 
 „^enttft bu ba§ ?anb, ttio bie ^itronen'* b(ur)n?" ift bcr ^In* 
 fanj cinc5 ©ebidjtcd Don ©octljc. Sir Ic[cn alle S^age cin @cbid)t 
 Don (Sdjiller. §orft bu bie ^iad^tigaU"' fingcn? !5^er §irfd) ^^ 
 rul)tc'' im Sc^attcn einer Gid)c''. !Dcr DJialcr'^ ®rafe rnatt 
 ^icrc, !2anbfd)aftcn" unb 'iportrait^. S3icle ^flan^cn iDadjfcn im 
 Safi'cr. §eibclbcrg licgt am ^Icdaw l^k 5IIpcn trcnncn " bie 
 edjtDci^ " Don ^talien. S3iet Stcgcn erjcugt " Un!raut *\ Sir 
 Ic'jcn nid)t, um su*'' cffcn, fonbern \Dir cfjcn, um gu Icl)cn. 5Irbcit 
 unb (Spar[^mteit " fiil)ren gum 9?cid)tum*\ 33crmcibcn*' Gie 
 bicfe garben", fie ftcljcn'" 3f}ncn nidjt. ^ctradjte'* ben 
 '3d)meid;Icr " aU bcinen geinb. §anb(e" mtt 33or)'id)t '* unb 
 crgrcife " hen 2lugenOIi(f '\ (Srtrage *' bein (Sd)i(ffa( '^ mit @e* 
 bulb '\ §a(te 3J^aJ5 "" in alien !Dingen. 9^ebe " ftet^ bie Sal)r* 
 I)eit. 33crU-aue'''auf ©ott. 
 
 §9rcn <Sie e3 bonnem"? (55 regnet m (StriJmen'*, ba6 
 Safi'cr ftcigt'^ Don ^tunbe"' gu 8tunbe. (^ie tDiffen ben Seg, 
 fu^rcn (^le un5. "^x^ i^anb forberte'' ben ^ob bc5 2J^orbcr5 bc3 
 f>rdfibentcn. !^a5 Ocifpicr* 5llejanber§ ermutigte"" ba^ gecr'°. 
 ^ie9?i)mer erobertcn'' unb gerftorten" ^orintl), (Eafar fiird)^ 
 tcic''^ feine gcinbe nid)t gcnug, unb feinSelbftDertrauen'* iDar 
 cine ber §aupturfadjcn^' feinc^ SSerberben^"'. X)k (Solbaten 
 jeigten" mvLf' unb ^iTapfcrfeif^', allcin"" bie Xdm i()rer gitl}rcr 
 tDar fcl)ler[)aft". 33icle '^r)i(ofopI)cn bc3 5lltcrtuni5 glaubtcn nid)t 
 an bie ©otter §omer3. ©er^eig"' Derprtct" ba^ gerj bc^ 
 
 31 2)ie ^itrone, lemon. 35 nightingale. 36 stag. 37 to rest, 38 oak. 
 39 painter. 43 2)ic ?anbfd)oft, landscape. 41 separate. 42 Switzer- 
 land. 43 to produce. 44 weeds. 45 in order to. 46 economy. 
 47 riches. 48 to avoid. 49 S)ie ^arbe, colour. 50 to be becoming. 
 51 consider. 52 flatterer. 53 to act. 54 precaution. 55 seize. 56 mo- 
 ment. 57 to bear. 58 fate. 59 patience. 60 to keep within bounds. 
 61 to speak. 62 to trust. 63 thunder. 64 S)cr (Strom, tori'ent. 65 to 
 rise. 66 hour. 67 demand. 68 example. 69 encourage. 70 army, 
 71 to conquer. 72 to destroy. 73 to fear. 74 self-confidence. 75 prin- 
 cipal craise. 76 ruin. 77 to show. 78 courage. 79 bravery. 80 but. 
 81 faulty. 82 avarice. 83 to harden. 
 
HEADING EXERCISES. 89 
 
 EO^cnfd)en. Scr bet^o^nt btcfc« (S^Io^ (Spred^en (Sie itatie* 
 ni[c!) ? 9^em, aber id) lerne e^. 
 
 Q6) l^abe ein ©mpfano^immer**, em ©psimmer, ein <Stubier^ 
 simmer unb pci <Sc^Iaf jimmer. — !Da§ SBaff er !o(^t^% maljlen"' 
 ©ie hen ^affce, — Sann friiljftUcfen^^ <2ie getDoIjnlid)*^? — 
 Soljiit 9cl)cn <Ste ? tof bie ^oft, i(^ emarte ettten^ricf Don 
 meinen (SItent, — Siet)iel ®elb brau^ft** bu 3U beiner ^ieife ? 
 — (S^ ift fo !alt bet un5, bag ba^ ©af[cr in ben 3'i^wic^it G<^* 
 friert". — 3ft3r)r9lad)barti3ir!ridj'^ fo orm, iPtc er f agt ? — 
 Siffen ^kr it)o bcr ^o!tor ^cijjncr iroljnt? 3a, er n)oI)nt in 
 bcr ^eirftragc. — Sa^ madjt bcr (53artncr ? dv ^flan^t " tirfd)- 
 bciume". — ^'Ijr (cbt Don enrcm @elbc, \Dir leben Don un[erer 
 §anbc Arbeit, — $Bir Icfcn 5KieIanb§ Dberon. — T)k mn\\l 
 bcr £)per ift au^gejcic^net'S abcr bcr ^c^t taugt'^ nid;t^. — 
 (Eafar^ ©cmal}[ln olptc'' hen Xoh iljrc^ Wanned. — ©cr 2:ob 
 iibcrrafdjtc °* ^Icjcanbcr auf bcm @ipfcl"* fcinc^ ^nt)mc5 in 
 :Sabl)ton. — ^ic <Dcbattc tDar [eljr lcb^aft'% fii^rte"" abcr gn 
 {einem 9?efultate, 
 
 84 paxlour. 85 to boiL 86 to grind. 87 to breakfast, 88 usually. 
 89 to want. 90 to freeze. 91 really. 92 to plant. 93 cherry-tree. 
 9i excellent. 95 to be worth. 96 to have a presentiment of. 97 to 
 surprise. 98 acme. 99 lively. 100 to lead. 
 
 To § 58. 
 
 SKo [inb <Bk tt)al)renb bc§ (Soncerte^ cjctDcfen? 3d) l^abe ctnen 
 (Spasiergang ' urn hen (See gemadjt\ — So ^aben^Sie in -Berlin 
 gewoljnt ? Qn bcr ^^Gcrftrage. — Sann gebenfcn ' Sie ouf^S 
 Sanb 3n gel)cn? iXbcrmorgen. — Sann iDcrbc ic^ ba^ S3cr^ 
 gniifjen* ^bcn, (Sie ^n fel)cn? — SSie (ange l)aben (Bk in ^ari^ 
 getDoIjnt ? (gin Qaljx. — Qfi) fonntc ^ mcine $)ici[e au§ SO^angeP 
 an®elb nid)t fortfc^cn'. — gaben (Bk Suft% eincn 5ln§flug " 
 in^ ©ebirge mit un§ gn mac^en ? ^6) f iircl)te, e^ tcirb morgen 
 
 1 walk. 2 to take. 3 to intend. 4 pleasure. 5 could. / 6 want. 
 7 continue. 8 a min J. trip. 
 
90 KEADOa EXERCISES. 
 
 rcgnctt. — Sad l^abctt <Bk in bcr (Stabt gefauft ? (Smcn goffer '% 
 cine 9tci]"ctafd)c " unb einen 9^cgctifd)inn^\ — Sir iperben mor* 
 (jcn mit !itagc§anbrud)'^ aufl)rcd)en '\ — Sir Ijaben (ange auf 
 (Sie cjetDartet; iijarum fitib ^ie fo fpdt gefommcn? X)ic §aupt* 
 ftragc'^ JDar gcfpcrrt'% unb id; mugtc'' fomit'^ einen Umroeg" 
 madjcn, — Dcr !i:f)ce ipirb glcidj'" fcrtig fcin; tpir beabfid)ti(jcn^', 
 nad) bcm 5lbcnbef[cn in ben ^ar! gu fal)ren". — Sdj I)cibe (Sic 
 in biefem ^Regen nid)t crtuartct. <Sinb (Sic nag " gciDorben ? — ■ 
 Serben (Sic umS begteiten"? — 3}Wn 9^ad)bar I)at aUe feine 
 $ferbe t)er!auft; er gebenit and) fcin §an§ gu t)er!aufen. 
 
 :4:)ic©rabfd)rift"§erfd)eldlautct": „(vr f)at bic StememDcIt 
 unS nal)c geriicft" Kepler \}at bic ^BciDcgung^gcfe^c " bcr ^(ane- 
 ten entbedt". ^icfcDfficierc ^aben in 9J?e^*i!o gcbient", !Der 
 ^aifer ift unferm ^iirgermcifter fel}r getro(jen^\ Unferc (5i)cn* 
 bal)nen" ipcrben balb in ben ®cfit5 " bed Staated iibcrgel)en ", 
 3d) I)abc (angc nidjtd Don meincm 53rnber oel)ort; id) fiird)tc, er 
 ift in fciner (Stcttuncj" nid)t glitctlid). 3ic finb fcljr freunb(id), 
 nad) meincm 35ettcr gu fragen; er tuirb 5(}ncn hatii feine 5luf* 
 iDartung" mad)cn. Tlc'm Dnld ift in 5luftra(icn fd)neK rcid) 
 geworben unb unrb balb nad) §aufe 3urii(f!el)rcn''. Dr. 3al)n 
 ift nod) nidjt t)on5lfri!a gurud. gerr M)(er \)at bieSlbfidjt" 
 feine ^inbcr nac^ ^eutfd)(anb in bic Sd)ule gu fd)i(fcn. Sir 
 iDcrbcn einen S^eil unfered ©aufed bcr gamilie bed iDoftord iiber^ 
 Iaffen'\ gd ift bcr ©cfunbr)eit" gutraglid)*" bic gcnfter bed 
 Sol)n5immcrdtaga(^" mel)nna(d" gu offncn". ^iefed2J?dr* 
 c^en*Mft alien ^inbem bcfannt. §aben Sic gcine'd @ebid)te 
 
 10 trunk. 11 satchel. 12 nmbrella. 13 day-break. 14 set out. 
 15 main-street. 16 to close. 17 was obliged. 18 thus. 19 round- 
 about way. 20 in a moment. 21 to purpose. 22 to drive. 23 wet, 
 21 to accompany. 25 epitaph. 26 to read, run. 27 law of motion. 
 28 to discover. 29 to serve. 30 favorable. 31 S)ie (Sifcnba^n, railroad. 
 32 possession. 33 to pass over. 31 position. 35 respects. 36 return. 
 37 intention. 38 to yield. 39 health. 40 conducive. 41 every day. 
 42 several times. 43 to open. 44 tale. 
 
READING EXERCISES. 91 
 
 gctefctt ? SKir lerncn tagltt^ erne gabel Don ^effing au6tncnbtg *\ 
 Tiapokon l)atte !cine goffnung, au§ bcr ©cfangcttfdjaft " ber 
 (ingtanbcr ju cntlommen '\ 
 
 45 by heart. 46 cajDtivity. 47 to escape. 
 
 To §59 — §60. 
 Dftlad)t* ber3]^unb% tocm bct^^cq it^eint'. ^lu^cr ®ott 
 
 voav nicmanb * ^^^^O^ ' ^i^f^^ ^^t'- ^^^S ^f^ ^^^ ^^G ^^^*'^^) ^^^'^ 
 fi^riftcn \ !ur3 * aber unb inidj'am " burd) ^ctfpiclc '". ^a^ bcr 
 (Sinnaljme" Don ^roja teilten'' bie ©riedjcti bte ^cute'' unb 
 fcQcItcn'* nad) bcr ©ctmat Tldn£)nld \vav fritter'' Inciter" 
 unb Icben^frol) ''; jctit '* ift er finftcr '" unb t)cr[^(offcn'°. ©nc 
 Dtciljc"' t)onUngIud§falIen'% bcfonbcrS" abcr bcrS^ob fctner 
 gran, Ijabcn fcincn Tint unb fcin S3crtraucn'* erfdjiittcrt ". 
 3}lorgcn u^crbcn \vh unfcr l^anb^au^ bcjicljcn '". 9lad) bcm Wllt^ 
 tagcj'fcn fpiclcn tuir geiro^nlic^ ''^ (Sc^ad)'\ Wlit (^onncnauf* 
 gang''' i^crlaffcn'" bie S3ogc( il)rc 9^cfter. <Scit eincm^onat 
 I)abe id) nidjt^ t)on meincm iSrnbcr gcljort. SJ^ojart licbte bie 
 ^unft^^fo(c{benfd)aftac^'% bag er il)r fcine ©cfunb^cit " auf^ 
 opfcrte '*. Scnn n)ir JJ^'cube '' obcr 2cib " im ^erjen tragen '% 
 U)iinfd)en^^ tt)ir bie (S^'cgcntoart'" einc§ grcunbc^. 
 
 S^a, ti3o bie W^t*' ruft", mug " unfcr S5ortetI" fc^tDcicjen". 
 Qm filter *' erntcn'" Ujir, xoa^ Wiv in bcr 3^ugenb gcfdt''' I)aben. 
 (gotuic'' bcr Scil)raud;'' ha^ gcben ber ^ol)Ie'" erfrif^t "^^ fo 
 
 1 smile. 2 moutli. 3 weep. 4 nobody. 5 ■witness. 6 deed. ' 7 S)ic 
 S5orfc^rlft, precept. 8 short. 9 efficient. 10 ®a^ SBeifpiel, example. 
 11 capture. 12 divide. 13 booty. 14 to sail. 15 formerly. 16 merry. 
 17 cheerful. 18 at present. 19 gloomy. 20 reserved. 21 series. 
 22 accident, 23 especially. 24 confidence. 25 to shake. *^6 to move 
 into. 27 habitually. 28 chess. 29 sunrise, 30 leave. 31 art. 32 pas- 
 sionately. 33 health. 34 to sacrifice. 35 joy. 36 sorrow. 37 bear. 
 38 to wish. 39 presence. 40 duty. 41 to call. 42 must. 43 in- 
 terest, 44 be silent. 45 old age. 46 to reap. 47 to sow. 48 as. 
 49 frankincense. 50 coal. 51 to refresh. 
 
92 EEADIXa EXERCISES. 
 
 crfrtfdjt ba6 (3tM " bie goffnung " bc6 gcrgcn^^. T)cr SJienfd^ 
 ift Tiic "* fo fd)on, al^ xotnn er urn 33cr5eit)ung " bittet ''. 3^ 
 leucjtte ^'^ mdjt, ha^ id) ntirecf)t ge^abt l^abe; bod) meiue ^* id^, ift 
 c^Ttutt" ^cii, ha^ U)r e5 t)erGe§t''" xtub mit mcmer 9^eue" ^u* 
 fricbcn feib. ^onnen (Sie mir fagen, ob ^rofeffor Corner l)ier 
 JDoIjut? ^r ^at bb3 bon3cftertt '' l)icr geroo^nt; jel^t lror)nt er in 
 bcr SSorftabt". Qd) bebauere aufrid)tig'*, bag <kk no(^ immer 
 untDo^l fiub; \)ahcn ^ic hm 5lr3t bcfragt? (Sie fragcn, ob icf) 
 ben Dberften fenne; id) fenne i^n nur tjon 5^nfcI)n*^ -3"C^ gel)e 
 langfam"' ijorau^"''; iDenn il)r leine 3<^it Dcr(icrt'% tDerbet i^r 
 mid) leid)t*' emt)olen'°. (S3 ift gwcifel^aft ", ob eine li^cnfung'' 
 ber ^uftfc^iffe " moglid) '* ift. §crobot befd)reibt " in feiner ©e- 
 {d)ic^te bie(Sitten" unb (^cbraud^c" aUer ^Zationen, xodd)t er 
 auf feinen $Reifen fennen gelernt l)at. 
 
 52 prayer. 53 hope. 54 never. 55 pardon. 56 to ask for. 57 to 
 deny. 58 to think. 59 now. 63 to forget. 61 repentance. 62 the 
 day before yesterday. 63 suburb. 64 sincerely. 65 sight. 66 slowly. 
 67 ahead. 68 lose. 69 easily. 70 overtake. 71 dubious. 72 steering. 
 73 balloon. 74 possible. 75 describe. 76 S)ie <©itte, manner. 77 2)er 
 ©ebrauc^, custom. 
 
THEORETICAL PART 
 
A 
 
 51 
 
 a B b 
 
 a S b 
 
 c 
 
 S c 
 
 D 
 
 d E e 
 
 b g e 
 
 L/C/ y<^ .^^y^ ^ 
 
 X.. 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 F 
 
 5 
 
 f G g H 
 
 f @ 9 €> 
 
 h I i 
 
 
 K k 
 
 yj 
 
 %^ 
 
 ^c^^^^^^^C/ 
 
 W 
 
 L 
 
 1 M m 
 
 I m m 
 
 N n 
 
 ^ n 
 
 O o 
 
 So 
 
 p p 
 
 ^^ 
 
 ^C/.^^^<t^ 
 
 aC^^i^ 
 
 
 U u 
 
 a q 
 
 R r S 
 
 9t r @ 
 
 S B 
 
 f « 
 
 / 
 
 T t 
 
 S t 
 
 ^J/^7JM^ 
 
 Vv Ww Xx Yy Zz 
 
 Compound Consonants. 
 ch ck 88 8z Bch sp 8t th tz 
 

 <y 
 
 /^^^>/^^^^ 
 
 C/j^^y '/^^^^/f<f^-iy^ 0^/>t^/^-^ \ 
 
 >^>e^i 
 
 '^€yc^v^. 
 
 
 i^i^-u< 
 
 '^^<ri^-^-t^ 
 
 ?>^^>^^>^^^-" 
 
ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 ALPHABET. 
 
 In tlie Middle Ap;es, the form of the E.omcan letters underwent, in 
 the hands of monkish scribes, many changes. Most of the European 
 nations used, at the time of the invention of printing, the form then 
 in vogue; but sooner or later they returned to the plainer Roman char- 
 acters, while the Germans alone have retained it up to the present day. 
 
 1. The German alphabet consists of the following letters: 
 
 German 
 letters. 
 
 Roman 
 equivalents. 
 
 German 
 name. 
 
 German 
 letters. 
 
 Roman 
 equivalents. 
 
 German 
 name. 
 
 51 a 
 
 a 
 
 ah 
 
 ^ 
 
 n 
 
 n 
 
 en 
 
 ^ b 
 
 b 
 
 ba 
 
 D 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 e c 
 
 c 
 
 tsa 
 
 ? 
 
 P 
 
 P 
 
 pa 
 
 T) b 
 
 d 
 
 da 
 
 Q 
 
 q 
 
 q 
 
 koo 
 
 g e 
 
 e 
 
 a 
 
 ^ 
 
 r 
 
 r 
 
 er 
 
 g f 
 
 f 
 
 ef 
 
 <B 
 
 f« 
 
 s 
 
 es 
 
 ® g 
 
 g 
 
 ga 
 
 Z 
 
 t 
 
 t 
 
 ta 
 
 © I) 
 
 h 
 
 hall 
 
 U 
 
 u 
 
 u 
 
 u(oo) 
 
 S i 
 
 i 
 
 e(ee) 
 
 ^ 
 
 'O 
 
 V 
 
 fou 
 
 3 i 
 
 J 
 
 yot 
 
 SB 
 
 lu 
 
 w 
 
 va 
 
 t ! 
 
 k 
 
 Vah 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 s 
 
 ix 
 
 8 ( 
 
 1 
 
 el 
 
 9 
 
 i) 
 
 y 
 
 ipsilon 
 
 m m 
 
 m 
 
 em 
 
 3 
 
 S 
 
 z 
 
 tset 
 
2 AI.PHASET. [§ 1^ 
 
 a. The letter f is never used at llie end of a word, but § is 
 substituted for it Thus, the nominatiye of ©lafe is @Ia8. 
 This § is retained before another -word in composition: as, 
 (^(aSglocfc, glass-belL Also before a suffix (§ 10) commencing 
 \vitli a comonant, $ is used- Compai'e: 9iofe, 9to§d)CTi; Icfen, 
 lc05ar. Finally, it occurs before some consonants— especiaUv 
 ! — in words of foreign origin mostly: as, 2}ZuiJfc(, 23la^!e. 
 
 2. Besides the six vowel-sounds of the alphabet there are: 
 a. The modified vowels: %{ a, O o, U it. 
 
 They -were developed through the phonetic assimilation of n, o, ii f o 
 an i or j-sonnd in a following syllable: as, ^ii)C, from chasi; jd^Oll, from 
 sconi; ^iillc, from hulja. 
 
 The dots ai'e an abridgment of the letter c. "When the mod- 
 ified vowel is a capital, many authors ^Tite %t, De, Ue in- 
 stead of % r, il 
 
 The scientific name for the modified vowel-sound is „Um* 
 laut/ change of sound. 
 h. The diphthongs: oi, ct, cu, au, ait. 
 
 Di and ui, too, are diphthongs, but of exceedingly rare occurrence. 
 The diphthongs a\), Cl), and ot) occur, at present, only in proper names 
 and foreign nouns, and correspond to ai, ci, oi. 
 
 3. Tliree vowels: a, t, o occur double: ^a, ce, 00 : — ^aar, 
 §ecr, ^oot ; when modified, aa and 00 lose one of the two 
 vowels: thus, ^drd)eu, ^Ote. 
 
 4 Combinations of cojisonants are: d), ng, ^I), tl), fd), 5 {=" f 
 and 3), all of which represent simple sounds; and d))', pf, ^ 
 (= t and 3), qu, fp, ft, which represent compound sounds. 
 
 5. All consonants, except I), d), fd), j, 0, H), and ^, j)ccur 
 doubled: as, ff, ff, etc.; but instead of !!, 33 wo wiite rf, ^. 
 
 Obs. The letters jj and ff, although alike in sound, cannot be inter- 
 changed in writing. In the middle of a word, use ^ after long vowels: 
 as, (Strafe; and ff after sJiort ones, except before a consonant: as, Ijaffcn; 
 but: er l^^t. At the end of the word, jj is used exclusively like in ^a^, 
 
 6. Consonants when pronounced are either accompanied by 
 the voice, L e., by the vibration of the vocal chords, or not 
 In the former case they are called sonant, in the latter, surd. 
 Sonant are: b, b, g, j, I, m, U, ng, r, f, il). All the rest ai-e 
 sui'cL 
 
§ 8] ALPHABET. 3 
 
 7. Capitals are employed not only at the beginning of 
 sentences, of lines in poetry, and of direct quotations, as in 
 English, but also: 
 
 a. Tor all subntantwes, or words used substantively: as, bCK 
 §crr, the master; ta^ 2Bie, the how. 
 
 Note especially the adjectives connected with t)ier, etn)a§, 
 ntc^t^, etc. (§ 85, 3): as, Diet ©ute^, ti\m^ @roge§, ntd)B 9^eue^; 
 also the adjectives and ordinal numerals placed with the 
 article after a proper name: as, ^ar( bcr ©roje, §emri(^ ber 
 iBlcrte. 
 
 h. For pronouns of the third person, when used in address 
 (§98): thus, l^aben @te 3^^ §ciu^ t)er!auft? have you sold 
 your house? 
 
 c. For pronouns of the second person, when intended to 
 come under the notice of the person addressed (as in letters) : 
 thus, id) fd)i(fe 3)ir tjicrmit Sieine ^ltd)cr, I send you herewith 
 your books. 
 
 The pronoun of the Jirst person id), on the contrary, has 
 always a small initial 
 
 d. For adjectives derived from names of persons or places: 
 as, bie ^(atonifd)e ^I)Uo[opt)ic, bcr S^rojanifd^e llrteg. 
 
 But for adjectives of nationality small initials are used: as, 
 \i(X^ bcutfc^C 9tcid), the German empii-e. 
 
 e. For adjectives and pronouns used in connection with 
 titles and in comphmentary address: as, (^e. ^aiferlidje ©ol^eit, 
 his imperial majesty. 
 
 PRONUNCIATION.* 
 
 8. Quantity. 
 
 I. Besides aU diphthongs, the following vowels are long: 
 a. Every vowel doubled or followed by 1^: as, (^aal, §eer, 
 
 S3oot, et)re. 
 h. Every Jinal vowel with the exception of c : — bu, 'tiCi, \o, 
 
 (Sofa. 
 
 * This chapter is an extract from the author's ,,'J) a § S) e il t j cf) e i Tit 
 50lunbe beS ^aniioDcranerS" (Hahn, Hannover), to which tho 
 Btudeut is referred for fuller information. 
 
4 ALPHABET. [§ 8- 
 
 c. ETery vowel, when the syllable to which it belongs ends 
 in a single consonant: — Zoh, dlot, ©rab, tragbar. 
 
 H A Yowel is short when the syllable to which it belongs 
 ends in more than one consonant: as, 5lbt, ^ttt 
 
 Before 6), fc^, &nd final % however, long vowels occur as well as short 
 ones: — ®(f)macf), iBacf); '>!fl\)d)C, ^irf); gug, ^{u§; while before ^ in the 
 middle of a word the vowel is always long : as, ®ti"^^c. 
 
 9. The following list contains a description of all vocal and 
 consonantal sounds in alphabetical order: 
 
 a has the sound of a iafatJier : — @abe, SBaffc. 
 
 ao is like long a: — ^aar. 
 
 a like ai in air: — ^dl% SSotlbe. 
 
 01, the dij)hthong, is very^ much like i in kind: — ^aifer, 
 2)2ai. 
 
 au, the diphthong, is almost precisely like ou in house: — 
 
 an almost like oi in boil: — §dufer. 
 
 b hke b: — halh, iRebc; but at the end of a word, or before 
 sui'd consonants (§ 5), it is very much like p; — ab, QCljabt, 
 ^rcb^, 3i>eibd)en. 
 
 t before one of the vowels a, o, u, an is like k: — (Earrierc, 
 ^onto, Gultu^, caufat; before the other vowels, like ts: — den* 
 fur, ciuiL In many words of French origin it is Hke a shai-p 
 s: — (Seruicc, balancieren. 
 
 CC before e or i, is like kfs: — 5lccent, 5Icci[c; before the other 
 vowels, like cc in accord: — Slccufatiu. 
 
 1^ is a guttural sj)irant after the vowels a, 0, it, au : — ^ad), 
 !0od), ^ud), O^aud). After all other letters, it is a palatal spu-- 
 ant: — ^ed)er, id), ^dd)c, I'ddjcr, ^iid)er, ^Bdudje, didd), cud), 
 toc[d)c, ?crd)c. 
 
 In the diminutive syllable d)cn, it is always palatal, no matter 
 what letter precedes:^ — @ofad}cn, 9J^dbd)en. 
 
 a. d) initial occm'S ir foreign words chiefly, and has then the 
 jyalatal soimd, when followed by c or i: — (EI)emie, (il)iruvcj; 
 before the vowels a, 0, or any consonant, it is like k: — (il)a* 
 rafter, (E^or, (il)rift. 
 
 b. Finally, d) is hke sh in words of French origin: — (5I)auffcc, 
 
 Gl)Cf. 
 
 I^f, (1)0, when belonging to the same stem, ai'e like ks: — 
 
§ 9] PRONUNCIATION. , 6 
 
 ItJac^fen, ^^ndj^. Otherwise they are pronounced separately: 
 — irac^fatn, be$ 9?ei(l)6. 
 
 rf and ct|tt are hke ck and cqu. 
 
 b is hke d: as, dlthc; but almost like t, when final, or before 
 a surd consonant (§ 6): — ^tnb, eilenb^, ^aubdjcn. 
 
 bt, when belonging to the same stem, does not differ from 
 ^: — (Stabt. 
 
 tf when followed by one consonant, is either close like a in 
 base: as, eiuig; or open like ai in air; as, 5BciV "When followed 
 by more than one consonant, it is almost always open like e 
 mend: — @enbung. 
 
 The e of many prefixes and suffixes (§ 10) is slighted and 
 obscured: — ^cfud), genug, 2;t[c^d}en, 'Dlame, 33ogel, cifcrn. 
 
 CC, when both belonging to the same stem, are pronounced 
 lilve long c, i. e., hke a in base: — WlctX, ©cele. 
 
 tif the diphthong, is very much like i in kind: — eiuc !(ciuc 
 
 tXl, the diphthong, is much like oi in boil: — (Sule, eudj. 
 
 f like/. 
 
 g initial is like gr in «7iV/; — @an^r (\xaVL. 
 
 At the end of the word, it coincides with d), to wit: it is 
 guttural si3irant after a, 0, U, au: as, ^ag, bog, trUQ, 5(ug'; 
 otherwise, palatal: — 3Beg, <Stieg, ^^^Gr ^erg. 
 
 In the middle of a word, it has the sound of initial g, when 
 a vowel follows: as, Sage, ^erge; and that of final g, when a 
 consonant foUows: — 9J^agb, fragft, Utgt. 
 
 gn, in German words, is hke gn in ignorant: as, ©UQbe; in 
 foreign words, like ngji in long-necked: — ^fl^oraut, T)iagnofe, 
 3}?agnet, (Stgna(; or like ni in companion: — ^aftagtiettc, 
 ii^brgnette. 
 
 !^, at the beginning of a word, and in the suffixes ^ett and 
 ^aft is like h: — §au^, greiljeit, tra^rl)aft ; also in ^2l{)ortt and 
 Ul)U, in the interjections ([\)(\, o{)0, and in some foreign words: 
 ,as, aOftral)icrcn, tontraljieren. Elsewhere I) is not sounded: — 
 geljcn, <Stro^. 
 
 i is lilie i in machine or sin, according as it is long or short 
 (§8): — 9)ane, 9iiune. 
 
 ic, in German words, is Hke ee in bee, the e only serving to 
 lengthen i: — 9^iefc, ^nic. In many words oi foreign origin 
 both vowels are pronounced: — gamilte, (iSUeut, ^icravd). 
 
 i like y in you: — jener 3ubc. 
 
6 . PRONUNCIATION. [§ 9- 
 
 ! Uke k, even before n: — ^nabc, ^od)cn. 
 I is somewhat different from the English /, being produced 
 by touching the upper fi'ont-teeth with the tongue: — Sanb, 
 
 m is like m. 
 
 It like n. In words taken from French, however, it is like 
 ng in long: — ^a(fon. 
 
 ng, in the middle of a word, is like ng in f^inger: as, j^inger. 
 Vilien Jinal, it is like nk in sink: — @ang, ^Offitung. In many 
 pai*ts of Germany, however, final ng, too, is sounded like ng in 
 song. 
 
 is either like o in nofe, or like French o in pomme, accord- 
 ing as it is long or short (§8): — obcr, Sonne. 
 
 ij long is hke French eu in peu: — fd)bn, l)orcn; b short, is 
 somewhat like French eu in neuf: — ^bffel, fbnntc. 
 
 oi, the diphthong, is much like oi in boil: — ^roi^an. 
 
 00 Hke long o: — ^oot, l^oo^. 
 
 |1 Hke p. 
 
 In |if, pf, and |jt both letters are sounded respectively: — 
 •iPfau, rupfen, ^^falm, ^tolemdu^. 
 
 ^^ is Hke// — ^l)afe, (g(ept)ant. 
 
 qu is ahuost like kv ; the v, however, being purely labial: — 
 Cuclle, quer. 
 
 t diffei-s from r, being articulated by the vibration of the 
 uvula: — 9iei^, ©err, barren. 
 
 f is like z: — ^onne, 9io)e, getfcn, ?in]e, gerfe; except when 
 either preceded or followed by any other consonant than I, tn, 
 n, r, in which case it is Hke s in son. Examples: (Stein, 21ft, 
 *ip)a(m, Sefpe, grbfe. 
 
 g is always like s in son: — T^a^ §an^. 
 
 \6) is like sh: — ^ufd). 
 
 fp and p, at the beginning of a word, may either be pro- 
 nounced like sp, st, or equally weU Hke shj), sht: — fpred)en, 
 fte()en. In the middle of a word, the former way only is ad- 
 missible: — Sefpe, ^efte. 
 SHkes^-; — ^^offe. 
 , see imder fp. 
 
 ^ like s in son: — gllfe* ^^ the difference between ^ and 
 fl in ^-riting, see § 5. 
 
 i is somewhat different from /, the tongue touching the upper 
 front-teeth for its aiiiculation: — Xob, bctct. 
 
§ 10] PRONUNCIATION. 7 
 
 t^ does not differ from t: — tI)Un, Only when I) belongs to 
 
 another stem than t, it is pronounced separately: as, ^etl)au^« 
 
 it in some foreign words is pronounced like ^j: — Station, 
 
 ^ like ts: — @(f)U^. 
 
 tt like 00 in moon or book, according as it is long or short 
 
 (§8): — «ubc, «unb. 
 
 ii hke French u: — 9^ul)e, ^iirbe, 
 
 Ui, the diphthong, is somewhat like ui in ruin: — p^UU 
 
 t) hke/, when final: as, "ifaffit); and in the following words: 
 SBater, ©eoatter, ^eild)en, 33etter, 3Siet), l)te(, t)ier, 33ae6, 33oger, 
 SSogt, 33o(!, DoK, Don, bor, SSefper, SSice*, gret)c(, l^et)!oje, garoe, 
 ©flaue, and the prefix t)er==. 
 
 In all other words, i3 is Hke i;.- — 3Sit)at, ^latjicr, ncrt)OfS. 
 
 m like v: — ■ ^ctk; but after fcf) and ^^ its pronunciation is 
 purely labial, the action of the front-teeth being entirely ex- 
 cluded: as, (k^wanif ^voan^x^. 
 
 y hke^«; — 3:e^t, 5)^t^e. 
 
 i) stands between it and t: — ml)tf)ifd}, St)preffe» 
 
 J is like ts: — ^cit, ^^CtJ. 
 
 ACCENT.* 
 
 10. The accent, in simple words, regularly rests on the root- 
 sylloble. Examples: ®e=re'd)t, 33er^bi'nb=ung, freu'nb4ic^*er, 33er* 
 ei'n^am^^UTtg, (^e=fe'U4rf)aft^er4n. 
 
 No prefixes nor suffixes can take the accent, except the 
 following ; 
 
 1. The prefixes ant, er;^, mt^, ur: — a'nUrorten, (S'q^ 
 Ijerpg, mi'B^bilUgen, U'r^prung. 
 
 2. The prefix Utt in all substantives and adverbs: as, U'n* 
 menfd), U'tl-gern ; also in all adjectives, if the component of un 
 exists independently in the language: as, u'n*angene()m, u'n- 
 banfbar; but, un^ci'gUd), unspeakable, because faglid) does not 
 exist. A number of adjectives ending in the heavy syllables 
 bar and lid) make exception to the rule. 
 
 3. The suffixes ei and ier : as, 5lbt=ei', 9f?eg4e'r*uncj; and enb 
 in (eb=e'nb4g. 
 
 * For fuller information on tliis subject, which cannot be treated here 
 exhaustively, the student is referred to the author's "Lehre vom Acccni 
 der deutschen Sprache, " New York, F. W. Christern. 
 
8 
 
 ACCENT. 
 
 [§10- 
 
 Note.— Althongh the prefixes and suffixes will be treated in a later 
 chapter, we subjoin here, for the sake of reference, an alphabetical list 
 of the more common ones: 
 
 ant: antmortcn 
 be: bercbcn 
 cmp: cmpfangcn 
 cut: cntfcrnen 
 
 bar: frud)tbar 
 djen: 2;t| djdjen 
 c: @roJ5C 
 ci: ©rudcrci 
 d: 'Ji^cdd 
 en, cm: cjolbcn, 
 
 l)o(3ern 
 I)cit: ^d)onl)cit 
 icr: S^urnicr 
 
 Prefixes. 
 
 cr: cnniibcn 
 ers: (ir5l)cr5oa 
 Oe: @efal)r 
 mi§: migltngcn 
 
 Suffixes. 
 
 ig: frcubig 
 in: §clbm 
 i[rf): Ijcrrifd) 
 Icit: feanfbarfeit 
 Ici: allertci 
 lein: 2^i|'d)(cin 
 lic^: finblid) 
 ling: ^iingting 
 
 un: ungcm 
 ur: Urfprnng 
 ber: Dcrbinbcn 
 Ser: 3erbei^cn 
 
 ni^: ^cnntniS 
 ^al: !^abfa( 
 ch mtid 
 ant: (angfam 
 d)aft: grcnnbfdjaft 
 turn: 9?cid)tmn 
 ling: ^emcgung 
 3ig(6tg):bicnig,brei- 
 
 11. In compounds the accent rests on tlie determining com- 
 ponent (§ 212, 2), which occupies the first place in substantives, 
 adjectives, and verbs, as in ^^I'pfclbaum, aj^ple-ti-ee; ro'fenrot, 
 rose-red; au'ffd)(te^en, unlock; and usually the last in particles: 
 as, bcrgau'f, uphill; gcgenii'bcr, opposite; obgfci'd), althougk 
 
 DIVISION OF SYIiABLES. 
 
 12. "When a division of syllables is necessarj'-, compound 
 words and those A^ith prefixes (§ 10) are di'sided accordin<j to 
 their foiTaation: as, §an^M)nnb, gc-rcdjt. Also words with 
 suffixes (§ 10), if the suffix begins with a consonant: as, S^^^O* 
 ling, n)irt4idj. 
 
 Otherwise, every single consonant in the middle of a word is 
 put on the second hne: as, ba^bcn, rei^bcn, ge=I)cn. 
 
 Also d), \d}, pi), t\)f and §, as representing simple sounds (§ 4), 
 as well as bt, are put on the second line: thus, brc*d)Cn, Una* 
 fd)cn, (v(c4il)ant, 'ipan4[}cr, rci^gen, ^Std^^bte. 
 
 Of several consonants in the middle of a word the last one 
 is placed upon tlie second line: as Ijal^tcn, f)nf^ten, bc['[C0 
 Se|4ic, rnp=fcn, Sldj^d, en=gcr, fdj(an4er, fiird;4cn. 
 
 d becomes ft: as, ^d)ncMe. 
 
§14] THE APOSTEOPHE. ^ARTICLES AND DEC!LENSION. 9 
 
 The double consonants ^ and 5 are always put on the second 
 line: as, §C4*C, bei-^Ctl, Ijct-^en; also pf after m and r: as, !dm^ 
 
 Note. — Tlie sign nsed in the division, of syllables is also employed: 
 
 1. In abbreviations such as Slfloxh^ unb @ubft)inb (for 9Zorbft)iub imb 
 ©iibtinnb); SSofallange unb ^^urge (for iBofaltdnge unb ^ofolfuqc). 
 
 2. In compound proper names, and in adjectives derived from tbem: 
 as, Sung-@tiIIinr|, Stcujs^Orci], tie bcut[d)=ameri!anijc^e ^reffe. 
 
 3. In long and cumbrous compounds: as, £)I)crap^cIIation8geric^t§=» 
 ^raftbent, ha§ gur=fid^4ctBft4etn; especially for tbe sake of clearness, to 
 distinguish, e. g., @eueral[tab§=5lrst, and @cncraI^(Stab6ar3t. 
 
 THE APOSTROPHE. 
 
 13. 1. The omission of any letter in writing is marked by 
 .the apostrophe: thus, ha^ glaub' id) md)t !Der IiciCge (tieidge) 
 
 In contractions of the preposition with the article (§ 47), 
 the apostrophe is no longer in use: — an^, bcim. 
 
 2. Proper names do not require the apostrophe before the 
 genitive ending §: as, ®oetf)e^ S^lUft. But with those which 
 cannot take any ending in the genitive (§ 36, 1), the case is 
 signified by the apostrophe, as in English : thus, GbcrS' 
 9^omanc. 
 
 ARTICLES AND THEIR DECLENSION. 
 
 14. The definite article assumes a special form for each of 
 the three genders: thus, b er SSatcr, the father; bte SJZutter, the 
 mother; ha^ ^inb, the child. 
 
 In many cases, wbicli will be treated in a later chapter, the German 
 noun requires the article where the English does not: as, haQ l^ebeil ijl 
 fur^, life is short. 
 
 There being four cases of declension, the definite article 
 presents the following changes: 
 
 
 Si 
 
 ngular. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 masc. 
 
 fem. neui 
 
 m. f. n. 
 
 Nominative: 
 
 ber 
 
 bte ba^ 
 
 bie, the 
 
 Genitive: 
 
 bc§ 
 
 ber be§ 
 
 ber, of the 
 
 Dative: 
 
 bem 
 
 ber bem 
 
 ben, to the 
 
 Accusative: 
 
 ben 
 
 bie ba§ 
 
 bie, the 
 
10 ABTICLE3 AXD DECLENSION. ^NOUNS. [§ 14- 
 
 2)13 in eolloquifil language is often abridged to '^ : as, fomm ^cr, ttJcnil 
 bit '5 ipcrj i}a\tl Goe.* Here ! if you dare. 
 
 fl. The following pronominal adjectives are decHned in the 
 same way: 
 bicfcr, biefc, biefe^, this; aller, alle, aik^, all; 
 jcncr, jcne, jetie^, that; iDcldjcr, incldjc, ir)clci)e«, which? 
 
 icbcr, jebe, jebe^, each; 
 
 Full declension of bicfcr : 
 Singular. Plural, 
 
 m. f . n. m. f . n. 
 
 N. biefcr bicfe biefe^ {i)it^), this bie 
 
 t, these 
 
 G. bicfc^ biefcr biefe^, of this biefcr, of these 
 
 T>. bicfcm biejcr biefem, to this biefen, to these 
 
 A- bicjcn bicfe biefcr (bie^), this biefe, these 
 
 15. The indefinite article is declined like the definite, ex- 
 cept in the nominatiTs masculine, and the nom. and ace 
 neuter, where it takes no ending at all Hence : — 
 
 m. f. n. 
 
 N. tin cine cin, a 
 
 G. einc§ einer eine^, of a 
 
 D. einem einer einent, to a 
 
 A- einen einc cin, a 
 Si, The jKDssessives mcin, bctn, fcin, i^r (my, thy, his, her), 
 unfcr, euer, il)r (our, yom-, their), and the indefinite tein, no, 
 foUow the same mode of inflection as the indefinite article. 
 In the nomraative plural they are like bicf cr : — meinc, bcine, 
 fcinc, unfcrc, cucre, i^rc. 
 
 NOUNS. 
 
 DECLENSION. 
 
 SINGULAE. 
 
 The singular of nouns is formed according to the following 
 niles: 
 
 16. Masculine and neuter nouns take § (c^) in the gen- 
 ilivey and no obhgator}^ ending in the other cases. In the dative 
 
 * Goe. stands for Goethe. 
 
§ 16] DECLENSION. H ~ 
 
 they can take an c, except those ending in cf, em, en, er. Ex« 
 
 amples: 
 
 N. bcr ^efel)l, the order 'iia^ ^t%, the net 
 
 G. bc^ ^cfel)l§, of the order be^ 9^e^e§, of the net 
 D. bcm^efel)l(e), to the order bcm 9le^(c), to the net 
 A. hzxi ^efel)(, the order ba^ 9^e^, the net 
 
 Note.— The ending e§, instead of g, is required after a hissing sound 
 {\, % f d), %) : as, gu^ : gen. ^u^ e g, and preferred with all monosyllahiG 
 nouns, especially those which end in b or b : as. ber 23inb : bc§ SSinbcg; 
 bag ©rab : beg ©rabeg. 
 
 Exceptions: 
 
 1, Masculine nouns in e take n throughout: as, 
 
 N. ber ^nabe, the boy 
 G. be^ l^nabcn, of the boy 
 D. bcm ^naben, to the boy 
 A. ben ^nabcn, the boy. 
 
 The only exception is ber ^cife, cheese, which is declined as fol- 
 lows: gen. beg ^ajeg, dat. bent ^dfe, ace. ben M\t. 
 
 a, A group of nouns in e have a secondary nominative in 
 en, and form their genitive from this; thus, bcr 3^ame (;Jkmen), 
 name: gen. bc^ i)tamen^. 
 The others are: 
 
 ber gunfe, spark ber ©anfe, heap 
 
 ber ©ebante, thought ber Same, seed 
 
 ber ©efalle, favor ber ©c^abe, damage 
 
 ber ©lanbe, faith ber SBille, wiU. 
 
 S)er 53u(^ftabe, letter of the alphabet, although a nominative 33u(^= 
 ftaben does not exist, follows this analogy: gen. beg S3n(^ftabe n g. 
 
 2. A number of monosyllabic nouns which dropped their 
 original ending c, take en throughout; thus, ber SD^enfd), mar.: 
 gen. bc^ SO^enfc^cn, dat. bem 30^enfcl)ett ace. ben 9}ienfd)cn. The 
 others are: 
 
 W^\[, ancestor @C(f, fop §trt, shepherd 
 
 ^dr, bear @efe(I, companion \^ump, scamp 
 
 J^urfd), lad @raf, count OJioIjr, moor 
 
 ^t}rift, Christian @reif, griffin "^IdXX, fool 
 
 J^inf, finch §elb, hero ^hx\), nei-ve 
 
 gUrft, j)rince ^crr, master Oct)iS, ox 
 
12 NOUNS. [§ !&* 
 
 ^rin,^, prince <Spat> sparrow 'i^\)OX, fool 
 
 (^d)cnt, cup-bearer (StrauJ, ostrich 
 and tlie compounds: 
 
 bcr ^Q^eftol^, bachelor bcr Untcrtl)an, subject 
 
 ber -Snfap, inmate bet ^^orfaI)r, predecessor. 
 
 9ri)n, ©cd, ^in!, ©reif, ®pab, <Strau§ may also foi-m their singular 
 like ^cfcljl (§ 16). 
 
 3. !^a5 §cr5, heart, is declined as foUows: bc§ ^erjen^, 
 
 bem^ergen, ba^gerj. 
 
 17. Feminine nouns are invariable: thus, bie 5^au, woman; 
 gen, bcr Srau; dai bcr grau; ace. bie grau. 
 
 1. Formerly, feminine nouns were inflected, and a few retain in 
 certain phrases their old endings; thus, Quf Srbctl, on earth; mit @^reil, 
 with honor; mit ^reubcil, with pleasure; in 2}Zittctl, in the midst (of); 
 t)on ©eitelt, on the part (of). These examples are all in the dative sin- 
 gular from the respective nominatives (Svbc, (Sljrc, ^reubc, 3Jiitte, @eitc. 
 KoTE to § lG-§ 17. 
 
 The ^-declension embraces all nouns whose stem originally ended in 
 a vowel, while the ll-declension comprises all those whose st^m origin- 
 ally ended in tl. The former was styled by Grimm the strong declens- 
 ion, the latter the weak. To call the one the rule, and the other the ex- 
 ception, as has been done above, is less scientific than convenient. 
 
 PLURAL. 
 The nominative plural is formed as foUows: 
 
 18. Masculine nouns ending in e(, en, er do not take 
 any special termination, but modify in part the radical 
 vowel: — 
 
 ber 35ater, father: plur. 33ttter 
 
 ber Dfen, stove: plur. Ocfcti 
 
 ber ^ruber, brother: plur. iBruber. 
 
 Those ending in e take n without altering the vowel: — 
 ber £nabe, boy: jDlur. ^naben, 
 
 as do also those mentioned in § 16, 2; thus, SJ^enf^, plur. 
 
 ajienfdjcn. 
 
 All the others add c to the singular, and generally modify 
 
 the radical vowel; as, 
 
 bcr 51 ft, branch: plur. f[eftC 
 
 bcr @ol)n, son: plur. (So^tlC 
 
§ 20] DECLENSION. 13 
 
 ber gug, foot: plur. giigc 
 
 ber ^aum, tree: plm\ ^ttumc. 
 
 Note. — Two groups of nouns ending in er never modify the radical 
 Yowel, viz. , those derived from verbs and names of countries or places, 
 as, ber 9Jia(er, painter: pi. bie Wtcikx; ber 5lmerifaner, the American: pi. 
 bie Slmerifaner; ber hamburger, inhabitant of Hamburg : pi. bie ham- 
 burger. 
 
 19. Feminine nouns, when monosyllabic, add e to the sing- 
 ular, and modify the radical vowel; as, 
 
 bie ganb, hand: pL §onbc 
 
 bie tunft, art: pL ^Unftc 
 
 bie ^raut, bride: pi. ^VttUtC. 
 
 When of more than one syllable, they add n (en) without 
 modifying the stem-vowel; as, 
 
 bie ^(ume, flower: pL ^lumctt 
 
 bie ^ugenb, virtue: pi. S^ugenbcit. 
 
 Exceptions: — 
 
 1. The names of numerical figures receive en: as, bie <Sec^^, 
 the six: plur. bie (Sec^fcn. 
 
 2. Those ending in niS and fol take e: as, bie ginftemi^: 
 pL bie gin[terniffc; bie T)rangfa(: pi. bie ^rang[alc. 
 
 Note.— Nouns ending in ttiS double the last consonant before in- 
 flectional endings. The same is true of those in in : as, bie ^^onigin : pi. 
 I^iinigitttten. 
 
 20. Neuter nouns in c, et, en, er, 6)cn, lein are invariable: 
 
 ba§ ©emcilbe, paintiag: pi. ©emalbe 
 
 ba§ mttd, means: pL mttd 
 
 ba§ Saftcr, vice: pL Rafter 
 
 t)a? aj^abdien, girl: pi. 93^abc^en. 
 
 The others when monosyllabic take er, and modify the radical 
 
 vowel; as, 
 
 ba§^Iatt,leaf: pLiBIattct; 
 
 when of mo7^e than one syllable, they add e without changing 
 
 the vowel; as 
 
 ha^ ®elag, banquet: pL bie ©elagc 
 
U NOUNS. [§ 20- 
 
 Those in tum," however, make tiimer ; as, ha^ gurftcntum: 
 pL gurftentumcr. 
 
 21. The dative plural of all noims adds n to the nominative 
 plural, except when this itself ends in n; thus, bie ^J^dnbe; dat 
 ben ganbcn. 
 
 The genitive and accusative plural are like the nominative 
 plural 
 
 22. PAKADIGMS TO § 16— § 21. 
 
 ML\SCULINE NOUNS. 
 
 1. bcr 95atcr, father, 2. ber ll^nobc, boy, 3. bcr ©ojn, son, 
 
 (representing all (representing all nouns (representing all the 
 nouns in el, en, er) in e) rest) 
 
 be^ 3?ater§ be§ tnabctt bc5 ^ot)nc8 
 
 bent ^ater bem ^naben bent (Sol)n(e) 
 
 ben Skater ben ^mben ben (So{)n, 
 
 bie 3?oter bie ^naben bie 8o^ne 
 
 ber ^^dtcr ber ^nabcn ber eo^ne 
 
 hm 33dtertt hen ^nabcn ben ©d^nen 
 
 bie ^dter bie £naben bie (Sd^ne. 
 
 FEMDONE NOUNS. 
 
 4. bie #ttnb, hand, 5. bie Slumc, flower, 
 
 ber $anb • ber ^Inme 
 
 ber §anb ber ^lunie 
 
 bie §anb bie ^lume 
 
 bie §anbc bie :53(umen 
 
 ber §dnbe ber ^lumen 
 
 ben §dnbett ben ^lumen 
 
 bie gdnbe bie :33lnmen 
 
 NEUTER NOUNS. 
 
 6. ha^ gci^cn, sign, 1, ba§ Slott, leaf, 8. ha^ ©clog, . 
 
 (repres. those in e, el, (repres. all monosylla- banquet, 
 
 en, d)cn, lein) bie nouns) (repres. the rest) 
 
 bc^ 3cirf)enS be6 ^(attc§ be^ ®elag§ 
 
 bem 5cicl)en bem ^latt(e) bem @e(ag(e) 
 
 ba§ 3eic^en ba§ matt ba§ ©elag, 
 
 bie ^eicften bie flatter bie ©elage 
 
 ber 3ci(|en ber flatter ber (pelage 
 
 ben 3eid)en ben -Q3(dttern ben (^^elageit 
 
 bie 3eici)en bie flatter bie ®e(age. 
 
§ 26] DECLENSION. 15 
 
 Note that all monosyllabic nouns, no matter of what gender, modify 
 their vowel, 
 
 23. Exercise. Decline the following noiins: 
 
 !Da^ S:)ad). "^zx §immeL !Die 8uft. "^k^^ ©efamini^. 
 T^er ^art T){e 9J^aM. ^cr ©ut. S)ie 9^u6. ®er gifd). 
 !5)ie geber. 'Da^ ©ra^. !Die ^raut. ©ie Sur^eL 3}er ^atl. 
 !Der ^2(ffe. !r)a^ gad), "^k gructit 33ie ^nfeL 3:)er Solf. 
 3:)er i^ngeL 3:)ie @tabt. >Da§ ^ab. ^Der Sun[d), 3}ie traft, 
 3:)er i^dffet. ^Die ^tene. T)a^ gag. 3}ie ©an^. 3)ie SBunbe. 
 3:)a6 talb. !^er 9^aum. T)ie ^ruft. 3:)a^ «uc^. 3:)er ^ube. 
 IDer (Spa^. ^iDa^ getb. ^Die SKaub. 3:)er ©eibe. ^Da^ ^i'inb. 
 T)ie ^uf). 3:)ie 5lrbeit. !I)a^ 3:)orf, !:Der (gdjuler, 3:)cr :33o(f. 
 T)a^ ®et)eimnt§. S^a^ vgau^, "^k (Sd)ule. !Da§ (^d)lo6. 
 
 24. Of compound substantives only the last component is 
 declined; as, ba§ ^anbl)au§: gen. sing, be^ ?anb^au[e§; plur. 
 bie !Banbf)dufer. 
 
 1. A few nouns in composition are declined irregularly: bic SSotf= 
 mad^t, full power: pi. 3>oEma(^ten (not SSoEmad)te) ; bie Dl)umacl)t, 
 swoon: pi. OI)nm a d) t e ii. 
 
 25. Several nouns which have two meanings in the singular 
 have two corresponding forms in the plural: 
 
 "ba^ ^anb, ribbon: ^anber ber ^abctt, shutter: !gabett 
 
 \>a^ ^anb, tie: ^anbe ber ©trau^, nosegay: @trau|e 
 
 bie ^ant bench: ^dn!e ber ©trau^, ostrich: (gtraugc 
 
 bie ^ant bank: ^antctt ba^ Zyx^, cloth: 2^uc^e 
 
 ba^ ©ing, thing: ^inge 'i^a^ Zu&f, shawl: Stitt^er 
 
 ba^ ©tug, small in- ba§ 2Bort, isolated word : Si)rter 
 
 significant object: dinger ba^ SBort, connected 
 
 ba^ @efid)t, face: ©efid^ter word: SBorte 
 
 ba^ ©efidjt, vision: ©efic^te ber ^o% inch: 3oWe 
 
 ber Saben, shop: Wizn ber ^o^O toll: ^^ik. 
 
 1. 3)er 9JJann, besides aJiciuner, makes 2)'lannen, but only in the mean- 
 ing of 'vassals, warriors.' 
 
 2. Of \)0.^ l^anb, country, the plural $?anbe is in poetry preferred to 
 !?auber. 
 
 DEFECTIVE DECLENSION. 
 
 26. The following substantives cannot form a plural, and 
 Use instead the plural of a cognate noun: 
 
16 
 
 5 
 
 NOUNS. 
 
 L§26- 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 bcr ^au, 
 
 structure; 
 
 tauten 
 
 bcr :53ctrug, 
 
 deceit; 
 
 ^ctriigcreicn 
 
 bcr ©unb. 
 
 league; 
 
 ^unbniffe 
 
 ber 'A^ant, 
 
 thanks; 
 
 SDanffaciungen 
 
 ha^ dvhCr 
 
 inheritance; 
 
 (Srbfd)aften 
 
 ba^ ®lucf. 
 
 luck; 
 
 ®(u(f§fdlle 
 
 bie ©utift, 
 
 favor; 
 
 ©unftbe^etguttgen 
 
 ba^ !^ob. 
 
 ■praise; 
 
 ^obc^cr^cbungcn 
 
 bae Dbft, 
 
 fruit; 
 
 Dbftarten 
 
 ber 9?at, 
 
 advice; 
 
 9?atfc^Idge 
 
 ber 9?aub, 
 
 robbery; 
 
 9iauberctcn 
 
 ber 9?cgen, 
 
 rain; 
 
 9?cgcn(}uffe 
 
 ber (gcgett. 
 
 blessing; 
 
 (^cgnungen 
 
 ber (gtreit. 
 
 contention; 
 
 (gtreitiqfcttcn 
 
 bcr 5^ob, 
 
 death; 
 
 Srobc^fdlle, Xobe^arten 
 
 ba^3 Ungliicf, 
 
 misfortune; 
 
 llnGlitcft^fdlle 
 
 ber ikrbrug, 
 
 vexation; 
 
 33crbrieg(ic^teitett 
 
 hit 5>orftd)t, 
 
 precaution; 
 
 5>orfid)t§ma§rege(n 
 
 ber 3anf, 
 
 quan-el; 
 
 3cintereien. 
 
 27. Compounds with *mann for the last component sub- 
 stitute the word ?Ieute (people) for it iu the plural; as, ber 
 ^aufmann; bie ^aufleute. 
 
 Exceptions are: 53iebermanti, (S^renmann, man of honour; 
 <Scf)uImann, pedagogue; (Staat'iJtnann, statesman; 3Baibmann, 
 huntsman, all of which form their plirral regularly: thus, ^te* 
 bermdnner, (il)renmdnner, etc. 
 
 1. (SI)cmann, married man, too, makes G^emanner; 6^cl eute 
 means 'husband and wife,' or 'married people.' 
 
 28. The following plural forms lack the singular: 
 4Brieffd)aften, letters ©Itebmagen, limbs ^fingften, Pentecost 
 (Sintiinfte, income .Soften, ) ^ 
 eUern, parents Unfoftcn, ) ^""^^ 
 gaften, Lent ii^eute, people 
 gerten, vacation 9}2afcrn, measles 
 ©cbriibcr, brothers 93^olfen, whey 
 ©efd)iDiftcr, broth- Dftern, Easter 
 
 er(s) and sister(s) 
 
 29. Suppressed forms of declension: 
 
 9?dnfe, intrigues 
 
 STrummcr, ruins 
 Seit)nad)tcn, Christ* 
 mas. 
 
§ 30] DECLENSION. 17 
 
 1. Masculine nnci neuter nouns indicating measure, weight, 
 or number do not form any plural when preceded by a num- 
 eral. The preposition of between the measure and the object 
 measured is not translated, the latter being treated as an ap- 
 position to the former: — ■ 
 
 3tt)et JJafi 5IBetn, two barrels of wine. 
 J^C^n §U§ I)OC^, ten feet high. 
 ^Vod ^aav (S^U^e, two pairs of shoes, 
 gitnf ^funb S^^^^r ^^^ pounds of sugar. 
 
 300 Mann .^nfanteric, 300 infantry. 
 
 But: fed)^ aikn lancj, six yards long, Slle being feminine. — 
 The only feminine noun which has no plural termination is 
 bie 9J?arf, when used in the meaning of a coin; as, 3el)n SRatf, 
 ten marks. 
 
 a. A measure of iime, no matter of what gender, according to the latest 
 Tisago forms a plural: as, fie ift ;^et)n 3al)re, brei 9)?onatC iinb ;;rt)an3ig Xagc 
 alt, she is ten years, three months, and twenty days old. 
 
 2. Substantives taken in a partitive sense, when depending 
 on a noun, drop their genitive ending in ordinary prose: as, 
 tin ^ec^er 23Scin, a cup of wine; ein ^tM ©rub, a piece of 
 bread. 
 
 FOEEIGN NOUNS. 
 30. Masculine nouns. 
 
 1. Those ending in unaccented d, ett^ er, are declined like 
 bcr S3ater (§ 22, 1), but without modifying the vowel; as, ber 
 ©u!atcn: gen. sing, be^ ^u!aten§; nom. plur. bie !Du!aten. 
 
 2. The foUowing are dechned Hke ^nabe (§ 22, 2), taking 
 Ctl throughout: 
 
 a. Those denoting persons, and ending in one of the con- 
 sonants !, t, or in one of the syllables e, atib, ard), grapf), !rat, 
 gog, log, nOTTv Ot, fop'^; also the names of nations and tribes 
 in ar. 
 
 Examples: ^ofacf, ^tubcnt, 5I(umnc, (^onftrmanb, 3D?onard), 
 ©eocjrap^, Slrtftofrat, ^^etnagog, 2^()eotog, 5lftronom, 'patriot, 
 ^^ilofop^, UngaiV Hungarian. 
 
 '£t)rann, ^agabunb, ^arbar follow the same rule. 
 
 Exceptions are: S(bt, abbot; ^apft, pope; ^ropft, provost; 55ogt, bailiff 
 which are declined like bee (S50gU (§ 22, 3). 
 
18 NOUNS. [§ 30^ 
 
 b. The following names of animaU and things: :33ril(attr, 
 T^iamant, eteptiant, g-oltant, .hornet, ^onfonant, planet, ^^ono^ 
 grapf), 3:e(egrapf), Cluabrant, Quotient. 
 
 3. Those endinpf in unaecented or, otl, and denotinpf persons, 
 are declined like S>ater (§ 22, 1) in the singulai', and like ,^nabe 
 (§ 22, 2) in the j)luraL The syllables or and on are accented 
 in the plural; thus, ber X)6ftor: gen. sing, be^ ^oftor^i; nom. 
 plur. bte !5}ott6ren. 
 
 The follo^ving take the same endings: "^Pfalm, !i:ribun, ^on-- 
 fu(, Stnpoft, mvi^kl 
 
 4. All others take § (c^) in the genitive singular, and e in 
 the nominative plm-al: as, ber 9iotar, notary: gen. sing, be^ 
 9iotar§; nom. plui\ bie 92otare. 
 
 There are also some which modify the vowel, viz. 9lltar ; ^I)or, choir; 
 ^I;oraI, choral song; ^aital; ^^alaft, palace; ^oplan, chaplain; ^ropft, 
 provost ; ?Ibt, abbot ; 33ljd)of, bishop ; ^arbinat ; ^apfl, pope ; ©cneral; 
 SSogt, bailiff; the vowel modified being always the last one: as, Slltfirc, 
 e^)oraIe, ^anale, ^alafte, ^orbinale. 
 
 Note.— Nouns ending in § preceded "by a short vowel double 8 to ff 
 before any inflectional ending; thus, ber ^ibibu^, i^aper-match: beei 5ibi= 
 bufje?, bie gibibuffe. 
 
 31. Feminine and neuter nouns follow ilie declension of 
 crdinaiy German ones. 
 
 32. Nouns with special plural forms. 
 
 1. Some nouns taken fi'om ancient languages retain their 
 original plural endings : as, ba^ (J^amen : W (Jjfamintt ; \>a^ 
 gattum: bie gafto; ba^ STempu^: bie STempoto; \>a^ ^epfon: tik 
 &jifo; 'iia^ !ilt)ema: bie 3^f}emato; ber ^^erub: bie vil)erubim. 
 
 2. Others substitute for the classic plural endings German 
 ones: as, \>a^ ^tubium: W <Stubicn; \)a^ ^xi\^vo\\iViVim: bie ^n^ 
 bioibucn; ber 9^1)t)tt)mu§: bie 9^t)tt)mcn: ba^ ^lapitat: bie ^api* 
 tolien; ba^SJ^inerd: bie 9)^inera(tcn; tid^ ^lima: bie Mmatc; 
 bie Hrifi^: bie ^rifcn; ber §ero§: bie §croen. 
 
 3. Many foreign nouns taken from modern languages receive 
 an g; thus, bcr t^afdja: bie ^^afd)a§; 'na^ (Sofa: bie ©ofaS; \>([^ 
 (^cnic: W ©cnic§; ber £lub; bie £(ub§; ba3 ©olo: bie @oloS. 
 
 33. An alphabetical list of the more common nouns whose 
 plural deviates from the rules given in § 18 to § 27. 
 
^1 
 
 DECLENSION. 
 
 1 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 ber Stat 
 
 eel 
 
 Slate 
 
 ber %ax 
 
 eagle 
 
 Stare 
 
 bie %{p 
 
 Alp 
 
 Stipeu 
 
 ber Slmbo^ 
 
 anvil 
 
 Stmbo^e 
 
 ber %ima\t 
 
 attorney 
 
 Hnmatte (Stntt)alte) 
 
 ber 5trm 
 
 arm 
 
 Slrme 
 
 bie Strt 
 
 species 
 
 Strten 
 
 bas ^uge 
 
 eye 
 
 Slug en 
 
 bie «al)n 
 
 path 
 
 Sa^nen 
 
 ber 53aier 
 
 Bavarian 
 
 ^aiern 
 
 ber S3auev 
 
 lieasant 
 
 S3auern 
 
 ba§ 53eit 
 
 hatchet 
 
 53eite 
 
 ba^ «ein 
 
 leg 
 
 S3eine v 
 
 ber ^efuc^ 
 
 visit 
 
 S3efurf|e 
 
 bag S3ett 
 
 bed 
 
 ^etten 
 
 ber 33ofeiui(^t 
 
 villain 
 
 iBofen)i(^te(r) 
 
 t>a^ iBoot 
 
 boat 
 
 S8oote 
 
 bas Brob 
 
 bread 
 
 S3robe 
 
 bie SButfjt 
 
 inlet 
 
 md}kn 
 
 ba§ S3unb 
 
 bundle 
 
 S3unbe 
 
 bie ^urg 
 
 castle 
 
 S3urgen 
 
 ba§ ®entmat 
 
 monument 
 
 S)eufmate (3)entmater) 
 
 ber 2)o(!^t 
 
 wick 
 
 S)oct)te 
 
 ber ^olcii 
 
 dagger 
 
 S)o(d^e 
 
 ber S)om 
 
 dome 
 
 S)ome 
 
 ber ®orn 
 
 thorn 
 
 S)ornen 
 
 ba§ (2nbe 
 
 end 
 
 (Snben 
 
 ber (Srfolg 
 
 success 
 
 (grfotge 
 
 bie gai)rt 
 
 ride 
 
 gat)rten 
 
 ba« ^ett 
 
 skin 
 
 gette 
 
 bie glur 
 
 field 
 
 gturen 
 
 bie ^lut 
 
 flood 
 
 gluten 
 
 bie §orm 
 
 form 
 
 gormen 
 
 ber gorft 
 
 forest 
 
 gorften (gorfte, gorfte) 
 
 bie grau 
 
 woman 
 
 ^rauen 
 
 ber (Ban 
 
 canton 
 
 @auc 
 
 ber Oeijl 
 
 spirit 
 
 ©eifter 
 
 ha^ ©entac^ 
 
 room 
 
 ©emcic^er 
 
 ber ©ema^l 
 
 husband 
 
 @emaf)te 
 
 ba§ ©emiit 
 
 mind 
 
 ©emiiter 
 
 19 
 
20 
 
 NOUNS. 
 
 I §33 
 
 ba§ ©efc^led^t 
 
 race 
 
 ©cfc^tcc^ter 
 
 bos ©cfpcnft 
 
 ghost 
 
 ©cl>enftcr 
 
 bag ©cfud) 
 
 petition 
 
 @efu(^ 
 
 ber ©cttQtter 
 
 godfather 
 
 ©cDattcm 
 
 bag ©cnjanb 
 
 robe 
 
 ©cnjanbcr 
 
 i>a^ ©ift 
 
 poison 
 
 ©iftc 
 
 bic ©lut 
 
 glow 
 
 ©lutcn 
 
 ber @ott 
 
 God 
 
 ©otter 
 
 ber ©rob 
 
 degree 
 
 ©robe 
 
 has ^aav 
 
 hair 
 
 ^aare 
 
 ber §alm 
 
 blade 
 
 ^atme 
 
 bag ^orj 
 
 rosin 
 
 ^argr- 
 
 bos ^cer 
 
 army 
 
 ^cere 
 
 bas ^eft 
 
 haft 
 
 ^efte 
 
 ha^ .^emb 
 
 shirt 
 
 ^emben 
 
 ba§ ^erj 
 
 heart 
 
 ^erjcn 
 
 ha^ §om 
 
 horn (substance) 
 
 §ornc 
 
 bos ^ojpital 
 
 hospital 
 
 ^ofpitalcr 
 
 bcr c^uf 
 
 hoof 
 
 §ufe 
 
 bcr Rummer 
 
 lobster 
 
 ^ummern 
 
 ber §unb 
 
 dog 
 
 ^uiibe 
 
 ber §ufar 
 
 hussar 
 
 ^ufaren 
 
 bie Sagb 
 
 hunt 
 
 Sagbcn 
 
 bQ§ 3al)r 
 
 year 
 
 3a^rc 
 
 ber 3anitfc^ar 
 
 janissary 
 
 Sanitjd^arcn 
 
 bag Snjeft 
 
 insect 
 
 Snfeften 
 
 t>a^ Sntereffc 
 
 interest 
 
 Sntcreffen 
 
 bag 3ocl^ 
 
 yoke 
 
 3o(^c 
 
 ha^ Suroet 
 
 jewel 
 
 Suwclcn 
 
 bcr .Qafc 
 
 cheese 
 
 mit 
 
 bcr ^arfl 
 
 hoe 
 
 ^arftc 
 
 bag ^lofier 
 
 convent 
 
 tlofter 
 
 U^ tnic 
 
 knee 
 
 tnice 
 
 bcr ^orf 
 
 cork 
 
 ^orfc 
 
 ber ?a(^g 
 
 salmon 
 
 ?adf|fc 
 
 bic ![?ail 
 
 burden 
 
 i?aftcn 
 
 ber 2a\it 
 
 sound 
 
 5?aute 
 
 bcr ?cib 
 
 body 
 
 £ciber 
 
 ber !i:ei(^nam 
 
 corpse 
 
 feid^name 
 
 bag $!oog 
 
 lot 
 
 ?ofe 
 
 bcr iJorbccr 
 
 laurel 
 
 Sorbecrcn 
 
§33] 
 
 3] 
 
 DECLENSION. 
 
 
 bcr 2nd}§ 
 
 lynx 
 
 ?ud|fc 
 
 bev Wlami 
 
 man 
 
 SUidnncr 
 
 bie maxt 
 
 boundary 
 
 5War!cn 
 
 bcr SJiaft 
 
 mast 
 
 ma\tm (SJiafte) 
 
 bag 2JJecr 
 
 sea 
 
 ajJcere 
 
 bcv Tlold) 
 
 salamander 
 
 mol^e 
 
 bcr Q^onb 
 
 moon 
 
 SJionbc 
 
 ber 2Jiorb 
 
 murder 
 
 aJZorbe 
 
 bcr 2JJu§!ct 
 
 muscle 
 
 mmdn 
 
 bie gjiuttcr 
 
 mother 
 
 aJJiitter 
 
 bcr 9kd)bar 
 
 neighbor 
 
 9^ad|barn 
 
 bag ^d} 
 
 net 
 
 ^e^e 
 
 baQ £)()r 
 
 ear 
 
 O^rcrt 
 
 ber Ort 
 
 place 
 
 Drtc, Oetler 
 
 ba§ ^aar 
 
 pair 
 
 ^^aore 
 
 bcr ^ar! 
 
 park 
 
 ^^arfe 
 
 bcr ^i^antoffel 
 
 slipper 
 
 ^^antoffelu 
 
 bcr ^fab 
 
 path 
 
 ^fabe 
 
 ber ^^[au 
 
 peacock 
 
 ^^fauc(n) 
 
 bag ^]^[crb 
 
 horse 
 
 ^43ferbc 
 
 bie ^fiid)t 
 
 duty 
 
 ^i3flid)ten 
 
 ba§ ^4>fuub 
 
 pound 
 
 ^l^funbe 
 
 bcr ^ol 
 
 pole 
 
 ^^otc 
 
 bcr ^ommer 
 
 Pomeranian 
 
 ^^otnmern 
 
 bie ^oft 
 
 post 
 
 Soften 
 
 bcr ^ul3 
 
 pulse 
 
 ^ulje 
 
 bcr ^imft 
 
 point 
 
 ^4)unfte 
 
 bie dual 
 
 torture 
 
 Ouotcit 
 
 ber Slanb 
 
 margin 
 
 9Muber 
 
 ba§ 9led)t 
 
 right 
 
 9ted^te 
 
 ba§ Regiment 
 
 regiment 
 
 9tegimenter 
 
 ba§ m 
 
 deer 
 
 m^ 
 
 ta^ 9lcic^ 
 
 reign 
 
 9teid)c 
 
 bag 9lol)r 
 
 reed 
 
 5Ro^re 
 
 ta^ 9to§ 
 
 horse 
 
 9Jof[e 
 
 bcr Salnx 
 
 salmon 
 
 @atme 
 
 bag (5alj 
 
 salt 
 
 @atse 
 
 bie (Sc^ar 
 
 host 
 
 @(^arcu 
 
 bag <3(^af 
 
 sheep 
 
 ®d)afe • 
 
 bag @cl)cit 
 
 log 
 
 ®d^eitc(r; 
 
 bag 0d)i|f 
 
 ship 
 
 @cf)i[te 
 
 2J 
 
22 
 
 KOUNS. 
 
 [§ sa- 
 
 ble <Bii\ad,t 
 bcr (Sd^merj 
 ticec^rift 
 bcr <?(^ii"'t 
 bcr <S(^::!) 
 tit €c^u'.b 
 baS 'Sdjiuciii 
 tcr vgce 
 ba§ @cit 
 bcr <Spalt 
 ba§ ®i)icl 
 baS (Bpital 
 bcr Cporit 
 bcr Sp^o^ 
 bic (Spur 
 bcr (Star 
 bcr (Star.t 
 bcr (DtQt^rl 
 baS Ctotiit 
 bic ©tirit 
 bcr (Sto[f 
 tcr Ctral)t 
 bcr (Strolc^ 
 bag @tr:cf 
 t:r (Sunb 
 tcr 2::g 
 bcr Xalt 
 hcQ Xaii 
 bic 2:i)at 
 i>a$ Xier 
 bc8 Sljor 
 bcr Z:}cx 
 bcr Sijroii 
 tic Sijiir 
 tic Sod^ter 
 bic Xrac^t 
 tic UI)r 
 bcr Unf)oIb 
 bcr iScrtuif 
 t:r i3cr;!id) 
 bcr 5Sctcrau 
 
 battle 
 
 pain 
 
 ■writing 
 
 scoundrel 
 
 shoe 
 
 debt 
 
 pig 
 
 lake 
 
 rope 
 
 cleft 
 
 game 
 
 spitil 
 
 spur 
 
 sboot 
 
 trace 
 
 starling 
 
 state 
 
 Eting 
 
 statute 
 
 forehead 
 
 matter 
 
 ray 
 
 stroller 
 
 piece 
 
 strait 
 
 d.y 
 
 neasnre 
 
 Tcpe 
 
 deed 
 
 animal 
 
 gate 
 
 fool 
 
 tlirone 
 
 door 
 
 daughter 
 
 costtune 
 
 clock 
 
 monster 
 
 IJSS 
 
 trial 
 veteran 
 
 <Sc^(ad}tcn 
 ^d^mer^cn 
 ^d^riftcn 
 ©d^ufte 
 
 ^c^ulbcrt 
 
 ^d^mcine 
 
 Cccn 
 
 @eitc 
 
 ©poltcii 
 
 ©piele 
 
 epitalcr 
 
 ©pornc(n), @Voveit 
 
 epro|y::i 
 
 ©purcn 
 
 ©tore or @tavcu 
 
 ©taatcii 
 
 etad^clit 
 
 etotutcit 
 
 ©tirncii 
 
 etoffe 
 
 ©tra^Icii 
 
 ©trold^e 
 
 etudE2 
 
 ©unbc 
 
 Sage 
 
 Saftc 
 
 2:auc 
 
 2;ici-e 
 
 S:i)ore 
 
 iX^^orcii 
 
 Z\)vo\iz 
 
 d)urcn 
 
 S:o(^t:r 
 
 Srat^tcn 
 
 ll!)rcn 
 
 ll:tl)0lbe 
 
 Cerluf:c 
 
 S^crfudjc 
 
 2?cterQncu 
 
S] 
 
 DEOLEiiSION. 
 
 
 bcr SSettcr 
 
 cousin 
 
 SBcttmt 
 
 bcu ^ofot 
 
 vowel 
 
 33o!aIe 
 
 bic 2Br.l)t 
 
 election 
 
 53aI)Icn 
 
 ber SSalb 
 
 wood 
 
 Scitber 
 
 ba3 2Bci)r 
 
 weir 
 
 5>SeI)rc 
 
 bie 2BcU 
 
 world 
 
 Sclten 
 
 ba3 2Scr! 
 
 work 
 
 ilScrfe 
 
 bcr SSurm 
 
 worm 
 
 SSiirmer 
 
 bic i^at)I 
 
 number 
 
 BaI)Icn 
 
 bie Beit 
 
 time 
 
 Bcitcn 
 
 ba3 3citg 
 
 stuff 
 
 •Bcuge 
 
 ba3 Bid 
 
 end 
 
 Bide 
 
 bcr Bierrat 
 
 ornament 
 
 Bicrraten (Bierratc) 
 
 bcr B^ttS 
 
 rent, interest 
 
 Binfcu. 
 
 23 
 
 PROPER NAMES. 
 
 Names of rivers, seas, lalces, mountains, and forests, as well as those 
 of countries of the masculine or feminine gender, follow the rules given 
 for common nouns. But the names of persons, places, and the neuter 
 names of countries require special attention. 
 
 8i. All names of phpe^, and the neuter names of countries 
 receive ^ in the genitive, and are undeclined in the other 
 cases: — 
 
 N. :53erritt ^eutf^Ianb 
 
 G. ^Berlins T)eutfd)Ianb8 
 
 D. ^Q-rin 3:)eut|d)tanb 
 
 A. ^txWxi T)eutfcl)(anb 
 Names of places, however, endin^^ in one of the sibilants ^^ 
 f^, fc^, y, I, do not form any genitive, but substitute the pre- 
 position Don : thus, W 9JJaueru uou ^art^, the walls of Paiis. 
 
 35. Names of persons have § in the genitive, and can have 
 Tt (en) in the dative and accusative, but are better le^t un- 
 declined in these tv/o cases: — ■ 
 yVricbrlcl), Frederick, (gtifabett), Elizabeth, ®oet()e 
 ?^riebnd)8 G(ifabct()0 @oett)cg 
 
 ?vricbrid)(en) (S(ifabetl)(en) @oetl)e(n) 
 
 gri:bnd)(en) (5(i}abett)(en) @oetf)e(n)« 
 
 33. Special remarks. 
 
 1. MxxuUne names of persons (includinj familj names) 
 
24 NOUNS. [§ 36^ 
 
 terminating in a liissing sound either take cn^3 in the genitive, 
 or else mark it by the apostrophe, or hj the article. Also the 
 preposition t)on may be used. Examples : ^an] e U ^, Wa^ e n ^, 
 gritjen^, ^raugen^^; 3=acolv3' SSerfe; Hbm' 9^omane; ber ^ob 
 hc^ (Botxatc^; bie ^(rbcitcn Don !D?a^. 
 
 a. 3pfu3 (II)riftu§ is declined as follows : gen. 3efu S^rifti ; dat. 3efu 
 S^rifto ; ace. Sejum (Sl^riftum. 
 
 b. Of So^aunciJ and ^43aulu§, the Latin genitive forms 3o^aimi6, 
 ^Quli occur. 
 
 2. Feminine names of persons ending in e can take n§ in- 
 stead of §: as, %{)txt\t: gen. %)^txt\zn^, 
 
 a. Of SJJaria the Latin genitive form 2Jiaria occnrs. 
 
 3. If the name of a person is used with the article or a pro- 
 noun it is not dechned. — bie ^Uii)er be^ geinric^, the books 
 of Hem;y; bie iBriefe unfercr 9J?arie, the letters of our Mary. 
 
 Only if the proper name iirecede the governing word it takes 
 a genitive ending: as, bc^ oro^cu griebrid)0 @iege ; unfere^ 
 §eim'id}8 ^ricfe. 
 
 37. In the plural, ina:<cidine names of persons ai*e either, 
 and preferably, left undechned, or they take c or '{<: as, bie 
 §einricf) (§einrid)c, or .^einrid)'^); W Solf (Solfc, or 3S?olfe); 
 bie beiben ^umbolbt (or ^umbolbfci). 
 
 Those in o add e to their Latin theme in on; as, diccro: pL 
 bie (>iccroticj Otto: pL bie Ottonc. A few take ncn: as, (gcipto: 
 pL tie ^cipioncn. 
 
 1. Feminine names of persons take n (en) : as, bie OJ^ariett, 
 bie ©ertmbcn. Those ending in a, i, or I) take 'n: as, bie 
 (Jmma'n, hk Wx% bie (gmm^'n. 
 
 3S. Family names, either -with, or more frequently without, the 
 article, take in colloquial usage an '§ to denote the collective members 
 of the family: thus, 2JiiUer'§ fmb bci un8, the JMiller's are with us. 
 
 Also titles are treated in the same way, but always without the article: 
 as, 2)o!tor'^ fiiib gcfommcu, the family of the Doctor has come. 
 
 39. Of two or more names belonging to the same person only the laso 
 one is inflected: thus, ^cinrid^ §cincg ^ieber, Henry Heine's songs. 
 
 1. Of two proper names connected by Don, the sign of nobility, the 
 first one is declined, if the governing word precedes : as, bic 9ieifen 
 2llcyanbcrfil UOli ^iimbolbt: and the last one, if the governing word follows: 
 as, 3llc^-Qubcr uou Jpumbclbt^ SfJcifeu. 
 
 4D. A proper name preceded by a title with the article is left un- 
 
§ 42] GENDER. 25 
 
 changed : ~ bic ^romiTtg be? ^oifcr« SBil^elm, the coronation of the 
 emperor William. 
 
 If, on the contrajy, the title is nsed voithout the article, the proper 
 name is declined, and the title is not: as, ^aifer SBU^elmg ^ronung, or 
 tie ^ronung ^aif:r SSiII)cIm8. 
 
 1. The title ^crr, however, is always declined, whether accompanied 
 by the article or not: as, ^etrtt @i-iiu3 iBtlbev, or bic 33Ubcr beS ^eiTll 
 ©riin, Mr. Green's pictures. 
 
 2. A title in. apposition^ whether the preceding proper name be in- 
 flected or not, is always declined: thus, bic @iege ^friebrid)8 bt^ @rof3Ctt; 
 bic (Siege be3 ^iittigS gviebric^ beg @io(jeit, the victories of Erederick the 
 Great. 
 
 GENDER 
 
 The only succinct rules for determining the gender of a noun are the 
 following: 
 
 41. Masculine are: 
 
 1. The names of seasons, months, days, and points of com^ 
 pass: as, bcr (gommer, summer; bcr 5lpri(, April,- bcr SJiontacj, 
 Monday; ber ©itbcn, south. 
 
 2. Most names of rivers. 
 
 The rivers of Asia, America, Africa, and Australia are masculine. As 
 to European rivers, those of Germany, Austria, France, and England 
 are mostly feminine, those of the other countries, masculine. 
 
 The few masculine German rivers are: bei* 3ll)eiu, bcr 'jDlain, ber ^cilar, 
 bee Sec^, ber 3>n«. 
 
 3. The names of stones; as, bcr ^Rubin, ruby. 
 
 4. Most substantives ending in e( (net fcl, tct), en, cr, Id), 
 Itng; as, bcr §imme(, sky; ber Garten, garden; bcr 3::cHcr, plate; 
 ber l^ranic^, crane; bcr gittbling, foundling. 
 
 42. Feminine are: 
 
 1. Most names of trees, flowers, fruits : bie Ratine, fir; bie 
 gud)fia, fuchsia; bie 92u6, nut 
 
 2. The names of the numbers : as, btc (Scd)§, the six. 
 
 3. Most derivatives in t and e not denoting living beings: 
 as, bie 9}iad)t, might; bie Srbe, eaiih. 
 
 4. AU derivatives in ci, ic, in, l^cit, lett, fcl)aft, nng, ion, if, 
 cn3, ur, tat: as, bic (S4i)meid)efci, flattery; bic 9}fe(obic, melody; 
 bie §elbin, heroine; bie grcil)cit, liberty; bie ADantbart'cit, grat* 
 
26 ) Noum [§42- 
 
 itude; btc 55rcunbfcf)aft, friendship; bic §offnuttg, hope; btc 
 3^ation, bie 9J?u]if, bie grequenj, bie 9^atur, bie SJiajeftat 
 
 The only exceptions are: bcr 9?ibctung, the Kibelnng; ber ^ornnng 
 (obsolete for ^ebruor, Pebruarj^), and ba^ ^ktfc^aft, seaL 
 
 Note. — Many female appellatives are formed from the male ones by 
 the syllable in; this generally causes the modification of the root-vowel: 
 as, bev ©uaf, count: bie ©ratin/ countess (§ 209). 
 
 43. Neuter are: 
 
 1. Nearly all names of countries and places: as, ha^ \dy6nc 
 QtalkUf beautiful Italy; ha^ alte 9?om, ancient Boma 
 
 The most common exceptions are: bic ®cf)tuci5, Switzerland; bic Xui» 
 !ei, Turkey; bcr J^aag, the Hague. 
 
 2. Karnes of metals: as, ha^ ©olb, gold; ha^ ^kx, lead; but; 
 bcr ^ta{)i, steeL 
 
 3. Names of letters of the alphabet: as, ba§ 51 Itnb ba§ D. 
 
 4. Eveiy word used suhdanliixhj : as, ba^ 35}arum, the why; 
 ba$ (2d)due, the beautiful; bad Sfjcn unb 2:rinfcn, eating and 
 diinking. 
 
 5. Collective nouns haYing ®e for a prefix; as, ha^ ©ebirgc, 
 mountains. 
 
 6. All nouns ending in cf)ett and Icitt, and most of those in 
 fat, fe(, ntd, turn: as, t)a^ 3!J?effercl}cn, Httle knife; ha^ £inb(ein, 
 baby; ha^ i^ab)a(, refreshment; bad 9iatfe{, liddle; ha^ 4Buttb=» 
 nid/league; bad (E^riftentum, Christianity. 
 
 a. The s;s-llables d)cn and Icin, by which diminutives are 
 formed from nouns, regularly require the modification of the 
 radical vowel: as, bad gdnbdjcn, bad ^oljuc^en, bad ^Srubcrdjen, 
 bad ^dttuidjcu (§ 209). 
 
 44. Some nouns have a double gender TN-ith a correspond- 
 ing difference in meaning: 
 
 bcr 5l(p nightmare bie 3l(p Alp (mountain 
 
 pastui'e) 
 bcr iBanb rolume ha^ 53anb ribbon, tie 
 
 bcr ^auer peasant \ia^ ^auer cage 
 
 bcr ^udcl hiuup bie -53ucfc( buckle 
 
 ber 4BlllIe buU bie ^uUc bull (papal do. 
 
 cument) 
 bcr ^unb league bad i8unb bundle 
 
 ber (iljor choir (persons) bad (^^or choir (place) 
 
§46] 
 
 GENDEE. 
 
 21 
 
 bcr GrLe 
 
 heir 
 
 ha^ dxhc 
 
 inheritance 
 
 bie G-rlcnntniS 
 
 knowledge 
 
 ba^ (5r!cntttni§ sentence 
 
 bcr ©cl)alt 
 
 contents 
 
 ba^ ^5cl)alt 
 
 salary 
 
 bie ©ift 
 
 gift 
 
 ba^ ©ift 
 
 poison 
 
 bcr §arj 
 
 Harz mountains baS ^ar,^ 
 
 resin 
 
 bcr ©cibe 
 
 heathen 
 
 bie ©cibe 
 
 heath 
 
 bcr Sut 
 bcr ticfer 
 
 hat 
 
 bie Sut 
 
 •^ guard 
 
 jaw-bone 
 
 bie Sicfcr 
 
 pine 
 
 bcr It'unbc 
 
 customer 
 
 bie knnhc 
 
 tidings 
 
 bcr ^citcr 
 
 leader 
 
 bie ii^citcr 
 
 ladder 
 
 bcr !['oI)tt 
 
 reward 
 
 ba^ ^oI)n 
 
 wages 
 
 bie manM 
 
 almond 
 
 ba^ ^anhd 
 
 a number of fif< 
 teen 
 
 bie mavl 
 
 march(district), ha^ SJiarf 
 
 ma,rrow 
 
 
 mark (coin) 
 
 
 
 bcr iO^arfd^ 
 
 march 
 
 hk mav\d) 
 
 marsh-land 
 
 bcr ma\t 
 
 ship's mast 
 
 bie Wla\t 
 
 mast for hogs 
 
 bcr a}?cnfd) 
 
 man 
 
 bae ayjcnfd) 
 
 wench 
 
 bcr $me|[er 
 
 measurer 
 
 bae 9}?cffer 
 
 knife 
 
 bcr mm 
 
 rice 
 
 ba^ mci^ 
 
 twig 
 
 bcr ©d)i(b 
 
 shield 
 
 ba^ (gdjilb 
 
 sig-n-boai'd 
 
 bcr ©djiDuIft 
 
 bombast 
 
 bie SdjiDuIft 
 
 swelling 
 
 bcr ©cc 
 
 lake 
 
 bie (See 
 
 sea 
 
 bcr ©pro[fe 
 
 shoot 
 
 bie (Sproffe 
 
 step 
 
 bie ©teuer 
 
 tax 
 
 ba^ (Steuer 
 
 helm 
 
 bcr ©tift 
 
 peg 
 
 ba^ Stift 
 
 ecclesiastical 
 foundation 
 
 bcr STett 
 
 part of a whole \>a^ ^ci( 
 
 share, portion 
 
 bcr S^or 
 
 fool 
 
 ba^ S:i)or 
 
 gate 
 
 bcr $l>erblenft 
 
 earnings 
 
 ba« S3erbienft 
 
 merit 
 
 hk Sjcljr 
 
 defence 
 
 bag Seljr 
 
 weir 
 
 45. Compound, substantives, with very few exceptions, 
 have the gender of the last component: as, bet ^(umengartett, 
 flowergarden; hit ^lumenjud^t, floriculture; bttS ^(umeubeet, 
 bed of flowers. 
 
 PREPOSITIONS (cf. § 189). 
 46. Prepositions govern the genitive, dative, or accusative. 
 1. The genitive: ipd^renb, dui-iug, and tocgcU/ on account 
 of:— 
 
23 
 
 PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 [§46- 
 
 3Ba^renb bc8 (^tunncS. 
 
 During the storm. 
 
 Segcu bcS ^RcgenS, 
 
 On account of the rain. 
 
 2. The dative : 
 
 
 au^, out of, from 
 
 fcit, since (time) 
 
 bei, near 
 
 Don, from, of 
 
 mit '«'ith 
 
 3U,to 
 
 nad), to, after 
 
 gcgenUbcr, opposite. 
 
 Exami)les: 
 
 
 'Die Seute fommcn au§ bcr 
 
 People ai-e coming from 
 
 ^ird)c. 
 
 church. 
 
 <Scit fcincm 5tobc. 
 
 Since his death. 
 
 a. To after verba of motion toward a place is nad), towards 
 
 B.2yerson, yii as, 
 
 
 3c^ Qclje noi^ SSien. 
 
 I go to Yienna. 
 
 -Jc^ gcljc ju neiucm On!ct. 
 
 I go to my uncle. 
 
 3. The accusative : 
 
 
 burd> through 
 
 gcgen, against 
 
 fur, for 
 
 urn, about, rotmd. 
 
 Through the wood. 
 Against the enemy. 
 
 O^nc, without 
 Examples: 
 S)urd) bctt Se^alb. 
 ©cgcn bcti geinb. 
 4. The dative or ajccusative : 
 
 an, at, on l^ttitcr, behind unter, imder 
 
 QUf, upon nebcn, beside t)or, before 
 
 in, in iiber, above, across 3n){fd;cn, between; 
 
 the dative being required in answer to the question where? 
 and the accusative in answer to the question whither? 
 
 Examples : 
 Qd) fpa^icre in bem (^rtcn. I walk in (within) the garden. 
 Qd) gcl)C i;i ben ©artcn. I go into the garden. 
 
 47, Preposition and article are often contracted: thus, 
 oitS Seufteiv for an ba^ &enfter, to the ^vindow; 
 
§ 48] AUXILIARIES OF TENSE. 29 
 
 am genftcr, for an bem genfter, at the wmdow; 
 
 im (Garten, for in bem ©arten, in the garden; 
 fitim Tiini^kv, for bel bem SDIinifter, -with tlie minister; 
 Horn Wlavttc, for Don bem TlaxttCf from the market; 
 inv ^irdjc, for 3U ber ^trc^e, to churcL 
 Similarlj: auf^, burd)^, fUr5, l^inter^, in^, Itbcr^, um§, i3or§. 
 
 1. la the phraso um'3 §immct3 UJlGen, for heaven's sake, um'§ stands 
 for urn be§. 
 
 VERBS. 
 
 The study of the verb must begin with the three Auxiliaries IjaBcn, 
 fein, and tuerbcn, because many tenses of the verb are formed with their 
 assistance. 
 
 4:8, Conjugation of ^abtn, to have. 
 
 INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 Present: 
 
 iiS) Ijahc I have ic^ ^abc I (may) have 
 
 bu I)aft thou hast bnl)abeft thou have 
 
 er (fie, e§) I) at he (she, it) has er Ijabe he have 
 
 ipir l)aben we have n)ir ^abcit we have 
 
 ibr Iiabt ) , ibr Iiabct ) 
 
 (Bk !)aben \ ^^^ ^^^ ©icr)aben | ^^^ ^^^^ 
 
 fie l^aben thej have fie I)aben they have 
 
 Note.— On the use of <Sie in address, see § 98. 
 
 Imperfect: 
 
 ic^ ^attc I had tc^ !)attc I might have 
 
 bu l)atteft thou hadst hVi l^dtteft thou mightest 
 
 have 
 
 er f)atte he had er Vdtk he might have 
 
 n)ir \jaitcn we had njir Ijdtten we might have 
 
 i^r t)attet you had i()r Ijattct 3'ou might have 
 
 fie l)attett they had fie Ijatten they might have 
 
 The other moods and tenses are formed Hko those of lobctl (^ 51 and 
 §55): 
 
30 
 
 VERBS, 
 
 f§48. 
 
 INDICATIVK 
 
 SUBJUNCTTVli 
 
 Perfect: 
 
 id) t)alie QCi)aht I liave had id) Ijahc gc()abt I(may)liaveliad 
 
 Pluperfect : 
 
 id) l)atte gcl)abt I had had id) fjcitte gel^abt I might have 
 
 had 
 Future: 
 xi) iDcrbc Ijdbcn I shall have ic^ iDerbc Ijahcn I shall have 
 
 Future Perfect: 
 
 x6) l^crbe gel)abt I shall liave ic^ iDcrbe Qtt)aht I shall have had 
 l)abcn had I)abcn 
 
 Conditional: id) ^riiirbe r)abcn I should have 
 
 Conditional Perfect: i^tuiirbegefjabf^aben I should have had 
 
 Imperative: l^abe have (thou) 
 
 l)abt, l)abett (Sic have (you) 
 
 Infinitive Present: (^u) l)aben to have 
 
 Infinitive Perfect: gel}abt (jU) Ijahcn to have had 
 
 Present Participle: I)abenb having 
 
 Past Participle: gc^abt had. 
 
 49. 
 
 Conjugation of fein, to be. 
 
 
 INDICAT1\K 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 
 
 Present: 
 
 
 id) bin 
 
 I am 
 
 ic^fci 
 
 I (may) be 
 
 bu btft 
 
 thou ai-t 
 
 t>Vi f eieft 
 
 thou be 
 
 crift 
 
 he is 
 
 cr fci 
 
 he be 
 
 h)ir jinb 
 
 we are 
 
 \v\v fcicn 
 
 we be 
 
 il)r fcib 
 
 you are 
 
 il)r fcict 
 
 you be 
 
 fie finb 
 
 they are 
 
 fie fcien 
 
 Imperfect : 
 
 they be 
 
 i^toar 
 
 I was 
 
 ic^ tDdrc 
 
 I were, I might 
 
 bu tearft 
 
 thou wast 
 
 bu Uiarcft 
 
 thou wert [be 
 
 cr luar 
 
 he was 
 
 er luare 
 
 he vrere 
 
 ttjir tDarett 
 
 we were 
 
 wiv tuarcn 
 
 we were 
 
 i^r Xoavct 
 
 you were 
 
 i^r marct 
 
 you were 
 
 fie luareu 
 
 they were 
 
 fie jpciren 
 
 they were 
 
§50] 
 
 AUXILIAIITES OF TENSE. 
 
 31 
 
 Perfect: 
 
 id) Bin geiDe[en I liave been id) f ci gclDcfcn I (may) Imve 
 
 been 
 bu bift gett)e[cn thou bast been, bu [cieft getDCfeu thou have been, 
 etc etc etc 
 
 Pluperfect: 
 
 id) toot genjefen I had been ic^ tt»arc gctt)C]€tt I had been 
 
 bunjarftgeiDCfctlthou hadst bu iDdrcft gc- thou hadst 
 
 etc been, etc iDcfctt, etc been, etc 
 
 Future: 
 
 id) iDcrbe \dn I shall be ic^ tt)erbe fein I shall be 
 
 Future Perfect: 
 
 ic^\r)crbcgctt)c[cnl shaU have id) Wcvht gett)e^ I shall have 
 fcin been fen feitt been 
 
 Conditional: id) tDiirbc feitt I should be 
 
 Conditional Perfect : ic^ tuiirbe geftJefeu feitt I should have been 
 
 fci 
 
 feib, feictt Sic 
 
 (3U) fein 
 
 gewefcn (ju) fcin 
 fctenb 
 gctocfen 
 
 Imperative : 
 
 Infinitive Present: 
 Infinitive Perfect: 
 Present Participle : 
 Past Participle: 
 
 Note.— In the conjugation of fein three roots are to be distingnisliecl: 
 hi, as, vas. From vas tuar {originally tna^) and gett)cfen are derived. 
 2)a8 3Be(eu, the being; Deutucfcn, to decay; aniucfcitb, present; abtuefeub, 
 absent, have the same root. 
 
 be (thou) 
 
 be (you) 
 
 to be 
 
 to have been 
 
 being 
 
 been 
 
 50. 
 
 id) tt)erbe 
 bu n)u'ft 
 er n)irb 
 iDir n)erben 
 i^r njerbet 
 fie iDerbcn 
 
 Conjugation of toerbeit^ to become 
 
 IKDICATrV^ 
 
 Present: 
 I become i^ tpcrbe 
 
 thou becomest bu Voerbeft 
 he becomes er li^erbe 
 we become tt)ir iDerben 
 you become it)r iDerbet 
 they become fie toerbcn 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 I (may) become 
 thou may est become 
 he may become 
 we may become 
 you may become 
 they may become 
 
32 
 
 [§50, 
 
 Imperfect : 
 
 id) rjurbc, or I became id) iDUrbc 
 
 loarb 
 hvi njurbcft, or thou becamest bit tDiirbcft 
 
 luarbft 
 cr njurbc, or lie became cr tt>Urbc 
 
 luarb 
 toir tourbcu we became iuir Witrben 
 
 I might become 
 
 thou mightest 
 
 become 
 he might be- 
 come 
 we might be- 
 come 
 i^r ttJUrbct you became i^r luitrbet you might be- 
 
 come 
 fie IDUrbCtt they became fie roiirben they might be- 
 
 come 
 Perfect: 
 
 id) Bin (jelDorbcnl have become id) fci gcmorbenl (may) have 
 
 become 
 Pluperfect: 
 
 id) toor gciporben I had become id) toare gcmorbcn I had become 
 
 Future : 
 
 id) iDcrbc ipcrben I shall become id) iucrbe toerbeti I shall become 
 
 Fnture Perfect: 
 
 id) mcrbe genjor- 1 shall have be- id) tDerbe gctt)or* I shall have be- 
 beti fcin come ben fcin come 
 
 Conditional: \6) iDlirbe tDCrbetl I should become 
 
 Conditional Perfect: id) Uuirbe gcnjorbetl I should have become 
 
 fein 
 
 Imperative: iDerbe become (thou) 
 
 hjerbet, iDerbcn ^^ie become (you) 
 
 Infinitive Present: (^u) tDCrben to become 
 
 Infinitive Perfect: gciPorbcn (311) fcilt to have become 
 
 Present Participle: IPCrbenb becoming 
 
 Past Participle: gcioorticn become 
 
§ 52] GENEKAL REMAEKS. 33 
 
 General remarks on the Verb, 
 
 51. Tliree foiTQs: tlie infinitwe, imperfect, and pad participle 
 are called Principal Parts, because all the others can be 
 inferred from them. 
 
 52. Formation of moods and tenses. 
 
 1. The Infinitive of every verb (except fcitt and t\)Vin) ends 
 in en: as, toben, to praise. By cutting off this syllable, the 
 stem is obtaiaed. 
 
 2. The Present Participle adds etlb to the stem: as, (obetlb, 
 praising. 
 
 3. The Past Participle requires the augment i]e, and has 
 either (c)t or en for an ending: as, geIol)t, praised; gcfcIjCIl, 
 seen. — The augment (jc is suppressed: 
 
 a. In aU verbs with the prefixes be, ge, cnt, emp, er, t)er, 3er, 
 and some others (§ 78 to 79) : thus, bebauen, partic. bebaut. 
 
 b. In aU verbs not accented on the stem (§ 10), especially 
 those in ieren and eten, as, marfd)ieren: partic. marfd)iert; pro- 
 :p()egeten: part propljejeit 
 
 4. The Present Indicative adds the endings c, (e)ft, (c)t, cn, 
 (c)t, en to the stem. On certain changes of the stem-vowel, 
 see § C4, 1. 
 
 The Present Subjunctive adds the terminations e, eft, e, etl/ 
 et, en to the stem. 
 
 5. The Imperfect Ind. either ends in te, and then the Im- 
 perfect Subjunctive agrees with it; or else it takes no ending, 
 but changes the radical vowel; as, cjeben: imperf. id) Qah; and 
 in this case the Imperfect Subjunctive adds e to it, and mod- 
 ifies the vowel: thus, id) gab, e. g.y becomes id) <^Ciht, 
 
 6. The Perfect and Pluperfect are compound tenses, and 
 are formed by adding the past participle to the proper tenses 
 of the auxiliaries l)aben and jein: thus, id) l^abe gelobt, I have 
 praised; ic^ l)atte getobt, I had praised; i^ bin gcfommen, I have 
 come; id) XOdX gefommen, I had come. 
 
 7. The Future and Conditional are also compound tenses, 
 and are formed by adding the infinitive to the proper tenses 
 
34 VERBS. [§ 52^ 
 
 of tr>crbcn: — ic^ tuerbc toben, I shall i)raise; i^ ipiirbe loben, 1 
 should praisa 
 
 8. Tlie Imperative adds e to the stem ia the singular, and 
 (c)t in the plural: — lobe, praise thou; Iob(c)t, j^i'^ise ye. 
 
 Tliis e is, in colloquial language, often suppressed; as, rcicfj' 
 mir bie ^^axi^. Some verbs reject it altogether (§ GJ^ 1, a). 
 
 53. In the same way as in EngHsh some verbs undergo 
 stronger inflectional changes than othera (compai'e icinie^ ityrofe, 
 written with praise, praised, praised), so the German language 
 presents a strong and a lueak conjugation, the foiiner being 
 commonly called the irregular, the latter the regular. 
 
 WEAK OR REGUIiAR CONJUGATION. 
 
 54. The characteristics of the regular conjugation are that 
 tlie stem-i-xnoel is never ctmnged, that the imperfect ends in tc, 
 and the fyast pnirticiple in t. 
 
 The following table presents the conjugation of a regular verb. 
 
 55. CoBcn, to praise. 
 ACTIVE VOICE. 
 
 IXDICATTSTE MOOD. SUBJUNCTH^ MOOD. 
 
 Present: 
 i^ lobe, I praise, I am praising id) lobc, I (may) j^raise 
 tVi lobfl bu lobcjl 
 
 cr lobt er lobe 
 
 mir (obcn tuir lobcn 
 
 i()r lobt, or lobct i^r lobct 
 
 fie lobctt fie lobcn 
 
 Imperfect: 
 
 t(^ lobte, I praised, I was \&j lobte (old Conditional), I 
 
 bulobtcfl [praising bit lobtcft [might praise 
 
 er lobtc cr lobte 
 
 xoxx lobten xoxt lobtcn 
 
 i()rIobtct iI}rIobtct 
 
 fie lobicn fie lobteu 
 
§ 55] WEAK CONJUGATION. 35 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 Perfect: 
 
 id) \)ahc QCloU, I have praised ic^ ^abc gcfobt, I (may) liave 
 
 praised 
 
 'hu f)a\t cjefobt bu l)abeft c\ctoU 
 
 cr ^at gelobt er I)abe gciobt 
 
 ttJtr I)abctt Qclobt iuir I)abeu gclobt 
 
 i^r l)abt cjelobt i^r l)abct gelobt 
 
 fie l^aben gelobt fie f)abcn gelobt 
 
 Pluperfect: 
 
 id) ^attt gelobt, I had praised id) \)atk gclobt (old Cond. Perf.), 
 
 I might have praised 
 
 bu I)attcft gelobt bu I)attcft gelobt 
 
 er l)atte gelobt er l)dtte gelobt 
 
 tDir l)atteu gelobt wiv fatten gelobt 
 
 il)r i^attet gelobt il)r I)dttet gelobt 
 
 fie l^attcn gelobt fie ^dtteu gelobt 
 
 Future: 
 
 id) tnerbe loben, I shall praise id) trcrbe loben, I shall praise 
 
 bu tDtrft lobeu bu u>erbeft lobeu 
 
 er tt)irb lobeu er wcvht lobeu 
 
 ipir inerbeu lobeu tuir n^erbeu lobeu 
 
 i^r JDerbet lobeu il)r inerbet lobeu 
 
 fie iDerbeu lobeu fie li^erbeu lobeu 
 
 Future Perfect: 
 
 id) tttcrbe gelobt l^abeu, I shall ic^ tt»crbe gelobt l^abeu, I shall 
 
 have praised have praised 
 
 hVi iDirft gelobt l)abeu, etc. bu luerbeft gelobt ^abeu, etc. 
 
 CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
 
 Present: Perfect: 
 
 ic^ ttjiirbe lobeu, I should praise id) ttjiirbe gelobt l)abeu, I should 
 
 have praised 
 
 bu tnitrbeft lobeu ^u mitrbeft gelobt l^abeu 
 
 er iDitrbe lobeu er ii^iirbe gelobt l)abeu 
 
 toxv itjiirbeu lobeu u>ir triirbeu gelobt t)abeu 
 
 il)r iDiirbet lobeu it)r iniirbet gelobt l)abeu 
 
 fie iDiirbcu lobeu fie icUrbcu gelobt l)abeu. 
 
36 VERBS. 'l^§ 55 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 lobe, praise (thou) IoI)(c)t, lobctt ^\c, j^raise you 
 
 cr foil lobcn, or er lobe, let Idm fie foUcn lohcn, let tliem praise 
 
 praise 
 lobcn ipir, or lag (lagt) un^ lo^ 
 
 bcu, let us i^raise 
 
 Note.— If tlie exhortation is directerl to only one person besides the 
 speaker, lajj is used; if to more than one, la^L 
 
 INFINITIVES. 
 
 Pres. 3U lobcn, to praise 
 
 Past gctobt (3U) Ijahzn, to kive praised 
 
 PAETICIPLES. 
 
 Pres. lob en b, j^raising 
 Pasi gclobt, praised. 
 
 PASSIVE YOICR* 
 
 INDICATrVTB MOOD. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present: 
 
 id) ti)crbc gclobt, I am praised ic^ toerbc gclobt, I (may) be 
 
 praised 
 
 btt ttjirft gelobt bu tDcrbeft gctobt 
 
 cr tpirb gclobt cr iDcrbe gclobt 
 
 toxv iDcrbcn gclobt iinr uterben gclobt 
 
 i^r tocrbet gclobt i^r iDcrbct gclobt 
 
 fie iDcrben gclobt - fie toerbcn gclobt 
 
 Imperfect: 
 
 id) tpurbe gclobt, I was praised i^ ftiiirbe gclobt (old Cond.), I 
 
 were praised 
 bu it^nrbcft gclobt bu initrbeft gclobt 
 
 er iDurbe gclobt cr iriirbe gclobt 
 
 unr luurbcn gclobt toir tuiirbcu gclobt 
 
 il)r tpurbct gclobt il)r luiirbct gclobt 
 
 fie luurbcn gclobt fie toUrben gclobt 
 
 * The study of this table is meant to be reserved for § 166, 
 
§55] 
 
 WEAK CONJUGATION. 
 
 37 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 Perfect: 
 
 id) bin gclobt njorben, I have ic^ fei gelobt tt>Drben, I (may) 
 
 been praised liave been praised 
 
 bu bift gelobt tnorbctt bu feieft cjelobt morbcn 
 
 er ift (gelobt hjorben er fei gelobt tnorben ^ 
 
 mv finb gelobt iDorbcn \v\v feien gelobt luorben 
 
 i^r feib gelobt worben il}r feiet gelobt tuorben 
 
 fie finb gelobt njorben fie feicn gelobt ttjorben 
 
 Pluperfect: 
 
 ic^ mar gefobt njorben, I had ic^ mare gelobt morben, I should 
 
 been praised 
 bu marft gelobt morbcn 
 er toar gelobt morben 
 \mt maren gelobt toorben 
 i()r waret gelobt morben 
 fie toaren gelobt morben 
 
 tc^ merbe gelobt mcrben, I 
 
 be praised 
 bu mirft gelobt merben 
 er ttJirb gelobt merben 
 mir merben gelobt merben 
 i^r tDerbet gelobt merben 
 fie merben gelobt merben 
 
 Future Perfect: 
 
 have been praised 
 bu mftreft gelobt trorben 
 er iDcire gelobt morben 
 njir mciren gelobt morbcn 
 i^r tociret gelobt morben 
 fie maren gelobt morben 
 
 Future : 
 
 shall \6) merbe gelobt merben, I shall 
 be praised 
 bu merbeft gelobt merben 
 er merbe gelobt merben 
 wiv merben gelobt merben 
 t^r merbet gelobt merben 
 fie merben gelobt merben 
 
 id) mcrbe gelobt tDorben fein, I id) merbe gelobt morben fein, I 
 shall have been praised shall have been praised 
 
 bu mirft gelobt morben fein, i^Vi merbeft gelobt morben fein, 
 etc etc. 
 
 CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
 
 Present : 
 
 id) milrbe gelobt merben, I 
 
 sho old be praised 
 bu tpitrbeft gelobt mevbcn 
 er tnurbe gelobt toerbcn 
 mir miirben gelobt merben 
 i^r luitrbct gelobt iDerbcn 
 fie ttJiirben gelobt merben 
 
 Perfect : 
 
 i^ miirbe gelobt morbcn fein, 
 
 should have been praised 
 bu tnilrbeft gelobt morben fein 
 er nntrbe gelobt morben fein 
 mir jDitrben gelobt morben fein 
 il)r loiubct gelobt morben fein 
 fie joiirben gelobt morben fein 
 
38 VERBa [§ 55- 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 fct gclobt, be thou praised 
 fcib gctobt, ] 
 fcicn^iegeIobt,r"y^^P^^^ 
 
 INElNlnVES. 
 
 Present: gclobt (p) ircrbcn, to be praised 
 
 Past: gclobt iuorbeu (3U) feitt, to liave been praised. 
 
 FUTURE PARTICIPLE. 
 
 in lobctt, to be i)raised. 
 
 1. Inferrogative form: lobe id}? do I praise? Ijaht id} gclobt? have I 
 praised ? 
 
 2. Xerjatwe form: icf| lobe itic^t, I do not praise; {6) ^abc nid^t gelobt, 
 I Lave not praised. 
 
 Examples of regular verbs for practice: Icbetl, live; ftrafCTl, 
 punish; fagcn, say; na()cn, approach; fdjicfctt, send; bantetl, 
 thank; ()o(en, fetch. 
 
 56. Special remarks, 
 
 1. When the stem of a verb ends in b or t, a euphonic e is 
 inserted before an inflectional t to prevent difficulty in pro- 
 nunciation: as, cr rcbct, rcbctc, l^at gercbct; if)r rcbct. Also 
 after vx and n the same e is sometimes indispensable. 
 
 For practice: babcn, bathe; arbeitett, work; atmen, breathe; 
 geidjucn, draw. 
 
 2. When the stem of a verb ends in a hissing sound, an e 
 is often required before the termination ft: as> bu reifcft, tatV* 
 Scft, I)afie|t. 
 
 3. Verbs whose stem ends in el or er drop the c from the 
 termination en: as, iDir l^anbeltt/ tDattbcrtt; and in the first per- 
 son singular of the present tense, as well as in the second sin- 
 gular of the imperative, they drop the e j)receding I or r : as, 
 id) l)anbre, imper. l)anble ; id) twanbre, imper. tuanbrc ; although 
 before r it may also be retained: as, ic^ njanbere. 
 
§ 58] OEDER OF WOEDS. 39 
 
 Preliminary rules on the Order of Words in the 
 Sentence. 
 
 57. The order of words in the sentence differs materially 
 from the English, and contributes more than anything else to 
 that strongly marked individuality by which the German 
 idiom is characterized. What grammatically belongs together, 
 as subject and predicate, is often torn asunder, the subject 
 being placed at the head of the clause, the predicate at the 
 (sometimes very distant) end of it, the two thus embracing, 
 as it were, and holding together what logically belongs to- 
 gether. 
 
 There are three modes of arranging a German sentence: 
 the normal order, the inverted order, and the transposed order. 
 
 58. In the normal order the subject precedes the pre- 
 dicate, and this, its adjuncts (objects and adverbs); thus, bie 
 ^flanscn liebcn ba^ Sidjt, plants like light 
 
 1. It is to be noted, however, that if the predicate consists 
 of a verb in any compound tense, the participle or infinitive 
 stands last in the clause: as, 
 
 liDcr JJcitlb I)at bo^tob ge=s The enemy has evacuated 
 r a U m t. the country. 
 
 ^d) tt) e r b e nac^ SDeutf cf)Ianb I shall go to Germany. 
 cjef)en. 
 
 2. Similarly, when the predicate is made up of the verb 
 fcin, or tDCrbcn, and a complement, the complement stands last 
 in the clause. 
 
 9^apoIeon to a r f einetl ^cttl* Napoleon was a terror to his 
 
 bctt etn (Sc^recfen. enemies. 
 
 !iDtefcr ©artetl tftnic^tme^r This garden is mine no 
 
 mctn. more. 
 
 (5m 3Kcd)}e( n? a r un« a n g e * A change was agreeable to 
 
 nct)m, us. 
 
 3. An infinitive depending on a verb, substantive, or ad- 
 jective, likewise stands last: 
 
40 ORDER OF WORDS. [§ 58-« 
 
 3c^^offc,baIbeittc2lnth)ort I hope to get an answer 
 
 jubcfommcn. soon. 
 
 a^ Uiar fcin SSunfc^, mit It was his wish to live in 
 
 jcbcrmann in grieben gU peace with everybody. 
 
 Icbctt. 
 
 (S5 ijt fd}n)cr,icbcrmann JU It is hard to please every- 
 
 gcfalletu bod 
 
 59, The inverted order only differs from the normal in 
 that the personal verb precedes the subject It occurs in in- 
 dependent clauses only, and is (besides in questions) required: 
 
 1. If the sentence — ^usually for the sake of emphasis — ^be- 
 gins with any other word than the subject (for exceptions, see 
 §196, note): as, 
 
 ©cute b I C il) C I c^ ^U §auf C. To-day I stay at homa 
 !Dcn S3o(}eI fclje id), aber I see the bird, but not the 
 
 nic^t bo§ 9^cft, nest 
 
 5lnn ID ar er, bod) freigcbig. He was poor, yet HberaL 
 Or, with compound tenses: §eute twcrbe tc§ gu §aufc 
 
 bicibcn. liDcn 23of;ct I) ab e icij gefeljeu, aber nidit ba§ 9^cft. 5lrm 
 
 tft er (jcK3c[en, boc^ freigcbig. 
 
 2, If the principal clause/oZfoit-s the subordinate: as, 
 SBcnn bcr (Sommcr fommt, "When summer comes I go 
 
 g C I) C i ^ auf ^ l^anb. into the country. 
 
 The principal clatif?e is, in this case, freqnently introduced by jo: as, 
 SScnn eiicr ©ctriffcn rein i% \ o If your conscience is clean, you 
 fcib iljr frei. Goe. are free. 
 
 60, The transposed order differs from the normal in that 
 the personal verb is removed to the end of the clause. It only 
 occurs in dependent clauses, and is required after relative pro- 
 nouns and adverbs, and many conjunctions (§ 194) ; thus, 
 
 ^^lanctcn, njcldjc -I^onbe Planets which have moons, 
 ^aben. 
 
§ 62] USE OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 41 
 
 T)k (S telle, h)0 VOiV hen The place at whicli we came 
 
 ge inb e r r e i d) t e n. up to the enemy. 
 
 Qd) tneijj, b a 5 e r frci l ft. I know that he is free. 
 
 1. When the conjunction ba§ is suppressed, the clause assumes the 
 normal order; as, ic^ Ixieijj, er til freu 
 
 2. Instead of ttJcntl with the transposed order, the inverted order 
 without tricitn is more extensively used than in English: as, '^ ab C ici) 
 3eit, jo fomme ic^, if I have time, I shall come. 
 
 61. The negative ntc^t, unless drawn elsewhere by em- 
 phasis, follows the personal verb as well as the object: 
 
 ^r !ommt nic^t — ift nid)t ge* He does not come — ^has not 
 
 !ommen. come. 
 
 Q6) f tub e tneitt ^\id) nt(f)t — I do not find my book — can- 
 
 fautt meitt^U(^ nidjt f inben. not find my book. 
 
 62. Preliminary remarks on the use of the 
 
 Sul:yunctive. 
 
 The Subjunctive has a variety of uses which will be treated in the 
 syntax. We confine ouiselves here to the conditioned and quotatUnud 
 
 uses. 
 
 1. Conditional use. Example: — 
 
 Senn ber 3}^enfc^ unfterbli^ If man were immortal; 
 to are. 
 that is, the Subjimctive (imperfect or pluperfect) is used when 
 the speakar assumes as real that which is contrary to reaUty. 
 a. In the clause which contains the conclusion drawn from, 
 the hypothesis, either the Subjunctive or the Conditional is 
 used: as, 
 
 SKenn bcr 3Jlen[c^ nt(^t fret If man were not free, he 
 tDcirc, jo to a r C er nicljt t)er= would not be responsible. 
 anttoortltd)(oryo to it r b e e r 
 ttid)t ueranttoortli^ f ein). 
 
 2. Quotational use. Example: — 
 
42 VERBS. [§ 62- 
 
 9J?etTl grcunb ft^rcibt, er My friend writes lie cannot 
 tonne nid}t f ommcn. come ; 
 
 that is, the Subirmctive is used whenever the speaker reporta 
 or quotes a statement nob in its exact form, but only accord- 
 ing to its contents {indirect statement), and without in any 
 way identifying or concerning himself with ii 
 
 a. As to the teyises employed in indirect statement, it ia 
 never wrong to use the same as in English: thus, 
 
 ^)er SJHntfter f agte, erratic The minister said he had no 
 tcinc 3c it. time; 
 
 yet it is more common to deviate from the ordinary sequence 
 of tonses, and to use those of the corresponding direct state- 
 ment; hence, bcr 2)^nifter fagtc, er ^ ab e fcine ^cit, because the 
 direct statement would be: „ic^ ^ ab e fetnc ^c^^-" 
 
 STRONG OR IRREGULAR CONJUGATION. 
 
 63. The characteristics of irregular verbs are: 
 
 1. The change of the radical vcnveL 
 
 2. The lack of an, ending in the im/perfect indicaiive (first 
 and third person siogular). 
 
 3. The ending of the pa^ participle, which is en instead 
 of et. 
 
 64. The change of the radical vowel always takes place in 
 the imperfect and usually in the past participle; thus, binben, 
 bind: impert baub, part gcbttnbcn. 
 
 The scientific name for this change of the vowel is „5lblaut/ 
 divergence of sound. — ^Moreover: 
 
 1. Most verbs with t for a radical vowel change this to i or 
 ic in the second and third singular indicative present, and in 
 the second singular imperative; as, \d) l^clfe, I help, bu ^tlfft, er 
 ^ilft; imperative, I}i(f; ic^ lefc, I read, bu Iteft, cr licft; imper- 
 active, UcS; viz. long e becomes ic; short e— I 
 
§ 66] STRONG CONJUGATION. 43 
 
 Note.— Of tliG two vowels c and i occurring in the conjugation of 
 many verbs with c in the infinitive, the latter (i) is the original one ; it 
 was changed to e when the ending contained an a, as can, e. g., be seen 
 in the old High-German conjugation of l^etfen : hilfis, thou helpest; 
 hilfit, he helps; helfam, we help; helfat, you help; helfant, they help. 
 
 This phonetic assimilation of i (or u) to an a in a following syllable 
 is called ^ved)ung. 
 
 a. The ending e of tlie imperative is dropped in this class 
 of verbs, except in tt)erbe, become, and in fiel)e, look, although 
 fte'^, too, is quite common. 
 
 The other verbs may drop the c. 
 
 2. Verbs with a for a radical vowel imodify it in the second 
 and third singular indicative present; as, \6) falle, bu fall ft, CV 
 fiitlt. 
 
 Exceptions are: fd^affen, to create; jc^aHen, to resound; fatten, to fold; 
 ntal)len, to grind; jatjen, to salt; jpalten, to cleave. 
 
 a, ?aufcn, to run; faufen, to drink, and fto^en, to push, follow the 
 same rule:— thus, id^ laufe, bu lan\% er I&ltft; 16) jaufe, bu faitffl, er ffiltft; 
 id^ fto^e, hvi ftoijt, er fto^t. 
 
 3, The imperfect subjunctive, besides adding an e to the 
 imperfect indicative, modifies its voweL Thus, i(^ banb be- 
 comes ic^ banbc; id) bot: ic^ bote; tcf) trug: \d) triigc* 
 
 In a few verbs, the vowel of the imperfect subjunctive is an alto- 
 gether different one from that of the imperfect indicative: as, id) florb, 
 ic^ fturl)e, the u being found in the Old High-German plural of the 
 Imperfect Indicative. 
 
 65. Some verbs whose stems end in t, reject the inflectional 
 t of the third person singular; as, braten: er brdt ; fledjten: er 
 flicfjt ; gelten : er gi(t ; l}ixittn : er l)a(t ; raten: er rat ; fd)clten: er 
 
 mt 
 
 66. Conjugation of some irregular verbs for comparison 
 with the refmlar verb. 
 
 
 
 INDICT 
 
 LTiVK 
 
 
 
 
 Present: 
 
 
 16) lobe 
 bu lobft 
 er lobt 
 
 ingc 
 ingft 
 ingt 
 
 
 >red)e j 
 
 ■prtt^ft 
 
 |)rid)t 
 
 [aire 
 ttllft 
 ttllt 
 
44 
 
 §06- 
 
 tuir loben 
 il)r lobt 
 fie loben 
 
 fmgen 
 
 fingt 
 
 imgen 
 
 
 prcc^en 
 
 pred)t 
 
 prcd)cn 
 
 alien 
 
 allt 
 
 alien 
 
 if^ lobte 
 bu lobtcft 
 er lobte 
 Unr lobten 
 i()r lobtct 
 fie lobten 
 
 fang 
 
 angit 
 
 ang 
 
 angen 
 
 angt 
 
 angen 
 
 Imp& 
 
 \ 
 
 rfed: 
 
 prad)ft 
 
 prad^ 
 
 prad)cn 
 
 prac^t 
 
 prat^en 
 
 fid 
 
 ictft 
 
 id 
 
 iclcn 
 
 iclt 
 
 ielen 
 
 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 
 
 
 Present: 
 
 
 id) lobe 
 bu lobcft 
 er lobe 
 tinr loben 
 il)r lobct 
 fie loben 
 
 mgeft 
 
 [inge 
 
 ingcn 
 
 inget 
 
 ingen 
 
 
 pred)e 
 
 prec^cft 
 
 pred)e 
 
 prec^cn 
 
 prec^ct 
 
 pred)en 
 
 faltc 
 
 aUcft 
 
 aUe 
 
 alien 
 
 aUct 
 
 alien 
 
 
 
 Imperfect : 
 
 
 id) lobte 
 bu lobtcft 
 cr lobte 
 W)\v lobtcn 
 i^r lobtct 
 fie lobten 
 
 angc 
 
 angcft 
 
 cinge 
 
 dngcn 
 
 dnget 
 
 dngen 
 
 
 prod)e 
 
 prdd)cft 
 
 prdd^e 
 
 prdc^cn 
 
 prdd)ct 
 
 prdc^en 
 
 tele 
 [ielcft 
 
 iclcn 
 ielct 
 ielen 
 
 
 
 Imperative: 
 
 
 lobe j 
 lob(e)t j 
 
 inge 
 ing(e)t 
 
 Infinitive: 
 
 aHe 
 all(e)t 
 
 loben 
 
 'ingen 
 
 fprec^cn j 
 
 Participles: 
 
 alien 
 
 lobenb 
 gelobt 
 
 ingenb 
 ^efungen 
 
 1 
 
 prec^cnb j 
 jefpr0d)cn \ 
 
 allenb 
 jefallctt 
 
 67. Mixed Conjugation. Some verbs are regular in their 
 endings, but irregular in so far as they change the radical 
 
68] 
 
 AUXILIARIES OF MOOD. 
 
 45 
 
 YoweL Thus, brenncn, to bum, forms its imperfect brautttc, 
 and its participle gcbraunt. 
 
 To this class belong also the six Auxiliaries of Mood, so called becau5e 
 they are often used with other verbs to supply certain modalities the 
 expression of which is not provided for by special forms of conjugation. 
 
 68. Conjugation of tbe Auxiliaries of Mood. 
 
 1. 2)urfCtt, to be allowed. — ^Past Participle: geburft. 
 
 INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTTVE. 
 
 Imperfect: 
 
 ic^ biirfte 
 bu bitrfteft 
 er biirfte 
 n)ir biirftcn 
 i()r bltrftet 
 fie biirften 
 
 Qcfonnt. 
 ii^ tonnte 
 'tvi fonnteft 
 er !onnte 
 \o\x fonnteti 
 il)r fonntet 
 fie !dnntett 
 
 gemoc^t 
 \6) mbc^te 
 'tVi moc^t-eft 
 er mo(l)te 
 tt)tr mo(i)ten 
 i^r mod)tet 
 fie moc^ten 
 
 Part.: gemugt 
 ic^ miigte 
 bu mit^tcft 
 er viv&''^it 
 
 Present: 
 
 Imperfect : 
 
 Present: 
 
 \6) barf 
 
 \^ burfte 
 
 id) burfe 
 
 tvi barfft 
 
 bu burfteft 
 
 \>Vi biirfeft 
 
 erbarf 
 
 er burfte 
 
 er biirfe 
 
 n)ir bitrfen 
 
 xovc burfteu 
 
 n^ir bUrfett 
 
 if)r bi'trft 
 
 t^r burftet 
 
 il)r biirfet 
 
 fie bitrfeti 
 
 fie burfteu 
 
 fie biirfen 
 
 2. Iliinnctt, to be able.- 
 
 -PastPartic: 
 
 t(^ faun 
 
 ic^ fonnte 
 
 tc^ fbnne 
 
 bu !annft 
 
 \>]X fonnteft 
 
 \iVi fbnneft 
 
 er fann 
 
 er founte 
 
 er fonne 
 
 ttjir fonncn 
 
 \o\x fonnten 
 
 tuir fonnen 
 
 il)r fount 
 
 tf)r fonntet 
 
 i^r fbnnet 
 
 fie fduueu 
 
 fie fonnten 
 
 fie fonnen 
 
 3. SWogCtt, to like, may.- 
 
 —Past Partic. : 
 
 i^mag 
 
 id) mod)te 
 
 ic^ nioge 
 
 \>Vi magft 
 
 bu mod)teft 
 
 'tM ntogeft 
 
 crmag 
 
 er mo^te 
 
 er moge 
 
 ttjtr Tubgen 
 
 n)tr moisten 
 
 n)ir mbgen 
 
 tt)r mbgt 
 
 it)r mod)tet 
 
 it)r moget 
 
 fie mogeu 
 
 fie mod)ten 
 
 fte mbgen 
 
 4. SRuffc 
 
 in, to be obliged, must. — ^Past 
 
 id) mug 
 
 id) mujte 
 
 id) miiffe 
 
 bu mujt 
 
 \>yi mugteft 
 
 bu mUffeft 
 
 ermufe 
 
 er mufete 
 
 er miiffe 
 
46 
 
 VERBS. 
 
 [§6a- 
 
 tDtrtnilffcn n)irmu§ten tDtrtnuffcn tPtrmu^tcn 
 
 \\)V mitgt i()r mn^kt tt)r mitffct i{)v mii^tct 
 
 fiemiiffen fie mupten fiewiifien fie miigtett 
 
 5. SoUcn, shall, to be to.- -Past Partic.: gefoUt. 
 
 i(i)foII id)fo(Ite id) foUe id) fotlte 
 
 bufoUjt bufoUteft bufolleft bufolltcft 
 
 crfoU erfoUte er foUe erfoUte 
 
 ttjirjollen toir follten njirfotlen ipir foUten 
 
 ifjv foCt 
 fie foUeti 
 
 i^r foUtet 
 fie foUten 
 
 i^r fotlet 
 fie foUeu 
 
 i^r foUtct 
 fie foUteu 
 
 6. U&nUtn, to wish, to be wiHing. — ^Past Partic. : cjctuoUt. 
 
 id)XDiU 
 btt Unllft 
 ertoiU 
 \v\v xooUtn 
 i^r tooUt 
 fie tooUen 
 
 xii) tPoUte 
 bu iDoUteft 
 er iuoUte 
 irir tpollteti 
 if)r iDo Utet 
 fie iDoUtett 
 
 id) njotle 
 bu tPoUeft 
 er njoUe 
 n)ir ftJoUen 
 il)r iDotlct 
 fie tooUen 
 
 ic^ troUte 
 bu tPoUteft 
 er iDoflte 
 irir tDoUtctt 
 i^r tvolltet 
 fie iDoUten. 
 
 Note.— As tlie conjugation table of tlie six Auxiliaries of Mood shows, 
 their chief deviation from the regular verb loben is in the singular of 
 the present indicative, vrhich takes its forms from an imperfect of the 
 irregular conjugalion (§ 63 to § 64). 
 
 69. The compound tenses of the Auxiliaries of Mood are 
 formed regularly (§ 52, 6 to 7): as, id) Ijahc gefonnt, I have 
 been abla If, however, the past participle is accompanied by 
 an infinitiw, it taJies the form of the infinitive: as, id) Ijobt 
 nid)t fommen f onnen, I have not been able to come. 
 
 70. Instead of the Conditional id) tt)iirbe Ifinnen, iDotlett, 
 muffen, etc., the imperfect subjunctive, ic^ fi)nnte, tooUtz, mii^te, 
 etc, is almost invariably used, and instead of the Conditional 
 Perfect i6) tritrbc Qetonnt l^aben, I should have been able, the 
 Pluperfect Subjunctive ic^ l^dtte QCfonut. Hence, a phrase like 
 he could have come (he would have been able to come) is 
 translated er 1^ (itte fommeu !i)nncn (§ 69), and he should have 
 come, or he ought to have come, by er l)dtte fommen foUctt. 
 
§ 71] IRREGULAR VERBS. 47 
 
 71. Alphabetical list of all irregular verbs. 
 
 Note. — The following rules will greatly facilitate the study of the 
 
 list. 
 
 1. All verbs vdth a in the infinitive retain it in the past 
 participle. In the imperfect they take either te or u: 
 
 raten: net, geraten 
 tragen: trug, getrageu 
 
 2. Those with et in the infinitive take t or ie in both the 
 imperfect and past participle: 
 
 reiten: ritt, gerittett 
 meiben: micb, gemicbeti 
 
 Exception: l^eigen, l)ic|j, gel)ei§en. 
 
 3. Those with te or any modified vowel (S, o, it) have an o 
 in both the imperfect and past participle: 
 
 bieten: M, gebotcn 
 liigen: log, gclogen 
 
 Exceptions: (iegen, Ittg, getegen; geBciren, gebttr, geBoreu; and the 
 modal auxiliaries biirfeu and miiffeiu 
 
 4. Those with e take either a or o in the imperfect; if o, the 
 same vowel is found in the past participle: 
 
 geben: gab, gegeben 
 l^eben: Ijiih, ge^obett 
 
 5. Verbs whose root ends in inb, ttig, or in!, take a in the 
 imperfect, and U in the past participle: 
 
 btnben: bonb, gebunben 
 fingen: fang, ge[ungctt 
 jinfen: fan!, gefunfen 
 
 Exception: bringen, bro(f)tf, gebraii^t. 
 
 6. Consonants remain unchanged, except in a few cases 
 pointed out in ihe hst 
 
48 
 
 IBBEGUIAB VERBS. 
 
 [§71 
 
 o 5 
 
 -*:J &> 
 
 S b 
 
 -£i.b 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 y rf 
 
 
 _ CJQ C3 ® ^ 
 
 2 S i=5 ^ ^ 
 .S .§ ^ S ;S 
 
 «1^-§ I. 
 
 
 3 s 
 1? « 
 
 u— JjrL C35 vO 5fc2 
 
 
 o t> — .o «CS^Oo500« 
 
 o 50 
 
 2 
 
 O 
 
 s& -§ 
 
 ■s 
 
 I rt ® fl tjD5 
 a 
 
 
 
 «_> e_» fi -»-r o 
 
 ^ 3 3 '>H A 
 
§71] 
 
 mREGTTLAR VERBS. 
 
 49 
 
 
 sO '.sn ■j^t ^.ct yzi j=i j=t 
 
 
 :C3 
 
 
 
 •.Ox— s 
 
 i-t '^ ^ 
 
 :^>e^ 
 
 
 
 i s 
 
 "6^ G> 
 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 O :« 
 
 5-* "S^ 
 
 fi ts 'fl 
 WW ^ 
 
 CS)CS> 
 
 sO sO ^O >0 .O >0 .O -s—^vO vO ,o 
 
 
 O Cl> &> «L> o o 
 <35 «) CS5 <35 CSJ <33 
 
 cn 
 
 <=5 <-5c> 
 
 SS .1 
 
 
 
 
 
 >A ^O ^O ..^ x:> .^3 X> .^z jO o 
 
 '73 
 
 I? 
 
 JH ® © 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^a ^a ^a js j=> ja 
 
 
 «> .iZ 
 
 
 
 »- 
 
 s 
 
 »- 
 
 s 
 
 
 »^;« ^ 
 
 3 23- 
 
 
 f5 O C^ w 
 
 
 <33 
 
 
 6) 
 
 OS 
 
 d 
 o 
 
 o •—* 
 to ** 
 
 
 u — ^ a> 
 
 
 3 
 
80 
 
 IRBEGTJLAR VERBS. 
 
 [§71 
 
 Pi 
 
 •e- 
 
 o 
 
 «» 
 
 ^ 
 
 :g3 
 
 :0 re- rO P 
 
 i-t 
 
 
 :CS 
 
 
 
 
 :C :0 ^ 
 
 vO 
 
 ^ y=> fi ^ i:: 
 
 i-, iZ -^ 
 
 <L> 
 
 -C c^ .«- «_, :o 
 
 M^l^CS 
 
 C5 
 
 CS5 csi crs c: cs; 
 
 Pi 
 
 S €32-ti^^ 
 
 
 
 »ta 
 
 c» 
 
 
 C33 Ca 
 
 - it 
 
 C5 <3i 
 
 
 « o 
 
 
 
 
 c_> o c^ 
 <Si a C33 CA 
 
 «-> t> «-> 
 CS5G5C3 
 
 t> ej «_» c_> e_> c-> o 
 €52 CS; C5 C5 C3 C3 C» 
 
 
 >=- ? OS'S 
 
 C3 c_> .i- t> G e-> «^ 
 €55 C25 CSi C33 CS C» C5i 
 
 
 
 
 >% © Q"^ 
 
 cpj ^ crt q:?^ c3 
 
 9 © § 
 
 i s a 
 
 '^ e+H *t-l 
 
 tfl 
 
 
 
 o 1^ 
 o 
 
 •fl .^ a o 5 © s 5 
 
 gg 
 
 
 ti ci d pt pt 
 
 «^ o c^ o ej 
 
 
 C5 
 
 
 <-> «^ e-> 
 
 ^-' ^-^ Z^ .«- -*-» ni TZJ 
 
 e_> o «_> ej 
 
 €55 C53 C: C35 C: CJi <33 
 
§71] 
 
 IRREGULAR VERBS. 51 
 
 03 CD C33 CA 03 
 
 
 i III I ilii^iiiiiii 1 1 1 
 
 CS3 CJC»<33 C» C3:0C3<35C»^<35C3«:C33C33 C35' — ^ CSS C55 03 
 
 I iitiia- rii iiiiiHijiii 
 
 I ill I I llg slsslsg ij I 
 
 CS3 02 CS3 O) <Si <Si <Si CSifC^ ^fT-jfT-^Sr^ST^aST^CTiM tt-t M-* f*-* 
 
52 
 
 IBBEGTJLAK VERBS. 
 
 [§71 
 
 t* .-« 
 
 I f t I Jl:g I f M mm 
 
 $i S § ri^ 
 
 n o ^ 
 
 o ^ o • 
 
 «-* *c 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 -«-> 
 
 
 
 e3 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 ■— 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 >3 
 
 ^ ^ ^ 
 
 
 
 
 _«-» 
 
 
 g; 
 
 jj-^ 
 
 «-» 
 
 -»-^ 3? ^T~" 
 
 
 2 
 
 
 . > 
 
 
 -^^ 
 
 ,o 
 
 >=> 
 
 .in -2 ;:j 
 
 
 
 i^— 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 :« 
 
 
 -« «r ■« 
 
 
 Ji 
 
 
 _«j 
 
 
 
 
 
 P3 
 
 
 :2 
 
 
 •^-t 
 
 
 •>— » 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 'TS 
 
 
 Y"? 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 d 
 
 
 .i_> 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 >=> 
 
 
 
 C3 
 
 
 c: 
 
 
 c: .«j «. 
 
 
 (3 
 
 
 ^tT 
 
 «-. 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 <— j^ >— * > 
 
 
 § 
 
 
 
 
 
 e_> 
 
 
 t> ^ <i> 
 
 <L> 
 
 «_> 
 
 
 "cI* 
 
 ^ 
 
 CSJ 
 
 
 C5^ CSiCS 
 
 — 
 
 <= 
 
 )<r3c:5ca 
 
 O *^ 
 '5 C33 
 
 
 I 
 
 S? 
 
 » 
 
 fi o :-» 
 
 ^> >>« ^^ O !-» O 
 
 ^ .Si .^ .ti .Si 5 5 o^ 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 f>> 
 
 
 
 
 
 i 
 
 pinch 
 regular. 
 
 pinch 
 re commonl 
 
 come 
 
 be able 
 
 creep 
 
 choose 
 
 i 
 
 :l 
 
 si 
 
 
 CO o 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ ^ ti 
 
 
 
 
 
 S 
 
 ti ^ s 
 
 lis 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 S 
 
 S «-> J3 
 
 
 
 
 
 •TJ "^ "^ © "d 
 
 r-H fn r— 1 r— ' 
 
 J-5 ^ J^ «^ 
 
 ;a 
 
 «5 
 
§71] 
 
 lEKEGULAB VEEBS. 53 
 
 ,^5 o 
 
 e8 >r 
 
 
 
 
 tl«|.S?S;£iBll litis rSegsg^g 
 
 C35 cri<53 C35 « C» C» <» <35 <3: cn e„ CS o» C55 rf c;3 C35 CSS C35 <35 C» C3I 
 
 
 o ::3 p 
 
 So^^^§ ti-^ 
 
 «> 
 
 o 
 
 2 • 8 d § 
 
 g g j:i Ji §^ji g g g ti g « ^Sg c t- ^ - ^ « 
 
 ggg ggggSS'sS n. g- ^2 2se^:£i-e 
 
54 
 
 IimEGDLAR ^^ERBS. 
 
 [§71 
 
 
 
 
 ^ ^ g 
 
 00 
 
 CO "^ 
 
 g g^ ^ 
 
 o 
 
 B ti 
 
 C3 
 
 «-> 
 
 -Si H 
 
 5=: rr ^ H 
 
 
 
 pi 3 
 
 « 
 ^ 
 
 1:3 ^ 
 
 
 d <o 
 
 jO _5 ^ ^ 
 
 © -+3 
 
 o o w 
 
 03 
 
 -^^ 
 
 j:i ?i J=J 
 
 .^ .^ .s 
 
§71] 
 
 IRREGULAR VERBS. 55 
 
 
 
 
 r^ ^■^_ ^*^. ^*^_ >**_ 
 
 CS3 C3 CS3 <33 CS 
 
 « .'^ 
 
 
56 
 
 mREGUIAK VERBS. 
 
 [§71 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 « 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 -•-» 
 
 i 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 II 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 OB 
 
 
 'C.2 
 
 o 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 •S 
 
 
 §1 
 
 i^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 M 
 
 
 ,^1-H 
 
 :« 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 rt 
 
 
 d 
 
 s 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 
 
 '^ 
 
 
 <M 
 
 g 
 
 S 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ,4 
 
 
 , 
 
 
 
 
 ti 
 
 
 
 S 
 
 
 Ck 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 ti 
 
 r; 
 
 o 
 
 
 •1 
 
 
 .3i o 
 
 
 i 
 
 JO 
 
 
 
 is 
 
 O 
 
 
 o 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 > 
 
 o 
 
 PM 
 
 2 
 
 22 
 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 g 
 
 2 
 
 a 
 
 -s 
 
 ^Q" 
 
 *c: ^ 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 *5^^ 
 
 P.^ " 
 
 s 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 fS 
 
 «-> 
 
 «-. «_» 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 «-> 
 
 o 
 
 «-> 
 
 <=5 
 
 cr. c=> 
 
 
 C35 
 
 C5C5 
 
 +3 
 
 C3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 c 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 « 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 d 
 
 2 
 ?> 
 
 
 > 
 
 s 
 
 jO 
 
 c: 
 
 
 
 
 *-» ^ 
 
 d^2 
 
 OQ 
 
 s 
 
 Pt 
 
 fi 
 
 >5" 
 
 ^ » 
 
 V* 
 
 o ^ 
 
 \ii o 
 
 C3 
 
 « 
 
 C3 
 
 C3 
 
 
 o ^ 
 
 »4 
 
 2 
 
 2 w 
 
 -<B 2 
 
 s 
 
 » 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 ^ 
 
 2 ^ 
 
 Pi 
 B 
 
 •S" 
 
 ^S"^ 
 
 fl 
 
 §: 
 
 g;^ 
 
 
 g"^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 M 
 
 1 
 
 ■4^ 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 a 
 
 c3 
 
 1 
 
 
 8 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 to 
 
 
 1 
 
 £ 
 
 r^ Sd 
 
 g. 
 
 cc 
 
 k 
 
 02 
 
 
 OQ 
 
 ^- 
 
 ti 
 
 g^ 
 
 o 
 
 
 g 
 
 
 
 ti 
 
 •^ 
 
 
 
 
 J 
 
 
 C5 
 
 
 
 <d 
 
 ?a 
 
 ?i » 
 
 
 '5 
 
 'S 
 
 2 
 
 
 » 
 
 M 
 
 
 .»-• .«-• 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 rS^ 
 
 ra^.^ 
 
 
 «^ 
 
 rs^^ 
 
 
 «^ ^ 
 
 o €-> o F 
 
 ^ ^>=> ^ii J=i ti f^ ^"^ 
 
 Ji ^_^ ci -i-J"^ «-» eit «-> ^ ci 
 
 
 I I ^1 I 
 
 TO 
 
 ■i 
 
 •a -a a 
 
 ©• 
 
§71] 
 
 IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 57 
 
 o «^ 
 
 «> 5 S> <u C33 
 •J- :0 »^— J- >-» ;-, -5 rg 
 
 ^^ 
 
 g_:« g_ 
 
 ^ ^> «V *^ «-> *K1. «^ «^ 
 
 a- 
 
 
 
 :0 
 
 d ri J-» oj 
 
 O »- €3? »- »- »- »- »->- .-^ 
 
 
 s 
 
 CD 
 
 rr ^ o pj'^ 
 
 -Os^ G 
 
 <35 CJi 
 
 cn C» 
 
 Cl> «> C-k «> «> 
 
 C» C5 C33 C» C53 
 
 ei tf c; 
 « o .^ o o -^ ^ o n n ^ 
 
 e^ tt> «_> «> o 
 C3i C35 CSi C55 €35 
 
58 IRREGULAR ^^ERKJ. [§ 71 
 
 a 
 
 <N 
 
 O 
 
 
 H 
 
 
 •*■* -*-> -t-t ->-, -*-, ,t_(-«^ii 
 
 
 
 Sao sS^O -^^ ». .^» 
 
 5< S }\ -« }_, o 
 
 s 
 
 f=-r ^- 
 
 •2 .«-► ri ^ «-» S n r-,-^n f-" o 
 
 ^ O Q ^^ w.. - ...— , 
 
 £> » » » 
 
 c:c3 
 
 CS3 CS5 
 
 t 
 
 
 ^«^ 
 
 
 
 '«> 
 
 
 
 &> 
 
 •^ 
 
 
 § 
 
 
 :C3 
 
 
 
 
 
 *e^ 
 
 1 
 
 
 ^ O 
 
 £2 
 
 ll 
 
 o 
 o 
 
 ^ 
 
 <D ® 
 
 
 - - ?? 
 
 
 fi 
 
 
§71] 
 
 IBREGULAR VERBS. 59 
 
60 VERBS. [§ 72- 
 
 SEPAHABLE AXD INSEPAEABI^E YEKBS. 
 
 72. Compound verbs — i. e., those made up of two in- 
 dependent words, as, au^ge^eu, to go out — have the pecuHarity 
 that their components may be separated from each other. The 
 first of the two components, which is usually an adverb or a 
 preposition, is called ihe prefix. 
 
 73. Separation takes place in the present and imperfect, but 
 only in principal clauses; moreover, in the imperative. The 
 prefix comes last in the clause. Thus, the verb abfc^reibetl/ to 
 write off, to copy, is used in the following ways: 
 
 3^) f^tClBe ben iBricf oB. I copy the letter. 
 ^6) fc^ricfi ben ^rtef oB. I copied the letter. 
 S^rciBc ben ^rief aB. Copy the letter. 
 
 But: 2)er S3ricf, hjelc^en i^ aB* The letter which I am copying. 
 f^rciBc. 
 3lt« i(^ ben 53rief aBf^rtcB. When I copied the letter; 
 
 these being dependeni clauses. 
 
 1, The augment g C of the past participle, and the J n of the 
 infinitive are inserted between the prefix and the verb : as, 
 Qd) \jabc hm ^rief ab gcs I have copied the letter. 
 
 fc^rteben. 
 Qd) tDitnfd^e ben ^rief ah^ I wish to copy the letter. 
 5ufd)reiben. 
 
 Other examples: 
 
 Infinitive. Participle. Infinitive with j^u. 
 
 anfongeu, begin: angcfangen angttfangen 
 
 Dorangetjen, precede: Dorangcgangen ijoranjttge^en 
 
 fliUfd^meigen, be silent: ftiagcfc^roiegen ftilljttfc^ttjetgetu 
 
 74. There are a number of idiomatic phrases made up of a 
 verb and a substantive, or an adverbial expression, which are 
 construed like separable verbs: as, ad)t geben, to pay 
 attention; thus, 
 
§76] 
 
 SEPARABLE AND INSEPARAELS VEEBS. 
 
 61 
 
 (^olumbue gab onf ben gtug 
 
 bcr SSogei adjt 
 ®a ^olumbu^ auf \)m g(ug 
 
 ber ^ogel ac^t gab. 
 
 Columbus paid attention to 
 the flight of birds. 
 
 Since Columbus paid at- 
 tention to the flight of 
 birds. 
 
 Other phrases of this kind are the following: 
 
 ttt ad)t Tiet)men, to take care 
 in onf)3rud) nefjmen, lay claim 
 
 to 
 banf fagcn, give thanks 
 fiirlieb ne^men, put up with 
 3ur 9^ebe ftellen, call to ac- 
 count 
 ftanb fatten, keep one's 
 
 ground 
 ^u ftanbe bringen, accomplish 
 an ftanbe fommen, be brought 
 
 about 
 ^n grunbe ge^en, be ruined 
 gn grnnbc ric^ten, ruin 
 
 l^an^ !)alten, keep house 
 
 l^o^n fpred)en, bid defiance 
 
 inne werben, perceive 
 
 gn Uiht t!)Un, harm 
 
 rebe ftel)en, answer 
 
 im (^itd^e (affen, leave in the 
 
 lurch 
 teil ne^nten, take part . 
 3n tett inerben, fall to one's 
 
 share 
 tro^ bleten, defy 
 jnnt 93orf(i)etn fomntcn, appear 
 in^ Serf fe^en, carry into 
 
 effect 
 
 Exceptions to the rule given in § 72. 
 
 75. The following compound verbs are inseparable. 
 
 Qrgtt)bl)ncn, suspect 
 froI)locfen, exult 
 frit^ftuden, breakfast 
 l^nb^aben, handle 
 l^ofmetj'tern, tutor 
 !urgtDei(en, amuse 
 langroeilen, bore 
 
 ratf(i)(agen, deHberate 
 recl)tfertigen, justify 
 f(^ulmetftem, keep school 
 IDe^flagen, lament 
 ipeiffagen, prophesy 
 tDetteifern, emulate 
 tt)etter(en(i)ten, lighten 
 h)ieber^o(en, repeat 
 h)it(fa^ren, comply with 
 
 Uebfo[en, caress 
 
 (uftmanbeln, walk for pleasure 
 
 mutma^en, suppose 
 
 Example : '^a ^rf olg red)tferttgt f cine (Sdjrttte — I}at f elite 
 ©d)rttte gerec!)tfertigt, success justifies his steps — ^has just- 
 ified his steps. 
 
 76, Verbs formed with the prefixes Be, fiC, ent, tmp^ tX, 
 tni§, tier, lit are inseparable. They reject the augment gc 
 
^ VERBS. [§ 7G- 
 
 in the past particij)le. Thus, ticrlicrctt, to lose; pres. idj 
 ucrlicrc; partic uciiorcn; m^m- ^utjciiicrcn. 
 
 1. 5tnttt)0rtcn, to answer, althonsli ant is but an older form for ent, 
 forms its past participle Qcanttt)ortct 
 
 2. Several verbs formed vrith. the prefix m i J3 take gc in tbe past part- 
 iciple, some before the preUx : as, miObrauc^cn, to abuse : part. gCinife* 
 brauc^t; others after it: as, nii{jMIbcn, to deform: part. jni|30Cl)iIbct. 
 
 Note, — Verbs formed with these inseparable prefixes, none of which 
 has any longer an independent existence in the language, are no com- 
 pounds, according to the definition given in <^ 72, but derivatives, and 
 as such, proj)erly sx^eaking, no exceptions to a rule given for com- 
 pounds. 
 
 On the meaning of the inseparable prefixes, see § 205. 
 
 77. Any separable prefix, as, auf in auftragen, becomes in- 
 separable when preceded by an inseparable one. Thus, be* 
 Quftragen, to commission: pres. ic^beauftracjc; part be auf* 
 tragt 
 
 The only exceptions are e n t g e g c n ; as, entgegcngel^en : pres. tc^ gcl^c 
 Cittgcgcn, and b e Do r in bcDorflcI)cn, be imminent: pres. e§ ftcl}t beDor. — 
 In other compounds, b e U o r is inseparable. 
 
 1. A compound verb such as ancrfcnttcit, to recognize, where an in- 
 separable prefix (cr) is preceded by a separable one (an), is, in accord- 
 ance with the rules given, used in the following way: ic^ er!enne an; 
 ic^ ^abc anerfannt; ic^ bin bcrcit anguerJennen. Some writers, 
 however, treat aucrtennen as inseparable. 
 
 78. Six prefixes: bur^, utn, ilbcr, unter, ^tnter, iDtber 
 are separable, when the compound of which they form a "poirt 
 iaintransUive: as, untcrgeljcn, go down: pres. t(^ gctje UUtcr. 
 
 With transitive compounds, the prefix is regularly insepar- 
 able, if it stands to the object merely in the logical relation of 
 a preposition of its noun. The phrase 'ta^ 8anb burd)3tel)cn, 
 e. g., can, without injury to the sense, be changed to burd) ha^ 
 2ciX\h gicljcn, where burc^ is a preposition to the object 2ant)f 
 and is, therefore, inseparable. Thus, ic^ b ur d) ^ i e I) e ba§ J^anb, 
 l)abe ha^ Sanb b ur d) 5 o g e n, the augment ge being always op- 
 pressed, when any one of the six jDrefixes is used insepar- 
 ably. 
 
§ 81] ADJECTIVES. 63 
 
 On the contrary, in tlie phrase ein (Sett burd^^te^Ctt, to pull 
 a rope through (sc a ring), the prefix t>VLX6) is not a mere pre- 
 position to the object (Scil, as the translation shows, but has 
 the weight of an adverb, and is as such (accented and) separ- 
 able: id) 3tel}e ein (Sell burd;, Ijabe em ^ei( burdjgcjogen.* 
 
 79. S3 oil is inseparable with the following verbs: t)otIbritt* 
 cjeu, accompHsh ; Doltcnbcn, finish ; uoUftrcden, t)on3ieI)cn, exe- 
 cute. "With aU others it is separable. 
 
 ADJECTIVES. 
 
 80. The adjective is not decHned when used predicatively : 
 
 ©le ^unft ift lang. Goe. Art is long. 
 
 35 n, full, only is often used predicatively in its inflected 
 form t)olIcr for all three genders: as, ber ^aum ift t)oI(er ^epfcl, 
 the tree is fuU of apples; bte Siefe ift t)oUcr ^(utnen, the 
 meadow is fuU of flowers ; ba§ 'BtM ift Doltct §anb(ung, the 
 play is f uU of action. 
 
 When used attributiveXy (as epithet preceding a noun) the 
 adjective is dechned, but its endings vary according as it is 
 preceded by a limiting word or noi 
 
 81. When not preceded by any limiting vxyrd the adjective 
 takes the endings of the definite article (§ 14) : 
 
 MASCULINE. FEMININE. NEUTER. 
 
 Singular. Singular. Singular. 
 
 btaucr ©tmmel, griinc SBiefe, green h)ettc§ X1)q1, wide 
 
 blue sky meadow valley 
 
 blauctt §immel§ griincr Siefe tDeitcn ^^a(eg {xotu 
 
 (blaue§ ^immel^) tee Z\)ak^) 
 
 blaucm ^tmmel grimct SBlefc xoditm i^^ale 
 
 btauctt §immet griinc SSiefe i^eitcg Z\)a{ 
 
 * For fuller information on this subject, see the author's ''Lehre vom 
 Accent der deutschen Sprache." 
 
64 
 
 ADJECTIVES. 
 
 [§81. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 blauc gintmct 
 liautt $immc( 
 bfauctt |)imme(n 
 blauc §iuimc( 
 
 griinc SS^icfcti 
 gritncr SSiefcn 
 Qrimcn SStcfctt 
 griinc Siefcu 
 
 PluraL 
 
 iDcitcr S^l)alcr 
 tvcitcit 5tl)a(em 
 tocite Zl)'dicv 
 
 The ending en is, in the genitive singular, preferred to c3 
 when the noun itself takes e^ (or §). 
 
 1. The adjective retains these distinctive endings if the 
 noun qualified by it is not added but understood: as, to a 3 fur 
 9^o|ert Dcrfaufen (Bit? — 9^ote uub Wc'i^t, what kind of roses 
 do you sell? — Ked ones and white ones. 
 
 The English one, ones after an adjective is never translated. 
 
 82. "WTien preceded by the indefinite article the adjective 
 requires the distinctive endings of the definite article in the 
 nominative and accusative only; in the other cases etl is sub- 
 stituted for them: — 
 
 lIASCULDfE. FRAfTXIXE. 
 
 tin Uautx §imtttet etne griinc SSicfe 
 eine^ blauen §tm* eincr gri'mcn 3S5ie[c 
 
 ntel^ 
 cincm blaucn §ini* eincr gruncit Siefe 
 
 mc( 
 cinen blaucn gim* cine griinc SSiefe 
 
 met 
 
 KEUTEB. 
 
 ein lueitcS !i:tiar 
 eine§ \\>cittn Zi)ak^ 
 
 eincm njeitcn Z\)ak 
 
 tin toeitcS 2:]^a( 
 
 1. The same endings are used after all 2X)ssessive adjectives, 
 and after tein, no; tiius, tnein liebcr S^eunb, my dear friend; 
 !ein gutcS S^i^^^^^ ^^ S^^^ sign. 
 
 The plural, after Siese pronominal adjectives, takes en 
 throughout: as, meinc altcn greunbc, my old friends; fcine 
 gutcn ^^2ac^rtcf)tcn, no good news. 
 
 83, "When preceded by the definite article the adjective 
 takes an C in the nominative singular of all three gendei's, and 
 ia the accusative singular feminine and neuter; everywhere 
 else en: — 
 
§ 85] DECLENSION. 65 
 
 MASCULINE. 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 ber blaue §immc( bie Mantn ©Immef 
 
 bc^ blauctt ©tntmcl^ bcr btauen ©immct 
 
 bcm blaucttjjimmel ben btauen J)tmme(n 
 
 ben bkuctt ^immel bic blaucn @tmme( 
 
 FEMININE. 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 bie griinc SSicfe bie gritttcn SSiefett 
 
 ber griincn Siefe bcr griincn Siefen 
 
 ber gritncn SBiefc \)cn grimcn SBiefen 
 
 bie griinc Siefe bie gritncn SCSiefen 
 
 NEUTER. 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 ha^ njcitc X^ai bie xocittn Z^kv 
 
 be^ weitctt Xljait^ ber iDeitcn ^^citer 
 
 htm weitcrt Sl^ale t^tn \odttn Z^akxn 
 
 ba^ iDcitc Zl)ai bic loeitctt ^i)dler 
 
 1, !^tcfer, jcner, jcber, and a few others having the same 
 distinctive endings as the definite article, have the same effect 
 on the adjective they precede: as, biefe^ altC @C^loJ3, this old 
 castle; jeber e^r(id)C llJiann, every honest man. 
 
 Note. — The principle underlying the declension of the adjective 
 (§ 81 to 83) is, tliat tliore should be sufficient infection to sho-w the case, 
 and no more. Hence, whenever the limiting word has a 
 distinctive ending, the adjective drops its own, sub- 
 stituting an indifferent cor cttfor it; but it retains 
 its distinctive ending, whenever the limiting word 
 lacks it. 
 
 84. Participles are declined like adjectives; as, ein lac^en- 
 bcr 'ip^ilofop^, a laughing philosopher; geliebtcr SSater, beloved 
 father. 
 
 85. Adjectives and participles are often used as substantives. 
 They, then, retain their ordinary declension, but are written 
 with a capital initial: 
 
66 ADJECTIVES. [§ 85- 
 
 Cm ^rcmbcr ift l^icr. A stranger is here. 
 
 5^cr ^rembc ift blonb. Tlie stranger is fair. 
 
 1. Tlie most common particij^les thus used are: 
 
 IDcr ^comtc (53c* cm ^camtct, official 
 
 amtctc), * 
 
 !Dcr ^ebtcntc, em ^cbientct, servant 
 
 !Der ©efangenc, cin ©efangettcr, prisoner. 
 
 !Der ®cle{)rtc, cin (3cic[]Vttv, learned man. 
 
 2)er 9?eifenbc, cin ^cifenber, - traveller. 
 
 !Dcr ©ei'anbtc, eitt ©cfanbtcr, ambassador. 
 
 >Der S3cmanbte, ein 3>enuanbtcr, relative. 
 
 2. Also bcr iDeutfc^e, the German, is nothing but an ad- 
 jective used substantively; hence a German is ein ^eut[djcr; 
 the Germans: bie !^eutfc^Ctt; Germans, 2)eutfc^c. 
 
 3. The neuter form of an adjective is very commonly used 
 substantively, usually with an abstract sense; as, ba3 (Sd^ouc, 
 SSaljrC UUb ©Utc, the boautiful, the true, and the good; (Bu)0^ 
 nc8 unb Olttcl; especially so in connection -with e tlu a§, some- 
 thirtg; ntd)t§, nothing; allc^, eveiything; and the lilie: as, 
 cixva^ ^cnt^f something new; nid)t^ ©utcg, nothing good. 
 
 86. Suppressed forms of declension. 
 
 1. @an^^, whole, and Ijaih, half, are left undecUned when 
 used vdthout an article before names of countries and places: 
 a^ 9an5 ^^eiUfdjlaub, in ganj ^eiiiu; ^Ib gcaulrcic^, I)alb ^oi'iiS. 
 
 2. In a few instances two adjectives connected by unb are not de- 
 clined. Such are alt unb jung, gro^ unb ticin. Thus, a 1 1 unb j u u g Be* 
 ftur:nt mic^ mit ^roblemcn (Goe ), old and youg assail me with pro- 
 blems. 
 
 3. In poetry the epithet sometimes follows the nonn, and is then nn- 
 declincd: as, ein SJicibc^cn fcf)on unb iounbcr&ar. Sch. 
 
 In prose, the only epithets which can be placed after the noun are 
 fetig, sairited; as, ntcin 95atcr jelig (for the more common mcin fcligcr 
 SSoter), my sainted father; and adjectives designating coins: as, gttjci 
 ©ulben ofterrcic^ifci^, two Austrian florins. 
 
§ 89J COMPARISON. 67 
 
 4. Before a neuter noun the adjective is, in poetry, occasionally found 
 T/ithout the ending e§, as, I i e b ^inb, eln U e b ^inb. 
 
 5. "When two adjectives of like inflection follow each other, the first 
 sometimes drops its ending: as, in tlax ititb triibcii S^agen (Goe.), in 
 bright and gloomy days. 
 
 Much more frequently is this the case in such expressions as ^ a X = 
 f erli C^ beutfc^cS ^onjulat, imperial German consulate. 
 
 87. Indeclinable adjectives, 
 
 1. Karnes of inhabitants of countries and places formed by 
 the syllable er, as, (BdjWd^a, Swiss; SBietier, inhabitant of 
 Vienna, may be ussd like attributive adjectives, but without 
 inflection. Thus, ha^ 2K t en C r 4BiciV Vienna beer. 
 
 2. Some foreign adjectives denoting colour, as, toja, lita, are not 
 declined. 
 
 88. Special remarks, 
 
 1, The adjective 1^ o (^ , high, when declined drops c ; thus, 
 ^oje ^crgC/ high mountains. 
 
 2. "When an inflectional syllable is added to adjectives ending in e( 
 or er, the e which precedes, or that which follows the I or r, is usually 
 dropped; thus, auf bunHem (for bun!elem) ©runbe, on dark ground; in 
 finftcrtt (or finflren) ^ddfttn, in dark nights. Adjectives ending in en 
 can only drop the c preceding the n; as, niit eigner (for eigener) §anb, 
 with his own hand. 
 
 3. The derivative syllables ig and i[(^ may, especially in poetry, drop 
 their i before inflectional endings : as, ettj'gei* ; l)eif ger ; ber '^eim'fdje 
 ^oben. 
 
 The chapter on the declension of the adjectives will be completed in 
 the syntax. 
 
 COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 89. The comparative is formed by adding cr (r) to the 
 positive, and the superlative by adding ft (eft). They are both 
 declined like the positive : 
 
68 ADJECTIVES. [§ 89- 
 
 xdd}r rich relict, richer berrei(^flc, the richest 
 
 miibe, tired miiber, more tired ber miibefic, the most 
 
 tired. 
 
 1. efl is used for ji in the superlative: 
 
 a. After sManis ([, jj, fc^, g) ; as, fufj : bcr fu^Cjlc ; 
 
 b. After b and t (except when they belong to the endings cnb or ct of 
 the participles; as, ful)tenb, cooling: ber fii^leubfte; gebilbet, accom- 
 plished : bcr gebilbetfte) : thus, l^olb, lovely : ber Ijolbefte ; matt, feeble: 
 bcr mattefle. 
 
 c. Usually after the diphthongs an and cu; as, gran : grauefie ; treu : 
 trcucjlc. 
 
 2. 6b cl, noble, forms its comparative eblcr (not ebeler), eliding the e 
 before \, and so do all other adjectives in el, and sometimes also those 
 in cu and cr : as, befd^eiben, modest ; bcjd^eib(c)ncr ; finfter, dark: fin= 
 ft(c)rcr. 
 
 90. The German has an adverbial form of the superlative 
 formed by am, at the, with the dative of the superlative. This 
 form is used where the Knglish superlative without the article 
 stands as a j)redicate: as, 
 
 3^m 3ll^t fi^^ ^^^ ^^9^ ^^ ^ *^^J ^^ ^J^ ^^'® hottest, 
 ^ei^cftcn. 
 
 91. Monosj^llabic adjectives with a, o, or U for a radical 
 vowel, modify it: 
 
 ftar!, strong: ftfirfer, ber [tarfftc 
 
 fromtn, pious: frommer, ber frommfte 
 fur^r short: furjer, ber tursefte. 
 
 The following are exceptions to the rule: 
 
 hav\d}, rough flad), flat morfd^, rotten 
 
 b(an!, bright frol), merry nacft, naked 
 
 blog, bare ho% hollow platt, flat 
 
 brat>, brave ^olb, gentle plump, clumsy 
 
 bunt, motley !a^(, bald rafcl), quick 
 
 bumpf, dull !arg, chaiy ro^, raw 
 
 fa^I, pale tnapp, scant ruub, round 
 
 falb, fallow Ial)m, lame fad)t, slow 
 
 falfd^, false matt, weary jauft, soft 
 
93] 
 
 COMPAEiaON. 
 
 69 
 
 fatt, satiated ftot^, proud boH, full 
 
 f(i)(aff, slack ftraff, tense tua^r, true 
 
 fc^tanf, slender ftumm, dumb inunb, sore 
 
 fd)roff, steep ftumpp blunt ga^m, tame, 
 
 ftarr, rigid toll, mad 
 
 Also with bang, anxious; glatt, smooth; llav, clear; gart, 
 tender, the vowel is usually not modified. 
 
 92. The comparison of the following adjectives is more or 
 less irregular. 
 
 Positive, 
 grog, great 
 gut, good 
 l)0d), high 
 nat)C, near 
 re(I)t, correct 
 t)iel, much 
 Dtete, many 
 iDentg, httle 
 
 Comparative. 
 
 grower, 
 
 beffer, 
 
 l)oI)er, 
 
 nci^er, 
 
 ncf)tigcr 
 
 me^r 
 
 me^rere 
 
 mittber or iDentger 
 
 1. The article before meift cannot be 
 meiften l^eute, most people. 
 
 Superlative. 
 
 ber grogte 
 ber befte 
 ber f)ocl)ftc 
 ber nac^fte 
 ber ric^ittgfte 
 ber meifte 
 bie meiften 
 ber minbefte or ber 
 iuenigfte. 
 
 dropped: thus, hk 
 
 93. Defective comparison, 
 place have only two degrees: 
 
 ber augerc, the exterior 
 ber tnnere, the interior 
 ber obere, the upper 
 ber untere, the inferior 
 ber niebere, the lower 
 ber t)orbere, the anterior 
 ber ^intere, the posterior, 
 
 hinder 
 ber mitttere, the middle 
 
 The following expressions of 
 
 ber ciugerfte, the extremest 
 ber innerfte, the innermost 
 ber oberfte, the uppermost 
 ber unterfte, the lowest 
 ber nieberfte, the lowest 
 ber oorterfle, the foremost 
 ber l}tnberfte, the hindermost 
 
 ber mittelfte, the middlemost 
 
 T^er erfte, the first, and ber le^te, the last, lack both the 
 positive and comparative: but from erft is formed a com- 
 parative erftercr (ber erft ere), the former, and from (el^t: 
 te^terer (ber (efetere), the latter. 
 
70 ADJECTIYES. [§ 94- 
 
 Special Remarhs on Comparison, 
 
 94 1. The positive is stren^liened by the adverbs f ef)r, very; 
 xcd)t, right; iibcrau^?, excessively; au|crft, l^oc^ft, extremely; 
 augcrorbentlic^, extraordinaiy; au^gejeic^nct, exceedingly; utt' 
 gemeirt, uncommonly; also by a word in com^^osition : as, 
 fdjnccmci^, white as snow; eiiidt, cold as ice; rabcnfdjroarj, 
 black as a raven. Thus, i^re @timme ift ungemeitt biegfam, her 
 voice is uncommonly flexible; tie ^JiebictU ift gaUeitbittcr, the 
 medicine is as bitter as gaU 
 
 2. The comparative is strengthened by t)icl, um tjiek'S, much; 
 tDctt or bci ineitem, far; ungleic^, incomparably; bebeutenb, um 
 ein bebeutenbe^,by a great deal; as, er ift luctt (bei iDeitcm, t>iel, 
 um Uielc^) alter, he is much older. 
 
 3. The superlative is emphasized by alter-, t)on alien, tt)ett* 
 au^, bci weitem; as, ber atterbefte SSein, ber befte Sein i)on 
 alien, bcnuei tau6 (bei iDeitem) befte SBein. 
 
 a. Superlatives thus strengthened aro always relative, never absolute. 
 The only exception is aUerliebfl, "which besides dearest of all, may 
 also mean very dear, very pretty, charming: as, bcin ^unbd^en ifl allcr* 
 licbfi, your little dog is charming. 
 
 95. The comparative is expressed by the adverb me!)r, more, 
 if not two subjects, but two quahties of the same subject are 
 compared with each other: as, er ift me I) r liftig al^ tapfer, he 
 is more cunning than brave. 
 
 96. The following examples show what particles are used 
 in comparison: 
 
 @r ift (eBcn) fo grog aU id) (or He is as tall as L 
 
 toic id)). 
 
 ^r ift nicl)t fo grog aU id) (or toic He is not so tall as L 
 
 id)). 
 
 (5r ift alter aU id). He is older than L 
 
 3c Idnger bie Stage, bcflo Htrjer The longer the dajs, the 
 
 bie 9Jad)te. shorter the nights. 
 
 5ld)ill U">ar bcr ftdrtfte tioit (or uns Aclulles was the strong- 
 
 tct) alien §ellenen (or ber ftdrf fte est of all Hellenes. 
 
 aller §etlehen). 
 
§97] 
 
 PRONOUNS. 
 
 71 
 
 1, 2) e n n Dor qI§, tlian, after a comparative is obsolete, except when 
 another ats follows: as, id) ]^ai^e it)n I}i3l)er ot§ ^iinftler b cnn al8 9Jicn* 
 f(^cn, I esteem him more highly as an artist than as a man. 
 
 PRONOUNS. 
 
 PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 
 97. Declension. 
 
 FIRST PERSON. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 N. icf), I 
 
 Gr. meincr (mein), of me 
 D. mir, to me 
 
 A. mid)f me 
 
 Plural. 
 
 unfer, 
 
 SECOND PERSON. 
 
 N. bu, 
 
 G. bciner (bein), 
 
 T>. bir, 
 
 A- bid), 
 
 tliou 
 of thee 
 to thee 
 thee 
 
 tf)r ((Sie), 
 cuer (-3i)i*cr), 
 cudi (^f)nen), 
 eud) (^ie), 
 
 masc. 
 
 N. er, he 
 
 G. Jciner (fetn), of him 
 D. t()m, ' ■■ ' 
 
 A. iljn, 
 
 THIRD PERSON. 
 
 Singular, 
 fem. 
 fte, she 
 iljrer, of her 
 i^r, to her 
 ftc, her 
 
 Plural for all three genders. 
 
 we 
 
 of lis 
 to us 
 us 
 
 you 
 of you 
 to you 
 you 
 
 neut. 
 
 it 
 
 to him 
 him 
 
 fetncr (fein), of it 
 il)m to it 
 
 e^, it 
 
 N. fie, 
 
 G. t()rer, 
 
 D. il)nen, 
 
 A. fie, 
 
 they 
 of them 
 to them 
 them 
 
 1. 9}Jeiu, belli, fcin are older forms than meincr, beiuer, feincr, 
 and occur in but a few phrases; as, S5ergiJ3metHnid)t, forget-me-not. 
 Unfrer and eurcr are sometimes found for unfer, of us, and euer, 
 of you. 
 
72 PEONOUKS. [§ 97- 
 
 2. ®8 is very often abbreviated to '§; as, bii fannfl mir'g glaubeit, yon 
 may believe me. 
 
 98. The German mode of address differs from the EngHsL 
 Instead of "you are ■VN'elcome," e. g., "we say "they are "wel- 
 come," Sic finb tt)ilI!ommen, using the third person plural 
 instead of the second, and distinguishing it by a capital 
 
 NoTE.— The nse of the third person in address is closely connected 
 witli that of titles, and came in at the beginning of the 17th centnry. 
 Persons of rank were then indirectly addressed by their title, most 
 commonly by §err or ^rau, with the verb in the third person singular 
 (Compare: how is your Lordship?). For the title was then naturally 
 substituted the pronoun er (for §err), or fie (for ^rau). During the 
 first half of the ISth century, the third person plural was considered 
 more polite than the singular, and has remained in nse up to the pres- 
 ent day, while er and fie (singular) are no longer used, except in certaia 
 parts of Germany, and only by superiors towards their inferiors. 
 
 1. This (Sic, however, is not employed exclusively. Children, 
 indeed, and pei-sons we are familiar with, as the members of 
 our family, relatives, and intimate friends, are addressed by 
 b U in the siagular, and by i I) r ia the plural Also in divine 
 worship and -poetry bu is used. Both bu and iljr require the 
 capital initial in letters. 
 
 a. Animals and things are addressed by bit in the singular, 
 and by itji* in the plui-aL 
 
 2. "While the verb connected with (Sic is always in the 
 plural, even when not more than one person is addressed, an 
 adjective, belonging to it as an apposition, is either in the sin- 
 gular or plui'al, according to the number of persons addi'essed, 
 thus, (gie 5(rmftcr, you unhappy one; but, @ie Slnnften, you 
 imhappy ones. 
 
 3. In addressing persons by their tiile, poHteness requires 
 the use of ^err or grau in connection with it. Ladies assume 
 the title of their husbands; thus, gutcn 5lbenb, §crr !5)octor! 
 gutcn SO^orgcn, gran !4^ircctor ! 
 
 Also when mentioning a member of the family of the person 
 addressed, the titles §err, grau, grdulein are not forgotten in 
 
§ 102] PEBSONAL PEONOUNS. 73 
 
 polite sr>eecli. Ex.: ©riigen (£ie 3t}re gran Mnikx unb S^jvc 
 g V ftul e in <Sd}tt)efter Don mtr, give my regards to your mother 
 and sister. 
 
 99. Tlie pronoun of tlie jfirst person is dropped in bittc, 
 pray; ban!c, thanlis; gc[cIjn)et(]C, not to mention: thus, btttc, 
 foutm bolb, pray come soon. 
 
 1. In poetry, also the pronoun of tlie second and third person is freely 
 dropped: as, bie ST^ur ift of[cn, ^ afl freien 2au\, Goe. 
 
 100, The pronoun of the third person agrees in gender 
 with the noun to which it refers. Ex. : 
 
 So i "it tnetn §ut ? Where is my hat? 
 
 §tertftcr. Hero it is. 
 
 S3o i ft tncbe Uljr ? "Where is my watch? 
 
 gieriftfi:. Here it is. 
 
 5Bo i ft mctn ®Ia§ ? "Where is my glass? 
 
 §ier ift e3. Here it is. 
 
 1. As to the words whose grammatical gender differs from 
 their natural one, as, t>Ci^ ^tib, woman, the j)ronoun prefer- 
 ably conforms to the latter. Ex. : l^a^ graulcinl fte H)i(l fter- 
 ben! Sch, The young lady! she is dying. 
 
 101. If the pronoun of the third person refer to an in- 
 animate object, and be governed by a preposition, a contraction 
 of that preposition with the adverb ba (bar before a vowel or 
 n) is usually substituted for i^; thus, 
 
 ^6) tr>ctg ntcf)t§ batJOtt. I hnow nothing of ii 
 
 ^c^ Ijabc nidit^ bagcgett. I have nothing against ii 
 Other combinations of this kind are: hobn, baburd^, hafHv, baljiutcr, 
 
 bamit, batior, baiuibcr, bct^u, ba;5h)lj:r)en, banelen, bo(r)ttad^, baran, barauf, 
 
 baraug, barin, barob, bariiber, borunt, barunter. 
 
 102, The reflexive pronoun of the j^rs^ and second person 
 does not diller from the personal; thus, id) bcflnne micl), I be- 
 think myself; bu bC|tnr.i't hi6), thou bethinkest thyself; Xoxv hc^ 
 flnneti un8, we bethink ourselves; ttjr bcflnnt eitcT), you be- 
 think yoTirselves. For the third person f id) is used for all 
 
74 PRONOUNS. [§ 102- 
 
 genders and either number; thus, cr befinttt fid), fie befinnt 
 fid), fie befinnen fi^. 
 
 1. This fid) requires no capital in address; thus, lute bcfinkn 
 (^ie fid)? how do you do? 
 
 2. The reflexive is sometimes used in a reciprocal sense: as, 
 fic befd)impf ten fid) (for eiiianber), they insulted each other. 
 
 103. The reflexive as well as the personal pronoims are 
 strengthened and emphasized by the indeclinable f C ( b ft (or 
 fclber), self: as, 
 
 <^\t betritgt f id) f e ( b ft ( f C I b e r). She deceives herself, 
 (gie f e ( b ft (f e t b e r) Tjat e§ c;ctl)atu She has done it herself. 
 
 But if no emphasis lies on the reflexive pronoun, fclbft must 
 be carefully avoided- Thus, I wash tnyself cannot be trans- 
 lated Ic^ tr>afd}e Vxx^i^ fclbft, unless I wish to intimate that I am 
 not washed by others. 
 
 1. ©clbft used as an adverb means even: as, felbft In fciner 
 le^ten <Stunbe, even in his last hour. 
 
 2. The phrase Don fcDft means of on^s oiitti accord; as, cr 
 t^at e§ t) n f elb ft, he did it of his own accord- 
 ion. The reflexive pronoun of the third person, fic^, is more 
 
 extensively used in German than in Enghsh, especially alter 
 prepositions: as, er l^at ®elb bet fid), he has money with him. 
 
 POSSESSIVES. 
 
 105. The possessive adjectives — mein, bcin, fcin, unfer, cucr, 
 il)r — are, like other adjectives, not declined when employed 
 predicativehj ; thus, biefe ©artcn finb mctn, these gardens are 
 mine, 
 
 "When used attribidively they are declined like the indefinite 
 article (§ 15). 
 
 1. To the pei-sonal pronoun 'tVi answers the possessive beitt; 
 to i()r: euer; to '3ie: 3I)r; thus, 
 
 ^a\i\^yx bcincn^ut? 
 Sabttl)r eure§iite? 
 ^aben Cie S'lji^c^ ©i^t? 
 
§ 107] I>OSSESSIVE& 75 
 
 2. Unfcr and eucr, when inflected, can drop their derivative 
 c; thus, unfre^, unfrem, unfrett; eure§, eurcm, euren, etc 
 
 3. In S3atcr unfcr, our father, the beginning of the Lord's 
 prayer, the possessive follows its noun. This is, in prose, the 
 only remnant of an old usage. 
 
 106, The possessive pronoun may assume three different 
 forms; mine, e. g., may be translated either 
 
 meinct, meine, meincS; pL mcitic; or 
 
 bcrmeinc, biemcinc, baSmcinc; pL blc mctncn; or 
 bcrmeittigc, bic meintQC, ba^ metnigc; pL bte meinigcn; 
 
 the declension agreeing with that of adjectives. Hence, your 
 cane and mine may be translated in three ways: — ^^'^r ^Btod 
 unbnelner; S^jr Stoc!unb ber metne; 3^I)r (Stocf unb ber 
 mctntge. 
 
 The corresponding renderings of ours are: 
 
 unfcrcr, unferc, unfcrc§, pL itnfcrc; 
 
 bcr uttfcrc, bte unfcrc, baS itnfcrc, pL bte nnfcrcn ; 
 bcr nnfrigc, bte unfrtgc, ba« unfrigc, pL bie unfrigcn. 
 
 1. !Da6 SJlelntge or baSSJJcine UBed absolutely means 
 my property, or my duty; and bie9}Jetniflen ox'txt^tu 
 n e Tl is used to mean my family, my friends, my companions, 
 etc. 
 
 Similarly, \>(x^ ©cintgc, bte ^^Dcintgen ; \>a^ Unfrtgc, bte UnfrU 
 gen, etc ; thus : (Jarbtnal, ic^ '^abe b a 2Ji e i n t g e gct^n, tl;un 
 ©tejc^tbas^'l^re. Sch. 
 
 107. S)ero and SI)ro, your, before titles, are antiquated. — (Stt). ab- 
 ridged of ©ttjcr, stands for (Suer : as, ®tt). §oI)cit, your Highness. — (gc. 
 and ©r., before titles, stand for ©cine and ©eincr : as, @e. 9JJojicjlat bet 
 Konig. 
 
76 PRONOUNS. [§ 108- 
 
 DEMONSTEATIVES. 
 
 108. The demonstratives are: — bicfer, jener, ber, berjenige, 
 berfcfbe, fold)cr. 
 
 109. The full declension of btcfct has been given in § 14, a. 
 That of i titer agrees with ii 
 
 The difference in the meaning between bicfcr and jcttcr is 
 that jcner points to a remoter object than btcfcr. Accordingly 
 "the latter," being the nearer, is translated by btefciv and "the 
 foi-mer" by jcncr ; thus, ic^ lefe $omer unb feantc, jenctt tm 
 Dricjinal, bief en in bcr Ucberfc^unn/ 1 am reading Homer and 
 Dante, the former in the original, the latter in the translation. 
 
 110. ^cr, this, that, when used adjectively does not differ 
 in declension from the definite article, but it is pronounced 
 with deeper emphasis: as, njcr !ennt bcn !iDicI}ter! Who knows 
 that poet! 
 
 When bcr is used as a pronoun, it is declined as follows; 
 
 Singular, 
 m. f. n. 
 
 bcr btc 
 
 ba«, that 
 
 bcffcn(be«) bercn(ber) 
 
 bcffen(be«), of that 
 
 bem bcr 
 
 bcm to that 
 
 \itxi bie 
 
 \>Ci^ that 
 
 Plm-al of all three genders, 
 bie those 
 
 bcren,bcrer of those 
 bcncn to those 
 
 btc those 
 
 1. !r)crct for bcr en is used before a relative pronoun, or a 
 substantive with a prei^osition: as, gcbcnfct bcrer, bie l^cib tra* 
 Cjcn, think of those who are suffeiing. !Dic §offnung bcrcr tm 
 Ungliicf, the hope of those in misfortune. 
 
 2. 2)c8 for bcffcn is found in bcS^alb and bcSlDcgen, therefore, and in 
 a few phrases: as, hjcg \ia% .^cr^, t)ott ift, b c8 gcl)t bcr 2JJunb \ihtx, out of 
 the abundance of the heart the mouth speaketh; besides, in poetry. 
 
§ 114] DEMONSTRATIVES. 77 
 
 111. As to its meaning, bcr stands between bicfer and jettcr, 
 and comes nearest to the Latin ide, while bicfer answers to 
 hie, and jcner to ilbd. While biefcr is most commonly strength- 
 ened by the adverb l^ier, and jener by bort, ber is emphasized 
 by \ia) thus; iDunfd)en (Sie biefe^ ^(aoicr ^icr, obcr jcne^ 
 b r t? do you wish this piano here, or that one there? SBel^ 
 d)en 9^mg meinft bu? — S;)cnbaan beittem Stnger, which ring 
 do you mean? — The one on your finger. 
 
 1. ^tx is sometimes introduced to represent the subject a 
 second time with emphasis: as, iDCr ntdjt arbcitct, ber [oU nidjt 
 effen, he who does not work shall not eat 
 
 2. Finally, ber may be used without any real demonstrative 
 power, and is then rendered by an emphatic j^ersonal pronoun: 
 as, b er foil an mid) benfen, he shall think of me. 
 
 112. The demonstratives biefer, jcner, and ber are used in 
 the neuter singular when connected with their noun by fcin or 
 tDerben. 
 
 !D{efc§ (or bic§) ift mcin ^rubcr. This is my brother. 
 3cnc§ ift mcine ^d)mefter. That is my sister. 
 
 ^tt§ ift feine ^ntfd)u(bigung. That is no excuse. 
 
 113. When referring to inanimate objects and governed by 
 a preposition, the demonstrative pronouns are little used, a 
 combination of that preposition with the adverbs ()ier or ba 
 (bar before a vowel or n) being substituted; as, 
 
 3d) f d)Iie5e I)ierau§(barau§). I infer from that 
 
 When, however, the demonstrative stands as antecedent to 
 a relative, no such adverbial combination can be used; as, id) 
 bin gufrieben mit bent, tra^ ic^ I}abe, I am satisfied with that 
 which I have. 
 
 114. ^crjcnigc, that, is a compound of the definite article 
 and }enig, a derivative of j;en(er). Both components aire 
 declined: 
 
78 
 
 PRONOUNS. 
 
 [§114, 
 
 SINGTILAR. 
 
 f. 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 m. f. n. 
 
 berjcnige biejcnige badjenigc bteienicjcn 
 
 beejenigen berjenigcn bc^ienigen berjenfgcn 
 
 bemjenigen berjenigen bemjentgen bcnjcnigcn 
 
 benjcnigeu bicjenige ba^jcnige bicjenigen 
 
 1. ©erjentge is used both as an adjective and a pronoun, 
 and generally as the antecedent to a relative: as, 
 
 !l)a$icnigc ©tucf, tuelc^e^ un^ That play which pleases 
 
 am beften gefdllt. us most 
 
 !iD e r i c n i g c, lueldjer jucrft !ommt. He who comes first 
 
 2. Tliat followed by a genitive is always rendered by bcr* 
 jcnigc, never by biefer or jeuer; thus, mein §au^ unb ba^* 
 jentge meinc^ 9^ad)bar^, my house and that of my neighbor. 
 
 3. ^cr can always be substituted for berjcnige. 
 
 115. 2)crfclBc (berfelbtge and fclbiger are obsolete) and bcr 
 Itatnlt^C, the same, are dechned like bcrjenige, and used both 
 as adjectives and q& pronouns: — 
 
 5Bir I)abcn alle benfelben We have all the same judge. 
 9Jid}tcr. 
 
 1. !DerfeIbe is strengthened by the particle cbctt preceding 
 it. In the same sense ctn unb bcrfelbe is used, cin remaining 
 usually imdeclined; thus, \mx finb an e b e n b c m f e I b c n (or an 
 cinunbbemfelben) S^age geboren, we were bom on the very 
 same day. 
 
 116. (5 Oliver, such, is declined like biefer (§ 14), and used 
 both as an adjective and a pronoun. 
 
 Such a is either ein foldjcr wdth regular declension, or fold) 
 ein, fol^ being indeclinable; thus, 
 
 SSlxi etnem fo(d)cn ©aule or With such a nag. 
 mit f 1 d) e i n e m (^aule. 
 
 1. (So ein is often used instead of fold) ein: as, Ijaben ^k je 
 fo ein en S3ogc( gcfe^en? Did you ever see such a bird? 
 
 2. (Sold) may bo strengthened by ebcn: as, e ben folc^ eitt 
 9?ing, just such a ring. 
 
§ 119] INTERROGATIVES. 79 
 
 INTEEKOGATIVES. 
 
 117. Tlie interrogatives are: — WZV? todd)CV? Wa^ fi'ir citt? 
 
 118. 29Scr is declined as follows: 
 
 m. and f. n. 
 
 ttjer? who? tDa«? what? 
 
 tDcffcn? (tt)C^?) whose? ttjeffen? (tueg?) of what? 
 
 it) em? to whom? 
 
 tDCn? whom? iDa^? • what? 
 
 1. 2Ber? refers to persons, VDa§? to things. They have no 
 plural. Ex.: 3Ber fiub <Bk, unb xoa^ iDOlIcn (Sic? Who are 
 you, and what do you want? 
 
 2. The genitive tue^ for tOt\\tn occurs in tPeSl)aIb? and 
 h) e ^ ii) e gen ? wherefore ? 
 
 3. The dative of tt)a§? is in colloquial usage tT)a§? Thus, 
 k)on lDa§ fprec^en (Ste? Of what are you speaking? 
 
 But when Wa^ is governed by a preposition, an adverbial 
 compound of tt)0 (tt)Or before vowels or n) and that preposition 
 is more correctly substituted for it: — 
 
 2B 1) n fpred)ett @ie ? Of what are you speaking? 
 
 iK r i tl befte^t t^re ©djUlb ? Wherein consists her guilt? 
 
 4. SBaS? is sometimes used for iDarutU? Thus, mcitt ©Ol^n, 
 tt)a§ btrgft bu fo bang betn @cficl)t? Goe. My son, why hidest 
 thou so anxiously thy face? 
 
 5. 2Ber and iDa^ are occasionally used as indefinite pro- 
 nouns meaning some one, something. They are, then, usually 
 preceded by irgenb: as, bu tannft irg enb it) en fragen, you 
 may ask anybody. 
 
 119. SBcI^cr? which? and which one? is declined like 
 
 bie[er (§ 14). 
 
 1. As a pronoun, vodd) follows the rule given for the de- 
 monstratives (§ 112); thus, iTjeld^eS finb 3^re greunbe? Which 
 are your friends? 
 
 2. SKelc^, especially in exclamations, may be followed by the 
 indefinite article, in which case it drops its endings: as, toetc^ 
 ein 9?iefe ! what a giant! 
 
80 PRONOUNS. [5 119- 
 
 3. "Wlieii followed by an adjective, lDcI(f| mar/ drop its end- 
 ings; thus, Uu(d} ticfC'^ '3c()lPeii3ea ! what a p}'ofoujid silence! 
 
 (for njcldjc3 ticfe <Sct)n}ei(jen!). 
 
 120. S!Stt§ fur Cin ? what? what kind of? is used adject- 
 ively; as, Xo a *3 f ii r C i U ^aum? what soi-t of a tree? The full 
 declension of iDtt'^ fitr eitt ^aum? i.5 as foUows: — gen. Wa^ fiir 
 cmc§ ^aume^? dat xoa^ fiir eincm -53aumc ? ace roa^ fiir eincn 
 
 1. Before a plui*al or the name of a material ciu is sup- 
 pressed: — 
 
 23 a 5 f ii r ^ aumc fitib ba^ ? What sort of trees are these ? 
 ^a§ fiir SBctn Dertaufcn "What sort of Avine do you 
 (gie? sell? 
 
 2. 2Ba§ can be separated from fiir eitt; as, n)a§ tft \>a^ fiir 
 ciite ^lutite? what flower is that? — Compare, whai is he for 
 a fool? Shakespeai-e. 
 
 121. To the adjective tt)aS fiir ettl answers the pronoun Id a 6 
 fiir cittcr? toa^ fiir eittc? xoa^ fiir cinS? Thus, ic^ 
 brattd)e eitt i^efebud). — • SSa^ fiir eitt^ ? — (Eitt ettglif^c^, I want 
 a reader. — ^What kind of a one? — An Engh'sh one. 
 
 EKLATIVES. 
 
 122. The relatives are: iDcIc^er, ber, lucr. — ^o is obsolete. 
 
 123. SBcI^Ct when used adjectivehj follows the declension 
 of biefer (§ 14); as a. pronoun, ij is declined as follows: 
 
 STNGTILAK. PLURAL. 
 
 m. f. n. m. f. n. 
 
 h)el^cr n)el(f)e lt)eld)e^ tt>ctd)c, which 
 beffett bereti beffett berett, ofwhich 
 ^Deicl)ettt U"ield)er iDelc^etn iDcMjctt, to which 
 u^eldjett uield}e it)eld)CiJ uield)c, which 
 
 the genitive adopting the forms of the demonstrative pronoun 
 
 bcr(§110). Ex.:— 
 
§ 127] RELATIVES. 81 
 
 ^er grembc, mit tt)cld)eni tcf) The stranger with whom I 
 rcifte, unb beffen @cfcl)id)te traveled, and whose liist- 
 id^ bir cr^dljltc. ory I told you. 
 
 1. In poetry bc§ for beffen is sometimes met with. 
 
 124. ^cr, who, which, is declined like the demonstrative 
 pronoun bcr (§ 110). The genitive plural is berctl (not berer). 
 
 1. The genitive of the relative always precedes the word by 
 which it is governed: as, ber ^ercj, beffen ©ipfcl \mx fc^ett, 
 the mountain the summit of which (whose summit) we see. 
 
 Note the omission of the article before the governing noun 
 @ipfc(. 
 
 2. ®er and iDcldjCl* are in most instances interchangeable. 
 
 3. Observe the use of the relative after fo((^ in phrases like 
 the following : 
 
 9^ur f ( d) e b i e gcfunb f inb. Only such as are healthy. 
 
 125. SBcr, he who, and tUttS, that which, are declined like 
 the interrogative \ozx? n)av5? (§ 118). 
 
 1. The genitive it)c3 for n)cffcn only occurs in h) cg^alb, Xo cSloegen, 
 •wherefore, and a few phrases, as: lueS bag §eq Dolt ift, beS ge^t bee 
 2Jiunb iiber, out of the abundance of the heart the mouth speaketh. 
 
 126. The relative can never be omitted in German: thus, 
 
 ^a^ iBU(^, n)elci)ee id) The book (which) I am 
 lefe. reading. 
 
 127. For a relative governed by a preposition, adverbial 
 compounds of that preposition with too (iDOr before vowels or 
 n 'are often substituted if the pronoun refers to inanimate 
 objects. Thus, ba^ §au^, ID r i n er tDO^nt, the house in which 
 ho lives. 
 
82 PRONOUNS. [§ 128^ 
 
 INDEFINITES (PRONOUNS AND NUMEEAI.S). 
 
 128. SWoit is used like the French on, and translated by 
 one, we, they, people,, or by the passive voice; as, 
 
 $^enn man rcift. When one is trayeling. 
 
 9}^ a n f agt. They say, people say, it is 
 
 said. 
 !DeTn 9^dd)ftcn mu§ man AVe must help our neighbor. 
 l)clfen. Bch. 
 
 1. The oblique cases are supphed by cincr; as, 
 
 SBcnn man fce!ran! ift, ift "When one is sea^sick, life is 
 e i n e m \>(X^ l^cbcn glctdj* indifferent to him. 
 giltig. 
 
 2. (5r is never used as a substitute for man, as he for one, 
 but man is always to be repeated: as, 
 
 SKcnn man retc^ ift, I) at man If one is rich, he has many 
 tiicle gutc greuabc. good friends. 
 
 3. The 2^ossessii-e answering to man is f:in ; thus, man bcr- 
 tcrnt f e i n e SJtutterfpradje nidjt, one does not forget one's (his) 
 mother tongue. 
 
 The reflexive answering to man is fic^ ; thus, man mug f i d) 
 nidjt felbft lobcn, one must not praise oneself. 
 
 129. 3cmanb, somebody, is declined as follows: gen. l:^ 
 manbcS; dai jcmanb or jcmanbcjn or jcmanbcn; ace. jemanb or 
 jcmanbcn. 
 
 !• 5 r 9 C n b jemanb means scttne one or other, 
 
 130. lUicmanb, nobody, not anybody, is decHned like j:* 
 
 manb (§ 129). 
 
 131. diner, some one, the pronominal form of cin, is in- 
 flected Hke btc[cr. Ex. : Scnn bu c t n c n Wci^t, if you know 
 some one. 
 
 1. 3 r g c n b eincr means some one or other. 
 
§ 137] INDEFINITES. 83 
 
 132. ^Cttt, no, not any, is declined like ein, and !eincr, no 
 ono, not any one, like bie[cr (§ 14). Ex.: !etne S^UIV no 
 trace; t)on ! C t U e Ttt gea(i)tet, esteemed by no one. 
 
 133. Mther is rendered by CtttCt tlOtt Bcibcn, neither by 
 Icincr tion Bcibcn ; t)On beibcn, bowever, is often sujDpressed; 
 as, todd)a t?on ben bcibcti toabcn? — -Reiner (ooubeiben); 
 wbicb of tlie two boys? — Neither. 
 
 1. If each or both can be substituted for either, it is trans- 
 lated by jcbcr or bclbe : as, wit 1:)atkn SBalb gu j e b e r ^Beite, or 
 3U b e i b e n @eiteiX, we bad wood on either side. 
 
 134. 3^^^^^ every, every one, is declined like biefer (§ 14). 
 Tlie indeHnite article may accompany it: — • 
 
 (($in) i e b C r ^ote. Every messenger. 
 
 ((Sin) J C b e V t)On eU(^. Every one of you. 
 
 1. SegUc!)cr is used but rarely for jeber. Sci>tt)cbcr is rather obsolete. 
 
 135. 3>bcttnan!t, every one, any one, compounded of jcber 
 and £D2ann, takes § in the genitive, and no ending in the other 
 cases; thus, 
 
 !Da§ ift nidjt jcbcrmannS ®c^ That is not everybody's taste. 
 fd)ma(f. 
 
 136. (^ttt^a^, something, and ntC^t§^ nothing, not anything, 
 are both indecHnable. (Sin)a^ before names of materials and 
 abstract nouns means some; the substantive after etma^ is, in 
 this case, not dechned: thus, mit etrja§ ©elb, with some 
 money. 
 
 1, 3 V g e n b ettraS means sometliing or other. 
 
 2. 2Sa3 is often familiarly used for etlDaS: as, tDiffen @ic in a § 9'teue§? 
 
 137. 5lttbct, other, is dechned like an adjective; as, tin 
 
 anbereS ^{(b; ba§ anbere ^ilb; anbcrc, others; ble anbercn, the 
 others. Note the phrase ba§ ift etlDa^ anbereS, that is another 
 thing. 
 
 1. When another denotes addition, it is rendered nod) Ctn: 
 as, fjcben (Sie mir nod; c i n c !£a[fc, give me another cup. 
 
84 ■ PRONOUNS. [§ 138- 
 
 138. ©inanbct, each other, one another, is indeclinable: 
 as, f :c fpredjen nid)t mit e i n a n b e r, they do not speak with 
 each other. 
 
 139. ^11 is declined like bie[cr (§ 14) and used both ad- 
 jectivcly and substantively. Ex. : allcr ^^^cifcf, all doubt; id) 
 feljc, wk allcl lommcn toirb, Sck; I see how all will end. 
 
 Yet before a possessive or a demonstrative, all may be left 
 undeclined; thus, TJtit all fc::icm ©elbe, with aU his money; 
 ail bic'fe SBuufcIjc; all these wishes. 
 
 1. In a few phrases tlie form atlc occurs for all; as, Bci olle bem, 
 with all that; tvo'^ a 11 e bcm, in spite of all that. 
 
 2. ^n I e 6, lilie the French tout, may be Tiscd in the meaning of every- 
 hod'j ; as, a n C § fliel)t mic^, everybody shuns me. 
 
 3. Kote also the distributive meaning of all. Ex. : er !ommt a 11 e 3a^rc 
 gttjeimal; ho comes twice every year. 
 
 140. (^amttil^ and gefaittt, all, complete, aro decHned like 
 ordinary adjectives, ©cfamt cannot, as [amttid), be used 
 without a hmiting word- Tlius, 
 
 (Sd)il(cr0 [ d m t H cTj e Schiller's complete works. 
 
 Scrfc. 
 
 iDie (^cfamte 9}iadjt bc5 The whole power of the 
 
 geiube^. enemy. 
 
 141, ©ont, all, whole, is declined regularly (§ 8t^/), and 
 used both adjecUvely and substantively: — • 
 
 Gin gan^cS QafjX, A whole year. 
 
 ^a^ &a\V^t unb jcine Xc'ik. The whole and its pai-ts. 
 
 142, Cauter, all, mere, is indeclinable; as, 
 
 G3 tft I a U t c r §CUd)cIcL It is all hypocrisy. 
 
 143, 6ittig, and the less common etli^, some, are declined 
 like biefer (§ 14), and used both adjectively and substantively; 
 
 (5tTttge (etlid)e) (Sd)iffc. Some ships. 
 
 Ginige (etHd}c) tdjauptcn. Some people pretend. 
 
§ 147] INDEFINITES. 85 
 
 (5r erja^Itc mtr ctntc^e§ He told me sometliing of 
 (ct(t(J)e^) au^ jeinem Seben. liis history. 
 
 144. (itXDtid)f some, is antiquated, but its abridged form 
 tOcl^ is used colloquially as a pronoun referring to a substan- 
 tive mentioned before. It is declined like the relative iDelc^er. 
 Example : 
 
 §aft bu nod) ®e(b? — Qa, Have you any more money? 
 i^ ^abe noc^ toddjt^, — ^Yes, I still have some. 
 
 145. Win ^aaXf a few, is indeclinable: as. 
 
 Wit etn ^ aar ^Jrcunbcn. With a few friends. 
 
 1. (Sin paar, a few, is not to be confounded with eiii ^aax, a pair, a 
 couple, which latter is declined, except in the case mentioned in § 29. 
 
 146. Wlan^, many a, is declined like biefcr (§ 14), and 
 employed both adjectively and substantively: as, 
 
 SD^ a tl d^ C r ^rrtum. Many an error. 
 
 WandjtV mctnt. Many a one beUeves. 
 
 1. When followed by an adjective it may drop its endings: 
 as, mand) tapfcrcr (Soibat, many a brave soldier (for mandjcr 
 tapfere <SoIbat). 
 
 2. The use of the indefinite article after mand) is optional; 
 thus, mand) ctn ^rrtum; manc^ cin tapfcrer ©olbat. 
 
 147. 85icl and tDenig are, or at least may be dechned, 
 whether used adjectively or substantively: — 
 
 S3iete M)rer, unb iDentCje Many teachers, and few 
 
 (SdjiUcr. pupils. 
 
 S5te(e finb bcrufcn, unb h3e* Many are called, and few 
 
 ni(je finb au^emal)(t. are chosen. 
 
 Only when preceding a noun in the singular they are 2:)re- 
 ferably not dechDed, provided, however, that they are not 
 preceded by the definite article, or a pronoun. Ex. : 
 
 mtrotnic^ Si^. Goe. With Httle wit. 
 
 Tlit c'mxocnic^ ®ebulb. With a Httle patience. 
 
86 tPvONOUNS. [§ 147- 
 
 1. Note that tiie indefinite article before ttjcnig remains undeclined. 
 The sasae is tiue of the indefinite article in e i n b i § d^ e n, a little, which 
 is, colloquially, often used for cirt hjenig. 
 
 2. Mar!c the distinction between biel, much of one thing (multmn), 
 and Diele^, many things (multa). Ex. : S?ernc diet, nid^t U i c I c «. 
 
 148. 1. 9Re^r^ more, and ttJcnigcr, less, are not declined: 
 as, m e I) r 2id)t, more light; to c n i g e r 8drm^ less noise. 
 
 a. 3D^C^r foUows its noim, when the negative !cm precedes: 
 as, 
 
 ^cinc ^lagcn m c I) r ! No more complaints I 
 
 b. 3rore after a numeral or mmaerical expression, when 
 denoting addition, is rendered by nod) i^receding the numeral: 
 
 ©ebcn ^ie mtr nod) gmci Give me two more meters. 
 3J^ctcr. 
 
 2. SWc^rctC, several, is used both adjectively and substant- 
 iveh': 
 
 5^ad) mel)rcren .^a^rcn. After several years. 
 
 W c I) V c r e ftarbcn. Several died. 
 
 ^&\ ^abe mc^rcre^gU f an- I have to buy several things, 
 fen. 
 
 149. @cnug, enough, is indeclinable, and may either pre- 
 cede or follow its substantive; as, genng O^cgcn or 9^C(jen 
 g e n n g, rain enough. 
 
 150. One before a proper name is rendered by ein CjetDtffer: 
 as, ein getPif fer (imft (Stein, one Ernest Stein. 
 
§ 152] NuiraEiALS. 87 
 
 NUMERALS. 
 
 151. List of the eardingil numerals. 
 
 L em (em^) 13. breije^tt 50. funf^tg orfimfsig 
 
 2. ^trei 14. t)ier3el)tt 60. fedi^ig 
 
 3. bret 15. funf3et)norfunf- TO. ficb^ig (fiebensig) 
 
 4. t)ier 16. fec^je^n [^e^n 80. ac^t^tcj 
 
 5. fUnf 17. fieb5el)tt (ftcben^^ 90. neun^tg 
 
 6. \cd)^ 18. ac^t^etju [ae^n 100. ^unbert [(cinS) 
 T. fiebeti 19. neunae^n 101. l)unbcrtunbem 
 
 8. a6)t 20. sttjan^tg 200. 3tDeit)utibert 
 
 9. neun 21. ctnunb^tDanstg 1000. taufenb 
 
 10. 3cl)n 22. ^roetunbaiDanjig 10,000. ge^ntaufetib 
 
 11. elf 30. breigig 100,000. ^unberttaufenb 
 
 12. ^molf 40. t)icr3ig 1,000,000. etne TliUion. 
 
 1. In the arransfement of long' numbers the German usage 
 agrees with tlie EngHsh, except that the units precede the 
 tens; as, aiDeiuubbrctgtg, ad)t3c^n^unbert3metunb3n)an3tg. 
 
 2. Before l^uubert and taufeub the indefinite article is us- 
 ually omitted. 
 
 152. din, one, before a noun is declined like the indefinite 
 article, but pronounced with deeper emphasis; as, nur etne 
 <StUttbe, only one hour. "When used as a pronoun it takes the 
 
 form of cincr, cinc, cinS: as, 
 
 (S t n e r t)ou tl)ncn. One of them. 
 
 ^iu^ t)on ben ^inbern. One of the children. 
 
 1. When preceded by the definite article or a pronoun, eitt 
 is dechned like an adjective (§ 83); thus, traruiTl gtrei *!|3ferbe? 
 id) braud)e nur ble[e^ eine, why two horses? I need only this 
 one. 
 
 2. "When eitt stands first in a compound number it is not 
 declined: as, Dor einuttubreij^ig 3^agen. 
 
 3. In numeration, one is eiu^ : as, einmat ein^ ift eiu^, 
 once one is one. — ^a^ (Sinmalein^ means the multiplication 
 table. 
 
88 KUMERAI^. [§ 153- 
 
 153. SttlCt and btci require inflectional endings in the 
 genitive, unless they ai'e preceded by a limiting word showing 
 the case: as, 
 
 '^k (Sntlaffung giDeier obcr The dismission of two or 
 breict OJiinifter. thi-ee ministers. 
 
 ^a^ ^eugni^ jweier ober The testimony of two or 
 brcicr. three. 
 
 But: :Die (5ttt(af)ung bcr brei SD^tnifter; ba^ B^ugni^ biefer 
 breu 
 
 1. 3^0, JttJCen are antiquated forms for gttjci. 
 
 1. ©cibc, both, is often used to render tivo, with the de- 
 clension of an adjective (§ 81 to 83): as, beibc ^O^ne; bie bet* 
 bctt (Sol)ne. 
 
 a. Note the neuter singular in phrases like this: ^o tft 
 @tocf uub ®ct)trm? — Qd) I)abe beibc^. 
 
 b. In colloquial usage beibe is emphasized by all; as, blitlb 
 OUfallenbcibcn 5lugcn, blind in both eyes. 
 
 154 The units as a rule are not declined, except in certain 
 phrases: as, alle Dierc, aU fours; ouf alien Dieren, upon all fours; 
 alle neunc, aU the nine (pins); mit jcc^fcn fa^ren, to drive six 
 in hand. 
 
 155. The tens are regularly not declined. Only occasionally 
 they take a termination in the dative, especially in such phrases 
 as, in ben breigigcil ftc()Cn, to be between thirty and forty. 
 
 156. §unbert, taufenb, and 9>JiUton are often used as col- 
 lective nouns: \ia^ §unbcrt, ha-^ STaufenb, bie SD^tUton. The 
 plural forms are: bie §unberte, bie S^aufenbe, bie 2)ZilIionen. 
 Ex.: ^r l^at ba^ @Iii(f t)on ^aufenben cjcgriinbet, Sck, he has 
 laid the foundation to the happiness of thousands. 
 
 157. By means of the syllable er many indeclinable deriv' 
 atives are formed from the cardinal numbers, and are used 
 both as substantives and adjectives; thus, ein (Sedijic^cr, a man 
 of sixty; ein ^^^^^i^Qf^' ^ 20-kreuzer x)iece; brciunbadjt3ii3Ct 
 ^ia, wine grown in 1883. 
 
§ 161] NUMERALS. 89 
 
 158. The Ordinals are formed from the Cardinals by add- 
 ing i to the numbers 2 to 19, and ft to the rest, with the de- 
 clension of ordinary adjectives. Thus, ber 3tt)eitc, bei' breigigftc; 
 ein giDcitcr, em bretgigftcr. 
 
 The Jirst, howeYeYy is ber erfte; the third, ber brttte (not 
 breite), and the eighth, bcr ad)tc (not ad)tk), 
 
 1. For bcr 3 tt) e 1 1 e is often substituted bcr a n b c r e. 
 
 2. In compound numbers, only the last member receives the 
 ordinal ending; thus, ber breiunbneunjicjfic, the ninety third, 
 
 159. Ordinals /?rece<i6 their substantives: as, erfte 6 ^apitef, 
 chapter the first Only those denoting the succession of prin- 
 ces /o/Zow; the proper name: as, ©einric^ ber ^lerte, Henry the 
 fourth. 
 
 160. From the Cardinals are further formed: 
 
 1. The Iteratives by adding mal: as, ein mat, once; ^XotU 
 in a I, twice, etc They are adverbs; but adjectives may be 
 formed from them by adding the derivative syllable ig: as, 
 ein bretmatigcr 5lngriff, a thrice repeated attack. 
 
 2. The MultipUcatwes by adding fo^ or falttg: as, iXod- 
 fad), JlDcifdltig, twofold. They are declined like ordinary 
 adjectives: as, ein breifa(I)cr (breifciltiger) 3JJorb, a threefold 
 murder. 
 
 a. (5 1 n f d 1 1 i g, originally identical with etnf ac^, simple, plain, 
 has now in common usage the meaning of f ooHsh, silly. 
 
 b. !iD p p C ( t, double, is declined like an ordinary adjective: 
 as, ein boppcltcS 5^crbrccl)cn, a double crime. 
 
 3. The Variafives by adding erici (§ 211): as, einerlei, of 
 one sort; ^ttictertci, of two sorts. They are indedinable ad- 
 jectives: as, brcierlci 9^ofen, tlu-ee kinds of roses. 
 
 Note the phrase e5 ift mir eincrlei, it is the same to me. 
 
 161. The Distrthutives are formed by [t and the correspond* 
 ing Cardinals or Ordinals; as, 
 
90 NUMERALS. [§ 161- 
 
 ^ie morfc^tertcn }e t)kv UUb They marched four and 
 
 Dter. four. 
 
 3c ber jet)nte 3J?ann ficl. Everj- tenth man fell 
 
 162. From the Ordinals are formed: 
 
 1, The Fractionals "by adding tcl (an abridgment of 'Ztxir 
 part) and suppressing the final t of the Ordinal; as, eitt t)icr* 
 it\f one fourth, eiu glDansigftcI, one twentieth. 
 
 But instead of eiti gtueitel, we use cine § d I f t c or c i n I) a ( b, 
 which is declined like an adjectiye; as, ctn {)albeS -3^^^/ half 
 a year. 
 
 1. Ordinal adverbs by adding cn8 : as, crftcn^, firstly; gtDei* 
 ttn^f secondly, etc. 
 
 163. Numerical expressions such as three and a half may be 
 translated either hterally : brci unb cin ^alb, or by adding l)Qlb 
 to the next higher ordijaal: as, Diert 1) a I b, the idea being: of 
 the fourth one half, and three whole ones understood. With 
 the former mode of expression the noun stands iu the sing- 
 ular; with the latter, which is indeclinable, in the plural: as, 
 brci unb eine l)albc (Stunbe; Dicrt^alb igtunben. 
 
 1. One and a half is rendered anbert^alb (not gtt)eitl)Qlb). 
 
 2, Of rare occurrence are numerical expressions such as jelbanbcr, 
 fctbbritt, fclbJJiert, etc dv fpeift fclbbritt, e. g., means: he dines with two, 
 he himself being the third. 
 
 164. The time of day by the clock is expressed by placing 
 cardinal numbers before the substantive Ul)r: as, 
 
 ^3 i[t brci Ur)r. It is three o'clock. 
 
 Often the preposition um is used, in which case Uf)r may 
 be dropped: as, c^ ift um brci. 
 
 Note also the following expressions: 
 (55 ii't cin Dicrtcl auf bier. It is a quarter past three. 
 (55 i|t Ijaib t>icr. It is half past three. 
 
 (55 ift brci uicrtct auf t>icr. It is a quai-ter to fom-. 
 5ct)n 5DJinutcn n a d) (or iibcr) Ten imimt<?s past four. 
 
 Dier. 
 giinf 3}Zinutctt O o r t)icr. Five minutes of four. 
 
§ 168] VERBS (continued). 91 
 
 The time of the day is added in the genitive; as, IttU fitttf 
 m)r(be^)9Jiorgen^ — (be^j^Uc^mittag^ — (be^)5lbenbg. 
 
 165. Dates are expressed by ordinal numerals, either in 
 tho accusative or by tlie preposition an with the dative: as, 
 b e n c r ft e n SJ^at or a m e r ft c n 9}2ai^ on the first of May. 
 
 The question what day of the month is it? is translated bct 
 ipieuiclte ift I)cute? or beu toieoieUen \)ahcn tt)ir ^eutcV 
 
 PASSIVE VOICE. 
 
 For its conjugation table, see § 54. 
 
 166. The passive voice is formed by the auxiliary Itter^ 
 bcu ; the past participle of Uierben, in this office, is tDorben. 
 'Seiil is used in the second person of the Imperative only. 
 
 167. The Future Participle denotes possibility as well as 
 necessity: 
 
 ^ein (^ternbilb ift 3U fe^ en. No constellation is to be 
 Sch. seen. 
 
 ^eine ^dt ift 3 u t) c r (i c r e n. No time is to be lost. 
 1. When used attributively the Future Participle takes a b 
 before the endings: as, 
 ®n iVL tabelnber (Sc^ritt. A step to be blamed. 
 It does not admit of the forms of comparison in er and ft, 
 
 168. <Setn as well as ttjcrbcn is construed with the past 
 paiticiple passive. "WHien the German wishes to represent the 
 actual endurance of an action, it uses Incrbcn, but existence in 
 a state resulting from that action is expressed by the use of 
 fcin. If, e. (/., the enemies are beaten means the enemies are re- 
 ceiving a defeat (are being beaten), it must be translated bic 
 gctnbe It) erbcn gefdjlarjcn. If on the contrary, it impUes: the 
 enemies received a defeat, and are now beaten foes (condition 
 resulting from the defeat), it is to be rendered by bte JJcinbe 
 ftnb gefd)(agcn. 
 
92 VERBS (continued). [§ 168^ 
 
 If an expression of time relative to the action in question is 
 given, the distinction between tnerbcn and fcin is greatly fac- 
 ihtated by the practical rule: Use tr>crbcn, if the endurance of 
 the action coincides with the time mentioned; and (ein, if it 
 'precedes it. Thus, the sentence in spring the frontier ivas fort- 
 ified, if it imphes tliat the fortifying of the frontier took place 
 in spiing, must be rendered by im grii^Iing IPurb e bie ©rcnje 
 bcfeftigt; and by im grit^Iing luar bie ©retire bcfefttgt, if it 
 impHes that by spring the fortification of the frontier was an 
 accompHshed fact 
 
 169. A dative or genitive depending on an active verb can, 
 in the con-esponding passive construction, never become a 
 nominative, but the genitive or dative is retained, and the 
 verb becomes impersonal; thus, the phrase id) erlaube 3^^cn, 
 I aUow you, becomes in the passive voice: eS ift Sl^nen erlaubt 
 (never (gte )inb erlaubt), you ai-e allowed. 
 
 170. Intransitive verbs, too, are used in the passive voice, 
 but only imi)ersonally: as, e^ tourbc XAd gefUTigen, there was 
 much singing. 
 
 171. The verb I)ci6cn means both to call and to he called. Ex.: 
 X'lriftibc^ l)ie§ bcr @crcct)te, Aristides was caUed the Just 
 
 REFLEXIVE VERBS. 
 
 172, Reflexive verbs are conjugated like ordinary active 
 verbs, mth the addition of the reflexive pronoun, which is 
 either in the accusative or in the dative, and foUows, in the 
 normal order, the personal verb, but precedes the infinitive 
 and participle. 
 
§ 173] REFLEXIVE VERBS. 93 
 
 PARADIGMS. 
 Present Indicative. 
 
 id) fc^e mid), I seat myself ic^ fd)meid)te mir, I flatter 
 
 myself 
 
 bu fe^eft b i dj bu f c^meic^etft b i r 
 
 er f e^t f i d) er f d)meic^ett f i d) 
 
 luirfe^cnun^ iDir fd)meid)cInunS 
 
 i()r fc^t e u c^ il)r f djmeic^elt e u d) 
 
 (^ie f c^eu f i d)) (^ie fd)metd)e(n f i d)) 
 
 fie fe^en fic^ fie fd)meidjelu fid) 
 
 Perfect Indicative. 
 
 ic^ \)aht mid) gefel^t, I have id) l)abc mir ocfd)mcid)c(t, I 
 seated myself have flattered myself 
 
 Future Indicative. 
 
 ic^ tuerbc mid) fe^en, I shall id) tvcrbe mir fd)meid)cln, I 
 seat myself shall flatter myself 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 fe^e bic^, seat thyself fc^meid)re bir, flatter thyself 
 
 fet^t cnd)r I seat fd)meid)e(t cud), ) flatter 
 
 fct^en @ie fid), ) yourselves )d)meid)e(n (Sie fid), J yourselves 
 
 Infinitives. 
 
 Pres. fic^ (^u) fc^en, to seat fid) (^u) fd)meid)e(n, to flatter 
 
 oneself oneself 
 
 Past, fid) gefet^t (311) f)aben, to fii^ gefd)meic^e(t (^n) ^ben, 
 
 have seated oneself to have flattered oneself 
 
 Participles. 
 
 Pres. fid) fe^enb, seating one- fic^ fd)meid)e(nb, flattering 
 
 self oneself 
 
 Past gefe^t, seated gefd)meid)elt, flattered 
 
 1. Interrogative form: fe^e Id^ Tttid^.? do I seat myself? — Ijahc id) mid) 
 gefcljt ? have I seated myself? 
 
 2. Negative form: id) fc^c tnid^ ntd)t, I do not seat myself; id) \)aht 
 ini(^ ni(!^t gefe^t, I have not seated myself. 
 
 173. The following alphabetical Hst contains the most 
 common of those verbs which are used in the reflexive form 
 exclusively: 
 
94 
 
 VKU13S (flON'riNUED). 
 
 [§ 173- 
 
 r4bcncl,nicn,,^^^^g 
 
 fjc^ anfdjidfcn, j^repare 
 
 fic^ bcbanfen, thaiik 
 
 iid) bccifcm, exert oneself 
 
 bccilcn, hasten 
 
 bcfinben, be 
 
 licgcbcn, betake oneself 
 [tc^ bcgniicjeti, content oneself 
 fic^ bci)clfcn, make shift 
 fic^ bctitmmeni (urn), concern 
 
 oneself 
 firf) bctaufcn (auf), amount to 
 fid) bcmdci)tigen (with the gen.), 
 
 possess oneself 
 
 fic^ bctragen, ) 
 
 fid) bcfinncn, reflect 
 
 fid) bcftreben, endeavor 
 
 fic^ bcraerbcn (um), apply for 
 
 fid) biicfen, stoop 
 
 fid) einlaffcn {in or auf), enter 
 
 into, ujDon 
 fid^ ent^altcn, abstain 
 fic^ entfd)Uct!en, resolve 
 fic^ entfinncn, recollect 
 fic^ erbannen, have mercy on 
 fid) erbrciften, dare 
 
 While in the verbs enumerated above the reflexive fic^ is in 
 the accusativey in the following it is in the dative : 
 
 ftf^ anmaBcn, presume fid) bic 55rcil)eit ncf)mctt, take the 
 
 fic^ au^bittcn, ask for hbei-ty 
 
 fic^ anetgncn, aj^propriate to fid) getraucti, venture 
 fic^ bcnfen, fancy [oneself fid) 93?iil)e c^zhtxi, take pains 
 
 ftf^ einbilben, imagioe, fancy fid) fd)mei(^eln, flatter oneself 
 fid) l)erau!gne^men, dare, i^res- fic^ Dornc{)iucn, propose to one- 
 ume fid) Dorftcllcn, imagine. [self 
 
 174. Any active verb may assume the reflexive form and 
 meaning; as, ficiben, to dress: fid) tlcibcn, to dress oneself. 
 
 fid) crcifcrn, get into a passion 
 
 fic^ ereigneu, happen 
 
 fid) erfreuett (gen.), enjoy 
 
 fic^ crgebcn, surrender 
 
 fid) crpolen (Don), recover from 
 
 fid) crtdften, catch cold 
 
 fic^ crfiil)ttcn, dai-e 
 
 M crfunbigcn, inquire 
 
 M freuen, rejoice 
 
 fid) [^rdmcit, grieve 
 fic^ irren, be mistaken 
 fid) fiimmcni (urn), see to 
 fid) fd)dmen, be ashamed 
 fid) fd)Idngcln, -vNdnd, meander 
 fid) fel)nen (nad)), long for 
 fid) fputen, make haste 
 fic^ umfef)cn, look about 
 fid) Dcrirren, \„^^^^^^ 
 fid) t)erlaufen, [ "'' ^^^^ 
 fid) Dertieben, fall in love 
 fic^ Demetgen, bow 
 fic^ uerfUnbigen, sin 
 fid) tniberfet^en, oppose 
 
 fid) Dcmunbcm, [ ^ "*=^ 
 
§ 177] IMPERSONAL VERBS. 95 
 
 Many, however, take tlie reflexive form without a strictly 
 reflexive meaning; as, fiird^tcn, to fear: fid) fitrrfjten to be 
 afraid; argcru, to vex: fid^ cirgern, to be vexed 
 
 1. Often, too, the reflexive form has a passive sense; as, bcr 
 9?ittg l)at \i6) gefunben, the ring has been found. 
 
 175. "With some intransitive verbs the use df the reflexive 
 pronoun is optional: as, au^ru'^en and fid) au^rul)en, to rest; 
 irren and fid) trren, to err; tial)ett and fid^ nal)eti, to approach. 
 
 176. Observe the reflexive use of some intransitive verbs in 
 such phrases as: er arbeitet fic^ ^U 2^obe, he is working himself 
 to death, — ($r tt)irb fic^ blitlb (efen, he will read himself blind. 
 
 IMPERSONAL VERBS. 
 
 177. Impersonal are: 
 
 1. All verbs denoting natural phenomena: as, e3 rcgnct, it" 
 rains; e§ bottttert, it thunders. 
 
 2. A group of verbs denoting physical or moral sensations, 
 the person affected being either in the dative or accusative. 
 The only Enghsh analogue is methinks. The most common 
 verbs used in the impersonal form exclusively are the follow- 
 ing:— 
 
 e§ a^nt mir, I forebode e§ grant mir, I have a horror 
 
 e§ bangt tntr, I am anxious of 
 
 e^ bdud^t mid) (or mir), me- e§ l)Uttgcrt mic^, I am hungry 
 
 thinks e^ f^aubert mir (or mic^), I 
 e§ bitttft mic^ (or mir), me- shudder 
 
 thinks e^ fc^lafert mtc§, I feel 
 C§ burftet mid), I am thirsty sleepy 
 
 e^ efclt mir (or mid)), I am e^ fc^tDinbelt mir, I feel 
 
 disgusted (at) giddy 
 
 C§ fricrt mid), I am cold e6 fc^tDi^t mt^, I perspire 
 
 e§ fri)ftc(t mic^, I feel cliiUy c^ trdumte mir, I dreamt 
 
 e^ gelitftet (or litftet) mid), I e^ Dcrlangt mid), I desire 
 
 desire 
 
 3. A number of phrases made up of fetnorlDerbett with 
 a predicative complement, and a dative of the person, as: 
 
96 VERBS (contintjed). l§ 177- 
 
 C§ ift mtr hJOljO I am well c§ tDirb mir ]^ci§, I am get- 
 ting liot [earnest. 
 c^ ift mir iibe(, I feel sick e§ ift mir emft, I am in 
 
 Note also the phrase e§ ifl mir, oI§ ob, I feel as if. 
 
 4 The Yerbs feljlen, gebre(f)cn, mangetn, to want; bc^ 
 
 bUrfcn, brauc})en, to need, which are construed as follows: 
 
 a^ fc^tt (gcbric^t, mange(t) un^ nidjt an tapfcren (Solbatcn, we 
 
 do not lack bravo Boldiers; e^ bebarf feinc^ ^eiPeife^, no j)roof 
 
 is needed. 
 
 I^c!)tcn and mangetn may also be nsed personally: as, tapfcrc ©olbatcn 
 <cl)len uu3 iiic^t. 
 
 5. The verb eS (jicbt, there is, there are (see § 179). 
 
 Notes, 
 
 a. The following verbs can be used only in the third person, 
 but in the plural as well as the singular: cj e H it g e It, g I ii (f e n, 
 succeed; miglingen, miBgliiden, succeed ill; gcfd)el)cn, 
 happen. Thus, c^ QcUtigt mir Tiid)t, i^tt gu itberjeugen, I do not 
 succeed in convrQcing him. — 5UIe feiue (5?:penmente gclingeti 
 i^m, he succeeds in all his experiments. 
 
 b. Almost any verb admits of the impersonal use: as, ba 
 ^fcift e^ unb gcigt e^ (Goe.), there is fifing and fiddhng. 
 
 Note especially: e^3 fcf)(dgt, it strikes (said of the clock), and 
 C§ tlopft, tliere is a knocking. 
 
 Quit-e idiomatic are e^ gilt and c§ i'd^t: — ©^ gitt mcittc 
 (5^rc, my honor is at staka — (S^ Idjt il^m iibcl, it iU becomes 
 
 him, 
 
 178. The impersonal use of verbs in a passive or reflexive 
 form is common: as, 
 
 a^ tDltrbe gctan^t unb ge* There was singing and danc- 
 
 fungcn. ing. 
 
 ^^ rui)t fid) l^ier angenel^m. It is pleasant resting here. 
 
 179. Conjugation of c8 gicBt, there is. 
 Present: e5 gtebt, there is, there are. 
 Imperfect: e§ gab, there was, there were. 
 Perfect: e^ f}at gcgcbeit, there has (have) been. 
 Pluperfect: e^ Ijatte gegebett, there had been. 
 
§ 181] IMPERSONAL VERBS. 97 
 
 Future: e^ ttJtrb gcbett, there will be. 
 Conciitional: e^ iDUrbe geben, there would be. 
 Examples : — ■ 
 
 (S^ g i e b t feiucn 3l^f ^^'f* ^^^^ There is no such thing as 
 
 chance. 
 (5^ ift \Da()rfrf)CtnItc^, ba6 e§ It is probable that there 
 etnmat S'^icfen QC^chtn have been giants at one 
 ^ a t, time. 
 
 1. When there *>, instead of having the pregnant meaning 
 of there exists, is equivalent to the copula is, it is more fre- 
 quently translated by e^ ift, and there are by e3 finb: as, 
 (5^ ift eitt ^OIDC int ^dfic^. There is a lion in the cage, 
 ^^ finb brei ®er im ';)iefte. There are three egga in the 
 
 nest 
 
 paltn and 6c:n, 
 
 USED AS AUXILIAEIES 07 TENSE. 
 
 180. All transitive, reflexive, and impersonal verbs a^ well 
 as all modal auxiliaries are conjugated with l^aben: as, irf) 
 f)abc eineu ^autu gepflan^t, I have planted a tree. (Et I) at 
 fii"^ C^c'it^tf he has seated himself. (S^ ^at geregnet, it has 
 rained. Qd) t) ab C nid)t geburft, I have not been allowed. 
 
 181. Intransitive vorbg are conjugated some with Tjabetj, 
 and some with fciu. — Qdxi is required: 
 
 1. "With those denoting transition from one condition into 
 another: as, 
 
 ^r t ft gcftorbett. He has died. 
 
 (Sie i ft geucfeu. She has recovered. 
 
 2, With tho33 denoting nrntion, particularly when the poini 
 of departure or arrival is either actually expressed or under- 
 Btood: as, 
 
 dv {ft Don Berlin it)egge=« He has moved away from 
 
 30 gen. Berlin. 
 
 <Sic linb nad) T)re§ben gc* They have traveled to Dres- 
 
 reift. [men? den. 
 
 SBami finb (Sle angetom* When did you arrive? 
 
98 ADVERBS. [§ 18U 
 
 a. When the j>oint of departure or arrival is not held in 
 view, many verbs denoting motion may be used with I)aben: 
 as, 
 
 (Sie I) a ben Diet gereift. They have traveled a 
 
 great deal 
 
 (5Ht)enr to walk, however, requires fcia under all circum- 
 stances. 
 
 a With the following: 
 
 cjliirfen, succeed GelinGcn, ) g^^j^^d 
 
 iueicl)cn, yield cjerateii, ) 
 
 bcgegnen, meet Qef^ef)ett, happen 
 
 bleiben, stay mtplingen, ) ^^^ 
 
 fofgen, follow - miBratcn, [ ^^ ^ 
 
 9ebcit)en, prosper fein, be 
 
 a. ^ 1 g C U "vrben meaning io obey requires ^abcit. 
 
 182. The same verb may, according to its meaning, ba con- 
 jugated with either I) a ben or fein: thus, 
 
 3^) b in fortijcfaf)ren. I have driven off. 
 
 3ci) I) a h e fortgefa^ren. I have continued. 
 
 $)a^^ Rafter ift gcfrorcn. The water is frozen. 
 
 Gr (j a t gcfroren. He has been cold 
 
 ADVERBS. 
 
 183. Besides the primitive adverbs, the enumeration of 
 which belongs to the dictionary, there are 
 
 1. Adverbs which originally are genitive cases of substan- 
 tives, adjectives, or participles: as, niorgen^, in the morning; 
 obenb^, in the evening; flug^, quickly; teil^, paiily; anfang^, 
 in the beginning; rec^t^, on the right; lint^, on the left; bereit^, 
 already; ftet*:3, constantly; eilenb^, hastily; gnfc^enb^, visibly, etc. 
 
 a. The genitive ending 8 ia also found with a te^^ feminine nouns: as, 
 nac^t?, by night; eincrfeit^, on the one hand; anberfcitS, on the other 
 hand. 
 
 b. The ending 8 combined with en to enS makes adverbs from all 
 ordinal numerals and many superlatives: as, crjicnS, firstly; I^jd)ftcn8, 
 ftt the most; nacljjlcn?, shortly; rjcnigftcnS, at the least. — SSoUenbS, com- 
 pletely, is a corruption of tooQenS. 
 
§ 184] ADVERBS. 99 
 
 2. Adverbs derived from substantives, adjectives, or pai-ti- 
 ciples, by means of the suffixes lid) and ling^ : as, •mitnbltc^, 
 orally; bitterOc^, bitterly; freilid), indeed; gcin^Iic^, entirely; 
 l)Od)li(^, bighly; ti'tr^lid), recently; neulid), newly; fdjlDCrlid), 
 hardly; flc^entlid), euppliantly; (jefriffentltd), deliberately; yM^ 
 lincjd, backward; btinblitltj^, blindly. 
 
 The suffix ^Ddrt^, too, forms a fer/ adverbs: as, f)immc(^ 
 jDdrt^, heavenward; aufiudrt^, upward; DortnartS, forward. 
 
 3. Adverbs formed by composition: as, t)orbct, past; I)aufen^ 
 iwifc, by heaps; rci^enmcife, in rows; especially all those com- 
 pounded with (){n, l)cr, ba (bar), and luo (mor): as, ^inauf, 
 |erau^, bamit, barnad), iDouon, iDoriiber. 
 
 4 Adverbs formed by the fusion of adverbial phrases: as, 
 Ubermorgen, after to-morrow; untermcg^, on the way; 3uerft, 
 at first; especially by the fusion of a substantive in the geni- 
 tive with a limiting word preceding it: as, cjIitctlic^ertDetfc, 
 luckily; fcine^rae^^, by no means; jebenfall^, at all events; aller^ 
 bing^, certainly; groSenteil^, for a great part; niittlevweile, in 
 the meantime; eitllgerma^en, m some measure, etc. 
 
 184. Almost any adjective can, in its uninflectcd form, be 
 used as an adverb, without changing its form: as, Xok f c^on 
 Icuc^tet ber SKorgenftertt! Ho\y beautifully the morning-star 
 shines! 
 
 Nor does the comparative of adjectives change when used 
 adverbially: as, fic fiurjcu fcf) Otter ai^ fic fpiclcu, they sing 
 more beautifully than they jolay. 
 
 But the superlative of the adverb is different, being formed 
 with the preposition au (rarely i:t or 311) and the definite article 
 contracted to atu (ittl or 3 utn) : as, 
 
 ^te malt am fd)Ottjlcu t»Ott She paints the most beauti- 
 allett. fully of all. 
 
 1. To translate most beautifully {absolute superlative), in- 
 stead of the most heautifully {relative superlative), auf ^3 i.> Bub- 
 stituted for am : as, 
 
 (Sie Keibcn fid) tiXi\^ fdjonjlc. They dress most beautifuKy. 
 
100 AD^'ERBS. [§ 184-, 
 
 a. The number of superlatives used as^adverbs in tbeir simple form 
 in fl is limited. Tbe following are tlie most common: l^od)ft, langft, 
 jiinsfl, eiligfl, batbigfi, gefalligj^, ^ofItc^l% ergebenfl, freunblid^ft, gel^or* 
 jantft, mbgli^ll, Kicijl. Ex.-. 
 
 3c^ erfu^e @ic 1^ 6 f It d^ fl. I request you most politely. 
 
 185. Some adverbs form their degrees of comparison from 
 other stems. 
 
 Positive. Comparative. Superlative. 
 
 ba(b, soon el^cr (balber) am c()cften (am balbeften) 
 
 gem, ^viILingly liebcr nm Ilebften 
 
 iibel, badly arger am cirgften 
 
 hJoI)(, well beffer am bejten 
 
 186. Some adverbs of place have corresponding adverbial 
 superlatives in ft: 
 
 augen, without: Sup. augerft t)orn, in front: Sup. Dorbcrft 
 
 innen, within: Sup. innerft l)mten, behind: Sup. ^interft 
 
 oben, above: Sup. oberft mitten, in the midst: Sup. 
 
 untcn, below: Hup. uuterft mittelft 
 
 Examples: 
 ^cr ^cc^cr h)ar inn en Ucr^ The cup was gilded inside. 
 
 golbet. 
 3u innerft bc^ §eilicjtnm$. In tho innermost of the 
 
 sanctuary. 
 
 187. §irt and ^cr. Phrases like go out, come out, cannot 
 be rendered by gcl)e au6, tomme au^ simply, but only by Qcl)e 
 I)inan3, bmme l^crau^, ^:n denoting motion away from, and 
 ^er, motion towards, the speaker. 
 
 Other adverbial compounds of this kind are l^inan, l^eran ; 
 ^inauf, ^crauf ; Ijincin, l^erein; l)inubcr, ^eriibcr. 
 
 Examples : ®e^i' \) t nein ; !omm f) e rein. ®c^' ^ i nanf, !omm 
 \j e ranf . (^cl)' ^ i nilbcr, !omm I) e riiber. 
 
 1. As the examples show, \)\xi and I)er occupy the^ry^ place 
 in the compound. When compounded with rj o and b a, how- 
 ever, they stand second; thus, IDoljCr fommft bn, }XxCii WO^in 
 9et)ft W^ — @cl)ft bii and) ba^ in? 
 
§ 190] PREPOSITIONS. lOl 
 
 ^cr and Ijin may be separated from lt»0 and ha: as, VDO 
 ge^ft bu t)tn? SBo !ommft bu l)er? >Dacjef)ter ^in. T)a 
 fommt er Ij c r. 
 
 188. Demonstrative adverbs, made up of bil or I)lcr and a 
 preposition, are very extensively used in correlation with the 
 conjunctions baf3 and it)ci(, or an infinitive vvdth 31:: as, 
 
 Qd) red)ne barauf, bag I reckon on your coming. 
 
 (Sie fommen. 
 
 Reiner ftrebte barna^, ben No one strove to gain the 
 
 ^rei6 3U cjeiDinnen. prize. 
 
 PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 (Repetition and completion of § 40.) 
 
 189. Prepositions with the accusative: 
 
 ^^^' *^^ 9^9^^' I ao-ainst 
 
 burd), through iDiber, j ^^amst 
 
 fiir, for Ittn, about, around. 
 
 o^ue, without 
 
 Add to these gen, toward, and fonber, without, which, however, occur 
 in but a few phrases: as, gen §imnicl, toward heaven; fonber ©Icid^en, 
 without equal. 
 
 1. ^t§ more frequently stands adverbially before a pre- 
 position: as, bi^ nad) ^ari^, as far as Paris; bl^ gur ^irc^e, as 
 far as the church; bi6 au bie ©reuge, as far as the frontier. 
 
 2. In phrases like voxv c^dcn bcti ^crg l^ittaitf, ^tnauf is not 
 to be mistaken for a preposition, but is an adverb following 
 an absolute accusative. Similar phrases are: ben gtug l)inab, 
 down the river; b^n ^alb l)tnbnr(^, through the forest. 
 
 3. The expression ^^cifct^ O^nc, without doubt, is the only 
 remnant of an old construction of o^nc with the genitive. 
 
 190. Prepositions with the dative : 
 
 au§, out of cjegcniibeiv opposite 
 
 au^cr, except, besides H^^^B' according to 
 
 bet, near, with mit, with 
 
 cntgegen, against nad), after, to 
 
102 • MiEPosmoNS. [§ 190- 
 
 r[ad)it, \ , th, over, on account of (ob- 
 3Utldci)ft, j solete in prose) 
 
 neb ft, 1 feit, since (time) 
 
 famt, along t)Ott, from, of 
 
 mitfamt, " (together) with ^U, to 
 
 gufamt, J Sufolgc, according io 
 
 3Uli)it)cr, contrai-y to 
 
 Add to these banf, owing to, thanks to; as, ban! feincn ^e* 
 nxiiI)UnQCn, owing to his efforts. 
 
 1. (intQcgcn, gcgcniibcr, ^nfolgc, jnrjibcr, and usually 
 also gem ft 6 and jnnftdjft^/o/foM; their noun: as, bcm J^'cinbe 
 entgcgen, against the enemy; ber ^irdje gcgeniibcr, opposite the 
 chui'ch; bcm ^cfet)Ie gnfolge, according to tlie order; bent @e* 
 fc^C jnunbcr, contraiy to the law; bcr ^orfd^rift QCrna^, accord- 
 ing to the prescription; bcm ^bnig gnnadjft, next to the king. 
 
 2. 9^ ad), esjDeciaUy in the meaning of * according to/ either 
 precedes or follows the noijn; as, nad) meiner iD^einnng or met* 
 ncr 3JZcinung nac^, according to my oi^inion. 
 
 3. 5(n]ler occurs with the genitive in the phrase on§cr ?an* 
 bc^5 fcin, to be out of the countiw, abroad; and with the accus- 
 ative in phi-ases hke etira^ au^cr alien 3^^^^f^^ fe^en, to put 
 something beyond all doubt 
 
 4:. Wit is also used as an adverb : as, ic^ Wax mit babei, 
 I was one of the party. 
 
 191. Prepositions with the dative or accusative: 
 
 an, at iiber, c/ver, above, across 
 
 auf, upon nnter, under, among 
 
 jointer, behind Dor, before 
 
 in, in 3lpifd)en, between, 
 neben, beside 
 
 "With the dative they answer the question where f with the 
 accusative, the question whither? Examples : 
 
 ^c^ fpa3tere in bem (Garten. I am walking in the garden. 
 
 3d) OCl)e in ben (Marten. I am going into the garden. 
 
 1. When these prepositions denote other relations than those of pZace, 
 then aitf and iibcr govern the accusative; all the others, the dative. Ex- 
 amples: — 
 
§ 191] PREPOSITIONS. 103 
 
 %n. — %m erflcn 9Kal fd^neite e«. On the first of May it snowed. 
 
 3c^ I)al)e einen greunb an i^m. I have a friend in him. 
 ^d} jtueifte am Svfolgc, I doubt of the success. 
 
 a. Only a few verbs, like benfen, to think; gtaubctt, to believe; erinttem, 
 to remind, require the accusative after an because the idea of turning the 
 thought towards predominates. 
 
 b. Also with the meaning of ahowt, up to, before numerals, an has the 
 accusative; as, fviv ja^en an bie l^unbert §irf(^c, we saw about a hundred 
 stags. 
 
 3lt. — 3n einer ©tunbe bin id^ ^^u- I shall be back in an hour, 
 riidf. 
 
 Sr jprid^t t)iel in ©leid^niffen. He speaks a great deal in par- 
 ables. 
 
 Uttter. — Untcr jolt^en ®efprarf)en In the midst of such conver- 
 irurbe C3 9^ad^t. sation night came on. 
 
 ®ic bat un8 unter ^clgen Xlfvii^ She besought us with warm 
 ncn, tears. 
 
 SBor. — 35or einer ®tunbc. An hour ago. 
 
 3lu3 ijVixC)t Uor bcr ©trafe. For fear of the penalty. 
 
 3lttf. — ^Sorrje c§ mir anf einen Xag. Lend it to me for a day. 
 
 ^ore nidjt auf il)n. Do not listen to him. 
 
 Sartc anf mid^. Wait for me. 
 
 3tcgimentcr auf 9(legimenter. Kegiments after regiments. 
 
 Ucftct. — (Sr blicb iibcr cin 3a^r. He remained over a year. 
 
 Sic mad) ten ^liine iibcr ^Idne. We made plans upon plans. 
 Note. — The dative is used only when ubcr means during : — 
 
 Sr jc^Uef iibcr bcr ^rcbigt ein. He fell asleep during the sermon. 
 
 2. When used together with b i § every one of these nine prepositions, 
 no matter what relation it denotes, requires the accusative : 
 
 ©r ^anbbiS anS^inninSSaffer. He stood in water up to the 
 
 chin. 
 ®ic ging bi§ iuS scl)nte 3al)r in She went to school until her 
 bie ©c^ule. " . tenth year. 
 
 The only exception i^ b i ^ t> o r, which when denoting time has the 
 dative:^ 
 
 Sis t)or brei Xagen Wax er iool)i. He was well until three days 
 
 ago. 
 
104 
 
 PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 [§ 192- 
 
 192. Prepositions with the genitive: 
 
 abfett^, off from 
 anftatt or ftatt, instead of 
 aufeerl)a(b, outside 
 inner^alb, within (time and 
 
 place) 
 ober^a(b, above 
 unterl}alb, below 
 bet)Uf'?, in behalf of 
 binncn, within (time) 
 biefleit(^), on this side 
 jenieit(^), on the other side 
 
 g-;}fortbesaieof 
 
 infolge, in consequence of 
 inmittcn, in the midst of 
 
 fraft, in -sirtue of 
 
 ^^^?^' I along 
 
 laut, according to 
 feiten^, on the part of 
 tro^, in spite of 
 urn — iuillen, for the sake of 
 unfcrn, unnjcit, not far from 
 
 t)cnnitte('3 or mtttc(§, ) ^ „ 
 uenuittelft or mittclft C "^^^ 
 
 Uermogc, by dint of 
 tDa^retlb, during 
 iDegen, on account of 
 3Ufo(ge, according to. 
 
 To these mar be added the following prepositional expres- 
 edons: — 
 
 angeficbts. ) in the 
 
 in ^Ingcftdjt, | sight of 
 
 anldB(id), j in con- 
 
 aud "iJlnlag, j sequence of 
 
 in ^ctradit, ) 
 
 in 5(nbetrad)t, j 
 
 in ^etreff, 
 
 in ^Inbetrcff, 
 
 betreff^, 
 
 onbetreffs, 
 
 besiiglid), 
 
 considering 
 
 concemmfx 
 
 in ©cgentpart, in the pres- 
 ence of 
 
 in ^inftdjt, 
 
 ^inudjt^, 
 
 ^in[id)t(i(f), 1- in re.crard to 
 
 in 9?iicf fi^t, 
 
 riiiffic^tlid) 
 
 Ungeadltet, notwithstanding 
 
 itnbefd^abct, without preju- 
 dice. 
 
 1. 5lnftatt may take the noun between its components: as, 
 an bc^ 33ater^ ftatt, or with suppressed article, an ^ater^ ftatU 
 
 2. ^ i n n e n, t r ^, and g u f o I g e also occur with the dative. 
 3ufolge follows a dative, but precedes a genitive: as, bem 
 4Befel)lc jufolgc, gufotge be^ 48cfeI)I^, according to the order. 
 
 3. (^ntlang and langS also occur with both the dative 
 and accusative. Gntlang may either precede or follow its 
 noun. 
 
§ 193] pREPOsrrioNS. 105 
 
 4. § a I b C n, and its more common form I) a I b c r, follow their 
 noun; as, be^ gricbett^ I)alber, for the sake of peace. 
 
 a. Observe the compounds meinetl^alben, bcinetf)al'6en, fcmctf)atBeu, 
 i'^rct'^alben, uufertlialbcn, curet^tben, i^rct^atben, for my sake, for tliy 
 sake, etc. 
 
 § a I b e n being by origin the dative plural of Old High-German lialba, 
 side, part, the pronoun connected with it may either be considered as 
 the dative of the possessive, or as the genitive of the personal pronoun. 
 The t in either case is an inserted letter. 
 
 5. Um — tDiHen takes the noun between its two parts: 
 as, um be§ greunbe^ \mikn, for the friend's sake. It forms 
 similar compounds as ()alben; thus, utu meinetipillen, for my 
 sake; um un[ertU)tUen, for our sake. 
 
 6. 3S e fj C n and ungeac^tct either precede or follow their 
 noun: as, inegcu bci* ^cilte, ber ^alte iretjen, 
 
 a. 335 e f| C tt forms similar compounds as I)atbcn ; thus, mciuct* 
 tDegen, on my account; unferttr>egen, on our account 
 
 b. SSeg en, being the dative plural of SScg, was formerly connected 
 with the preposition t)on. Phrases like Don 9ted^t3 luegen, toon ?lmt8 
 luegen are remnants of it. 
 
 193. Some prepositions are strengthened by adverbs, usually 
 following the noun, to depict, as it were, the action expressed 
 by the verb, and to define more closely the relation denoted 
 by the preposition. Examples: T)tX J)afe f prang Uber betl 
 3aun meg, the hare leaped over the fence. — !4)er ^a^ll (jlitt 
 lib er ben @ee I) in, the boat ghded along over the lake. — (5in 
 Ungetritter fommt t) om ©ebirge I) cr, a thunderstorm is coming 
 over from the mountains. — ^urd) bie geinbe I)inburc^, 
 through the enemies. 
 
 1. While the adverbs meg, !^in, I)er, ^tnburd) in the foregoing 
 examples might be left out without injury to the sense, there 
 are others which serve as indispensable complements to the 
 preposition; they, too, follow the noun: — 
 
 ^er §unb !roc^ unter bem The dog crawled out from 
 
 ^ett I) e r tJ r. under the bed. 
 
 ^on 3ugenb auf tnar cr He was addicted to drink 
 
 bem XxviXii crgeben. from his youth up. 
 
 3c^ [a^ 3Um genfter l)in== I looked out of the window, 
 au^. 
 
106 
 
 CONJUNCTIONS. 
 
 [§193^ 
 
 ^r fant ^ur Xpre herein. He came in by the door. 
 (Sie famen auf un^ ^U. They came towards us. 
 
 SD^itten, too, is similarly used, but precedes the preposition, 
 as, mitten im ^albe, in the midst of the forest 
 
 CONJUNCTIONS. 
 
 194. Conjunctions are either subordinative or coordinative, 
 according as they introduce subordinate or coordinate clauses. 
 All subordinative conjunctions require the transposed order; 
 most coordinative ones, the invei-ted order: — 
 
 al'S i^ il^tt He was sick when I saw 
 him last. 
 The enemies were our sup- 
 
 (5r tvav fran!, 
 
 S)ie gcinbe nmren un§ an 
 3at)l iiberlcgcn; and) f^nU 
 len ftc eine beffere ^ttU 
 Inng. 
 
 195. 
 
 enors m number ; be- 
 sides, they had a better 
 position. 
 
 Alphabetical list of the subordinative conjunctions: 
 
 ol'?, when 
 
 ot§ ob, ] 
 
 aU rocm, ) 
 
 auf baB, in order that 
 
 as if 
 
 je — befto, ) 
 je — untfo, >- 
 }e — ie, ) 
 
 beoor, before 
 
 t)a, as, since, when 
 bamit, in order that 
 bamit nic^t, lest 
 bafe, that, in order that 
 ba| nid)t lest 
 C^e, before 
 fall'?, in case 
 cjleic^wic, just as 
 tnbem, while, as 
 inbefjen, ) 
 
 although 
 
 inbe^, 
 infofei 
 infowcit (a(cj) 
 
 while 
 
 m(ofem(al§),Ji^^f^^ 
 
 the— the 
 (see § 201) 
 
 le nad^bem, according as 
 nacl)bem, after, according as 
 nun, now that 
 thf if, whether 
 cbgieid), ob)d)on, ) 
 obiuo^l, tcicmol)(, ) 
 o^ne bag, without 
 
 !eitbeni(ba§),}^^^(*^^) 
 f — and), however 
 fobalb (a(i^), as soon as 
 
 ha^f so tliat 
 
 ofern, if 
 
 tange (al^), as long as 
 
 oft (al^), as often as 
 
 oroeit, so far as 
 
 olvie, as soon as 
 
§ 190] 
 
 CONJUNCTIONS. 
 
 107 
 
 ftatt (or anftatt) ha% instead 
 of 
 
 urn — ^U, in order to 
 
 ungeac^tct (bag), notwith- 
 standing 
 
 t)orau«gefe^t (bag), suppos- 
 ing that 
 
 n)d{)renb (bag), while 
 
 IDetl, because (rarely, while) 
 
 menu, if, when 
 
 xocnn aud), although 
 
 1. The dash in fo — aurf), tnie 
 
 irienn fd)on, [ ^-^^"S" 
 tuenn aud) nod) fo, though 
 
 ever so 
 tnenit ntd)t, unless 
 trenn nur, provided that 
 Wte, how, as 
 lute — auc^, however 
 tDte ttjenn, as if 
 iDOfern, if, in case 
 m\cxn nid)t, unless. 
 
 auc^, um — p means that 
 
 the particles forming these conjunctions are separated by 
 other parts of speech. Thus, lute gele^rt er aud) fein mag, 
 however learned he may be. Um eiueu gutetl ®runb JU ^aben, 
 in order to have a good reason. 
 
 Also the following may be separated: tucnn an6), obgleic^, tneim glei(j^, 
 ixienn jd^on, toenn nur, njenn nid^t, tt)ofern nic^t. 
 
 moreover 
 
 196. List of the coordinative conjunctions: 
 1. Copulative: 
 
 unb, and 
 
 aud), alfo, besides 
 augcrbem, ) 
 pbem, j 
 iiberbie^, ) 
 itberbem, ) 
 be^i]leid)cn, likewise 
 nic^t nur — fonbern 
 
 not only — but also 
 ni(^t allein — fonbern aud), 
 
 not only — but also 
 ntd)t blo^ — fonbern aud), 
 
 not only — but also 
 foiuol)! — al^ (and)), as well 
 
 as, both — and 
 tueber — nod), neither — nor 
 teilS — tei(^, partly— partly 
 
 QUC^, 
 
 3um Zdi — jum Xei(, partly 
 — partly 
 
 etne^teilc^ — anbernteil^, part- 
 ly — partly 
 
 eincrf eit^ — anberfeit^, on the 
 
 one hand — on the other 
 
 hand 
 
 hato — balb, ) „^^^ ..^^ 
 m-m [no— then 
 
 ferner, ) furthermore, 
 iDeiter, | moreover 
 erften^ (erftlid)), first 
 fobann, second 
 ferner, then 
 enblid), finally 
 namlic^, namely 
 alg, ) 
 
 ^ 2 
 
 as 
 
108 
 
 CONJUNCTIONS. 
 
 [§196. 
 
 2. Adversative: 
 
 fonft, otherwise 
 benn, unless 
 
 bennoc^, nevertheless 
 bef|enungead)tet, 1 
 bemungead)tct, ^ notwith- 
 QleidilDO^I, ' I standing 
 entiDcber — ober, either — or nic^t^^beftoiccnicjer, J 
 
 abcr, 1 
 
 aUettt, [but (§197) 
 
 foubcrn, J 
 
 nun (abcr), now 
 
 3. Concessive: 
 
 S^ax, frei(id), ti3o()I, it is tire, 
 
 4. Causative: 
 
 bcnn, for 
 
 bal)er, 
 
 be^l)a(b, 
 
 be^iDcgcn, 
 
 barum, 
 
 urn bc^millcn, 
 
 for that 
 reason 
 
 bemnac^, " 
 fonad), 
 (omit, 
 mit^in, 
 
 \0r ] 
 
 alfo, 
 folQlid), J 
 
 accordingly 
 
 consequently 
 
 Note. — Of all these coordinative conjunctions, only the following 
 have no influence on the construction : ttl&Cr, HtfCttt, foilticni, bctttlp 
 Oticr, UtCii ; to which can be added enttncber, bod), inbeffeu, although they 
 are quite as frequently used with the inverted order. 
 
 Special remarks on some conjunctions. 
 
 197. But, when adversatiTe, is, after negative clauses, 
 rendered either by oBct or by fouticrn, with this difference 
 that the speaker introduces by f onbcrn a dii'ect antithesis or a 
 gradation, and by abcr a limitation. Examples: 
 
 dx ift nid)t rcic^, fonbern He is not rich, but poor 
 
 arm. (direct antithesis). 
 
 (5r tftnid)t itjo^l^abenb, fon* He is not well-to-do, but 
 
 b C r U reid). rich (gi-adation). 
 
 Sr ift nid)t reid^, aber itso^f* He is not rich, but well-to- 
 
 tjabenb. do (limitation). 
 
§ 200] CONJUNCTIONS. 109 
 
 198. If is translated by tttentt^ when it is conditional; and 
 by oB, Avlien it is equivalent to whether (in indirect questions 
 and dubitative clauses) : — 
 
 ^c^ !omme, it) entt id) fantt. I come if I can. 
 ^d) iDcig nicfjt, ob id; !om* I do not know wlietber I 
 men !ann, can come. 
 
 199. 1. Wlien is to be rendered by M or tuetttt. "With 
 reference to an event of the present or future time Wcnu is 
 used exclusively: thus, 
 
 Senn bte (Sonne aufge^t. "When the sun rises, 
 ^ir fommen U>ieber, wcnn We come back when the 
 bcr ^ncfuif ruft. Sch. cuckoo calls. 
 
 As to past events, al^ is used, if when means " at the time 
 when," and \r> cnn, if it means "at each time when," whenever: 
 as, 
 
 51(0 S^apolcon nad)9?UJ3(anb When Napoleon went to 
 
 gog. Russia. 
 
 S33 e n n 5^apo(eon cinen @ieg When (ever) Napoleon gafti- 
 
 gewann. ed a victory. 
 
 a. If when has an antecedent, it is usually translated by tx) o ; less fre- 
 quently by b a : as, 
 
 @3giebtim2J2enfc^enteben2tugen* There are moments in the life 
 blicfe, to er beat iiBeltgeift of man, when he is nearer to 
 
 nailer iji. Sch. the spirit of the universe. 
 
 2. When? is rendered toattlt ? if denoting time, and lUCtttt ? 
 if meaning under what circumdances? Examples: — 
 
 S a n n bift bu getommen ? When did you come ? 
 Senn finb gmei g-tguren When are two figures sim- 
 einanber dt)niic^? ilar to each other? 
 
 200. Lest is regularly translated bttg nic^t (or bamttnid)t); 
 after expressions oi fear, however, by ba§ : as, id) fUrcf)tete, 
 'ba);i> cr tame, I feared lest he should come. 
 
110 INTERJECTIONS. [5 201- 
 
 201. 3^ — U (^^ beflo) requires the dependent order in 
 the fii'st (dependent) clause, and the inverted order in the 
 second. The second je is usually replaced by be ft O, or um 
 fo: as, 
 
 3 c fdngcr t^ ba^ ^t(b one The longer I look at the 
 fc^c, befto (utn f o) beffer picture, the better I like 
 gcfaflt eg mir. it 
 
 INTERJECTIONS. 
 
 202. Genuine interjections are the following: 
 
 ad)! at)! ei! i! I)a! a^a! aJi! I)e! I)eba! ho! 
 
 oh! holial holla! 
 
 ad) ! ol) ! ! ah! alas! (t! pft! hush! hist! 
 
 an ! nu lueb ! oh ! i)m ! h umph ! hum ! 
 
 je! jemine! o jerum! oh ^ifui! fie! 
 
 dear! piff paff ! hang! 
 
 l^cifa ! t)eiia|a ! ) ^^^^, jjo^ tauf enb ! ) what the 
 
 jud)! jud)lie! jucf)I)eifa!) " ci ber taufenb ! j deuce! 
 ^urra! hurrah! 
 
 1. To these may be added the following words and plirases used as 
 exclamations: 
 
 SBe^c! ac^ iDel)! o \od)\ tueg ba! out of the way! 
 
 woe! alas! 5lc^tUTig! take care! attention! 
 
 le ibcr ! unhappily ! §ci( ! hail ! 
 
 lDO^(an ! weh ! @(ii(f auf ! ©Uicf ^u ! good luck! 
 
 brat) ! well done! ©ottlob ! God be praised! 
 
 red)t fo ! 'tis well! 3U gitfe ! help! 
 
 t)onnart^ ! forwards! t?euer ! gcuer io ! fire ! 
 
 iDeiter! go on! ben3at)re! i betDa^rc! J ^.^^ 
 
 bait! stop! @ott bctnal)rc! rfnrhiar 
 
 fad)tc ! gently! bcptc ! ©ott bcptc ! ) ^^^"'^• 
 
 fort! be gone! be off! fief) ! behold! 
 auf! up! 
 
§ 205J WORD FORMATION. Ill 
 
 WORD FORMATION. 
 
 A. DEEIVATION. 
 
 203. Meam of Derivation. All German words like those of 
 the other Aryan languages, are beUeved to come ultimately 
 from monosyllabic roots. These roots became stems and words 
 by means of (1) internal vowel changes, the Umlaut (§2) and 
 5lblaut (§ 64); (2) prefixes; (3) suffixes. Thus, e. g., the root 
 binb became by 5lblaut ^atlb, tie, and ^Utlb, band. The ad- 
 dition of the prefix ber and of the suffix uttg produced, at a 
 later period, ^erbtttbuttg, connexion. Any primary deriv- 
 ative, as ^unb, can become the stem of a new (secondary) 
 derivative, as ^iinbni^, alliance. 
 
 DERIVATION OF VERBS. 
 
 204. A large number of verbs, viz., all those of the strong 
 conjugation, and many of the weak, have no German root- 
 word, and are, therefore, considered here as primitive. 
 
 The derivative verbs are mostly formed from substantives 
 and adjectives by merely adding the infinitive ending en, and 
 modifying, in many instances, the root- vowel: as, ipflligen, to 
 plough, from ^ftU(5 ; rotett, to redden, from rot. A few are 
 formed from primitive verbs by S(b(aut: as, tegett, to lay, from 
 (iegen, to lie; fe^en, to set, from fi^cu, to sit; faugeu, to suckle, 
 from faugett, to suck. Tliis latter group is always transitive. 
 
 A very large number of verbs are formed by means of pre- 
 fixes. 
 
 205. Prefixes used for the derivation of Verbs. 
 
 1. Sc was originally identical with bei, by. 
 
 a. It appHes the action of the simple verb to an object, and 
 thus makes intransitive verbs transitive: — 
 
 ftagen, wail: beflagen, bewail; 
 
 fommen, come: belpmmen, come by, obtain. 
 
112 WORD FORMATION. [§ 205 
 
 b. "With a transitive verb be alters the direction of its action, 
 viz. the accusative governed by the simple verb becomes a 
 dative of the instrument: — 
 
 ftreueit (-^ lumen auf ben 3Scg), to strew (flowers 
 
 on the way) ; 
 beftreuen {^tw 3Scg mtt ^(umen), to bestrew (the 
 
 way with flowers). 
 
 c Sometimes it merely strengthens the notion conveyed by 
 the simple verb : as, 
 
 l^arren, wait: be^arren, persist; 
 
 or it adds to it the idea of completion: — 
 
 be(icn/ cover: bebe (fen, cover all over. 
 
 d. It also forms a number of verbs from substantives and 
 adjectives, in which office it can be circumscribed by to furnish 
 viUhi to make : — 
 
 gtugel, wing: beflitgein, furnish with wings; 
 
 feud)t, moist: befeuc^teu, moisten. 
 
 In befnebigen, satisfy, be^er^tgen, take to heart, and others, 
 the derivative syllable ig has been inserted. 
 
 2. @nt (emp), formerly attt (as preserved in 5ltlttt)ort, 
 answer, and 2lnt(i^, countenance) has several meanings, the 
 most important of which are : 
 
 a. That of removal and separaiion : 
 
 fit^ren, lead: entful)ren, lead away; 
 
 loitfcn, run: enttaufcn, run away. 
 
 l>. That of deprivaiion : 
 
 flatter, leaves: entbldttcrn, strip of leaves. 
 
 c. That of reversal : 
 
 (aben, load: entfabcn, unload; 
 
 l^eiltg, holy: entl)ciUgen, unhallow. 
 
 d. It also expresses the beginning of the state or activity 
 denoted by the simple verb : 
 
 brennen, bum: entbrennen, take fire. 
 
 3. (Sr was originally not di£[erent from ur (as preserved, 
 ft g.y in Urfprung, origin). 
 
§ 205] DERn^\TICNS OF VEEBS, 113 
 
 a. One of its earliest meanings is out, forth, chiefly with an 
 upward motion: — 
 
 baucn, build: erbauen, build up; 
 
 -:^ iDad)fen, gTow: emadjfen, gi-ow up. 
 
 b. In close relation to this meaning of a gradual rising, er 
 (hke ent) denotes the beginning of the state or activity ex- 
 pressed by the simple verb, or the adjective: — 
 
 braufen, roar: erbraufen, begin roaring; 
 
 gritn, green: ei'grUTien, grow green. 
 
 c. In many other compounds it intensifies the notion ex- 
 pressed by the simple verb: — 
 
 tragcn, bear: ertragen, endure; 
 
 finbeu, find: erfinben, invent; 
 
 and vrith verbs of doing violence it adds to the verbal action 
 the impHcation of destruction as resulting from it: — 
 
 fd)(av3Cn, strike: crfdjlagctt, strike dead; 
 
 briicfettr press: erbriicfen, stifle. 
 
 d. It adds to the verbal action the idea of attainment: — 
 
 tro^en, defy: ertro^cn, obtain by defiance; 
 
 eilen, hasten: ereilen, reach by hastening, 
 
 overtake. 
 
 e. It often answers to the Latin re in the sense of again, 
 lack:— fid) er^olen, recover; fid) crinuem, recollect; erfeuueti, 
 recognize. 
 
 4. @C modifies the sense of many simple verbs in the same 
 way as Latin cum, with, together: as, rinuen, flow: gcrimtClt, 
 coagulate; fallen, fall: gef alien, faU in with, please; — others are 
 merely strengthened by it: as, gebenfen, think of; geli'lftenf 
 covet. 
 
 5. S5et, originally the same a3 Dor, has a variety of mean- 
 ings. 
 
 a. Its original sense seems to have been off, away : — 
 retfen, journey: t)erreifen, journey off; 
 
 treiben, drive: t)ertvcibcn, drive away. 
 
 Hence, it impUes the idea of losing or making disappear 
 through the verbal action: — 
 
114 WORD FOBMATION. [§ 205- 
 
 fpieten, gamble: Derfpietcn (fciti ©ctb), gamble 
 
 away (one's money) ; 
 hanm, build: Derbaucn (eine STu^fiiit), injure 
 
 a view by building. 
 
 b. It denotes the termination of tbe state or action ex- 
 pressed by the simple verb: — 
 
 flingcn, sound: t)er!Ittigett, die away; 
 
 b(ut)en, bloom : DerblitI) en, cease blooming, fade i 
 
 or the complete ivorhing out of the verbal action: — 
 
 bluten, bleed: Derblutcn, bleed to death; 
 
 l^ungent, starve: Der^ungcnt, starve to deatL 
 
 c. It reverses the notion of the simple verb: — 
 
 ac^tcn, esteem: bcrarf)tcn, despise; 
 
 or it adds (like mis) to the action of the verb the idea of a 
 wrong application : — 
 
 brucfen, print: Derbni(fen, misprint; 
 
 in particular the idea of spoiling y ruining , and the like: — 
 
 gie^en, train: bergic^en, educate improperly, 
 
 spoil; 
 
 also the meaning of over, excessively: — 
 
 falgen, salt: nerfafjen, oversalt. 
 
 d. It forms many derivatives from substantives and ad- 
 jectives, and denotes an entering u^on the condition ex23ressed 
 by them : 
 
 geirot, marriage: ftd^ t)cr{)eiratett, get married; 
 
 orni, poor: ijeranncn, become poor. 
 
 "With active verbs it is, in this case, to be circumsciibed by 
 to make, and the like : — 
 
 fd[)(e(^tcr, worse: t)er)'cf)(cd)tern, make worse; 
 
 beutfd}, German: Derbcut[d)en, tm-n into German. 
 
 Note also derivatives from nouns denoting materials, where t)er ex- 
 presses a iransformaiion of the object into the material denoted by the 
 noun, either a real one: as, berjieinent, to petrify; or an apparent on^ 
 the object being only covered by the material : as, uergolben, to gild. 
 
§ 203] DERIVATION OF VERBS. 115 
 
 e. Sometimes Ucr merely intensifies the notion contained in 
 tlie Bimple verb: — 
 
 bletbett, stay: l5erl)(eil)en, persist; 
 
 or it merely serves (like be) to make the simple verb tran- 
 sitive: — 
 
 fc^tDeicjcn, be silent: Derfd)tnetGen, conceal; 
 lacf)Ctt, laugh: terlad^ett, deride. 
 
 Sometimes, too, it has no effect whatever on the meaning 
 of the simple verb. Thus \)enttc{}ren, au5pnent, is the same 
 as me^ren; nor does ijerdnbem, change, differ from dnbertt. 
 
 6. Set denotes separation: — 
 
 fciHen, fall: ^crfatfen, fall apart; 
 
 [cf)neiben, cut: 3crfd)Tteiben, cut in pieces. 
 
 "When the simple verb itself contains the notion of separ- 
 ation, 3cr merely strengthens it: — 
 
 brei^en, break: 3erbred)en, break asunder.^ 
 
 208. Suffixes used for the derivation of Yerbs: 
 
 1. tif which forms diminutives: as, lad^eltt, to smile, from 
 ladjcn, laugK It has often a disparaging and depreciatory 
 sense: as, frommelu, affect piety, cani 
 
 2. et^ which forms a few iterative, desiderative, and caus- 
 ative verbs: as, !(ap.pcrn, rattle; frfjlafem (impers.), feel sleepy; 
 etnfc^Iafertt, cause to sleep. 
 
 3. ict, of French origin, but grafted upon some German 
 stems: as, bud)ftabieren, speU. 
 
 4. tg. This sufiax forms a number of causative verbs: as, 
 reinigen, make clean. 
 
 5. CttJ : as, fautetisett, play the sluggard. 
 
 6. 3 and f^ : as, adjjen (from ad)), groan; !^errfd)en, rule. 
 
116 WORD FORMATIOK. [§ 207^ 
 
 DERIVATIOK OF SUBSTANTIVES. 
 
 207. A large number of substantives are regarded as prim- 
 itive. The others ai'e clsrived either by chan<;^e of vowel (%b* 
 laut): as, (Sc^Iu^, <Sd)(o^, from f5)Iic^cn; a few by prefixes; 
 many, by suffixes. 
 
 208. Prefixes used for the derivation of Substantives. 
 
 1. 3CKt only occurs in $Ittth)ort, answer, and Slntli^, counte- 
 nance, and means originally toward.iy against. 
 
 2. ®r J, arch, denotes what ii first cr most distinguished in 
 its kind: as, (irjengcl, archangel; (Srjbicb, arrant thief. 
 
 3. @e forms many nouns with a collecfive cr frequerUaiive 
 character, and regularly goes together with tlie sufiix e ; as, 
 ha^ ©cbtrcje, mountains; ba$ ©claufc, i-unning to and fro. 
 Many have droj^ped the e again, but have retained the Um=« 
 laut caused by it: as, ha^ ©ciDolf, clouds; ha^ @efcf)lpd^, chit- 
 chat 
 
 4. 9Ki§ corresponds to mis : as, SD^i^Gtiff, mistake. 
 
 5. M\\, This prefix either denotes negalion: as, Uufmtt, 
 nonsense; or it expresses something unnatural, monstrous, or 
 injurious: as, Unmctlfc^, an inhuman person; Unttcr, monster; 
 Un!raut, weeds. 
 
 6. lit chiefly denotes originalitij or primitiveness : as, Ul** 
 fprung, origin; UrlPClt, primitive world 
 
 209. Suffixes used for the derivation of Substantives. 
 
 Note. — The sufSxes d^ e it, Iclii, c, el, en, in, ting, ni^, fcl cause 
 Umlaut {) 2). 
 
 a^tn and km, corresponding to the Enghsh kin and ling 
 
 (cf. manikin, goding), form diminutives; thus, bad §dnbd)eit, 
 
 ^ little hand; \ia^% ^dumdjcn, little tree; the root vowel being 
 
 modified if capable of it, except in a few proper names, as 
 
 ^ar(: ^ar(d[)en; ©ertrub: ^ertnibc^en. 
 
 d)cn is more common than lein, which latter is chiefly used after ^ 
 and g: as, ba§ S8dd)letn, httlo brook; \)ai Sroglein, Utile trough, from 
 Srog. To use d)eu after such souuds ij not i^ossible -without the in- 
 sertion of a euphonic el*, as, SSodjeldieu. 
 
§ 209] D2RIVATI0N OF SUBSTANTIVES. 117 
 
 Nouns endinrj in c or cil drop these endings before (i)tn and Iciu; tlius, 
 ba3 £uglciu, littlo eye; tag ©urtd)cn, little garden. 
 
 In Borne -words the diminutive force of d^cn and tcitt is no lon-^er fait: 
 as, br.3 SJidbd)cn, girl; ha^ grdltlcin, young (unmarried) lady; 2JJdnud)cn 
 lui'!) Ocibcf}cn, male and female (of an animal species). 
 
 Diminutives are often used as terms of endearment, 
 
 C forms feminine abstract nouns from adjectives: as, bie 
 
 ©ro^C, greatness, from (jrojj. 
 
 CI (from tile Latin ia), corresponding to the English y, forma 
 substantives from tlie names of persons. 
 
 Such nouns denote the emplo^^nent, state, or condition of 
 a i^erson, cr a place of business: as, bie glfd^crcv fishery; bic 
 ©rucfcrci, printmg-office. 
 
 Some also have a collective sense: as, bie $yteitcrct, cavalry. 
 
 Other nouns in ci are formed from verbs. They denote an 
 abstract action, usually "wiLh a contemptuous impHcation; bie 
 §CU(^e(ci, hypocrisy; ^(auberct, chit-chat 
 
 cl and c:t form a large number of nouns, mostly of the mas- 
 culine gender: as, bcr (Sdjliifl'ct, hey; ber ©raben, ditch. 
 
 cr, lite Enghsh er, or, denotes the agent, and is chiefly used 
 to make appellations of male persons, partly from substantive 
 stems: as, ganger, singer, from (Sang; partly from verbs: as, 
 iO^atcr, painter, from Tlialctt ; partly from the names of countries 
 and places: as, b:r (gno^anbcr, theEnghshman; bcr §amburgcr, 
 inhabitant (or native) of Hamburg. 
 
 In a few nouns, an. tt or an I has been inserted between tlie 
 stem and the suffix cr; thus, ^imftlcr, artist; (Sd)Ulbner, debtor. 
 
 Also a few names of instruments have the suffix cr: as, bcr 
 ^oI)rer, auger. 
 
 IJcit (or f cit), Enghsh head and hood, forms feminine ab- 
 stract nouns from adjectives: as, bie greif)eit, Uberty; bie SDant* 
 bartcit, gratitude. The following few are derived from names 
 of persons: bie ^inb()cit, cluldhood; bie ©ottl}ett, Godhead; bie 
 3r'^orl)cit and 5^arr^eit, foUy; and with a collective sense: hk 
 9JZenfcl}l)eit, mankind; ^Ijrifteti^cit^ Christendom; and (5$eift(ic^=» 
 !eit, clergy. 
 
 The form !' c i t is used instead of lie i t with adjectives having a suflSx 
 (except buntet, and those in en). Examples: — ©cUgfeit, happiness, 
 from jetig; ^itterfcit, bitterness; (gitdfcit, vanity. 
 
113 Word formation. [§ 209- 
 
 Frequently the syllable ig is, for the sake of euphony, inserted before 
 !cit: as, I[?cid)ttgfeit, facility. 
 
 in, corresponding to English ess, ine, makes feminine from 
 masculine appellations, and regularly causes the modification 
 of the root-vowel; thus^bie C^rcifin, countess; tie §elbitt, heroine; 
 "iik giinbin, bitch. 
 
 SKanntn, from SQlann, only occurs, now, in bic 2anb§nt a ii ii i it, country- 
 woman. 
 
 jTic ^rin^effin, princess, bic Sibtif fin, abbess, and bic ^ononiffiit, 
 have both the foreign suffix ens and the German in. 
 
 ling makes appellations of persons from substantives and 
 verbs: as, bcr §dupt(ing, chieftain, from ta^ $^^pt? '^^^ ^^^^* 
 ling, apprentice. 
 
 "With more recent derivatives, ling expresses contemj^t: as, 
 bcr X)i(i)terlini3, j^oetaster. 
 
 ttiS, Enghsh ness, forms abstract substantives from verbs 
 and substantives, and a few from adjectives: as, ha^ ^cbiirf* 
 ni^, need; ba^ ^Bitnbni^, league, from ^unb; bie S'iitfterni^^, 
 dai'kness. The abstract meaning often passes over into the 
 concrete. 
 
 fol, fcl form substantives almost exclusively from verbs: 
 as, ba^ *8d)icf)a(, fate. 
 
 f^nft, Enghsh ship, and tunt, English dom, make abstract 
 and collective nouns from names of persons, substantives, ad- 
 jectives, and also a few from verbs; thus, grcunbfcf)aft, fiiend- 
 ship; 9iittcrfd)aft, knighthood; ^H'icftcrtum, priesthood; :53rief* 
 fc^aften, letters; (^igenfdjaft, quality; iKcicl}tum, aiches; Sac^^* 
 turn, growth. 
 
 tri, an abridgment of Xci(, forms Eractionals: as, eiu ^ierter, 
 a fourth. 
 
 tin 9^ Enghsh ing, forms abstract nouns (convertible into 
 concretes) from ti'ansitive verbs: as, ^rcnnnng, separation; 
 (irfinbung, invention. In a few cases it has a collective mean- 
 ing: as, ^leibung, clothing. 
 
 The foUowing suffixes: onb (old participial ending for Cltb), 
 cm, cnb, at, it|, ic^t, ig, ing, ril^, and nt are of very rare 
 occun-ence. Examj^les: bcr ^^eilanb, Saviom*; bcr 5ltcm, breath; 
 bie S^ugcnb, virtue; bie §cimat, home; bcr £ranid> crane; baS 
 
§ 211] DERIVATION OF ADJECTIVES. 119' 
 
 T)t(ft(i)t, thicket; bci* @ffig, vinegar; bci* ©(irlno, lieriin^-; ber 
 ga^nrid), ensign; bie ^rmut, poverty. 
 
 DERIVATION OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 210. The prefixes iised for the derivation of adjectives are 
 the same as those forming substantives, viz. ht, tXlf gc^.TTti]!, 
 un, ur. Examples: bcrcit, ready; er^faul, very lazy; gcredjt, 
 just; tni^mutio, discontented; wntreu, faithless; urpld^Ud}, very 
 sudden. 
 
 211. Suffixes forming Adjectives, 
 
 "btiX, This suffix is of the same root as hear, and originally 
 means hewHng ; thus, frud)tbaiv fruit-bearing, fiaiitfuL In 
 more recent usage, its prevailing signification is that of a pos- 
 sibility or inclination to the action impHed by the stem: as, 
 gangbar, passable; bienftbar, serviceable. It is added to ab- 
 stract nouns, and verbs. With transitive verbs, it has always 
 a passive meaning: as, e^baiv eatable. 
 
 cn, English en, makes adjectives from names of materials: 
 as, golben, golden. — Often cm is substituted for it; thus, 
 bleieVn, leaden; I)dl3ern, wooden. 
 
 l^aft, ^tjftig i^ connected with ^aftett, to cling. When added 
 to abstract nouns and some verbs, it produces adjectives denot- 
 ing a, propensity towards that which is expressed by the stem: 
 as, lafter^aft, vicious; fdjtca^^aft, garrulous. — ^^Vhen added to 
 appellations of persons and some other nouns, it denotes 
 resemblance: as, riefett^aft, gigantic; !rampff)aft, spasmodic. — 
 It is also added to tlu-ee adjectives: frautl^aft, morbid; b0^t)aft, 
 malicious; Voal)rl)aft, true. 
 
 ig^ English y, forms adjectives from nouns: as, mad^ttg, 
 mighty, from 9)^ad)t; faftig, juicy, from ®aft. Those derived 
 from concrete nouns do not modify the stem-vowel, except 
 UJaffctig, "watery, and fdrnig, granulous. — • ig is also added to 
 verbs and adjectives: as, Txad)giebtg, yielding; Ddllig, complete; 
 — finally to a few adverbs: as, ^icfig, from tjlCV; bortig, l)eutig, 
 fonftig, Dorig. 
 
 i g combined with f a I (§ 209) to fcltg (for jolifl) occurs in several ad- 
 jectives: as, niiil)iclig, toilsome, from iuiul)fal ; triibjelig, woeful, from 
 
120 WORD FORMATION. [J 211- 
 
 i^t is added to a few concrete noims, mostly names of 
 material.^: as, ^ot^idjt, woody, but it is going out of use, being 
 superseded by icj. Only ti)Orid)t, foolish, is still properly in 
 use. 
 
 ifd|, English vili, is added to proper names of persons, 
 nations, and places: as, Iut()erifd), Lutheran; fpanifd), Spanish; 
 l)ani|d), of Halle; — moreover, to appellations of jDei'sons, places, 
 and animals: as, biebifdj, thievish; I)immliid), heavenly ; pnbtfd), 
 doggish. 
 
 ^ Observo tho depredator j sense of ij'd^, compared with that of lid), in 
 finbifd), childish, and finbfid), childlike; tueibifd), womanish, and lueib* 
 Ud^, womanly; I}errijd), masterful, and l^errlid), magnificent. 
 
 "With abstract nouns, ifc^ signifies s, propensity to that which 
 is impHed by the stem: as, gdnfifd), quaiTelsomc, from ^anl. 
 
 Adjectives derived from foreign noims usually have the 
 suffix ifd}: as, ^joetift^, logifc^. 
 
 Tlie adjective ]^iibf(^, pretty, is a contraction of I)ofifcf), 
 com-t-like; b cutf d), of Old High-German diutiac. 
 
 let is added to numerah, definite and indefinite: as, iX'ddtX^ 
 let, of two sorts; t)iclerlci, of many sorts. It is by origin a 
 feminine noun in the genitive, meaning sort; the ending ci* of 
 the preceding numeral is the 2)roxDer case-ending agreeing 
 with it 
 
 • li^, Enghsh like, ly. This suffix when added to appellations 
 of persons, denotes manner or resemblance: as, fiirftlic^, princely; 
 ttianntic^, manlj^ — ^To adjectives it imparts a diminidim signi- 
 fication: as, rotltc^, reddish; a(t(ic^, oldish. In this latter class, 
 the stem-word ia always modified. 
 
 With verhsj Wi) denotes, like bar, Si, possibility ; as, crtrdgl{(^, 
 enduiable. 
 
 In a fevf instances a t is inserted before Ud^: as, iDefentUd), essential. 
 
 jam, Enghsh some, denotes, hke bar, a pK)ssiMlity or inchn- 
 aiion to the action imphed by the stem: thus, Icnffam; man- 
 ageable; fparfam, saving. It is added to abstract nouns, verbs, 
 and a few adjectives. 
 
 On the derivation of adverbs, see § 183. 
 
§ 2131 COMPOSITION. . 121 
 
 B. COMPOSITION. 
 
 212. By a compound word we here understand one that con- 
 sists of two or more independent words expressing but one 
 lidea: as, 5lpfetbaum, apple-tree; (Sonnenaufgancj, sunrise. 
 
 Note.— Accordingly, -words like tugenb!)aft, ^rantt)cit, ^nec!^tjd)aft,etc., 
 are no longer considered a3 compounds because the components \)a\i, 
 izit, jd^aft have lost their independent existence as words and become 
 derivative syllables, as which they have been treated under the head 
 of derivation. 
 
 1. No compound is to be regarded as having more than 
 two components, although each component may be a com- 
 pound in itself: as, ^^(eibermac^erl)aubn)er! (^'leiberma{f)er=§anb* 
 lucr!). 
 
 2. Of the two components, the one always determines the 
 other. The determining component regularly occupies the 
 first place in substantives, adjectives, and verbs, as in S)lovh^ 
 iDinb, north- wind; ()ellb(au, Hght-blue; auffc^ticfeeu, to unlock; 
 and the last in particles, as in bcrcjauf, up hill; bergab, down 
 hill. 
 
 COMPOUND SUBSTANTIVES. 
 
 213. Nearly all compound substantives have a substantive 
 for their second component. The first component may be a 
 substantive, adjective, numeral, verb, or particle. Examples: 
 Safi'erfaK, water-fall; S3oUmonb, full moon; >[)reie(f, triangle; 
 (Stubier^immcr, study; TOtbiirger, fellow-citizen. 
 
 A few combinations are to be considered as loose word-groupings 
 rather than as compounds. Such are baS SSergifsmeinnic^t, forget-me- 
 not; ta-i @tettbid)ein, rendezvous; ba§ ^iirfid^feiii, the being by oneself. 
 
 1. "VVlien the first component is a substantive, it often has 
 its regular genitive ending § orn: as, ^rtegSgott, god of war; 
 J^bmen^aljn, lion's tooth; Dtofcnblatt, rose-leaf; the it in the last 
 example being the old, feminine ending of the genitive. At a 
 later period, § was added as a connecting hnk to feminine 
 nouns too, as in 3Saf)rI)eitglicbc, love of truth; Uniuerfttdtg* 
 freunb, coUege friend. 
 
 Sometimes, too, the fu:st component takes a plural form; as, 
 2B b r t e V bud), dictionary ; 2B C i b e r f cinb, woman-hater. 
 
122 WOED POBMATION. [§ 213- 
 
 2. When the first component is an adjective, its stem is 
 closely joined to the second component: as, (^ro^mut, mag- 
 nanimity. Only a few adjectives take an ending: as, ^raufc= 
 min3C, cm-led-mini 
 
 a. "While in ^raufetum^C the adjective retains the same form 
 in the obHque cases, it is fuUy declined in the following: ber 
 $ol)Cpneftciv high-priest; ber (&I)eimerat, Privy-Councillor; bie 
 i^ani^ctncile, tedium. 
 
 itt cgo^cpriefter, e. g., is declined as follows: gen. bc^5 .^olicn^ 
 pricftcr^; dat bcm §oi)cnprieftcr; ace. ben .'pot)cnprtcfter; plur. 
 bic §ot)cnpricftcr. A high pried is dn §ol)erpricftcr. 
 
 3. When the first component is a verb, a euphonic e is often 
 inserted, as in 3^^9^P^9^'^' forefinger. 
 
 COMPOUND ADJECTIVES. 
 
 214 Compound adjectives have mostly an adjective for their 
 second component The first component may be a substantive, 
 adjective, verb, or particle. Examples: iDaiferanu, waterless; 
 l)cUc^ritn, light-green; mcrfttjUrbig, noteworthy; uberglUcfUc^, 
 overhappy. 
 
 "VMien the first component is a substantive, it often takes the 
 same singular and plui'al endings as in compound substantives 
 (§ 213, 1): as, IcbenSmiibc, tired of life; aI)Uum30DoU, presage- 
 ful; Inlbetreid), rich in images. 
 
 1. A very frequent combination is also that of a participle 
 ■with its adjunct preceding it: as, ]^er3>crrci§enb, heart-rending; 
 H)citreid)cnb, far-reaching; rul)mbebec!t, covered -svith gloiy; 
 mccrum|d)lungen, sea-siuTounded. 
 
 2. Finally, adjectives are formed by adding i.j to a com- 
 bination which is not in use b}^ itself: as, langl}aarigr long- 
 haired; engbriiftig, narrow-breasted. 
 
 COMPOUND VERBS. 
 
 215. Verbs are compounded with substantives, adjectives, 
 and i^articles: as, ratf d)lagen, dehberate ; groBtUit, brag; fort* 
 gcl)cn, go away. Those compounded with particles ai'e the 
 most im|X)rtani Their i^eculiaiities have been treated in 
 § 72 to 79. 
 
§ 216] HISTORY OF THE GEKMAN LANGUAGE. 123 
 
 Brief Historical Sketch of the German Lan^age. 
 
 216. The German language belongs to the Germanic or 
 Teutonic family of languages, wliich, again, like Greek, Italic, 
 Indian, Persian, Slavic, Lithuanic, and Celtic, is a member of 
 the Ar}^an or Indo-European family. 
 
 The Germanic ^oup comprises: 
 
 1. The Gothic, now extinct, and only known through a 
 Tersion of the Bible by the Gothic bishop Ulfilas, who lived 
 in the fourth century. 
 
 2. The Scandinavian, with four sub-divisions: Swedish, 
 Vanish, Norwegian, and Icelandic. 
 
 3. The Low-German, with the Frisian, Old Saxon^ and Anglo- 
 Saxon for dialects. Out of Old Saxon were developed the 
 Dutch, or literary language of the Netherlands, and the „*!p(att:= 
 beutfc^," occupying the "flat" parts of Northern Germany, 
 while Anglo-Saxon, in consequence of its introduction into 
 England, became Emjllsh. 
 
 4. The High-German, occupying middle and southern Ger- 
 many, and a part of Switzerland. 
 
 That form of High-German which wag in use between the 
 seventh and the eleventh century, is called 'Old High-German.* 
 It was succeeded by the so-called 'Middle High-Germxin* with 
 the Saabian as leading dialect during the following centuries 
 down to the Reformation, when Luther brought into general 
 use that form which bears the name of 'New High-German' 
 or 'German.* 
 
 Up to the times of Luther there was no uniform literary language 
 used in Germany. The Low-German was, as it were, in competition 
 with the High-German, each producing an independent literature. 
 Luther, in his writings, used neither the one nor the other, but an idiom 
 which had sprung up in the written official communications between 
 the Imperial Court and the numerous German princes. It was spoken 
 in no part of the country, but had, to a certain extent, grown up on 
 paper. "While the High-German was predominant in ii, the Low-German 
 was sufficiently represented to make it intelligible to the northern as 
 well as to the southern Germans, and thus eminently fitted to become 
 universal. 
 
124 CORRESPONDENCES OF CONSONANTS. [§ 216- 
 
 And, in fact, the rapid and extensive circulation of Luther's cate- 
 chisms and version of the Bible, which became household books of the 
 nation, brought about this universality. Moreover, the first German 
 grammars vera compiled on the basis of the new idiom, -vs-hich thus 
 became a canon of speaking and writing correctly. Nowadays, Luther's 
 language is the speech of the educated in all Germany, the other 
 dialects being no longer heard in their purity except among the rural 
 population. 
 
 Correspondences of Consonants in German and 
 English. 
 
 217. The chief characteristic of the High-German in contradistinction 
 to the Low-German is the progression (or rotation) of miUes. This sing- 
 ular phenomenon, which already appeared once before in the primitive 
 German language, when High-German, Low-German, Gothic, and 
 Scandinavian were not yet separate idioms (§ 216), consists in a regular 
 shifting of the mutes from one class into another, so that, in general, 
 the sonants h, d, g (§ 5) of a former period became surds p, t, fc (§ 5) ; 
 the surds, aspirates, p^, Vi, Teh {viz. p, i, fc, -{■ aspiration) ; and the aspir- 
 ates, sonants. The regularity of these changes, however, is not absolute; 
 the most important deviation is that the aspirates pli, th, kh, viz. surds 
 -[- aspiration, became 2/, is (2), kch, viz. surds -f fricative, and in many 
 instances pure fricatives /, sz, ch. German inherited from Old High- 
 German most of the phonetic changes of this second rotation of mutes, 
 while English, being through Anglo-Saxon the inheritor of Low-German 
 (§ 216, 3), does not participate in them. Hence, the discrepancies be- 
 tween German and English mutes in words of common origin. 'We 
 point out the most important, taking also into account some conson- 
 antal correspondences that stand outside the law of rotation of mutes 
 (Grimm's law). 
 
 218. Dental mutes and fricatives. 
 
 1. 2 = d: as, 2^od)ter, daughter; treibett, drive; trinfett, 
 drink; ^ropfcn, di-oj); 
 
 bictcn, bid; fatten, fold; ©artcn, garden; I)a(ten, liold; \)n\tcr, 
 hinder; rcitcn, lide; (^djUltci'/ shoulder; 0citc, side; trctcu, 
 tread; UUtClV under; 
 
§ 219] CORRESPONDENCES OF CONSONANTS, 125 
 
 ^ttt, bed; iB(ut, blood; (^ott, God; gut, good; I)art, hard; 
 taU, cold; SBort, word. 
 
 2. ^ = th: as, banten, thank; bauu, then; bcin, thine; 
 benfcn, think; bi(f, thick; i)ing, thing; boc^, though; ^Dorn, 
 thom; brct, three; bu, thou; biinn, thin; ^urft, thirst; 
 
 beibe, both; ^rubcr, brother; (grbc, earth; gcber, feather; 
 Sebcr, leather; nteber, nether; ficbett, seethe; 
 
 ^Oa), bath; §erb, hearth; S^Jorb, north; ^nh, south; 2^ob, 
 death. 
 
 a. ^ =: th: as, fort, forth; ^onat, month; WVLttCY, mother; 
 taufcnb, thousand; ^atcr, father. 
 
 3, <B, ff, f? = t: as, au§, out; e^, it; 8o§, lot; lDa§, what; Ocffer, 
 better; c||en, eat; (ajjcn, let; Staffer, water; iciffett, wit; beigen, 
 bite; gu^, foot; Grligeu, greet; Qa% hate; ^flug, nut; \m% 
 white. 
 
 4=' 8' ^ = t: as, jcl)n, ten; 3^tt, tide; 5man3ig, twenty; 
 ^inn, tin; 3U, to; ^^ttgc, tongue; ^tuci, two; gtDdif, twelve; 
 $i^e, heat; fc^tuer^eti, smart; fi^en, sit; §er5, heart; ^f^e^, net; 
 (Sal^, salt 
 
 5. <&^ = s: as, f(i)(agcn, slay; (S^tcim, shme; (gc^tittctt, 
 sled; f carnal, small; jiimei^Ctl, smelt; (Sd)mieb, smith; fdjncU^ 
 sneU; (^C^tiepfe, snipe; (gdjlDalbc, swallow; (Bd)\van, swan; 
 (Schwann, swarm; (Sd)n)^in, swine; fc^WcUeu, swell; iB6)\MXt, 
 sword; fdjtoitigen, swing. 
 
 219. Palatal mutes and fricatives. 
 
 1. ^^ = k: as, brcd)Ctt, break; ^^6)^ yoke; ?er^C, lark; 
 maci)en, make; 9^ec^cn, rake; iDadjen, wake; :^uc^^ book; ^tl&j, 
 dike; SQiild), milk; (Stord), stork. 
 
 a. <5^ = sc, sk: — Sfof<^C, flask; ^^(xk, scale; <Sd)aum, 
 8cmn; fc^elten, scold; @(^ulc, school; %\\6), desk. 
 
 2. G^5 = gh: — ac^t, eight; bo^, though; gluc^t, flight; l)OC^, 
 high; lac^Ctl, laugh; letd^t, light; SMji, light; ^ad)t, night; rcd^t, 
 right; 2^od)tciV daughter; \t)td)tig, weighty. 
 
 3. @ = y : ^ — ©ant, yam; gelb, yellow. 
 
 4. ^ = dg: — §ecfe, hedge; ^riicfe, bridge. 
 
126 
 
 CORRESPOXDENCES OF CONSONANTS. § 220J 
 
 5. If = ch: — ^anf, bench; ^^ammcr, chamber; .^apelle, 
 cliai>el; ^ttfc, cheese; .^tttn, chin; £ird)C, church; trtinfcn, 
 drench. 
 
 220. Labial mutes and fricatives. 
 
 1. 8 = v: — cbeit, even; l^aben, have; ^abc, knave; 9?atie, 
 raven; ficben, seven; @i(bcr, silver; fterben, starve; ftreben, 
 strive; %auht, dove; treibcu, drive; nbd, e^dl; itbcr,over; Wthm, 
 weava 
 
 2. ^ = b or f : — ^olfter, bolster; ^tippe, crib; £tl>pc, 
 diff. 
 
 3. ^f =p: — ?flicl)t, phght; ^ftug, plou^^h; ppcfcu, phict; 
 gopfcn, hop; (Sc!)ticpfc, snipe; Xropfen, drop; ^tUtUpf, stump. 
 
 4. 5 = p: -- 5lffc, ai)e; greifcn, gripe; §arfc, harp; I)cffcn, 
 help; off en, open; ftreifen, strij^e; auf, up; rcif, ripe; fcl)arf, 
 sharp; Sc^iff, ship. 
 
 5. 3f = v: — elf, eleven; §afen, haven; Of en, oven; (gc^au- 
 fel, shovel; JlPOlf, twelve. 
 
GERMAN TEXT-BOOKS 
 
 PLIBLISUEU BY 
 
 HENRY HOLT & CO., New York. 
 
 These books are bound in cloth unless otherwise indicated. 
 ^ 
 
 Grammars and Exercise Books. 
 
 Blackwell's German Prefixes and Suffixes. By J, S. Blackwell. 
 
 Professor in the Uuiversity of Missouri. 16mo. 137 pp 
 Hass's Conversation in German. By H. C. O. Huss, Piofessor of 
 
 Modern Langiiaijcs in Princeton College. 12uio. 280 pp. 
 Joynes-Otto First Book in German. For young pupils. By Emil 
 
 Otto. Revised by Edward S. Joynes, Professor iu the South 
 
 Carolina College. 12mo. 116 pp. Boards. 
 Joynes Otto Introductory German Lessons, The. Kew edition, with 
 
 full voc.ibularies. By Prof. Edward S. Joynes. 12mo. 252 pp. 
 Keetels's Oral Method with German. By Jean Gustave Keetels. 
 
 12ino. 371 pp. 
 Otis's Elementary German. By Charles P. Otis. 16mo. 332 pp. 
 
 ([^^" There are two editions of this hook: I. In German type; II. In 
 Roman type, ichich edition will only he sent when specially ordered. 
 Otto's German Conversation Grammar. By Dr. Emil Otto. New 
 
 etUllon, revised, and in part re-written, by Wm. Cook. 12mo. 
 
 Half roan. 591 pp 
 Otto's Elementary German Grammar. With a vocabulary by George 
 
 MoRiTZ VVahl. IJmo. 315 pp. 
 Otto's Translating English into German. By Dr. Emil Otto. 
 
 Ediied by Prof. Rhodes Massie and Prof. Edward b. Joynes. 
 
 12mo. 1G7 pp. 
 Spanhoofd's Deutsche Grammatik. By A. W. Spanhoofd, teacher in 
 
 St. Paul's School, N. H. 16mo. 187 pp. 
 Wenckebach und Schrakamp's Deutsche Grammatik fiir Amerikaner. 
 
 By Carla Wenckebach, Professor in Wellesley College, unci 
 
 Joseph A Schrakamp. 12mo. 291 pp. 
 Whitney's Compendious German Grammar. By Wm. D. Whitney, 
 
 Professor in Yale University. 12rao. 472 pp. Half roan. 
 Whitney's Brief German Grammar, based on the author's "Compen- 
 dious German Grammar." \^y Wm. D. Whitney. IGmo. 14;i pp. 
 Whitney-Klemm German by Practice By Dr. L. R. Klemm. Edited 
 
 by William D. Whitney. 12nio. 305 pp. 
 
 Natural Method and Conversation Books. 
 
 Game of German Conversation. By Mme. F. Jeff Tensler. 
 Heness's Der neue Leitfaden. Beim Unterriciit in der deutscheij 
 
 Spraclie. By Gottlieb Heness. 12mo. 403 pp. 
 Heness's Der Sprechlehrer unter seinen Schiilern. By Gottlieb 
 
 Heness. 12mo. 187 pp. 
 Kaiser's Erstes Lehrbuch. By H. C. Kaiser, Ph.D. 12rao. 128 pp 
 Pylodet's German Conversations. By L. Pylodet. 18ino. 278 pp. 
 
HE.M^Y HOL T d- CO:S GERMAN TEX 7 BOOKS. 
 
 Schrakamp und Van Daell's Das Deutsche Bnch. By A. N. Van Daeli 
 
 and JosEPiiA Schrakamp 12mo. 144 pp. 
 Sprechen Sie Deutsch 1 18ino. 147 pp. Boards. 
 Stern's Studien und Plaudereien. First Series. By Sigmon M. SteriTj 
 
 Director of Sieru's School of Langu.-iges. 12mo. 2t'2 pp. 
 Stem's Studien und Plaudereien. Second Series. By Sigmon M. 
 
 Stern aud Menco Stern. 12mo. 380 pp. 
 Wenckebach's Deutscher Anschauungs-Unterricht. By Carla and 
 
 Helene AVenckebach. ]2mo. 451 pp. 
 "Williams's German Conversation and Composition. B}' Alonzo Wil 
 
 liams, A.m., Professor in Brown Univers^ity. 12mo. 147 pp. 
 
 Reading Books. 
 
 Fouque's Undine. With introduciion. notes, and vocabulary, by II. C. 
 
 G. VON Jagemann, Profe.'-sor in the Indiana University. 190 pp. 
 Hey's Fabeln fiir Kinder. Illustraled by Otto Speckter. With 
 
 vocabulary. {In roman type.) l2mo. 5'i pp. Boards. 
 Joynes-Otto Introductory German Eeeder. By Dr. Emil Otto. 
 
 With notes aud vocabulary by Prof. Edward S. Joynes. 12mo 
 
 282 pp. 
 Elemm's Lese- und Sprachbuecher. In sieben Ereisen. By Dr. L. H. 
 
 Klemm. 
 Zlemm's Abriss der Geschichte dcr deutschen Literatur. Krcis VIII. 
 
 12mo. ij85 pp. 
 Meissner's Aus meiner Welt. Geschichten fUr Grosse und Kleint^. 
 
 With vocabulary by Carla Wenckebach. I'imo. 127 pp. 
 OtVs Grimm's Maerchen. Selected and edited, with introduction, 
 
 notes, and vocabulary, by Charles P. Ottis. 151 pp. 
 Otto's German Eeader. By Prof. E. P. Evans. 12mo. 239 pp. 
 
 Half roan. 
 Schrakamp's Erzaehlungen aus der deutschen Geschichte. B}^ Josepha 
 
 Schrakamp. 12mo. 2^6 pp. 
 Simonson's German Balla/*. Book. Prepared by Prof. L. Simonson, of 
 
 the Hartford (Ct.) High School. I'-mo. b04 pp. 
 Storme's Easy German Beading. By G. Storme. IGmo. 356 pp. 
 Wenckebach's deutsches Lesebuch. By Carla aud Helene Wencke- 
 bach ]2mo. 316 pp. 
 Wenckebach's Die schoensien deutschen Lieder By Carla and 
 
 Helene Wenckebach. 12uio. 3H3 pp. 
 Whitney's German Reader. By William D. Whitney, Professor in 
 
 Yale University. 12nio. 523 pp. Half roan. 
 Whitney-Klemm Elementary German Reader. By Dr. L. R. Klemm. 
 
 Edited by Prof. W. D. Whitney. 12mo. 237 pp. 
 Dictionary. 
 Whitney's Compendious German Dictionary. (German-Enirb'sh and 
 
 English-German.) By William D. Whitney. 8vo. 900 pp. 
 
 A complete caUilogve and price-list of Henry Holt & Co s educa^ 
 tional publications will oc sent on applioition. 
 
HENRY HOLT &= CO:S GERMAN TEXT-BOOKS. 
 
 Whitney's German Texts. 
 
 Selected and annotated under tlie general editorship of Professor Wiiliam D. 
 Whitney. ]6mo. Cloth. 
 
 Goethe's Iphigenie auf Tauris. Witli an introduction and notes by Frank. 
 
 LIN Cahtkr, Presideni of Will.anis College. 113 pp. 
 ■ Faust. I. Theil. With an introduction and notes by William Cook, 
 
 late Professor in Harvard Unive'Sity. Ji20 pp. 
 Lessing's Minna von Barnhelm. With an introduction and notes by W. 
 
 D. Wliiuiey. Professor in Yale University. 138 pp. 
 • ' Nathan der "Weise. With an introduction and notes by H. C. G. 
 
 Branut, Professor in Hamilton College. 158 pp. 
 Schiller's Wilhelm Tell. With an introduction and notes by A. Sachtlej- 
 
 BKN, Professor ni the College of Charlesto*), S. C. 199 pp. 
 Maria Stuart. With an introduction and notes by Edward S. Joynks, 
 
 Professor in South Carolina College. 2C'-Jpp. 
 
 Seidensticker's German Scientific Monographs. 
 
 With notes. 12mo. Paper. 
 
 No. I. Uber Goethe's Naturwissenschaftliche Arbeiten. Von H. Helmholtz. 
 5.3 pp. 
 
 No II. Uber Bakterieu, die Kleinsten lebenden Wesen. Von Dr. Ferdinand 
 CoHN. 55 pp. 
 
 Student's Collection of Classic German Plays. 
 
 12mo. Paper. 
 Goethe's Hermann und Dorothea. With notes by Calvin Thomas. 101 pp. 
 
 Egmont. Edited by Professor William Steffen. 113 pp. 
 
 Koerner's Zriny. With an introduction and notes by Edward R. Rugg:.es, 
 
 I'rofessor in Dartmouth College. 1-^6 pp. 
 Lessing's Emilia Galotti. With notes. 82 pp. 
 Schiller's Der Neflfe als Onkel. With notes and a vocabulary by Ai 
 
 Clkmknt. 99 pp. 
 Jungfrau Von Orleans. Edited by Rev. A. B. Nichols, Instructor in 
 
 German in Harvard University. 203 pp. 
 
 Wallenstein's Lager. With notes by E. C. F. Kracss. 60 pp. 
 
 Die Piccolomini. With notes by E. C. F. Krauss. 139 pp. 
 
 "Wallenstein's Tod. With notes by E. C. F. Krauss. 210 pp. 
 
 "W alien stein, complete in one volume. Cloth. 
 
 College Series of German Plays. 
 
 12mo. Paper. 
 
 Einer muss heiraten, by W lhelmi ; and Eigensinn, by Benedix. With 
 
 notes. (Ji pp. 
 Three German Comedies. I. Er ist nicht eifersuechtig, bv Erz: IL 
 
 Der W eiberfeind, by Benedix ; III. Im "Wartesalon erster Classe, 
 
 l)y MiKLLKR. With notes. 24 pp. 
 
 Der Bibliothekar. By Gustav von Moser. With notes. 162 pp. 
 Die Journalisten. By Gustav Freytao. With notes. 178 pp. 
 Zopf und Sohwert. By Gutzkow. With notes. 173 pp. 
 Englisch. By Goerner. With notes by A. H. Edgren. 61 pp. 
 Badekuren. By Putlitz. With notes. 69 pp. 
 Das Herz vergessen. By Putlitz. With notes. 79 pp. 
 
 3 
 
HEXR Y HOL T ^ CO.'S GERMAN TEXT-BOOKS. 
 
 Stern's Selected German Comedies. 
 
 Selected and Edited by Professor S. M. Stkrx. l-Jiuo. Paper. 
 
 Ein Knopf. By Julius Rosen. 41 pp. 
 
 Der Schimmel. By G. von Moser. 55 pp. 
 
 Si3 hat ihr herz entdeckt. By W. Mukller von KoENiaswiNTER. 79 pp. 
 
 Simson und Delila. By Emil Claar. 65 pp. 
 
 Er sucht einen Vetter. By Jungman. 49 pp. 
 
 Er muss tanzen. By C. .A.Paul. 51 pp. 
 
 Gaenschen von Buchenau. By W. Friedrich. 59 pp. 
 
 German Plays for Children. 
 
 Kinder-Comoedien. By various authors. Edited and annotated in German 
 by l^rufe^soi'lH. Hkness. Five plays iu one voliune li^'mo. Hi pp. 
 
 Unterhaltungs Bibliotiiek. (12rao. Paper.) 
 
 Andersen's Bilderbuch. ohne Bilder. With notes and vocabulary bv I'ro- 
 
 ffSsurL. SiMo.NsoN «.f iiie Hartford (Ut.) High School. 104 pp. 
 Die Eisjxingfrau u. andere Geschichten. With notes by E. C. F. Krauss. 
 
 LXli'P. 
 
 Auerbach's Auf Wache; Boquette's Der gefrorene Kuss. The two in 
 
 one vuluine. With notes. IJb pp. 
 
 Carove's Das Maerchen ohne Ende. With notes. 45 pp. 
 Ebers' eine Prage. With introduction and notes. 117 pp. 
 Eichendorff s Aus dem Leben eines Taugenichts. 132 pp. 
 Fouqu6's Undine. With a glos.saiy of the principal words and phrases. 
 
 137 pp. -SVe «i/.su Jugfiiiaiin's edition under Read iny Books. 
 
 Sintram und seine Gefaehrten. 114 pp. 
 
 Grimm's Die Venus von Milo ; Kafael und Michel- Angelo. 139 pp. 
 Grimm's Kinder- und Hausmaerchen. With notes. '.i2S pp. See also 
 
 Otis'.f ftlition undfr Readiinj Buoka. 
 
 Hauffs Das kalte Herz. 61 pp. 
 
 Heine's Die Harzreise. With introduction and notes. 97 pp. 
 
 Heyse's Anfaung und Ende. 54 pp. 
 
 Die Einsamen. 44 pp. 
 
 Hillem's Hoeher als die Kirche. With notes and vocabulary. 46 pp. 
 Muegge's Biukan Voss. 55 pp. 
 
 Signa die Seterin. 71 pp. 
 
 Mueller's Deutsche Liebe. With Eneli.<sh notes. 121 pp. 
 Nathusius' Tagebuch eines arxnen Praeuleins. 163 pp. 
 Ploennies' Princessin Use. Wlih not.s by J. M. Merrick. 45 pp, 
 Putlitz's "Was sich der wald erzaehlt. 62 pp. 
 
 . Ver?issmeinnicht. With Enjrlish notes. 44 pp. 
 
 Eiehl's Der Fluch der Schoenheit. W^ith introduction and notes by 
 
 Francis T>. Krnpai.l. 77 pp. 
 Schiller's Das Died von der Glocke. With introduction and notes by 
 
 Charlf.s V. Otis. Ph D. ^O pp. 
 Storm's Tmmensee. With notes. 34 pp. 
 Tieck's Die Flfen ; Das Rothkaeppchen. With notes by Professor L. 
 
 SiMON-oN. '1 !••• 
 
 Vilmar and Bichter's German Epic Tales. Told in rrocp. Die Nibe- 
 lungen. vmi a. F. V. Vilmar. Walther und Hildegund, von Al- 
 bert RicHTER. 100 pp. 
 
 4 
 
FRENCH TEXT-BOOKS 
 
 PUBLISHED BY 
 
 HENRY HOLT & CO.. New York. 
 
 These books are bound in cloth unless otherwise indicated. 
 
 Grammars and Exercise Books. 
 
 Borel's Grammaire Frangaise. A Tusage des Anglais. Par Eugene Borel, 
 
 R^^ vised by E. B. CoK. l.mo. 450 pp. Hulf ruan. 
 Delille's Condensed French Instruction. By C. J. Delillr. 18mo. 14.3 pp. 
 Eugene's Student's Comparative French Grammar. To which are 
 
 added Fieiicli English Exercises. Ivcvised by L. H. i?ucKiNOHAM, Ph.D. 
 
 Vlmo. •i.^X pp. 
 
 Eugene's Elementary French Lessons. Revised and edited by L. H. 
 Ulx'Kingham. Pli.D. \2\\\o. ];iJG pp. 
 
 Gasc's The Translator.— Enjflish into French. By Professors Gasc, L. 
 
 Bkun, aiitl otheis. l\inio. 2--20 pp. 
 Gibert's French Manual. A French Pronouncing Grammar for Young 
 
 Students. By .>1. GiBEiiT. l",'nio. ll'^pp. 
 
 Julien's Petites Legons de Conversation et de Grammaire. By F. Julien. 
 
 Square r.'mo. 'Zll pp 
 Otto's French Conversation Grammar. Revised by Fkrdinand Bocher, 
 
 Professor of Moderu Languages in Harvard University. \'X\\\o. 489 pp. Half 
 
 roan. 
 Pylodet's Beginning French. Exercises in Pronouncing, Spelling, and 
 
 TraiisLitiiig. 15y L. Pylooet. 16rno. 180 pp. Boards. 
 
 Sadler's Translating English into French. By P. Sadler. Revised and 
 aiuiotated b> Prof. C F. Gili.ktte. Iv'tno. :i8.5 pp. 
 
 The Joynes-Otto Introductory French Lessons. By Edward S. Joynes, 
 Professor in University- of South Carolina. J-^nio. 275 pp. 
 
 The Joynes-Otto First Book in French. By Edward S. Joynes. 12mo. 
 116 |)p Boaids. 
 
 "Whitney's French Grammar. By William D. Whitney, Professor in Yale 
 XTriiversity. l.uio. 44i pp. Half njaii. 
 
 Whitney's Practical French. Taken from the aiithor's larger Grammar, 
 and supplemented by conversations and idiomatic phrases. By Professor 
 W. D. Whit.\i:y. 
 
 Whitney's Brief French Grammar. Systematically arranged, with exer- 
 cises. By William D. Whitney. Itimo. 177 pp. 
 
 Natural Method and Conversation Books. 
 
 Ailiot's Contes et Nouvelles. Sui vis de Conversations,d''Exercices de Gram- 
 maire. Par .Madame L. Alliot. l^ino. 
 
 Aubert's Colloquial French Drill. By E. Aubf.rt, Professor in the Normal 
 College, New York City. Part I. lOmo. L6 pp. Part II. 118 pp. 
 
 Le Jev- des Auteurs. 9fi Cards in a Box. 
 
 Moutonnier's Les Premiers Pas dans I'Etud e du Frangais par la 
 niethode natnrelle. Par C. -Mo to.nniek. K'nio. lSi7 pp. lUuslraled. 
 
 Pour Apprendre a Parler Frangais. 12mo. 191 pp. 
 
 Parlez-vous Frangais? A p.)cket manual of Frencli and English Conversa- 
 tion, with hints fur pronunciation and a list of the irregular verbs. 18mo, 
 111 pp. Boards. 
 
 £ 
 
HEXR Y HOLT ^ CO:S FRENC H TEXT-BOOKS. 
 
 Riodu's Lucie. Familiar Coiivet-sations in French and English. By Mme. A. 
 Kiudu. l.iuo. l.'Spp. 
 
 Stern & M6ras' jStude Progressive ile la Langue Frangaise. By Sigmon 
 
 M 6TERN and iJAPiisTE Meras. iJiiio. :iH8 Pit. 
 Witcomb & Bellenger's French Conversation. Dialojnies on Familiar 
 
 iSniijectti, lo wiiicu IS annexed tae Summary of i^reuch Grammar, by Dklxllk. 
 
 Ibmo. '^'i pp. 
 
 Reading Books. 
 
 .ffisop's Fables in French. With vocabulary. 16mo. 237 pp. 
 Alliot's Les Autexirs Contemporains. Extraits choisis d'oeuvresdiverses, 
 Hvec Nniic. s tJiograpliiqiies ei >>iies. By Mme. L. Aluot. l"<Jmo. 371pp. 
 
 Aubert's Ijitt6rature Frangaise. Premiere Ann6e. By E. Acbkrt. 16mo 
 $33 pp. 
 
 Bocher s Progressive French Reader. Wiih notes and vocabulary bj 
 F. Bg'HEk, Prure.s.sur m Harvard Umver>ity. K'mo. 291 pp. Half roan. 
 
 Fishers Easy French Reading. Historical tales and anecdotes, arranged 
 Willi fi.ut-nuies. cuutaining ii'<iu»ilations ot the principal words. Itimo. '£iA pp. 
 
 Fleury's LHistoire de France. Kacontee a la Jeunesse. Par M. LahA 
 Flkl'ky. Itiino. ;i7x; pp. 
 
 De Janon s Recueil de Po6sies. A I'usage de la Jeunesse Am^ricaine. Par 
 
 .Mllk. Camillk ue Jano.n. Itiniu. 180 pp. 
 
 Joynes-Otto Introductory French Reader, The. Edited, with notes and 
 vucauulary, by Edwaku 8. Joyxe.s. l:init». IG^J pp. 
 
 Juliens Practical and Conversational Reader in French and English. By 
 V. JiLlEN. Square Vinxit. 18J [ip 
 
 Iiacombe's Petite Histoire du Peuple Frangais. By Paul Lacombe. 
 
 Willi Uramiiiatical ami Explanatoiy ^otes I'y Jules Bufe. I'^ino. Iil2 pp. 
 La Fontaine's Fables Choisies. Edited, with notes, by Leon Delbos. I'^nio. 
 
 119 pp Boards. 
 Pylodet's Beginner French Reader. With a complete vocabulary, Ar- 
 
 r.iiitred h.\ L Pyl« det. Itiiiio. :.3.") pp. Boards. 
 Pylodefs Second French Reader. With a complnte French English vo- 
 
 eaiml.iiv. C.nii.iled by L. Pylodkt. Illustrated, r^'mo. 277 pp. 
 Pylodefs La Litt6ratux'e Frangaise Classique. Tiroes des Matin6es Litt6- 
 
 laiies (I" Edoiahi) Mennkchkt. 1-Jmo. 3".'8 pp. 
 Pylodet s La Litt6rature Frangaise Contemporaine. Recueil en prose 
 
 et i-n VHis. i-.'m... 3Ht pp 
 Pylod?ts Gouttes de Ros6e. Petit Tresor poetique des Jeunes Pei-sonnes. 
 
 ismo iss pp. 
 Pylodefs La M6re lOie. Poesies, enigmes, chansons et rondes enfantines. 
 
 iliiislre. 8vi>. 8U pp. 
 Whitney's Si>ort French Reader. With notes and vocabt.lary. By W. D. 
 
 Whitney. 16mo. 
 
 Dictionaries. 
 
 Bellow'sFrenchandEnglishDictionary for the Pocket. 32:no. 600 pp. 
 
 The .same. Larger print. 12ino. 6()0 j.p. Half ro-in 
 
 Gases New Dictionary of the French and English Languages. By 
 
 FERriNAND E. A. Gasc. 8vo. French-Eiigiisli part, GUU pp. EnKhsu-French 
 
 l>art, V<(i pp. One volume. 
 Gasc.i Improved Modern Pocket Dictionary. By F. A. E. Gasc. 18mo. 
 
 Freiieh-Ei.grsii part, 2ol pp. Enghsh-Fieneh part, 387 pp. One v..lume. 
 
 A descriptive catalogue, with prices, of Henry Holt dt Co.'s educational publir 
 cations icul be stmt on application. 
 
HENRY HOLT &> CO.'S FRENCH TEXT-BOOKS. 
 Students' Collection of Classic French Plays. 
 
 The first six with full notes by Piof. E. S. Joynks. The last three with notes 
 by Leon Delbos, M.A. l;imo. Paper. 
 
 Le Cid. Par CoRNEiLLE. 110 pp. 
 
 Athalie. Par Kacinb. 117 pp. 
 
 I.e Misantlirope. Par Molierk. 130 pp. 
 
 li'Avare. l^ar Moliere. \'-^-i pp. 
 
 Esther. Par Racine. Gti pp. 
 
 Cinna. Par Cokneillk. H7 pp. 
 
 Le Bourgeois Gentilhomme. Par MoLtKRE, 140 pp. 
 
 Horace. Par CoRNiiiLLK. Im pp. 
 
 lies PlaideuTS. Par Racine, 80 pp. 
 
 The foregoing in 3 vols., three plays in each, in the above order. 12mo. Clath. 
 
 Ronnantic French Drama. (12mo. Flexible covers.) 
 
 Ruy Bias. By Victor Huao. With notes by Rena A, Michaels. 117 pp. 
 
 College Series of Modern French Plays. 
 
 With English notes by Prof. Ferdinand Bocher. 12iuo. Paper. 
 
 La Joie Fait Peur. Par Mme. de Girardin. 46 pp 
 La Bataille de Dames. Par Scribe et Legouve. 81 pp. 
 La Maison de Penarvan. Par Jules Sandeau. 7:^ pp. 
 La Poudre aux Yeux. Par Labiche et Martin, 59 pp. 
 Jean Baudry. I'ar Augusts Vacquerie. 7;; pp. 
 Les Petits Oiseaux. Par Labighe et Delacour. 70 pp. 
 Mademoiselle de la Seigliere. Par J Sandeau. 9".» pp. 
 Le Roman d'un Jeune Homme Pauvre. Par O. Feuillkt. 100 pp. 
 Les Doigts de F6e. Par E. Scribe. Ill pp. 
 Above in 'I vols. Cloth. Vol I. containing the first five, Vol. II. the last four. 
 
 Modern French Comedies. (12mo. Paper.) 
 
 Le Village. Par O, Feuillet. 34 pp. 
 
 La Cagnotte. Par M.M. Eugene Labiche et A Delacour. 83 pp. 
 
 Les Femmes qui Pleurent. Par MM. Siraudin et Lambert Thibou?t. 28pp. 
 
 Les Petites Mis6res de la Vie Humaine. Par M. Claihville. 35 pp 
 
 Le Niaise de Saint Flour. Par Bayard et Lemoine. 38 pp. 
 
 Un Caprice. Par Alfred de Musset. 
 
 Trois Proverbes. Par Th. Leclerq. 68 pp. Wjih vocabulary. 
 
 Valerie. Par Scribe. 39 pp. With vocabulary. 
 
 Le Collier de Perles. Par Mazkres. 56 pp. With vocabulary. 
 
 Selected French Comedies. 
 
 Original text, with a close English version on opposite pages. 
 En Wagon. Comfidie en 1 acte. Par Eugene Verconsin. 12mo. 44 pp. 
 C'e* ait Gertrude. Com^die en 1 acte. Par Eugeme Verconsin. 12mo. 51pp. 
 
 French Plays for Children. (l2mo. . Paper.) 
 
 La Petite Maman, par Mme. de M ; Le Bracelet, par Mm:;, deGaule. 38 pp. 
 
 L '■ Vieille Cousine, par E. Souvkstke ; Les RicocRet > 5: rP- 
 
 Le Testament de Madame Patural, par E. Souvestre ; La Demoiselle 
 
 de St. Cyr, par Drohoyowska. 54 pp. 
 La Loterie de Francfort, par E. Sodtestre. La Jeuno Savante^ 
 
 par Mme. Curo. 4T pp. 
 
 French Plays for Girls. (12mo. Paper.) 
 
 Trois Comedies pour Jeune 3 Filles : I. Les Cuisiniere«» ; II Le Tetit 
 Tom; III. La Malade Imaginaire Par Lemercier de Neuville. 134 pp. 
 
HENRY HOLT b' CO:s FRENCH TEXT-BOOKS. 
 Bibliotheque d'Instruction et de Recreation. 
 
 12mo \oluines. Paper or Cloth. 
 Achard's Clos-Pommier, et Les Prisonrders du Caucase. Par Xavieb 
 
 UE .MaisTRE. CMutli. 141 pp. 
 
 Achard's Clos-Pommier. Paper. 106 pp. 
 
 B6dolli9re's Mere Michel. With vocabulary. Cloth. 138 pp. 
 
 Tlie name. Piiper. 
 
 Biographies des Musiciens C616bres. Cloth. 271 pp. 
 
 The same. Paper. 
 
 Carraud et Segur's Contes (Les Petites Filles ]\Iodeles, par Mme. de Segur, 
 
 et Les (jouifis de la Giand'mere, par Mme. Z. Carraud). With a list of 
 
 difficult phrases. Cloth. 1W3 pp. 
 Carraud's Le" Qouters de la Grand*ra6re. With a list of difiScult 
 
 phrases. Paper. 95 pp. 
 Choix de Contes Contemporains. With notes. By B. F. O'Connor. Cloth. 
 
 iJUU pp. 
 
 The same. Paper. 
 
 Erckmann-Chatrian's Conscrit de 1813. With notes. By Prof. F. 
 
 liOcHr.R. Clutli. •£^'Q pp. 
 
 The same. Paper. 
 
 Ije Blocus. With notes. By Prof. F, Bocher. Cloth. 258 pp. 
 
 The same. Paper. 
 
 Madame Thferdse. With notes. By Piof. F. Bocher. Cloth. 216 pp 
 
 The saiiir. Paper. 
 
 Pallet's Princes de I'Art. Gloth. 334 pp. 
 
 Tlie same. Paper. 
 
 Penillet's Roman d*un Jeune Homme Pauvre. Cloth. 204 pp. 
 
 ■ The same. Paper. 
 
 F6val*s ' Chouans et Bleus.' With notes. Cloth. 188 pp. 
 
 • The same. Paper. 
 
 Foa's Contes Biographiques. With vocabulary. Cloth. 189 pp. 
 
 The same. Paper. 
 
 Petit Robinson de Paris. With vocabulary. Cloth. 106 pp. 
 
 Tlie same. Paper. 
 
 Macs's Bouch6e d^ Pain. (L'Homme.) With vocabulary. Cloth. 260 pp. 
 
 Tlie same. Paper. 
 
 De Maistre's Voyage Autour de ma Chambre. Paper. 117 pp. 
 
 Les Prisonniers du Caucase. Paper. 38 pp. 
 
 Merimfee's Columba. Cloih. 179 pp. 
 
 The same. Paper. 
 
 Porchat's Trois Mois sous la Neige. Cloth. 160 pp 
 
 The same. Paper. 
 
 Pi 3SsensS's Rosa. With vocabulary. By L. Pylodet. Cloth. 285. 
 
 The snme. Papf r. 
 
 Saint-Germain's Pour une Epingle. With vocabulary Cloth. 174 pp. 
 
 Tlie same. Pujier. 
 
 Sand's Petite Fadette. Cloth. 205 pp. 
 
 The same. Pajier. 
 
 Segur et Carraud's Contes. (Petites Filles Modules; Les Goutars de la 
 
 Giaiidniere ) C'h'th. VS^ pp. 
 S6gur's Les Petites Filles Moddles. Paper. 98 pp. 
 Souvestre's Philosophe sous les Toits. Cloth. 187 pp. 
 The same. Paper. 
 
 4 
 
(^/I'H.-Tf'^Y-Ui.-*.^ 
 
 y^S^ ^^^ ->^y^ ^J^-^ 
 
 
A 
 
 THIS BOOK IS DUE ON THE LAST DATE 
 STAMPED BELOW 
 
 AN INITIAL FINE OF 25 CENTS 
 
 WILL BE ASSESSED FOR FAILURE TO RETURN 
 ^H.S BOOK ON THE DATE DUE. THE PENALTY 
 WILL INCREASE TO 50 CENTS ©N THE FOURTH 
 
 DAY AND TO $1.00 ON THE SEVENTH DAY 
 
 OVERDUE. 
 
 JUL 26 1933 
 DEC 1 .^ 
 
 l70cr51L 
 
 LD 21-50m-l,'33 
 
UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY